Table of Contents

Iransporlalion, and
Ports Chapter 1

('trlryrighr 2017 by Vcnancio l.

Besavilla. Jr.. All
Ktghts Reserved. No part ol rhis publication mav
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
he reproduced. stored in a retrieval ,ystem,
oi
-'
transmitted. in.any form or by iiny means. electronic,
lnecnan tcal. photot'opying. recordinc, or otherwise.
wrthout the prior written permission oT the publisher. 1. Planning of National Roads 1-3
2. Maximum Speed of Cars 3-5
3. Capacity of Roads 5-5
4. Turnouts 6-7
5. Parking Maneuvers 7*B
6. Provisions of Safety Sight Distance B-10
7. Curbs and Gutter 10-11
ISBN 978- 621-956r-0-9
B, Traffic Lanes 77-72
9. Highway Intersections 13*18
10. Road Barriers t9-20
11. Sizes and Colors for Traffic Signs 20-39
12. Pavement Markers 20-39
12 Lane Lines, Barrier l,ines, Edge Lines 43-48
14. Pavement Messages and Pavement Markings 48-50
15. lnterchanges 51-60
3-6. Prohibitions of Traffic Signs 6t-75
VlIl 17. Types r:f Pavements IRigid and Flexible) 76-79
p",,u 1ii,...,, c.t,,'[r,r "ilil']l i,ll"rB,serr
Puhlishcr, #2 SIinr John Srrcel. Il Villagt"
18. |oints in Concrete Pavements 79-82
19. California Bearing Ratio 82-85
20. Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction 85,87
2t. Plate Load Test 87-BB
22. Thickness of Flexible Pavement Using Craphical Solution BB_90
L -t. Asphalt Mixture 90 - 118
24. Compondnts of Pavements tlg - 725
25. Geometric Shape of Traffic Signs 1"25 - 126
26. Types of Crack and Wearing of Concrete Pavements 1,26 - 727

27. Practical Problems of Highway Costing 128 - 130

 Table of Contcnt.s Table of Contents

Chapter 2
22. Passing Sight Distance for Summit Vertical Curves 252

TRANSPORTATION & HIGHWWAY 23. Headlight Distance [stopping Sight Distance) for Sag Vertical Curves 252 - 253
24. Stopping Sight Distance for Sag Curves 254
ENGINEERING 25. Sight Distance for Horizontal Curves 254 - 255
26. Cross-Sectional Areas of Earthworks 256 - 26r
27. Volume of Earthworks [End Area Method and Volume with
1,. Traffic Capacity 132 _ li;i Prismoidal Correction Method 261,- 265
2. Min. Radius of Curvature for Horizontal Curves 136 _ l,4A 10 Finished Grade of Roadway 266 - 269
3. Fundamentals ofTraffic Flow (Braking Distance, Stopping Distance) 141
- 156 29. Limits of Free-Haul, Economical Haul and Overhaul Volume 268 - 269
4. Tractive Force, Rolling Resistance, Aerodynamic Resistance
30. Mass Diagram 270 - 271,
and Grade Resistance 156_ X60
5. Space Mean Speed, Time Mean Speed and Mean Free Speed,
StandardDeviation 1,61 - lT3
6. Peak Hour Factor *
1.73 174
7. Capacity of Roads/Time Headway l,Z4 _ tVS Chapter 3
o
fam Density, Free-Flow Speed and Space Mean Speed 176 _ \g3
9. Highway Safety and Accidenr Analysts fAverage Daitry Traffic] lg4 _ n},Z
PORTS and Harbor
10. Crash Reduction Factor irg} - lg3.
11. Traffic Queue
r 1. Harbors 273 - 275
Under-Saturated Infinite eueue Lg4 _ Lgg
r Under-Saturated Finiteeueue ZA0 _ZOI 2. Waves, Wind and Tides 275 - 292
t2. Stochastic Queue _ZO3 3. Shallow Water Waves 293 - 294
ZA1,
13. Service Rates of Ramps;Connecting Freeways 4, Deep Water Waves 294 - 299
203._ ZZI
14. Sight Distance, Braking Distance, Stopping Sight Distance, 5. Significant Wave Height 299 * 300
Distance for Horizontal Road Surface 6. Saint-Verant and Flamant Theory (Distance fiom Stillwater and
ZZFZZ|
15. Vertical (SummitJ ParabolicCurves Center of Rotation of the Wave 300 - 301
ZZ3 _ ZZ7
1,6. Vertical [Sag) Parabolic Curves 7. Long Waves 301 - 303
ZZZ _Z3Z
t7. Unsymrnetrical Parabolic Curves _ 236 B, Relation Between Deep-Water Wave Length and Shallow-Water
233
18. Spiral Transition Curve 236 _Z4S Wave Length 303 - 304
T9, Passing Sight Distance (Overtaking Didtance] on a Level Road Surface 9. Length of Fetch 304 - 305
246 _ Z4g
20. Sight Distance for Vertical Summit Curves 10. Residrral Water Level 305- 307
Z4B _ 250
11. Seismic Forces Acting on Marine Structures 307 - 309
21. Stopping Sight Distance for Vertical Summit Curves ZSI
t2. Angular Frequency of a Wave 309 - 310
 I'able of (.onlcnl.s Chapter
HIGHWAY
1 ENGINEERING
13. Mooring anrl lJollards il1 il3
14. Marine Structures '-t14, tI6
15. Navigation Channels 31,6 - -t t7
16. Wind Pressure and Wind Forces Acting on \Iessels and Fier 317- 318
17. Maximurn Width of Channels and Water,ways 3t&-322
18. Length and Width of Pierand Slip 3ZZ-373
t9. Elements of Standard Ships in Relation to lts Depth o,f Floatation 3,24-3:25
20. Forms of Littoral Drift 376 -329
27. Motions of Ships Caused by Sea Water Waves 329,- 330,
22, Principal Dirnensions of Vessel 3,31- 33Z
23. Dead Weight Tonnage,. Gross Tonnage and D,isplacement Tbnnage 332 - 33;,4
24. Design Water Depth 334 - 340)
 a I
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 3
Chrptcr
Hi gh En grn eeH ng
1 {.r-ro 41'l*1r nn I

O-:-$ {;$, lll. Road narrowing (with due regard for

capacity needs) can be used to induce
- lower speeds as
traffic passes
Bypasses around communities are through the community; and;
countermeasures aimed at improving lV. ln order to alert drivers that they are
safety and reducing the volume of through entering a community, it is generally
{.1 Problom; traffic inside the community. Where a
regarded thal some form ol gateway
l
bypass can be justified, the most important treatment on the approaches is
What office is responsible for zoning of considerations are: beneficial (e.9., substandard curve,
National Roads are continuous in extent
their respective jurisdictions and final land that form pa* of the main trunk line l. The opportunity should be taken to tree lining, or even non-rigid gate
use and zoning planes to be submitted to system; all roads leading to nalional ports, reinforce the road hierarchy by structure).
HLURB (Housing and Land Use Regutatory national seaports, parks or coast.to.coast downgrading the old road to
Board) for approval? discourage through traffic; a) l, ll and lV only
roads, National arterial roads are classified
a) Municipal Planning into different groups from the viewpoint of ll. Access to the bypass should be b) ll, llland lV only
and restricted to only a few points where c) l, lll and lV only
function:
Development Office (MPDO) safe intersections and spur roads can o9 d) All of the above
b) City Planning Development Office
a) North-south backbone be provided to
line the existing
(cPD0) nelwork, Direct access from frontage
b) East-West Laterals
c) Provincial Planning Development land should not be permitted;
c) Other Strategic Roads
lll. {.?'' ."''-, hl&lit
r8 d)
Office (PPD0)
AII of the above
*a/ All of the above
Provisions should be left for future
expansion or development of the
community but such developments When choosing a design speed for a road
should be served by service roads project, the following factors need to be
and spur roads. consideredr

dl I and ll only l. Function ofthe road

b) I and lll only ll. Anticipated operating speed
Ihe following elements are to be
The elements to consider when planning
c) ll and lll only lll. Anticipated speed limit
considered when planning Expresswaysl
National Roads are:
Be d) All ol the above
lV. Economics

l. No frontage access l. Limited frontage access al l, ll and lV only

ll. Development set well back from the ll. Development set well back from the b) ll, lll and lV only
highway highway {.6 Probleml c) l, lll and lV only
lll. Grade separated intersections for lll. All access to premises provided via
rs d/ All of the above
extremely high flows and other provincial roads Where a bypass cannot be justified,
intersecting expressways
of countermeasures should be implemented
lV. Number of intersections to
lV. Number interseclions to be
to slow down the speeds of through traffic
be minimized
as it passes through the community or
1-9, r : :pslbleml
minimize
V, Where necessary or for emergency
V. Suitable at-grade channelized trading centers as follows:
purposes, parking/stopping to be intersections for minor llows and On open country roads with no "blind
provided clear of the main other elements l. Warning signs and rumble strips can corners" not closely bordered by
carriageway. Vl. No roadside vendors be used to alert drivers about speed- habitation, the maximum speed for
reducing devices ahead; passenger cars and motorcycles is:

a) l, ll, lV and V only a) l, ll, lV and Vl only ll. A series of road humps increasing in
b) ll, lll, lV and V only b) ll, lll, V and Vl only height from 40 mm to around 80 mm lra a) 80 kph
c) l, lll, lV and V only c) l, ll, lll and V only can be used gradually to slow down b) 60 kph
rs d) All ol the above
rs d) All of the above traffic in
pedestrian predominated c) 40 kph
area; d) 30 kph
 4 I lrtrttw^y F N(.tNEGFItNG HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 5

I r., Problem:
I r,lr trobbmr --"] |;ilT' Pi('blcfii {.8{,,',,,,, ProbllAm:
On opcn country roads with no ,'blind The speed limit appropriate on a high
Throttgh r:rr)wrlurl rrlrooln,,rpprrxrching standard duplicated carriageway road It is the maximum number of vehicles,
cornerg" not closely bordered by intersoctions at "lllirrrl colr(lrr", ;xrssing which have a reasonable expectation of
where there is only occasional access from
habitation, the maximum speed for motor school zones passing othor vohir;los which passing over a given section of a lane or a
adjoining properties is:
trucks and buses is: are stationary, or for similar dangerous roadway in one direction or in both
circumstances, the maximum speed for a) 50 kph c) 60 kph directions during one hour under
a) 25 kph *c/ 50 kph passenger cars, motorcycles, motor trucks b) 30 kph rs 4 80 kph prevailing road and traffic conditions,
b) 60 kph d) 30 kph and buses is:
a) Flow of traffic
a) 25 kph c) 30 kph
{;:}8 Pto&ldrrts':::
@ b) Road capacity
u€ b/ zo kph d) 40 kph c) Density
1.1O Probleml The speed limit appropriate on a very high
d) Free flow

standard expressways, which have low

0n "through streets" or boulevards clear of
crash rate is:
traffic, with no "blind corners" when so
1.14 Problem: ,I,NL Frolllsr:
designated, the maximum speed for
passenger cars and motorcycles is: a) 45 kph *c) 100 kph
The maximum speed for cars and motorisl b) 60 kph d) 75 kph The capacity of a route can be affected by
the lollowing factors:
a) 25 kph * c) 4okih
in high.risk pedestrian areas is:

b) 60 kph d) 30 kph
a) 25 kph o* c/ 30 kph tt;{S l. Number of lanes
ll, Lane and shoulder width
b) 50 kph d) 40 kph
lll. Terrain and road gradient
At the start of a new speed zone, a speed lV. Traffic composition
1.11 Problem: limit sign should be erected on the left and V, Side friction such as the presence of
right sides of the road. Then within the first road furniture and pedestrians
On "through streets" or boulevards clear of {,15' Problsm: kilometer, there should be two (2) farther Vl. lntersection capacity (priority of
traffic, with no "blind corners,' when so pairs of repeater speed limit signs. After movements, traffic signal phasing,
designated, the maximum speed for motor The maximum speed for cars and motorist that, repeater signs should be placed at number of lanes etc,)
trucks and buses is: in low.risk pedestrian areas is: sPacing.
a) l, ll, lll and lV only
a) 25 kph c) 20 kph * a/ 60kph c) 25 kph
-*a) 1km c) 500 m b) ll, lll, lV and Vlonly
b) 40 kph r€ 4 30kph b) 30 kph d) 45 kph
b) 2km d) 1.5 km c) l, lV, V and Vl only
0g' d) All ol the above

lalz^ Problem: f .{6 Prohlem:

The speed liJnit appropriate on lower 7.23 ProblGmr
On city and municipal streets, with light traffic, standard expressways.
The speed limit appropriate on roads where
when not designated "through streets", the ldeal capacity of a road is:
there are no footpaths and pedestrians are
maximum speed for passenger cars,
required to walk on the road is:
a) 50 or 60 kph
motorcycles, motor trucks and buses is: b) 60 or 75 kph ,* a/ 2000 vph
* a/ c) 90 or 100 kph
a) 25 kph c) 40 kph 40kph c) 35 kph 5S d) 80or90kph
b) 1800 vph

r:5- b/ 30 kph d) 60 kph

b) 30 kph d) 25 kph
d)
1400 vph
1200 vph
 6 t.IITTI IWN Y NC}INEERING
E. HIGHWAY ENGINTTRING 7

I r.z* Probleml ,1,2f ?roblrmr lV. 0n level carriageways with no

..- i
existing storm sewer, lhe gutter t;33' ,,,,,Piobtgni:
The specific location of turnouts shall be Turnotrls ulrrrll lrol lrrr 1rl,rr rrrl oprpor;ite each
alongside the turnout shall be sloped
determined taking into consideration the other but shlll tro plirr;orl rrol llrhs than Vehicles parked near intersections can
to 0.30%
following conditions; meters apart. obstruct the flow of turning traffic. Thus,
parking should be prohibited within the
l, Turnout shall be placed at a) 31.5 l, ll and lV only
locations/poblacions where o) 305
a)
following minimum distances from the
pedestrians are normally ug" b,, 3o.o d) 310
b) ll, lll and lV only boundaries of intersecting roads for angle
c) l, lll and lV only parhing - m. on both approach and
concentrated.
exit sides,
ll. A turnout may be placed at least 50.0 rs. d) All of the above -
meters after a road intersection. a) 10 *' c) 12
lll. Minimum dislance between two The pavement thickness of turnout shall no
b)6 d)8
conseculive turnouts in one direction
shall not be less than 500 meters in
_
case be less than for asphalt.
{.3{ Problemr'
cities/urban centers, ln other areas, a) 75 mm o* cl 100 mm
the minimum distance shall not be b) 150 mm d) 200 mm The following are vulnerable road users: The following guidelines should be
less than I kilometer. observed for angle parking:
lV. Turnouts should be placed on or l. Pedestrians l. The word "Angle Parking" shall be
adjacent to horizontal and vertical t ,Pirlhlem: ll. People with disabilities indicated on the parking signs as well
curves that limits the sight distances lll. Non"motorizedvehicles as the angle of parking to the curb.
in eilher direction. The pavement thickness of turnout shall no
lV. Motorcycles ll. Pavement, marking of parking bays is
_
case be less than for concrete. V. Dilapidatedvehicles desirable, particularly where the
a) l, ll, and lV only required angle is not 45 to 90 degrees.
b) l, lll and lV a) 250 mm c) 150 mm lll. Angle parking shall not be installed
r€ b/ 23A mm ou' l, ll, lll and lV only
*c) I, ll and lll only d) 200 mm
a)
where visibility restrictions would
d) All of the above
b) l, lll and lV only create a
hazardous operating
l, lll, lV and V only environment, such as the inside of a
d) All of the above bend or on a crest.

a) I and ll only
For adequate drainage of surface run.off, b) I and lll only
The required length of the turnoul shall be drainage facilities such as curb and gutter, c) ll and lll only
determined considering a length of inlets and storm sewer shall be provided
meters for each bus.
-._ within the turnout. The following shall be
nS' 4 Ail of the above
observed:
* a/ Vehicles parked near inlersections can
15.0 c) 16.0 l. The cross slope of the turnout shall obstruct the flow of turning traffic. Thus, {.$5.:::,Pfobbmi
b) 14.5 d) 15.5 be 0.50% steeper than the cross slope parking should be prohibited within the
of the adjacent lane of the existing following minimum dislances from the When considering parking adjacent to
carriageway. boundaries of intersecting roads for barrier lines the following lactors should
ll, The gutter alongside the turnout $hall parallel parking - _ m. on both approach be considered:
have the same slope as the existing and exit sides.
Turnouts shall have a minimum width of
carriageway.
L lf parking maneuvero can be made
_ meters to accommodate all types of Ill. On carriageway with existing storm 0s a)6
clear of through lanes. Generally, at
vehicles. least 3 meters needs to be available
sewer, the turnout shall be provided
with inlets (spacing of 20.0 meters)
b) 5 for moving traffic between the parked
a) 4.00 c) 3.80 c) J vehicle and the barrier line for a single
6b, 3.60 d) 4.20
and connecting pipes to the existing d) 8 lane of traffic.
sewer.
 a HIGHWAY ENoINEERING HIGHWAY ENgITeERING I
ll. The loss of capacity during parking
maneuvers if the maneuvers are not 1.37 Probhml {.4O Problem: 7.43 Problem:
completely clear of through lanes.
lll. The safety and potential of vehicles The areas whers the stalo of the road The provision of safety sight distance
What are thb components in stopping sight
crossing the barrier line to pass a surface condition and good texture of the depends on the characteristics of the
distance?
vehicle in a parking or unparking road surface is particularly important vehicle such as:
where vehicles are required to
maneuver even though this is an
maneuver suddinly si.rch as:
brake or L Type of vehicle - car and truck L Reaction distance - the distance
unlawful maneuver. ll. Friction between the tire and the road traveled while the driver perceives a
l:ll. On the approach to traffic signals lll. Eye height of the driver hazard, decides to take action, then
a) I and ll only At roundabouts lV. Speed of vehicles acts by starting to apply the brakes to
b) I and lll only
lll. Around tight curves
a) start slowing down; and

c) ll and lll only

lV. On downhill slopes
b)
l, ll and lll only
l, lll and lV only
ll. Braking distance -
the distance
required for the vehicle to slow down
r€ d/ All of the above
a) l, ll and llt onty c) ll, lll and lV only
and stop
b) l, lll and lV onty rg d/ Alloftheabove lll. Height of driver's eye above the
c) ll, lll and lV onty roadway
rs d/ Ailoftheabove lV. Height of object
r,.{,i*lt,,.:}Fr.*lemi
{,36 Probteml a) l, ll and lV only
The provision of safety sight distance rg'
depends on the characteristics of the road b) I and ll only
The first aim of safe road design is to
Other aspects that could contribute to loss environment such as: c) l, ll and lll only
ensure that road users remain safely on the
of control on curyes are: d) All of the above
road. This depends on the following l. Road geometry - grade and curvature
factors: l. Adversesuperelevation; sight limitations
ll. Poor sight distance; and ll. -
Road surface sealed or unsealed,
L a sound road surface; lll, Poor surface condition smooth or rough
,.4 Problern:
ll. an adequate width or cross.section; ' a) I and tl only lll. Road illumination at night
lV. Road topography
lll. horizontal and vertical alignment; b) I and ltl only The reaction time to be used tor road
lV. goodvisibility/sightdistance; c) ll and tll only *a) l, ll and lll only safety design is seconds. This value
V. !€ 4 Nl of the above b) l, ll and lV only is applied to the whole range ol design
delineation and signing;
c) ll, lll and lV only speeds.
-
VL provision for pedestrians, pedal d) All of the above
cyclists and people with disabilities;
a) 1.5 * c/ 2.5
Vll. management of traffic conflicts at b) d)
interseclions; and
The provision of safety sight distance { rPrirbleid
1.2 2.4
depends on the characteristics of the
Vlll. speed management driver such as: Each type of sight dislance consists of
L Alertness of driver
three elements: {i.4f,: Piobleml,
a) I, ll, lll and Vl only ll. Recognition of the hazard t. Driver Eye Height
b) Il, lV, V, Vil and Viltonty lll. Actions available to the driver - to il. Object Height The length of superelevation development
fiom zero cross slope to full design
c) l, lV, Vl and Vllonty
lV.
stop or to change direction
Decision of the driver
ilt. Sight Distance
superelevation is known as:
IV, Velocity of Vehicle
rs d/ Ailoftheabove
a) l, ll and lV only
,* ll and lll only
a) Superelevationrunout
b) ll, lll and tV onty
a) l,
!9" b) Superelevation runoff
* c) t,ll and til onty
b)
c)
I, ll and lV only
ll, lll and lV only c) Tangent runout
d) Atl of the above d) All ofthe above
d) Tangent run off

I
 to HIOHWAY HNoINeERING HIGHWAY EN(iINEERING 1t

{.46 Problem:
1
I
1,4O Probhml '': r':i i lr I
Ptoblethi { 5$::l :, :pf6$16ifi1
The length of superelevation development Types of curb that provide less vaulting of
Shoulder paving is a valuablo method ol A pedestrian bridge adjacent to the bridge
from the normal cross slope to the zero the errant vehicle on impact with the curb,
providing: used by vehicles can be an oplion where
cross slope point on lhe tangent is known less likelihood of the driver losing control
as: l. lntegrity of the pavement and less damage to occupants of the insufficient width is available for
pedestrians. This can be cantilevered off
a) Superelevationrunout ll, Width to place edgeline pavement vehicles compared to barrier curbs. This
the structure of the road bridge. A
b) Superelevationrunoff markings type shall be used for all traffic islands,
minimum width of _ should
r.\ c) Tangent runout lll, Additional safety to prevent vehicles medians and the right side of the roadway
provided, although it may need to be wider
be

d) Tangent r:un off skidding or drivers losing control in where operating speeds are greater than 60
for the higher pedestrian and cycle
gravel kph.
volumes.
lV. Low maintenance costs compared a) Barrier curb & gutter
;47',..r, :86drd with unpaved shoulders b) Barrier curb a) 1.8 m c) 2m
Minimum K yalue vertical curves should be a) l, ll and llt only c) lVlountableidrop curb & gutter
b) 1.2m r:r d) 1.5m
selected on the basis of the different b) l, lll and tV onty [:s' O Mountableldrop curb
controlling factors: c) ll, lll and lV only
l. Sight dislance is a requirement in all er dl Ailoftheahove

Il.
situations for driver safqty;
Appearance is generally required in
'l;$3 Froblem,' t,.56 Problom:
low fill and llat topography situations; {,$o Ffoblen*: They are essential part of any road that is
and They are lane in flat to rolling terrain, which
not on fill and must be incorporated into
lll. Riding comfort is a general
Types of curb & gutter:
the road cross-section. These are designed
are used to break up platoons of traffic and
requirement with specific need on to improve traffic flow over a section of
l, Barrier curb & gutter to accommodate the expected rainfall but
road. A series of such auxiliary lanes for
approaches to a floodway $/here the ll. Barrier curb can often be hazardous to vehicles that run
both directionE of
traffic can greatly
length of depression needs to be lll. Mountable/drop curb & gutter off the road.
minimized. improve traffic flow and driver satisfaction.
lV, Mountableldropcurb * a) Longitudinal drainage ditches
a) I and ll only
b)
b) I and lll only a) l, ll and ilt only Transverse drainage ditches a) Line lanes

c) ll and llt only b) l, lll and lV only c) Drop curb and gutters b) Climbing lanes
c) ll, lll and lV onty d) Shoulder *c) Overtaking lanes
rs dJ Ailoftheabove d) Auxiliary lanes

i,;i54 Probleml
Criterias used for the establishment of sag
vertical curvesl
Types of curb suiled for the edge of the
The most important criteria to consider to
avoid safety hazards created by
the I 1.57 Problem:
l, Headlight sight distance traveled way where it is generally drainage ditches is the actual
A special form of overtaking lane but they
ll. Passenger comfo( considered that drivers should not mount reconnaissance survey during wet whether
are only provided on inclines where truck
lll, Drainage control the curb or sidewalk. This types are used to identify the natural run-out locations.
speeds fall to 40 kph or less and upgrade
lV. General appearance for areas where operating speeds are Slopes on the side nearest the road should
traffic flow rate in excess of 20 vehicles per
V. Velocity of cars passing thru the generally less than 60 kph and where not be steeper than _ and.preferable
hour.
curye parking of vehicles is allowed. flalter as this will minimize accident
severity. The slope farthest from the road
a) l, ll, lV and V only a) Barrier curb & gutter may be as steep as the ground will permit. *al Climbing lanes
[s' 0 t,ll,llt and lV only lG- 0 Barrier curb D) Tapered lanes
c) a) 1.5:1 na 4
ll, lV and V only c) lvlountable/drop curb & gutter
d)
3:1 c) Ramps
d) All ofthe above d) Mountable/drop curb
b) 2:1 4:1 d) Diverging lanes
 13
12 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HI(iHWAY ENGINETRING

1.58 CE Board May 2Ot6 1,63 Problem:

The design of overtaking lanes and Where long steep grades occur, it is An intersection is the junction where two
climbing lanes requires the consideration desirable to provide emergency escape road either cross or meet' The types of
of the: ramps. There are to be located to slow or intersections that generally exist on the
stop an out of control vehicle away from road network are: *a) parallel type of 4 leg intersection
L lnitial diverge taper the main traffic stream. Out of control b) unchannelized intersection
ll. Auxiliary lane length vehicles result from drivers losing control l. Unflared and unchannelized
c) multileg intersection
lll. End or merge taper of their vehicle. The following are the types intersections (without widening or d) flared type of intersection
of escape ramps: traffic islands)
a) I and ll only tl. Flared and unchannelized
lll only l. intersections (with widening but
b) I and
ll and lll only
Sand Pile
without traffic islands) and
{.66' Pr<iblemr
19
c)
ll. Descending Grade
d) All of the abow lll. Horizontal Grade lll. Channelized intersections (traffic
The figure shown is one type of a highway
islands to guide traffic)
lV. Ascending Grade intersection at grade which is commonly
lV. Multipleintersections known as:
{.59 Problem: I, ll and lll only
a)
*a) l, ll and lll only
b) l, lll and lV only
A very short section of fully constructed b) l, lll and lV only
c) ll, lll and lV only
shoulder or added lane that is provided to c) ll, lll and lV only
allow slow vehicles to pull aside and be o€ d/ All of the abave
d) All of the above
overtaken. lt differs from an overtaking *a) flared type of 4 leg intersection
lane due to its short length, different b) unchannelized intersection
signing and that the majority of vehicles
are not encouraged to travel in the right
{.62 Prohlem: { c) parallel type of 4-leg intersection
d) multi-leg intersection
lane.
Delineation of the road alignment needs to Common $Pes of intersections are:
be considered as part of the design
rs.b)
a) Climbing lanes
process to ensure that adequate guidance l. Cross-intersections
1.67 Problem:
Tumout
is provided to road users. Delineation is ll. T-intersections
c) Diverge lanes
generally provided by the use of the lll. Y-intersections The figure shown is one type of a highway
d) Merge lanes
following devices: lV. Other multi'legged junctions intersection at grade, which is commonly
V. Roundabouts known as:
L Pavemenl tttlarkings
lll$&r P*libl*lnr ll. Signs a) l, ll, lll and lV only
l, lll and lV only
lll. Guide posts b)
Turnout is a very short section of
full l, lll, lV and V only
constructed shoulder or added lane that is
lV. Reflectivedelineators
sa d) All of the above
provided to allow slow vehicles to pull V, Lighting
aside and be overtaken. The length of Vl. Gurborotherphysicaldevices
turnout lanes for an average approach
speed of 30 kph is equal to: a) l, ll, lll and lV only
{.65 Problem: 0g a) m ulti-leg intersection
b) ll, lll, lV and Vl only b) unchannelized intersection
a) 180 m c) 50m
l, lV, V and Vl only
The figure shown is one type of a highway
c) flared type intersection
!s' b) 6o m d) 200 m or roid interseclions at grade, This is parallel tyPe of intersection
d)
os d/ All of the above commonly known as :
 t4 HIGHWAY ENGINE HIGHWAY ENOIruEEtaING 15

lll, Control movements to reduce the

possibility of conflict and
The figure shown is one type of a highway The figure shown is one type of highway lV. Clearly deline vehicle paths by use of
rntersection at grade which is commonly intersection at grade which is commonly pavement markings
known as: known as:
l, ll and lll only
d) channelized inlersection b) l, lll and lV only
b) channelized y-inlersection c) ll, lll and IV cnly
c) flared intersection ns d) Ail of lhe above
ns d) 3 leg intersection
a) rotary intersections roundabout
.Prirblom
rs_ b) 4-leg channelized type
multiJeg intersection
a) multileg intersections
d) flared type intersection Traffic can be controlled at intersections by
b) flared type intersections The figure shown is one type of highway traffic control device such as
*c) u n ch a n n el iz e d i ntersecfion intersections at grade, wh ich is commonly
d) parallel type inlersections known as: l. Regulatory signs
ll. Traffic signals
lll.

lir-
Roundabouts
The figure shown is one type of highway
intersections at grade which is commonly a) I and ll only
known as b) I and lll only
The ligure shown is one type of highway
c) ll and lll only
intersections at grade which is commonty
known as: a) y-with turning roadruays
[S d) All of the above
rg' b) 4-leg channelized type
intersection
c) rotary interseclions roundabout
a) clover leaf
d) channelized y-intersection
b) partial clover leaf
directional interchange
Signs facing the minor road approaches at
rs d) rotary i nter s ection s r ou n da b o ut
an intersection are used to give priority to
a) channelizedy-intersection
the major road.
b) rotary intersection
a) thru street signs
* cl 3 leg intersection with y-turning The figure shown is one type of highway b) fast moving vehicles ahead signs
roadways inlersections at grade which is commonly * cl sfop orgive waysigns
d) four leg channelized type
known as:
d) slow down signs
intersection
Principles of good design to reduce the
likelihood of traffic accidents include:

l. Minimize the speed of vehicles at

potential collision points
ll. Separate movements and points of
Purpose of traffic signals placed on
The figure shown is one of
highway *a) conflict by channelization, or in some
controlled interseclions is to:
intersections at grade which is commonty
b)
ch an n elize d y -i
y-with turning roadways
nfersecfion
situations, prohibit certain
known as: movements {and provide lor them at t. Separale vehicle movements in time.
c) rotary type inlersection
other intersections along the route) This minimizes conflicts.
d) 4-leg channelized intersection
l6 HIGHWAY ENGINEERIN@
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
ll. Minimize delays at an intersection
1.8{ Problem
lll, Enable vehicles from a side road to | .r ,j A traffic island is provided with this
t;86 Pitiblem
cross or enter the major road Low relative speed conditions treatment to:
at
lV. Assist pedestrians in crossing the intersections can be obtained by: Roundabouts may be appropriate in the
road
l. Choosing a layout where conflicting
l, Guide traffic into defined Paths following situalions:

a) l, ll and lll only movements cross at angles less than

ll. Separate through, turning and
l. At intersections with high accident
opposing traffic movements rates
or equal to 90 degrees
b)
c)
l, lll and lV only
ll, lll and lV only ll. Providing a layout or alignment that lll. Give advance warning of the ll. When physical conlrol of speed is
slows down approaching vehicles intersection to approaching drivers desirable
B9 d) All of the above lll. Providing declaration lanes lV. Provide refuge for pedestrians lll. When the flows on each approach are
V. Prohibit undesirable or unnecessary balanced and caPacitY analYsis
a) I and ll only
traffic movements indicates that volumes can be
b) I and lll only
1.79 Problem c) ll and lll only
lV.
managed
When the volume of left turners is
A conflict point occurs where two travel
[s- d) Atl of the above a) l, ll, lll and lV only
significant
paths interact or cross, Safe intersection b) l, lll and lV only V, lf traffic signals may be inefficient e,g"
design uses the following principles: c) l, lll, lV and V only due to a large number of Phases

1.42 Problem rs Vl. Formulti-leggedintersections

I. Minimizing the number of conflict d) All o{ the above
points
The safety of an intersection can be
a) l, ll, lll and lV only
ll. Minimizing the area of conflict improved by provision of ilght and left
b) ll, lll, lV and Vlonly
lll. Separating points of conflict auxiliary turning lanes. Turning lanes also 1.A4 Problem c) l, lV, V and Vlonly
lV, Giving preference to major improve intersection capacity and traffic
!g 4 Atlottheabove
movements flow. They are particularly important if the The types of slip lane arrangements are:
V. Minimizing relative speed of volume of traffic making these moves is
conflicting movemehts high or il the through or oncoming traffic L High entry angle slip lane
1.87 Problern
a) l, ll, lll and lV only
flows are high. ll. Free flow slip lane Roundabouts may not be appropriate in the
Provision lor turning lanes can generally lll. Slow entry angle slip lane
b) l, lll and lV only following situations:
be provided in the following ways:
c) l, Ill, lV and V only
l. Shared turning and through lane
l. Where satislactory geometric design
ra d/ All of the above ll. Flaring and tape
*a) I and ll only cannot be provided due to insufficient
lll. Separate lane for deceleration and b) I and lll only
ll.
space of unfavorable toPograPhY
Where unbalanced flows with high
storage c) ll and lll only
lV, volumes are on
one ormore
1.80 Problem Establishment of a traffic island d) All of the above
approaches
The speed of vehicles through an *a) l, ll and lll only lll. Where a major road intersects a minor
intersection depends on the following: road and a roundaboul would result in
l, lll and lV only
b)
vl ll, lll and lV only
1.85 Problem unacceptable delay to the major road
L Alignment
All of the above
lV. Where there is considerable
ll. Road environment
d)
One of the safest type of intersection pedestrian activity and due to high
lll. Traffic volume and composition treatments. traffic volumes it would be difficult for
lV. Traffic control devices pedestrians to
cross at the
{.83 a) T-intersection intersection
a) l, ll and lll only
Right turn slip lanes are provided to b) Y-intersection
a) l, ll, and lV only
l, lll and lV only
b)
ll, lll and lV only
minimize the delays for right turning u.rE c) roundabout b) ll, lll and lV only
c)
vehicles and to make the right turn d) cross intersection c) l, lll and lV only
rg d, All of the above movement easier and safer. !A d Alloltheabove
 I8 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING l9
{,88 Problern However, it must be recognized that drivers lll. Modify the hazard so that it is not so
1.gO Problern
and riders are only human and will dangerous
The maximum design speed through sometimes make mistakes and lose control lV. Replace the hazard with something
roundabout should be generally --.- in of their vehicles, that is not so dangerous Different types of road safety barrier
urban areas The reasons that they might lose control V. Shield the hazard with a barrier systems:
are many, for example:
a) 50 kph c) 60 kph
system
l. Flexible Wire Rope Safety Barrier
r€ o) 4o kph d) 70 kph L Excessive speed a) l, ll and lV only Systems
ll. Fatigue or inattention b) ll, lll, lV and V only 11. Semi Rigid Systems
lll. Alcohol or drugs c) lll, lV and V only 1ll. Rigid Systems
{.89 Problem lV. Road condition ra d) All of the above lV. Road Work Systems

d) l, ll and lll only

The maximum design speed through b) l, lll and lV only
a) l, ll and lll only
roundabout should be no greater than
in rural areas.
_- c) ll, lll and lV only I b) l, lll and lV only
o€ d/ All of the above
ll, lll and lV only

They are used to shield errant vehicles rs d) All of the above

a) 60 kph *c) 50 kph from running into hazards that cannot be
b) 70 kph d) 40 kph relocated or made more frangible.
{ .9?'r Froblam
a) roadside poles
1.{l Problem
t.go Some typical road environment hazards
are:
rs Dl roadside baniers
The location safety barriers in the vicinity
frangible wooden posts of curb and gutter is to be considered
Things to avoid in a design of a L Poles
d) drivable culve( end carefully. lf curb and gutler is essential in
roundabout: ll. Trees high-speed locations, the face of cr,-r.
lll. Steep side slopes should be located:
L straight approaches on high.speed lV. Water courses, dams 1.S5,, l
roads V. Culvsrt endwalls l. At least 3 m from the face of concrete
ll. Central island too small to provide Vl. Fences and encroaching buildings ln accordance with the
National safety barriers

lll.
deflection Vll. Bridge piers and abutments Corporative Highway Research Project 350 ll. At least 3 m from W-beam and wire
Unbalanced traffic flows Vlll. speed management rope safety barriers for concrete
(NCHRP350) procedures, there are six test
lV. Splitter islands
levels to
provide a
range of restraint barrier curb
d) l, Il, lll and Vl only requirements and
impact' severity lll. At least 3.0 m from W-beam safety
*a/ l, ll and lll onty b) ll, lll, V and Vll only conditions. The criteria is based on: barrier or wire rope safety barrier for
b) l, lll and lV only c) lll, lV, V and Vl only concrete mountable/drop curb &
c) ll, lll and lV only r8 d/ All of the above l. Structural adequacy of the barrier gutter
d) All of the above system lV, ln areas where the operating speed is
ll. Occupancy risk and the impact less than 70 kph, an offset ol 0,2 to
veloci$ and ride down acceleration 0.3 m can be tolerated to minimize
, Problem limits damage to vehicles
lll. Vehicle trajectory after impact
The options for treating roadside hazards a) l, lland lll only
The first objective in road safety is to keep are: a) I and ll only
road users safely on the road pavement b) l, lll and lV only
b) I and lll only
with a reasonable width, a sound ll, lll and lV only
road l. Remove the hazard c) ll and lll only
c)
surface, a predictable alignment and good ll. Move the hazard outside the clear f \:'
rg' d/ All of the above
delineation and signs. d) All of the above
zone
 2.O HI(,HW,AY ENGINTERING 21
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

OtObmil: {rt0S,,,t ',r,,,Ffob!!m {.irOA:

Problem
The warrant for the use of safety barriers Signs which provide means ol displaying Light retro-reflecting devices mounted at
Signs that instruct road users to meet essential traffic information on wide multi- the side of the roadway, in series, to
can be established considering: certain traffic rule requirements or road lane roads, where some degree of lane use indicale the roadway alignment.
condition. control is required, or where side'of"road
l, Fore slope or back slope steepness
and height a) Roadwork signs
clearance is insufficient to accommodate a a) Traffic cones
ll. Unforgiving hazards within the clear b) Overhead signs
road side sign.
rs b) Delineators
zone c) Traffic signs
Flexible post or bollard
lll. Water hazards within the clear zone Wq Special instrucfion srgns
a) Roadwork signs c)
b) Guide signs d) Flashing Lamps
a) I and ll only *c) Overhead srgns
b) I and lll only d) Special instruction signs
c) ll and lll only
3A d/ All of the above Warn road users of condition on or
adjacent to the road that may be
unexpected or hazardous. Devices which may be conical in shape or
,{,;{$S,r':r,: Prohlein ,r

tubular-shaped capable of performing

1.99 Problem a) Roadwork signs
channelization of traffic which may be set
[Qr b/ Warning signs Highway appurtenances designed to on the surface of the roadway or rigidly
c) prevent vehicular penetration from the
Device mounted on a fixed support Traffic signs attached for continued use.
(permanent signs) or portable support d) Guide signs travel way to areas behind the barrier such
(temporary signs) whereby a specific as to minimize damage to
impacting
message is conveyed by means of words vehicles and their occupants, and to *' a) Traftic cones
or symbols placed or erected for the 2o,7 6
reduce the risk of injuries to pedestrians b) Delineators
purpose of regulating, warning or guiding and workers. c) Flexible post or bollard
traffic. lnform and advice road users of directions,
a) Traffic cones
d) Barriers
distance, routes, the location of services,
a) Roadwork signs and points of interests. b) Delineators
b) Overhead signs ,* c) Barriers
o* c) Traffic signs
* a) Guidesigns d) Temporary curbing
d) Special instruction signs b) Regulatory signs
c) Warr;ilg signs
Roadwork deyices consisting of pre-cast
d) Traffic signs
concrete sections, sandbag, and others
which, rnay be used to guide traffic at lhe
construction site.
Signs that inform road users ol traffic laws
{;{o4 Warning devices used to supplement other
and regulations which, if disregarded, will Warn or advise of temporary hazardous
controls and devices necessary to alert a) Barriers
constitute an offense. conditions that could endanger road users
motorists of construction and maintenance b) Delineators
activities or obstructions in the roadway.
d) Roadwork signs
or the men and equipment engaged on JS c) Temporarycurbing
roadwork.
ns" D) Regulatory signs
a) Traffic cones d) Flexible post or bollard

c) Traffic signs
*a) Roadwork signs b) Delineators

b) Overhead signs c) Barriers

d) Warning signs
c) Guide signs r+B d/ Flashing Lamps
d) Special instruction signs
 22 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEEFiING 23

1.ll,l' 1.114 Problem {.{{8 Problem

Device used in place of rigid barrier posts Standard color used as a background for
Standard sign shape for STOP sign. Standard sign shape for warning signs.
or traffic cones with a minimum of 450 mm STOP signs.
by 50 mm wide with alternate bands of
* a) a) Pentagon
contrasting color as seen by approaching
b)
Octagon
Circle
b) Circle [€ a) Red
traffic for delineation of traffic.
c) Equilateraltriangle ns c) Equilateraltriangle b) Black
a) Barriers d) Rectangle d) Rectangle
c) Yellow
b) Delineators d) White
c) Temporary curbing
[€ 0 Bofiard 1.1{O Prsblem
{.{t$ Problem 7.',29 Problem
Standard sign shape for directional signs'
,l,lt2' Standard sign shape for GIVE AWAY sign. roadwork signs, signs for sPecial Standard color used as legend color for
purposes, and supplementary plates for signs having white, yellow, orange'

Signs are classified in the following groups a) Octagon warning signs.

fluorescent orange, lluorescent yellow
according to their use. b) Circle green background and as chevron for
* c/ Equilaterattriangte a) Pentagon
hazard markers.
l. Regulalory Signs
d) b)
li. Warning Signs
Rectangle
c)
Circle
Equilateraltriangle
a) Red

lll. Guide Signs or lnformative Sign re b) Black

lV Signs for Expressways
KA d) Rectangle
c) Blue
V. Signs for Special Purposes d) Brown
Vl. Hazard Markers 1 .1
{.
a) l, ll, lll and lV only Standard sign shape for regulatory signs.
b) ll, lll, lV and Vl only
{,r{2{
Standard sign shape for facility information
c) l, lV, V and Vlonly a) Octagon
signs, instruction signs, guide signs, and
rs 0g' ry Standard color used as background color
d/ All of the above Circle destinations of point of interest. for roadwork signs.
c) Equilateraltriangle
d) Rectangle a) Pentagon a) Red

{,1{3 Problem
b) Circle b) Black
c) Equilateraltriangle [g- c) Yellow
To be effective, the road sign should meet the ug d) Rectangle d) White
five basic requirements: 1.117 Problem
l. Fulfill a need Standard sign shape for additional
ll. Command attention information is:
1.1 '{.'l
lll. Convey a clear, simple message
lV. Command respect; and a) Octagon
Standard sign shape for pedestrian and ls the background color for most signs and
V. Give adequate time for proper response r€" b) circle
school crossings sign. legends for some colored background'

a) l, ll and lV only
c) Equilateraltriangle
a) Pentagon a) Brown
b) ll, lll, lV and V only
d) Rectangle
b) Circle
b) Green
c) lll, lV and V only c) Equilateraltriangle * c) White
Bs d/ All of the above d) Rectangle d) Blue
 24 HIGHWAY ENGINTERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERIN(i 25

1.t26 Problem {.{30 Prohlem {.{34 Probtem t.{38 Problem

ls used as background color for signs
related in pedestrian movement, school ls reserved as background color for all Series of letters and numerals used in What spacing is always used for lower
zones, and road work hazard markers to tourist facility directional and information special cases of traffic signs, case letters ol traffic signs?
give additional emphasis and guidance to signs.
vehicle operators.
a) Series A and I a) small spacing
[s a) Brown
!g' 0 Series C b) medium spacing
* a/ Fluorescentyellowgreen b) Fluorescent Orange c) Series F narrow spacirig
b) Fluorescent Orange c) Green d) Series D os d) wide spacing
c) Green d) Blue
d) Blue
{.t,35 Problsm
{ ;f ${':'.',: :;rfOblem {.f 30 Problem
*xtix*, Series of lefters and numerals for traffic
signs, which are commonly used as they
How many letters and numerals being used The letter size of a traffic sign indicates the
ls used as background color for roadwork provide the best legibility and aesthetics.
for signs? standard size as 160 DM which means:
signs whose legends relate to personnel
working. a)5 a) Series A and B
c)4 b) Series C *a) 160 mm series D letters at
a) Fluorescent yellow green
rs-b) 6 d) 3 c) Series F medium spacing
[S b) FluorescentOrange [A d) SeriesDandE b) 160 inches series D letters at
c) Green medium spacing
d) Blue
'l ;{',t3, t,,,:.rFifiblem
rt 160 mm series DM letters at
medium spacing
What series of letters and numerals are d) 160 inches series DM letters at
used in directional signs? Series of letters and numerals of traffic medium spacing
signs, which are not often used on large
ls used as background color for direction a) Modified series A signs due to the wide space required.
signs. b) Modified series F
r9 c) Modified series E a) Series A and B
1.14O Problem
a) Fluorescent yellow green d) tt4odified series C
b) Series C
b) Fluorescent Orange n* c) SeriesF
The letter size of traflic sign indicates the
* c) Green d) Series D
standard size as 90 LC would mean:
d) Blue

a) 90 inches lower case letters that

Series of letters and numerals not used on 1 itfl are always at wide spacing
1.r29 Problem signs which have to be used foi moving !s b) 90 mm lower case lefters that are
vehicles as the legibility distances are Standard letters and numerals of traffic
ls used as background color for signs for capital letters comprises 3 steps always atwide spacing
service small,
signs. of spacings. c) 90 inches lower case letters that

a) Brown
* a) SeriesAandB a) small, medium and wide
are always at medium spacing

b) Fluorescenl 0range b) Series C b) small, medium and large ,d)

90 mm lower case letters that are

c) Green c) Series F ,ro c) narrow, medium and wide

always at narrow spacing

[€ d) Blue
d) Series D
d) nanow, medium and large
 26 HI(iHWAY EN(iINEERIN(i HIGHWI\Y EN(iINEERIN(i 27

{.16S , P-roblern:,, 1,147 'Problom

It should be noted that when all sign rules Generally there should not be more than Signs should be mounted approximately at What are the different sizes for regulatory
have been followed, some visual judgment one signs of a particular type on each post, right angles to the direction of and facing signs?
rnust be exercised in adjusting sign except wltren one sign supplements the traffic they are intended to serve. At
elements. The following general rules are another or where route or directional signs curve alignments, the angle of placement l. Size A for urban low speed roads
to be applied when designing the sign face. must be grouped. When it
becomes should be determined by the course of ll. Size B for rural roads with speed
necessary to convey two qr more different approaching traffic rather than by the
l. Cramping of legend is to be avoided; messages at one location, separate signs roadway edge at the point where the sign is
limits between 60 and 70 kph
ll. Avoid large areas of blank panel, must be located a minimum distance of located.
I lll. Size C for high-speed rural highways'
particularly blank areas not multi.lane urban roads
To eliminate possible and undesirable
symmetrically disposed across the reflection from the surface of the sign, it lV. Size D for Expressways
panel; d) 30m should be turned about _
away from the V. Size E for Municipal roads
lll. lf there are two list of legends side by b) 40m normal to the headlight beam. After signs
side (e.g., as on Reassuiance Signs) it cs, c/ 0.6V where V is the Bith are installed, it is good practice to test al l, lll, lV and V only
them by trial approach run in a motor
is necessary to left justify the left list
and right justify the right list;
percentile speed in kph
vehicle both by day and night.
!s bJ I, ll, lll and lV only
d) 0.5V where V is the 85il percentile
c) ll, lll and V only
lV. Elements such as arrows and speed in kph
symbols may sometimes have to be
*n- a) 5" c) 8" d) All of the above
larger than the principal legend would b) 6" d) 10"
normally require. For example, an
arrow relates to several lines of
legends on a direction sign
The following conditions should
considered in the erection of overhead sign
be
{.146 Problem Signs used to warn motorists of potentially
d) l, ll and lll only displays: hazardous conditions on or adjacent to the
b) l, lll and lV only What are the classifications ol regulatory road.

c) ll, lll and lV only l. Traffic volume at or near capacity signs?

ll. Complex or closely spaced
u* a/ Warning signs
r15- dJ All of the above interchanges l. Priority Signs b) Regulatory signs
lll. Three or more lanes in each direction ll. Direction Signs c) Direction signs
lV. Restricted sight distance. lll. Prohibitive or Restrictive Signs
d) Prohibitive or restrictive signs
V. Multi.lane exits
lV. Speed Signs
Vl. Large percentage of trucks
V. Parking Signs
Vll. Street lighting background
Vlll. High speed traffic
Vl. MiscellaneousSigns
Signs are normally located on what side of lX. Consistency of sign message location What are the classifications of warning
the road? through a series of interchanges a) l, ll, lV and Vl only signs?
X. lnsufficient space for ground mounted b) ll, lll, V and Vl only
a) center signs l, lV, V and Vl only l. Horizontal Alignment Signs
b) left
r,*_ ll. lntersection and Junclion Signs
*c) right d) l, lll, lV and V only
d) All of the above
lll. Advance ltUarning of Traffic Control
d) mounted over the road b) lV, V, Vland VII only Device Signs
v) ll , Vlll, lX and X only lV" Road Width Signs
!s d) All of the above V. Road 0bstacle Signs
 28 HIGHWAY TN(iINEERING
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 29
Vl. Pedestrian and School Signs
firt .Pl,oblatrii
Vll. Railway Level Crossing l.{'55r'Probldm { ;{,59,r :,, r,, Pi6hlgm:
Vlll. SupplementarySigns The different general size of Horizontal
Which of the following sign is not Clearance sign shall be rectangular in
lX. 0ther t{larning Signs Alignment Signs: a
shape which should be in black letters on
supplementary sign?
L Size A, for use of urban or low speed white reflectorized background. The size of
a) l, lll, lV and V only . roads a) Advisory sign the sign shall not be less than
ll, Size B, for rural roads with speed tg' b)
b) lV, V, Vl and Vllonly
limits between 60 and 70 kph
Crossroadsrgn a) 1000 mm x 500 mm with the long
-
ll, lll, Vlll and lX only
lll. c) Playground axis horizontal
r9 d) All of the above lV.
Size C, for high-speed rural highways
Size D, lor high-speed urban roads
d) School b) 800 x 400 mm with the long axis
horizontal

a) I, ll and lll only

* c) 1500 mm x 600 mm with the long
b) l, lll and lV only {.1:56 Probleifi axis horizontal
c) ll, lll and lV only d) 1200 mm x 600 mm with the long
!g 4 Which of the following sign is nol an axis horizontal
Ailoftheabove
ln urban areas, advance warning signs intersection or junction sign?
should be placed at a distance of __ a) Priority cross {.{80 Problem
in advance of the hazardous area.
b) Crossroad sign

*a)
* c) Advisorysign
The low clearance sign shall be rectangular
in shape and not less than 1950 mm x 600
nof ,ess than 30 m. or more than
100 m.
Types of Horizontal Alignment Signs, d) Skewed intersection
mm in size with the long axis horizontal. lt
which are used to indicate the type of road
b) not less than 25 m. or more than curve ahead of the motorist.
shall be
installed on all
bridges,
underpasses and other structures where
50 m.
not less than 20 m. or more than
L Sharp turn it.t57' Problom the vertical clearance above the road
ll. Reverse turn pavement is __
or less to warn motorist
45 m.
lll. Curve lurn Sign used only in conjunction with another of the restricted height of the approach
d) not less than 40 m. or more than lV. Reverse turn warning sign to indicate the desirable structures. Vertical clearance shall be
100 m. V. Winding road speed in good weather, traffic and road reckoned from the highest flood level.
Vl. Hairpin curve conditions.
a) 50m c) 5.2m

a) l, ll, lll and V only

*_ a) Advisory speed sign
b) ll, lll, lV and Vl only b) Supplementary speed sign
' ln rural areas, advance warning signs c) l, lll, lV and V only vl Crossroad speed sign
f.{O,{' , Problorrt
should be placed at a distance of _
rs d) All of the above
d) Side road speed sign
The Slow Down Accident Prone Area or
in advance of the hazardous area, Bumagal Madalas ang Aksidente Dito signs
{: ;{r58ilr: :,, : lpl6bl6nf shall be rectangular in shape and not less
d) not less than 60 m. nor more than than
150 m.
b) not less than 80 m. nor more than Type of sign used in advance of an
A supplemental sign use lo warn the road *a) 1600 nm x 600 mm in size with
users of a hazard on a side road in close long axis horizontal
200 m. intersection where two roads cross at a
proximity to the through road.
common point. b) 1200 mm x 600 mm in size with
*cj no{ ,ess than 75 m. nor more a) Blind sign long axis horizontal
than 225 m. a) Priority cross
b) Advisory speed sign c) 1000 mm x 500 mm in size with
d) not less than 50 m. nor more than rs b) Crossroadsign c) Slipping road warning sign long axis horizontal
120 m. c) T-junction sign rg' dJ 0n side road sign d) 1400 mm x 500 mm in size with
d) Skewed intersection long axis horizontal
 30 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 31

:,tr .Probl*m 1,.171:

Classification of guide signs:
Signs that inform road users about the The background color should be easily When distances are shown on guide signs,
direction and distances of destinations on recognizable by motorist as being l. Advance Direction Sign
the following rules shall apply:
the route they are following or along other applicable to the particular category of ll. lntersection Direction Sign
roads thal intersect their route. guide signs for which it is used. What is
lll. Reassurance Direction Sign
t. The distance shall be shown in meters
the color combination of information signs, for distance up to 999 m
Supplementary signs
lV. Finger Board Direction Sign
ll. The distance shall be shown in 0.1 km
r€
a) street name signs and kilometer posts?
v. Street Name Signs
increments for distances lrom 1 km to
D/ Guide signs Vl. Town Name and Geographical Feature
4.9 km
c) Warning signs d) White legend on blue background
Signs
d) Stack signs b) White legend on standard green Vll. Service Signs lll, The distance shall be shown in 0.5 km
background Vlll. Tourist lnformation and Tourist increments for distances lrom 5 m, to
*c) Black legend on white Destination Signs 9.5 km
background lX. Route Markers lV. To the nearest kilometer for greater
d) Black legend on yellow background distances
a) l, ll, lV, Vll and lX only
b) ll, lll, V, Vland Vll only a) l, ll and lll only
Classification of signs in the Directional c) lV, V, Vll, Vlll and lX only b) l, lll and lV only
Signing series are:
os d) All of the above c) ll, lll and lV only
ra d) All of the above
L Those installed in advance of the What is the color combination of advance
intersection. direction signs, intersection and special
ll. Those installed atthe intersection. direction signs, and reassurance direction {.t69
lll. Those on departure from the
signs, including signs giving direction to 1,172 Problem
expressways from the adjacent road and What is the color combination of signs for
intersection.
street system? tourist interest? in signs more than 2 m. high
lV. Those installed on expressways.
Lighting

* a/ a) White legend on blue background normally requires lighting on

White legend on standard green [g- b) White legend on brown -
a) l, ll and lll only or blue background
background
a) both sides only
b) l, lll and lV only b) White legend on brown background
c) Black legend on green background
[€ b) bothtopandbottom
c) ll, lll and lV only c) Black legend on yellow background
d) Black legend on white background c) bottom only
€d) All of the above
d) Black legend on white background d) top, bottom and both sides

{"{,7,o Froblem
iiii,t ?g',, i,., probllrrt
1.164 Problern The principal legend on a guide sign
What is the color combination of signs should be limited to the number of words a Generally roadside guide signs should be
indicating roadside service and legends driver can read and in time he can turn his located on the where a driver
Which of the following is not classified as a used? attention lrom the road to the sign. The would expect to see them.
guide sign?
number of times of legend or destination
a) Black legend on white background names that a guide sign should carry
*a) -
right side of the road
a) lntersection direction signs
b) Black legend on yellow background should not be more than lines of
b) Skeet name signs
c) White legend on green background legend or destination names.
-
b) left side of the road
*c) Supplementary signs !€ d) White legend on blue c) at the top of the line post

d) Tourist information signs

a)4c)5 d) at the bottom of an underpass
background
b) 6 ss4 3
 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 33
32 HIGHW,AY ENGINEERlNG

{r;,{?8 Froblenr '1.{80 Problem

1.174 Problem 1',175 Problerir
I,llhat is the shape, color and reflectivity of The vertical sequence of panels of a stack
Typical methods of supporting overhead A type of Advance Direction Signs, which an advance direction sign? signs:
signs are: list destinations together with appropriate
direction arrows and if required road *a) rectangular in shape, l. arrow-top ofsign
L Cantilever Support names and route markers. reflectorized white legend and
Straight ahead
ll. Angled arrow above horizontal arrows
ref lectorize d gr een b ackgro un d
a) lntersection signs b) rectangular in shape, reflectorized
lll. Alternate panels to have arrows at
b) Route markers yellow legend and reflectorized opposite ends of the sign
na c) Sfac* signs blue background
d) Diagrammatic signs c) rectangular in shape, reflectorized d) I and ll only
5.5m (rrin) white legend, and reflectorized blue
b) I and lll only
{).6 (nri background
d) rectangular in shape, reflectorized c) ll and lll only
,{r;:{176 'Frobl6lii white legend, and reflecorized 19 d) All of the above
brown background
Types of Advance Direction Signs;

lt. Gantry Suppo( L Stack Signs

1.179 ?roblem
ll. Diagrammatic signs '1.18'l Problem
lll. Reflectorizedsigns
Advance direction signs are used in
Other factors which may affect the size of
5.5m (rrinl {}6 in) advance of an intersection to indicate
letter or sign include:
a) ll and lll only destinations along each route leading away
tr._ _ _11 from the intersection, providing prior
b) I and lll only
information of the routes ahead L Distraction due lo road side activities
lll. Butterfly Support
*c/ ! and ll only showing place, names, arrows, symbols
by
ll. of short legends
Signs composed
d) All ofthe above and instructions to indicate directions. may be enlarged to increase
J.44 3.44 Advance Direction signs should usually be conspicuity
1.75D
erected; lll. Signs containing short and long
legends require a balance of legend
1,177 Problem l. in advance of intersections where two size to ensure equal visual impact
arterial roads meet or cross; or an
arterial road crossing a feeder road
lV. The need to emphasize a more
Stack signs shall indicate the following important direction by making larger
5.5m
information;
ll. in advance of intersections where the
than other names on the sign
arterial road turns

l. Destinations lll. on feeder road intersecting arterial

together with , road a) l, ll and lll only
appropriate direction arrows lV. in advance of intersections where
ll. Road names arterial road may be confused with
b) l, lll and lV only

lll. Route markers another road c) ll, lll and lV only

Bs d/ All of the ahove
a) l, ll and lll only
a) I and ll only
a) I and ll only b) l, lll and lV only
b) I and lll only ll, lll and lV only
b) I and lll only c)
c) ll and lll only c) ll and lll only riB d) All of the above
Bdl All of the above r€ d/ All of ihe above
34 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 35
,I
{..1 lll. beyond all intersections and junctions
The distance at which Advance Direction with important roads to indicate the
sign should be located in advance of an Street name signs shall be rectangular in Town names signs and names of local correct route number of the highway
intersection varies according to
the
shape with their long axis horizontal. The geographical feature signs should be lV. just outside the builtup area leaving a

expected speed ol approaching vehicles. ln length of the signs should be _ expected on: city or town
rural areas, Advance Direction V. in rural areas at intervals of not more
signs
a) not less than 800 mm or more than
l. right side ofthe road than 2 km except where reassurance
should be located at a minimum distance
1.4 m and vertical dimension shall
ll. at the boundary or entrance to a town signs have been erected beyond
from the interseclion o, _ if the 8$h lll. left side of the road
have a minimum of 250 mm if the junctions which are spaced less than
percentile speed (kph) is between 71 - 80
sign contains both street name and
lV. at the entrance and exit to a town 2 km apart
kph,
house numbers and not less than Vl. in urban areas at intervals ol not more
[s a) 125 - 150 150 mm for skeet signs having only
a) I and lV only
than 2 km except where reassurance
b) 100 - 125 one street name r:f b) ! and ll only signs have been erected beyond
c) 75 - 100 c) l, ll and lll only junctions which are spaced less than
d) 180 - 250 b) not less than 400 mm or more than d) ll, lll and lV only 2 km apart
1.8 m and vertical dimension shall Vll. at other locations where reassurance
have a minimum of 180 mm if the is considered to be desirable
sign contains both street name and
1.1
Which of the following standard house numbers and not less than a) l, ll, lll, V and Vl only
abbreviation of signs is not correct? 150 mm for street signs having only The national highways could be identilied b) ll, lll, lV and V only
one street name by the shield of a route marker that has c) lll, lV, V and Vlonly
* a/ EXforexpressway black numerals and border on reflectorized !s d) All ofthe above
b) HWY for highway *c/ not less than 500 mm or more white background. The size of the shield
c) RD for road
than 1.2 m and vertical for route markers when erected as an
d) AVE for avenue individual sign on national roads shall be
dimension shall have a minimum
of 200 mm if the sign contains
t.{
both street name and house a) 350 mm x 400 mm Asian Highway Route Markers when
numbers and not less than 150
Street name signs should be located on mm for streef signs having only
b) 360 mm x 400 mm erected as an individual sign, the size of
posts as
near as
practical tothe one street name
c) 300 mm x 360 mm the shield on national road isl

intersec{ion so that they are clearly visible rrR d) 310nmx300mn 19 a) 6lN mmx750 mm
to both pedestrians and drivers. When the d) not less than 600 mm or more than b) 600 mm x 800 mm
signs are erected in the footway, the height 1.2 m and vertical dimension shall c) 700 mm x 800 mm
shall be:
I r. {88
have a minimum of 250 mm if the d) 700 mm x 850 mm
a) not less than 2,5 m. or more than sign contains both street name and
3 m. measured to the bottom of the house numbers and not less than The Route Markers should be incorporated
sign 200 mm for street signs having only ln the sign where advance direction signs
09 b) not less than 2.2 m. or more than
one streel name ore erected at an intersection orjunction,
Other Route Markers are located as Asian Highway Route Markers
3 m. measured to the bottom of when
lollows: erected as an individual sign, the size of
the sign
c) not less than 3 m. or more than
l. at all intersections and junctions
the shield on expressways isr
3.5 m. measured to the bottom of
where motorists need to be assured a) 800 mm x 950 mm

d)
the sign
not less than 1.8 m. or more than
of the route b) 820 mm x 950 mm

2.8 m. measured to the bottom of

ll. beyond intersections and junctions og" c) 720 mm x 900 mm

. the sign
before which markers have been d) 700 mm x 900 mm
incorporated in the directional signs
 36 HIGHWAY ENGINEERTNG
HI(iHWAY ENGINEERING 37
i;l9l Piobleiin {.193 Problem I 't.{99 Problem
The Philippines is one of the 32 member Supplemental arrow board signs can be
counlries of UN-ESCAp. As part of our installed and shall have black arrows or
Ihe following signs are called One-Way hazard markers indicate to the
commitment, Route Markers and
Supplementary Signs: approaching driver the direction to be
legend and black border on
Directional Signs shall be put along the followed if the marker appears in the
white background.
Asian Highway. Our country has been I. USE OVERPASS driving path. They may point to the left or
assigned the Asian Highway route number The direction of the arrows on the
II. USE PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS right as appropriate and are used as
AH26. The route links major seaports and board will depend on the road
III. TRUCK USE LOW GEAR lollows:
cities in the country comprising moslly of intersection geometry. ln urban areas IV. CHECK BRAKES l. To delineate an abrupt narrowing of
the Daang Maharlika which commence intervals not more than
* _^except pavement, for example, at a lane drop;
from Laoag - Legaspi-Matnog -
Manila reassurance signs have been a) l, ll and lll only ll. At exposed' ends of raised median
(Ferry) * Allen-Tacloban (.0rmoc.(Ferry). beyond junctions, which are spaced b) l, lll and lV only islands where traffic is required to
Cebu)- Liloan - (Ferry)- Surigao.Davao (. than 2 km apart. !1, lll and lV only pass to one side;
c)
Cagayan de 0ro) -
General Santos -
ra d) Alt ol the above lll. On central island of a roundabout
Zamboanga. The total length of AH26 is a) 6km c) 8km facing entering traffic; and
about _. b) 4km !s" d/ ikm lV. To delineate the curve approach just
prior to entering,an intercection.
*a/ 3,517 kn 1
b) 3,625 km a) I and ll only

c) 4,825 km
'1.194 Problern Type of sign used when there is a b) I, ll and lll only
possibility that through traffic may enter a c) !1, lll and lV only
d) 4,675 km
Traffic instruction sign should not carryl dead end local road in error. !s d) All ol the above
long messages and where possible nd
more. than _ lines of messages stroutU Uel a) DO NOT ENTER
'a

;ll
b) NATHROUGH ROAD
,*r{o&
Supplemental arrow board signs can be
installed and shall have black arrows or
*J,: I d)
ALTERNATE ROUTE
ROAD CLOSED
Signs used to guide drivers through
change in horizontal alignment of the road.
a

legend and black border on reflectorized

white background. lr *a) Chevron signs
b) Supplementary signs
The direction of the arrows on the arrow What are the types of Hazard Markers? c) Guide post signs
board will depend on the road or Major types of instruction signs used: d) Delineators
intercection geometry. ln rural areas, at L One-Way Hazard Markerc
intervals of not exceeding except
t, Supplementary signs ll. Two-Way Hazard Markers
where reassurance signs have been
il. ilovement instruction signs lll. Width Markers
-- within
erected beyond junctions located il. Hazard marker signs lV. ObstructionMarkers
these limits. lv. Advance direction signs
It is recommended that the spacing of the
a) l, ll and lll only Chevron signs should allow the driver to
a) a) ll, lll and lV only
12 km and not less than 8 km
b) l, ll and lll only
b) l, ll and lV only see at least _
signs in view while
[S h) lll and lV only negotiating the curve until the change in
10 km and notlessthan 5 kn [9 c) I and ll only
c) !1,

c) 8 km and not less than 4 km

d) All ofthe above
ll *" d) All of the above
alignment eliminates the need for the sign.

d) 6 km and not less than 4 km a)5 c)4

Bs'b) 3 d) 2
 3a HIGHWAY TNGINEERING
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 39
1.2012:'
il|. where any bridge less than 2 m. wide
I
than the approach pavement or
What are the types and sizes of Chevron running portion of the carriageway Guide posts should be erected at or near of
signs? lV, where there is no shoulder on the They are made reflective materials
the edge of the road formation with a
capable of
reflecting light clearly visible
approach road uniform distance from the pavement edge.
L l.tM.1A,450 mm x 600 mm
The nominal spacing of guideposts on a
under normal atmospheric conditions from
ll. HM-18,500 mm x 800 mm a) ll, lll and lV only straight section of road shall be with
a distance of 300 500 m. when-
lll. HM-1C,500 mm x 800 mm us, b) l, ll and lll only post in pairs, one on each side of the
illuminated by the upper beam of a
lV. HM.1D, 600 mm x 7S0 mm - standard automobile head lamp.
c) I and ll only formation.
a) ll, lll and lV only
d) All ofthe above
a) 120 m c) 200 m a) Reflectors
b) l, ll and lll onty o€ 0 150m d) 250m b) llluminators
[9 c) ! and ll only
d) AII ofthe above
t.tos @ c) Delineators
d) Baniers
The size of markers to be used at
approaches to road bridges;
Spacing of guide posts when used in
curves, having radius up to 150 m,
L A size - rural area where average
Markers used where it is necessary to traffic volume is less than 300 [g a) S. 0.3R + 5
delineate an exposed obstruction on a vehicles per day b) S=0.6R+5
traffic island nose at which traffic may pass ll. B size - all other cases
c) S=0.2R+5
Pavement markings have definite functions
to either side. This sign can be used on a lll. C size - where average traffic is less d) S=0.4R+5 and limitations:
wide column of an overpass structure, or a than 300 vehicles per day
median island separating the carriageway lV. D size - where average traffic is less l. They are subject to traffic wear and
with traffic proceeding in
the same than 300 vehicles per day require proper maintenance;
direction. 1
a) I only
ll. They may not be clearly visible if the
*a) Two-Way Hazard Markers b) ll only
Spacing of guide posts when used in road is wet or dus$;

b) One-Way Hazard Markers c) lll only

curves having radius over 150 m, lll. They may be obscured by traffic;
Width Markers r€ d) I and lt onty a) S = 0.5R lV. Their effect on skid resistance
rs" requires careful choice of materials;
d) Obstruction Markers
0 s=0.6R
c) S=0.3R+5 and

,.206 Problenr d) S=0.5R+5 V. They cannot be applied on unsealed

7 .204 lroblem roads.

They are used to mark the edge of the road

Conditions when Width Markers are used formation and assist the road users by a) l, ll and lV only
at approaches to road bridges: indicating the alignment of the road ahead b) ll, lll and V only
especially at horizontal and vertical curves. Small reflective panels or buttons mounted
l. where clearance to bridge curb from on guideposts or guard fence as an c) lll, lV and V only.
the end of the running lane is less a) Chevron signs
effective aid to delineate the roadway for 0g d, All of he above
than the shoulder or curb width of the driving at night.
b) Obstruction markers

ll,
approach road *c) Gur?e posfs a) Reflectors
where there are non.fragile vertical b) llluminators
d) Concrete baniers
obstruction less than 600 mm clear
behind the bridge curb
* c) Delineators
d) Baniers
 40 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 41

CE illay 20,1.6 l;2117 Problelil 1 1.226 Problem

Itlhat are the four types of pavement and
The color of curb markings for prohibition
curb markings? The color ol Fire Lane Zone markings. A type of line that is used where crossing
of parking.
a) of the line is either discouraged or
longitudinal lines, transverse lines, a) white * c) red prohibited. lt is generally used to replace or
lransition lines, and stop lines a) white c) red b) yellow d) black supplement a broken line where required
' [g' b/ longitudinal lines, fransyarse r9 b/ yeltow d) black e.g. barrier lines, and center lines. ll may
lines, other lines and other be either yellow or white depending
markings
'l.at.s.l,,t,;-# whether or not crossing the line is legally
c) hhm
longitudinal lines, transverse lines,
stop line and center line
:ats prohibited.

d) longitudinal lines, transverse lines,

The color of markings of islands in line of
The width ol solid or broken lines used as
pavement mafters.
a) broken lines
center line and lane lines
traffic.
[g b) solid unhroken lines
o* a) varles from 100 mm to 300 mm c) lane line
a) white c) red b) varies from 150 mm to 300 mm d) straight line
1.214 CE Board 6 is b) yellow d) black
c) varies fom 100 mm to 200 mm
d) varies from 150 mm to 200 mm
Types of Reflectorized Markings:
Froblem
l. Retro Reflector Raised pavement 1.219 Problem
Markers I Means any traffic control device marked on
ll. Hazard markers
The color of markings for bus and pUJ
the surface of the carriageway used to
lll. Delineators
lanes.
Color used in hazard markers to warn road regulate traffic or to warn or guide road
users at locations where the protruding users.
a) ll and lll only
a) white objects such as bridge, piers, traffic
b) I and lll onty
r€ D/ yettow
c) red
signals and other permanent objects on or a) Chevron signs
c) ! and ll only d) black near the roadrvay. b) Delineators
[€ d) All ofthe above
a)
c) Lane Line
white c) red €d/ Road Markers
b) yellow rs d) black

1.215 Probtam
The color of Keep lntersection Open Prtlilem
The color of pavement markings is
_ markings. I
Shall mean any public thoroughfare, public
* a) white c) red
a) white c) red A type of line that consist of line segments boulevard, and avenue, but shall not
b) black d) btue
19 0 yetlow d) black with equal lengths separated by uniform include roadway upon grounds owned by
gaps. The speed of vehicles on the seclion private persons, colleges, universities, or
of road or in the are in question should be other similar institutions.
taken into account in determining the
lengths of the line strokes and of gaps *a) Highway
between them.
b) Expressway
The color of pavement markings for an The color of tlo Loadingfunloading Zone
unbroken portion of no-passing lines. ll iY a) c) Carriageway
marking, broken lines
d) lntersection
b) solid unbroken lines
a) white c) red
a) white * c) c) solid line
rg- D/ yeltow d) red
btack b) yellow d) black
d) straight line
 42 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWI\Y ENGINEERING 43

Means any level crossroad, junction, A center line may be marked on an urban The center line on a trivo-lane two-way rural 'Lane lines must not be continued on the
including open areas formed by such or rural road if one or more of the following road or any other road where the 85th lollowing cases:
crossroad. conditions are met: percentile speed (or speed limit) is greater
than 60 kph, shall be a broken line, with a t. Across signalized intersections.
l. Two lane road (greater than 6 m in minimum width of 150 mm and 3 m. long However, lane lines of low priority
a) Lane width) carrying an Annual Average
b) Expressway Daily Traffic (ADT) in excess of i000
with gaps ol _ spacing. road must be discontinusd at the
c) lnterchange intersection.
vehicles
rs dl lntersection ll. Two lane road (less than 6 m but more
*a) 9m c) 6m il Across side street entrances unless
d) the street is one-way street (going in
than 5 m in width) carrying an ADT in b) 8m 10m
only)
excess of 300 vehicles l[. Past the startof the taper at which a
t,330, Prcblam lll. Winding roads with widths of 5 m or multi.lane road narrows down
more. lv. At approaches to widened or
lV. Two lane roads greater than 10 rn. in signalized intersection
ilax. speed lirnit for urban roads. width A line used to separate adjacent lanes of V, On divided roads
traffic moving in the same direction.
a) 80 kph *c) 6a kph *a) I,ll and lll only a) l, ll and IV only
b) 90 kph d) 75 kph b) l, lll and lV only [9 a) Lane line rs b) l, ll and lll only
c) ll, lll and lV only c) ll, lll and V only
b) Transition line
d) All of the above
c) Transverse line d) All of the above
d) Continuity line

Max. speed limit for rural roads.

lf the bridge is 5 m. or more between
a) 50 kph *c) 60 kph curves, center line marks shall be _ .
b) 30 kph d) 70 kph
a) discontinued across the bridge Lane lines on roads with 85th percentile As a guide, lane lines should be used in the
[g' D, speed (or speed limit) of 60 kph or less following cases:
continued across flre bridge
shall have a minimum width of 150 mm and
c) discontinued 30 m. from the bridge
3 m. long with _ gaps. l. Where the road is wide enough for
abutments two or more lanes of traffic in one
d) discontinued 25 rn. from the bridge
Im *c) 6m direction with a two way annual
It is used to separate opposite traffic abutments
a)
average daily traffic (AADT) of 8000 or
movements of an undivided roadway and is b) 8 m d) 10m
more (depending on whether parking
generally placed centrally on all roads and
is permitted)
bridges 6.0 m or more in width. Under
some circumstances this line may be
ll. At approaches to widened or
signalized intersection
placed off.center (e.9., where an extra lf the bridge is less than 5 m. between lll. On divided roads
uphill traffic lane is provided or parking on curbs, center line marks shall be _ .
Lane linee on roads with 8$h percentile lV. Across signalized intersections
one side of the road only)
a) discontinued across the bridge speed (or speed limit) in excess of 60 kph

a) Edge line
b) continued across the bridge shall be 150 mm wide, 3 m. long and *a) l, ll and lll only

b) Barrier line
* c) discontinued 30 n. kom the
gaps.
- b) I, lll and lV only
c) Continuity line bridge abutments
*a/
c) !1,lll and lV onty
lg 4 Centerline
d) discontinued 25 m. from the bridge 9m c) 6m d) All of the above
abutments b) 8m d) 10m
 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 45
44 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

1.247 Problem '1.25O Problem

1.242 Problem ,,245 Problem
Lines used to delineate the edge of the The recommended width of edge lines for
The following are the cases where barrier
Lane lines which indicates that overtaking
lines should be used: traveled way to distinguish it from the rural roads with outer lane width of 3'5 m.
from both directions of the road are shoulder area. lt should be a solid white
prohibited. However, cross movements are l. As center lines on approaches to line between 100 mm and 200 mm wide. * a) 100 mm c) 300 mm
permitted, Vehicles must always keep to signalized intersections b) 200 mm d) 50 mm
the right of the double yellow lines. ll. As center lines of multi-lane roads a) Transition lines

a) Double white line with a broken

where overtaking must be prohibited, r€ b) Edge lines
because of sign restrictions
yellow line lll. 'No-Passing' zones where there is a
c) Transverse lines 1.251 Problem
b) Single yellow line with a broken restricied sight distance due to d) Continuity lines
white line horizontal or vertical curves, or both fhe recommended width ol edge lines for
c) Double unbroken yellow line lV. As cenler lines on approaches to expressway with outer lans width of 4 m.
!g d) Single unbroken yellow line railway crossings 1-24;A Problorn
a) 100mm * c) 300mm
a)
b)
I, ll and lV only
l, llland lV only
The purpose of installing edge lines is b) 200 mm d) 50 mm
generally based on the following:
c) !1, lll and lV only
rs d) All of the above L to discourage travel on road
Barrier lines may consist of either: shoulders
1.252
l. Two unbroken yellow lines
ll. to make driving safer and more The road curb for No Parking Zones shall
assured, ParticularlY at night and
ll. Single unbroken yellow line
during inclement weather bY be painted
lll. Single yellow line with a broken white Markings to'No.Passing' Zones are applied
providing a continuous guide for the
line to:
driver
-
a) white * c) yellow
lV. Single white line with a broken yellow L b) blue d)
line
Vertical and horizontal curves on a lll. to act as a guide past obiects, which red
two-lane sealed road are close to the edge of pavement and
ll. Barrier lines shall not be marked which constitute a hazard
*a) l, ll and lll only unless the sight distance available at or
b) l, lll and lV only falls below the appropriate minimum
lV. to prevent Parking near Protlom
intersections
c) !1, lll and lV only sight distance for at least the length
d) All of the above allowed Lines used to indicate the portion of a
a) l, ll and lll only
lll. lf the length of road, with sight carriageway assigned to through ttaffic' lt
b) l, lll and lV only
distance below the minimum sight is intended to be crossed by traffic turning
c) !1, lll and lV only
distance, is less than the minimum a an intersection, or entering or leaving an
length of barrier line allowed.
n€ d) All ofthe above auxiliary lane at its start or finish.
lV. Where the distance between the end
Lane lines which indicates that overtaking of one barrier line and the beginning a) Transition line
from both directions of the road and all of the next barier line restricting b) Lane line
crossing movements are prohibited. 4
traveling in the same direction is less c) Transverse line
than that allowed for roads and D€ d) Continuity line
a) Single white line with a broken highways
The recommended width of edge lines for
yellow line urban road with outer lane width of 3.5 m'
b) Single yellow line with a broken a) l, ll and lll only
white line b) l, ll and lV only * a) 1A0mm c) 300 mm
*c/ Double unbroken yellow line c) !1, lll and lV only b) 200 mm d) 50 mm
d) Single unbroken yellow line rs d) Altoftheabove
 46 HIGHWAY TNGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 47
| -ry-'- "' _r'*-:::r:---_*'T **' "'-T--'._l
'1,257 Prohtem {.260 Froblem ,,] l I Problem

Lines used to guide traffic safely past Stop lines may be supplemented by word Crosswalks are defined by a pair of solid To ensure that the flow ol turning traffic is
obstructions on roadways such as islands, white lines across the road surface with a not impaired, parking near intersections
"Stop" marked on the carriageway, The
median strips, bridge piers or indicate distance between the word STOp and the distance between the line which is should be prohibited within the distance of
changes in the width of the traveled portion stop line should be between _ from the boundaries of lateral roads
of the roadway and an increase or a) not less than 3 m. but not more for parallel parking.
reduction in traffic lanes. than 6 m.
a) 12mto30m
b) 8mto15m rs b) not less than 4 m. but not more a) 3 m. on both approach and exit
,* a/ Transition lin* *c) than 8 m.
: ides

b) Lane lines
1Amb25m
u.l not less than 5 m. but not more b) 6 m. on both approach and exit
d) 12mto 25 m sides
c) Transverse lines than 8 m.
d) Stop lines d) not less than 4 m. but not more c) 4 m. on both approach and exit
sides
than 6 m.
og 4 5 m. on both approach and exit
sides

Types of Pedestrian Crossings

Transverse lines may be classified into the Lines used to guide vehicles through a
following types: turning movement at intersections. lt, if
l. Zebra used, should be designed as to indicate the
L Stop lines ll. Crosswalk proper course for turning vehicles without To ensure that the flow of turning traffic is
ll. Give Way lines lll. Giveaway being needlessly confusing to through not impaired, parking near intersections
lll. Pedestrian Crossing Ma*ings lV. Transition Crossings traffic or the traffic making other turns. should be prohibited within the distance of
M. Roundabout Holding lines _ from the boundaries of lateral roads
a) Holding lines for an angle parking.
a) l, ll and lll only
*a) I and ll only b) Roundabout holding lines
b) l, Ill and lV only b) l, ll and lll only c) Lane lines a) 8 m. on the approach side and 6 m.
c) ll, lll and tV only c) !1, lll and lV only
t€ d) Turn lines on the exit side
ng d/ b) 10 m on the approach side and 8
Ail of the above d) All of the above m. on the exit side
*c) 12 m on the approach side and
I
I 9m. on the exif side
d) 6 m. on the approach side and 4 m.
Types of parking bays on the exit side
lf 'a stop sign is used in conjunction with
the stop sign (P"1), it should generally be The markings of a zebra (non-signalized l. Parallel parking
placed in line with the Stop sign. The stop crossing) consists of a
series of
ll. Angle parking
sign should be placed at what dhtance longitudinal bars 300 mm or 600 mm wide lll. Double parking
lV. Curb parking
from the nearest pedestrian crossing line? and generally not less than _ long.
To ensure that the flow of turning traffic is
n_ I and ll only not impaired, no parking is allowed within a
a) m @ 4m
a)
[s b) m
a)
b) l, ll and lll only minimum distance of _ from the traffic
b) 5m signal post.
!1, lll and lV only
c) m c) 3m
d) All of the above
d) m d) 6m a) 15m c) 10m
rs' b) 2o m d) 8m
 48 HIgXWAY ENGINEERING
HIGHWAY EIVOINECRING 49
,fli266:,,,,1,,'Pi,oblsiii
,.279 Problom ,-278 Problom
Painted median islands are used on wide Markings which are placed on sealed
roads where light traffic volume cannot shoulders or other sealed po(ion of the Length of letters or numerals used on
Small devices which are fixed to the
justify the installation of solid curbed road where traffic is not desired. Such Messages painted on pavement in urban
concrete pavement surface to stimulate or
median island. markings are of the same bar width as areas.
supplement painted pavement markings.
The painted outline of the median shall be
at least 100 mm wide with a minimum
other diagonal markings. The spacing a) 2m *' c) 2.5m
between bars is generally 6 m.
median width of 2 . No painted median b) 3m d) 35m *a) Raised pavement markings
should be installed on roads less than
'b) Rumble strips
a) Pedestrian crossing markings
wide.
rs Dl Diagonal markings 1.214 Prohlem c)
d)
Zebra
Chevron markings
a) 12n c) 16m
c) Chevron markings Lengths of letters or numerals used on
b) 15 m {s- q rcm
d) Zebra messages painted
speed highways.
on pavement on high-
11,279 Problem
a) 3m c) 6m
1,267. Problorn b) 4m rs4 5m Hazard markers either as signs or painled
markings are to be used on objects so
ls a type of thermoplastic lane marking close to the edge of the roadway as to
The Bus and PUJ lane line is an unbroken
yellow line 150-300 mm wide used to
designed to aid and provide motorist with t.215 Problem constitute definite hazard. These include
visual, audio and motion warnings on the such encroachments as underpass piers,
separale other vehicles from buses and road. Lengths of pavement arrows used for lane
abutments, culverts headwalls, utility poles
PUJs. The BUS and PUJ lane line can be use control on high-speed roads.
and ornamental buildings,
supplemented by raised pavement markers
on concrete pavements. The line is tapered
*a/ Rumble strips a) 6m c) 6.5m Other adjacent objects which are not likely
Is" b) 7"5 m d) to be hit unless a vehicle runs off the road,
at the approach to the signalized b) Chevron markings 5.5 m
such as guardrails, trees and rocks must

i;;r;;--- -''---l
c) Painted median
intersection. The distance between the
be painted
taper and the stop line should
determined according to the capacity of the
be
d) Diagonal markings
r.tr;--
intersection and should generally be less Length of pavement arrow used for lane
a) reflectorizedsilver
b) reflectorizedyellow
_
than . use control on urban roads.
c) reflectorized red
* a/ 100 mm c) 200 mm a) 6m c) 7m trF d) reflectorized white
b) 120 mm d) 150 mm Messages when painted on pavement r-*'b) 5m d) 4m
should be limited to _ words or less.

a) 5m c) 6m 1,277" Problem I {.28O Problom '.:':i:r i:i, ri:::',

b) 4m r94 3m Obstructions in the roadway, il not

Type of raised pavement markers placed
Markings that are often used to guide illuminated shall be marked with
on undivided roadway.
traffic into the right turning lanes separated ref lectorized hazard markers.
by an island, such as a corner island at a For additional emphasis, it is advisable
6) Yellow raised
signalized intersection. also to mark obstruclions other than White raised
b)
islands with reflectorized white paint with
The color of Messages when painted on c) Single faced
a) Pedestrian crossing markings pavements.
no less than _alternating reflectorized
!s
b) Diagonal markings black and white stripes. d) Douhle faced
rg c) Chevron markings * a) white
a) 6m c) 3m
c) red
d) Zebra
b) black d) yellow
[:r 0 5n d) 4m
 50 HIOXWAV ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 51

I
Type of raised pavement markers placed Markers supplementing center or lane lines
on divided roadways. Standard road signs fall into different The figure shown is a type of freeway
may be placed in
the gaps mid.way categories: interchanges known as:
a) Yellow raised between the line segments at a sp'acing of
b) White raised where fog or heavy rain occurs in the
l. those for which a complete graphic
* c) Singtefaced
built-up areas.
- design is preset, or substantially
d) Double faced a) 12n c) 6m preset
Bb/ 9m d) 8m ll, those which are "made to measure"
lll, those which conform to the graphic
design
Because of the high cost of installation and lV. those which include regulatory and
maintenance, use of
raised pavement warning signs
markers may be considered on the Markers supplementing center or lane lines
following condition: may be placed in gaps midway between the
Iine segments at a spacing of _.if these
tt ,r5"
a) I and ll only a) t or trumpet
l. ln hilly areas where fog and rain are is less likelihood of fog and where there is b) l, ll and lll only b) partial clover leaf
frequently the causes of traffic no street lighting in the rural environment. c) !1, lll and lV only c) diamondinterchanges
accidents d) kumpet interchanges
ll. ln winding roads and accident.prone a) 10m * c/ 12m
d) All of the above

lll.
areas b) 9m d) 15m
ln ovefpass or underpass

*al I and ll only lr The figure shown is a type o[ free"

b) lll only
I and
The figure shown is a interchanges known as:
c) !l and lll only Signs has ils own numbering system such type of lreeway
d) All of the above interchanges known as:
as R2.7A(L). What does this sign denotes?

a) lt denotes a special traffic

inskuction sign in the Direction
Type - R2 and the seventh in the
Reflective markers placed at regular
series, the smallest available and is
intervals in gaps along a line may help to
define the line particularly at night or under left hand version.
foggy or wet conditions. b) lt denotes a warning sign in the
The lines usually treated in this manner Direction Type R2 and the
are: seventh in the series, the smallest
available and is left hand version.
l. Center lines c) lt denotes a guide sign in the
lt. Edge lines Direction Type - R2 and the , 'a' a) clover leaf
lll. Turn lines seventh in the series, the smallest
partial clover lea{
lV. Giveaway lines available and is left hand version.
b)

rg d/ tt denotes a regulatory sign in v)

d)
diamond interchanges
kumpet interchanges
a) clover leaf
a) I and ll only the Dircction Type - RZ and the b) parlial cloverleaf
b) l, ll and lll only seyentfi in the serieg the c) diamondinterchanges
c) ll, lll and lV only srnal/esf available and is left d) trumpetinterchanges
d) All of the above hand version.
 52 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 53
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

r{ ;281t. {.295., : '.Problorn { ;!g},,,:,:t ;:pfobl6m

The figure shown is a type of freeway

The figure shown is a type of grade The figure shown is a type of 4-leg
The figure shown is a type of intersection known as: intersection known as:
interchanges known as: interchanges known as:

t-
Irg'
a)
b)
c)

d,l
y-interchange
directional
trumpet interchanges
flyover with round-about
a) channelized
*'
---',L-
*_ a) diamond
b) flared a) Unchannelized

b) clover leaf ,'" c) multileg intersection

b) Flared
c) channelized
c) partial cloverleaf
d) rotary intersection d) I\4ultileg intersection
d) trumpet interchanges
,,29,4 Problem ,:x

The figure shown is a type of

1.292, Problem interchanges known as; I .ldXS, :.::,,::: g116bl$I1i
{,298 Problem
Ihe figure shown is a lype of grade The figure shown is a type of 4-leg
The figure shown is a type of lreeway intersection known as: intersection known as:
interchanges known as:

iiN-_
I I

l
a)
b)
channelized
flared
___-4
--\
I ,r c) rotary intersection (roundabout)

,* d) multilegintersection
I

a) directional
y-interchange a) Unchannelized
b)
a) directional b) Flared
flyover with round-about
rs, b) y-interchange *c/ channelized
d) humpet interchanges
c) flyover with round-about Itlultileg intersection
d)
d) humpet interchanges
 54 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 55

{;3O!l Fr,lrblem' 1,,8O4. Piclilem

The figure shown is a type of 4.leg The figure shown is a type of The figure shown is a tYPe of 3'leg No parking is a traffic sign classified under
inteisection known as: intersection known as: intersection known as:

il
a) Y with turning roadways
b) Flared T
No Porking
*c) Unchannelized T a) T with turning roadways

d) Unchannelized Y b) Unchannelized T *a) Regulatory or mandatory signs

c) Unchannelized Y b) informatory signs
a) Unchannelized rs d) Y with turning roadwaYs c) warning or cautionary signs
re b) Flared d) warning or mandatory signs

c) channelized
The figure shown is a type of
d) Multileg intersection intersection known as:

lt A highway intersection particularly

adopted to toll road connecting where the Speed limit is a traffic sign glassified under
'l.3OOr Problsm toll can be collected from both ingoing and
a) Y with turning roadways
outbound traffic at the stem of
the
The figure shown is a type of 3.leg rs bl Flared T interchange.
intersection known as: c) Unchannelized T
d) Unchannelized Y

{.3O3 Problem

The figure shown is a type of ,* a) Regulatory or mandatory signs

intersection known as:
b) lnformatory signs
a) Y with turning roadways c) Warning or cautionary signs
b) Flared T a) multilegintersection d) Warning or mandatory signs
c) Unchannelized T b) Trumpetintersection
us dJ Unchannelized Y c) rotary intersection
*a) T with turning roadways d) Orthotropic bridge
b) Unchannelized T
c) Unchannelized Y
d) Y with turning roadways
 I
56 Hlenwav ENGINEEF1ING HIGHWAY ENGINEERlNG 57

{.3O9 Prohlem {.31O Problem 1.312 Prohlem 1.314 Problem

A type of interchange which provides for Parking sign is a traffic sign classified traffic sign classified under An interchange with inner loops and outer
One way is a
transfer of traffic from one road to another under connections.
crossing it but with a reduced speed is
known as:

One Way
l'u'kitt,g
L'lowr lto.f'

*a/ lnformatory signs

tr$ 6) informalory and guiding signs
a) trumpet
b) Regulatory or mandatory signs b) regulatory and mandatory signs rg' b) clover leaf
c) warning or cautionary signs c) warning or cautionarY signs c) diamond interchange
a) trumpet interchange
d) warning or regulatory signs d) rotary interchange
b) rotary flyover d) warning or mandatory signs
[g c) Diamond interchange
d) directionalinterchange
'1.3,15 Problem
{,.3r, Problem f ,3{3 Problem
An interchange with a single one'way
End of freeway is a traffic sign classified An at-grade intersection in which there is ramp in each quadrant of a shaPe and
tr3og division or regulation of conflicting position to provide easy exit from and
under,
movements into definite paths of travel by entrance to the major highway and to
A type of interchange which is sometimes the use of pavement markings, raised confine nece$sary left turns at grade to the
called a high speed interchange is known islands, or other suitable means
to minor highway or crossroad.
as facilitate the safe and orderly move ent of
vehicles and pedestrian.

Encl d Wu,
I
*a) informatory and guiding signs L our ltg < hunntli:ttl
t\'lt.,i\l(seditrt\
b) regulatory or mandatory signs
c) warning or cautionary signs l)iunontl I nurc ltturge
a) interchange
a) diamond interchange d) warning and regulatory signs
b) trumpet ur" D) Ch an n elized intersection a) trumpet
y-type interchange
v) intersection roadwaY b) clover leaf
os d) clover leaf d) highway or grade seParation [9 c) diamond interchange
d) rotary interchange
 58 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING EO
I

HI(iHWAY ENGINEERING

:!,;3tO
A system of inter connecting roadways in
An interchange with one or more An area within a roadway or between An at-grade intersection operating with
conjunction with one or more highw4y separations and direct connections for
separations providing for the inter change roadways from which vehicular traffic is one.way traffic counterclockwise around a
major turning movements intended to be excluded. central area, circular or elliptical in shape,
of traffic between two or more intersecting
highways, usually without at
grade
to
or sufficient size produce weaving
crossing of through and major turning
maneuvers in lieu of direct crossing
movements. between the various movements.

a) median

rs, b) island
*a) rotary intersection
ul ouler separation
Diru.1iond Iuttn lungt b) multileg intersection
d) undercrossing c) channelized intersection
d) unchannelized intersection
Y:lt1tc IuItrr'/turgt

a) trumpet

*a/ b) clover-leaf
interchange ng' c) {.323
multileg inlersection
directionalinterchange {r331r Probl*m
b)
n\ d) diamond interchange
is a type of fully
channelized intersection The figure $hown
d) rotary intersection An intersection with five or more approach directional interchange which is commonly
roadways. known as:

An expressway with full control of access.

An at-grade intersection in which the
number of traffic lanes or the pavement
width exceeds the normal number of lanes
or the normal width of the approach
roadways.

a) clover leaf
b) partial clover leaf {

a) *c) multiple inferseclion *a) three level directional

a) unchannelized intersection skyway
Bs, b/ Flared intersection b) overpass d) diamond interchange interchange
c) channelized intersection
c) interchange b) four level directional interchange

d) multileg intersection
[€ d) freeway c) two level directional interchange
d) level directional interchange
 60 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 61
HIGHWI\Y ENGINEERING
1|324 Problem ,.327' Problem
t.33O Problem {,333 Froblem
The figure shown is a gpe of highway The figure shown is a type of a highway
interchange at grade which is commonly The figure shown is a type of a freeway exit The traffic s shown indicates;
interchange at grade which is commonly
known as: known as: which is commonlY known as:

(;1trc

75.(X)rn. -- 7,

*aJ Unchannelized.T
a) taper tyPe freewaY exit
a) right turn onlY
b) Flared-T
b) channelized freewaY exit
llg b) no rightturn
c) unchannelized freewaY exit
c) T-with turning roadway
rili' d) parallel tyPe freewaY exit
c) no u turn
d) Channelized-T a) Unchannelized-T d) no entry for all vehicles
b) Flared-T
*' c) T-with turning roadway
1,325 Problem d) Channelized-T {.331 Problem {.334
The figure shown is a type of a highway The traffic signs shown indicates the
interchange at grade which is commonly {,!328, Prohlom lollowing prohibitions
The traffic shown indicatesl

known as:
The figure shown is a type of a freeway
entrance which is commonly known as:

.L .l0nr *u, no overtaking for vehicles whose

a) Unchannelized-T a) no stopPing a)
3.5f
b) Flared-T a) taper type entrance b) no overtaking for trucks weighf exceeds

*c/ T-with turning roadway b) channelizedentrance c) no entry to all vehicles b) no entry for cars and buses
no parking for cars and trucks
c)
d) Channelized-T c) unchannelizedenkance II$- d) prohibitedtofortrucks
d) prohibited to cars and trucks
rg d) parallel type entrance

1,3.26 Problem 1.329 Fiobtea t,332 Problem {,335 Froblem

The figure shown is a type of a highway The figure shown is a type of a freeway The' traffic sign shown indicates the
The traffic shown indicates:
interchange at grade which is commonly entrance which is commonly known as: following:
known as:

'---- - lfi)

a) Unchannelized-T *a) taper type entrance

rs_ b) channelized entrance
a) pedeskians onlY trrY a) prohibited to all motor vehicles
b/ Flared-T
c) unchannelized entrance
b) pedestrian crossing b) no parking to all motor vehicles
c) T-with turning roadway
d) parallel type entrance
c) walk signal c) no stopping to all motor vehicles
d) Channelized-T
[g d) d) no overtaking to all motor vehicles
prohibitedtoPedestrians
 62 Hlguwav ENGINEERING HIGH AY ENGINETRING 63
11336. Problem
1.3U Problefi
The traffic shown indicates:
The traffic shown indicates The traffic sign shown indicat$: The traffic sign shown indicates:

*a/ prohibited to animal *a/

vehicle
drawn End of prohibition timiting
weight greater than 3.i Tons
b) animal drawn vehicles ahead
b) no entry to all cars and trucks
c) slow down, animal drawn vehicles
c) no stopping to all cars and trucks

d)
ahead
animal drawn vehicles crossing thru
d) no overtaking for all cars and trucks a) use right lane only *a) obligation to continue straight
street x'r b) obligation to follow the right ahead
direction b) continue straight at your own rist

ti83?: c) obligation to turn right c) no traffic straight ahead

The traffic shown indicates: d) obligation to turn the obstacle by its d) dead and straight ahead
The traffic shown indicates: right side

a) parking area for buses only The traffic sign shown indicates The traffic sign shown indicates:
a) no entry b) no enlry for buses
b) no stopping c) Bus stop
r€ c) end of all indicates prohibition
[9 d) end of reserved lane for buses
d) end of speed limit

The traffic shown indicates:

The traffic n shown indicates:

a) use left lane only a) obligation to follow the right

a r$' b, ohligation to follow the left

direction

direction r€ b) obligation to turn right

c) fast moving vehicles use left lane c) no right turn on stop signal
a)
a) drive slow
d) obligation to turn the obstacle by its right turn at your own rist
min. speed limit
max. speed limit
b) no blowing of horns
left side.
d)

*c/
b)
c) noise prohibition
end of speed linit @ d) end of prohibition using audible
d) distance to the next municipality
waming signal
 ,l

64 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 65
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

1 {.349 Problem
1.3,32 Problem {.355 Problem
The traffic n shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indicatest
The traffic n shown indicates: The traffic shown indicates

a) u turn to the right a) right turn then go skaight ahead a) u turn ahead
a) right curve ahead
b) obligation to turn around b) no right turn straight ahead tr'S' b, obligation fo use {he roundabout b) curve to right
lg- c) obligation to turn the obstacle by c) obligation to go straight c) counter clockwise traffic ahead c) dangerous double curve at right
ifs nghf side or to turn right d) no left or right turn allowed [S d) dangerous right curve
d) obligation to follow the right d) go straight ahead then turn right ar{
direction the nexl corner
1.353; Problem {.356 Problem
1.347 Problem 1.35O Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sig n shown indicates

The traffic n shown indicates: The traffic shown indicates:

o-u" ai obligation to go straight ot

a) zigzag curve
dangerous left curve
*a) dangerous double curve at left
a) u{urn to the left b)
b) zigzag road ahead
b) obligation to turn around turn left c) dangerous double curve at left
c) curve to left
*c/ obligation to turn the obstacle by b) go straight ahead then turn left u,tr d) dangerous curve d) turn left then skaight ahead
the next corner
ifs Ieff side
Ieft turn then go straight ahead
d) obligation to follow the left direction
d) no left turn straight ahead
I
{,357
'1,348 Problem '1,35{ Prohlern The traffic sig n shown indicates
The traffic sign shown indicates
The traffic s shown indicates: The traffic n shown indicates

*a) a) left curve ahead *a) dangerous double curue at right

a) no left turn obligation to turn left or right b) turn left b) turn right then straight ahead
b) left turn for fast moving vehicles b) turn left then turn right c) curve to lefl c) curve to the right
c) obligation to follow left direction no left or right turn u+r
rs d) obligation to turn left d) turn left or right on the next corner
d) dangerous left curve d) zigzag curve ahead
66 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING H HWAY ENGINEERING 67

1.358 Problenr ,.36{ Prob}em

I

The traffic sign shown indicatesl The traffic sign shown indicates: 1"he traffic sign show indicates: The traffic sign shown indicatesl

*a) warning cross road *a) curve to the right

a) parallel road a) headlights required
b) merging traffic lane b) roads under repair
b) entering cross road b) dangerous right curve
sigzag curve to the right
c) merging traffic c) construction holes ahead
c) entering major cross road c)
! ii d) narrowed road !g d) approachingtrafficlight
d) accident prone area d) dangerous double curve at right

{.36'*
The traffic sign shown indicates $rarning
The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indicatesl The traffic sign shown indicates:
signs lor:

a) warning cross road ,* a) curve to left

a) entering maior cross+oad a) men working ahead
!s D/ entering cross road
b) road intersection ahead b) slow men working ahead

c) entering major cross road

b)
c)
dangerous left curve
sigzag curve to the left
c) road under repair c) excavation ahead

d) accident prone area d) dangerous double lefi curve

lli\' d) mergingtralfic lg d) roads under reqait

{.3,66
The traffic sign shown indicatesl The traffic sign shown indicates warning
The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indicates:
signs for:

a) school zone
a) entering cross road a) airport ahead toilbridge
!€
a)
[9 b) pedestrian crossing
b) warning cross road D/ airport vicinity b) river ahead
c) disabled crossing
c) road intersection at grade c) warning airplanes ahead It'c) Hanging bridge d) parents and students area
i€ d) entuing major cross road d) airplane parking area d) approaching river
6A HIGHWAYENGINEERING HIG,HWAYENGINEERIN(i 69

,.37O Problem 1.373 Problem {.376 Problenr {.3?9 . Problem

The traffic sign shown indicates warning The traffic sign shown indicates warni The traffic sign shown indicates waming
The traflic sign shown indicates warning
signs for: signs for: signs for:
signs for:

d) animals plowing *a/ steep downward road ll rI' a) river ahead a) land fill area
r€ b/ Animal crossing b) steep upward road b) cliff ahead
b) excavation ahead
c) excavation ahead c) caution for landslide
c) disabled crossing c) watch for falling objects
d) pedestrian crossing d) watch for falling objects d) slippery road [g d) caution lalling stone

{.3711, ,,,Froblem, ,1.374 .Problem 1.?7V ::,Froblem', t,380 "Prolilem,,

The . traflic sign shown indicates The traffic sign shown indicates warning
The traffic sign shown indicates warning
signs for:
-r] The traffic sign shown indicates warning
signs for:
signs for: signs for:

* a) narrowingroad d) steep downward road a) rotary interchange ahead

a) entering cross road
b) parallel roads rg' b) steep upward road
b) eircumferencialroad
b) no enhy for Pedestrians
c) cars movement towards center c) excavation ahead
c) no parking
c) disaster area
d) lwo way road d) watch for falling objects
ll,,\ d) approaching (a d) railroad crossing

,fi3!91, ,:$15$ft6 t.375, 1.378 ,Problem

The traffic sign shown indicates warning The traffic sign shown indicates warni The traffic sign shown indicates warning The traffic sign ehown indicates the
signs for: signs for: signs for: following:

*a) a) check brakes a) reversed direction *a) zigzag right

rough road
b) cut and fill ahead
b) inclined road b) merging traffic b) dangerous curve

c) excavation ahead
c) exhaust free zone lL,,r c) two way road c) curve at right

d) smooth road
rs d) slippery road d) no overtaking on both sides d) accident prone area
 70 HIGNWAV ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 71

t;385 ,{.0P"1,,, Ftoblp,rn,

{;38&,:l rFiobleni
Ihe traffic sign shown indicates tha The traffic sign shown indicates The traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign shown indicates the
following: lollowing: following:
following:

{1f,} LEe'
*aJ zigzag left a) pedestrian crossing *a) of overtaking Prohibition
a) boat

b) dangerous curve b) athletic stadium

b)
end
no entry of all cars
rs b) terry
c) curve at left c) running kack and field
c) no parking for all cars c) ferrY station
d) accident prone area us d/ school d) car park d) sPeed boat

{.383 Problern 1.386 Problem {.389r Problem 7

The traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign shown indicates The traffic sign shown indicates the The tratfic sign shown indicates the
following: following: following: lollowing:

ilil1ffi )t
a) railroad crossing a) cul desac entering major road
a) parallel road
b) pedestrian lane
b) side road
a)
0€ b) narrowbridge
n€ c) ns" b) side road (left)
level crossing (guarded) c) T-intersection
intersecting grade
c) nanowing road
d) level crossing (unguarded) ra d) dead end uoss road
c)
d) turn left
d) embankment

"{;38* ',3AT Problem {;390 Problem {.s93

The traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign shown The traffic sign shown indicates the
following:
indicates The traffic sign shovrn indicates the
following: following:
following:

a) railroad station a) entering major road a) follow direction of anow

b) raikoad crossing u€ [S a) steep hill b) entering cross roads
ol side road (right)
c) level crossing (guarded) b) steep downward road c) no left turn
intersection grade
!s d) level crossing (unguarded) d) turn right
c) steel upward road
cauthn for land slide
[a d) no turn
d)
 73
72 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING I HIOTTWEY ENGINEERING

t.394" "Problem {,397 Prohlem t.4OOr:'. Problem

f .4O3, Problem
The speed limit sign shown indicates what
The traffic sign shown indicates the The .traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign shown indicates the
type of traffic signs.
following: following: following: .I',"

a)
I
go straight ahead or turn at your *a)
+
comfort room
f a)
It
lefl lane move slow
a) guide signs
3
o
Z *

own risk b) two waY traffic

og' b, no overtaking
b) no entry for both men and women
c) right lane move fast b) warning signs
c) only men and women allowed
rffi Priori$ to this dkection na c) regulatory signs
c) overtaking allowed d) gays not allowed
d)
d) prohibitive signs
d) no u{urn

{.3gg Problem { Problem

{.395 Piobtem
I.AOA Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates The haffic sign shown indicates the
the The traffic sign shows indicates what type
The traffic sign shovrn indicates the following: following:
of traffic signs,

J
following:

& a) road closed *a)

1z',

guide signs
t'"

a) bicycle lane *a/ picnic area b) dead end b) warning signs

b) no entry to bicycle forest zone c) cul de sac
b) c) regulatory signs
*c) for disabled person c) agricultural zone Itg' d, no through road d) prohibitive signs
d) bicycle crossing d) pine tress ahead

1.4;A2., Profilem t.4OS Problem

{.39S Problern {.399 Problern
The stop sign shown indicates what type The traffic signs shown indicates what tYPe
The traffic sign shown indicates the The traffic sign shown indicates the of traffic signs, of traffic signs.
following: following: t2'* --- Not

@
J I
7, t2'- Z.

s.0.s.

. a) guide sign
a) EMT a) road crossing a) guide signs
[g warning sign
b) telephone office b) Red cross b) waming signs b)
*c) emergency telephone c) Green cross no' c) regulatory signs c) regulatorY sign
prohibitive sign
d)
d) telegraphic transfer [A d) hospital with emergency use d) prohibitive signs
74 HIGHWAY ENGINEEFIING 75
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

1"406 Problem,
The traffic sign shown indicates what type The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indicates:
of traffic signs.

-12' -"-- a c) 4
a)
@' b) 3 d) 5
a) guide sign
rg' Jg a) parking [€ Problem
b/ warning sign
regulatory sign b) no parking
a) no blowing of horns
cross road ahead
't.4'15
b)
d) prohibitive sign c) police station
c) dead end ahead Reflectorized thermoplastic rumble strips
d) thru stop d) quiet zone shall be bonded to typical asphalt or
concrete surfaces to provide the following
1,4trt Problem traffic controls,
The traffic sign shown indicates what type
{;410 , Probleltr 1.4',3 Froblenr l. Warnlalert drivers of uPcoming
of traffic signs. The traffic sign shown indieates: roadwaY condition such aE
The traffic sign shown indicates: intersections, sharP horizontal
curves, narrow bridge aPProaches,
toll plazas, ages and tunnels
tl. Use as complimentary/enhancement
to advance warning signs such as the
7' StoP Ahead or the various Curve

4' signs.
lll. UJe to prevenUlessen the effect of
a) go straight ahead drowsiness during long drive, in
b) cross road ahead attention and highwaY sYnoPsis'
a) guide sign
os c) turn left or right (irunrl ltYLl
a) I and ll onlY
b) warning sign r€ d) road junction approach la a) route marker sign b) I and lll onlY
c) regulatory sign
d) prohibitive sign b) road junction aPProach c) ll and lll onlY
c) warning sign [€ d, Alloftheabove
d) regulatory sign
tr,l08 Problem
The traffic sign shown indicates: {"4{6 . iPrsblo,m
The traffic shown indicateg:
1.414, Types of Chevron signs:

Chevron signs shall be used to guide

l. HM-IA < 60 kPh
drivers through a change in horizontal
ll, HM-18 > 60 kPh
alignment ol the road such as curves and
lll. HM-IC < 70 kPh
bsl than sharp turns, lt is recommended lV. HM.1D > 70 kPh

,* that the spacing ol the chevron signs * a) ! andllonlY

*a) a) no parking should altow the driver to see at least
end of speed linit
b) park at your own dsk
signs in view while negotiating the curve
b) ll and lll onlY
b) do not enter
parking from 8:00 - 1 1:00 A.M. only
- c) l, lll and lV onlY
c) resume speed
c) untit ttre change in alignment eliminates d) All ofthe above
d) parking from 2:00 - 4:00 P.M, only the need for the signs.
d) dead end
 76 H IG HWA E N (, N EERI N G HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 77

At the edgeof Thickness of Pavement

pavement: Mcleods Method
D
A.\I)IktI! a t)ttt R,It, l\u.attk,ttI
2(X) ntot
-l0O onn
t) u.W T=Kloo '-
"r, s
2

,=*I
loo nrnr rol P =wheel load
2{)0 nrnr

,, \rtltqru,L S = subgrade pressure

t)tllt
.\kllt \t\t
2xt)
K = constant value from table
\hatrllc'lii^r,lwt_t. .\ltottltlLt
Pavement Thickness Using f = I-
'r \Zf
m
Asphqlt coilcrete paveileill Californ ia Bearing Ratio
nsion Press ure Method Atthecenter of c
Portlarul ceuotl
exwnsion pressure the pavement : P/A
('onctue payernent
Asphoh t- CBR=
CBRfor 5 mn penetration
(Yncfele ave rage pave ment de w
nsity u=YI 1 A= area of piston plunger
4

Rigid Pavement: (Olders {r)

2xti
P=load applied

ANXregate

tr- \l@
Shoultltr Travel tu.y E
Portlond cement concrele pqyerr,ent
shoullcr A Without dowels ortie bars:
4r
K='
- Mnltilane 0.125
The critical secllon rs at the edge of lt
contraction joint it wilt a
crack
(thickness at the centel .P
r--
approximately 45" with the edges. A
Two Ge neral Types of D-
Flexibl Pa vements: load cauing a setflanent of 0.125 cm in kg
M=Wx rt= area of standard plate (75 cm diam)
,X
a^=Y l(= mdulus of / cm3
f=
6M ,f A,=nr' subgrade in kg
A. Flexible pavements bd'z
By ratio and proportion : t4 Shrin Factor
A flexible pavement is constructed
M =Wx
with asphaltic cement and aggregaiei A, A, t'u,enat
and usually cons,sfs of seveial tiyers. b= 2x r' = (t+l'
The lower layer is cailed the
subgratii. d=t W
lt
lz
'=[ffiJ,,
,
. 6Wx
rr' = f S shrinkage factor
e,=insituvoid ratio
,50 nrn [) I (I) n0 I
2x t'z
12 (t* 0'
w ez.void ratio after compacting

Fff
| fi] mn k) 2-i0 mar W
rt+r'zl=1
lln mnr ()
,t
25() nlm i
(thicknexof pavement nf r
Joints in Cement Concrete
at edge aN at ce,tler)

f , allowable fens/e sfress t+r=s56aff Pavements

of concrete in
, psiorkg/cnz Az Location of joint
B. Rigid pavements W = wheel load in lb. or kg t=o.saff-r ,,/
-
SLAB LEN(IIl
. A rigid pavement is
with poiland cement concrete
constructed I
I
:t
F
and @ With dowels ortie bars: e
aggregates as shown with flexibte Purpose af dowet is to
t,=o.suff.r 4
pavements, the subgrade (ttte
lower slresses due to the load from the
adjacent
transmit the
I
pavements), the base layer
is optional. pavement.
7A HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 79
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

nsion Joint itudinalJoint

Scaling
t.4llg gE Board 2Ai75 A=n 12
r45

,",' L
(A) Plain Butt Joinl What is the stiffness factor of a pavement if 85806 -n r?
Suier its modulus of elasticity is 180 MPa and r=165mm
whose subgrade modulus of 40 MPa?
E-r
I= tJonttrt Do\ Ll lr \R
Solufion;
E- E
,=
modulus of elasticity
t. =o.s6a
f,
1l

trrttr S.F 3,j r =0.564.@-',uu

"i,'i,,:::ill:;:;.r,'
(lt) Buu Joint With 'I-ie
lilE, E
"=
subgrade modulus ' 0.41 Y

Tra nsverse Contraction

Ror

s.r 3l
6 0.605
l, = 39

t, =t-t,
mm fthrcknessof pavomerl)

\l -tao
Joint With Dowel Bar t, =184-39
Seoling l, = 1il5 mm (fiic*ressof base)
I d/-\ b dt[ I
'1
i? l).il-
1r'l
'r;::;:::a_&@g&ewe''
(C) Tongue atd Groove Warping A flexible pavement carries a static wheel 1"421 Problem
d load of 53.5 kN. The circular contact area
Determine the thickness of a rigid
.,

I of the tire is 85806 mm2 and the transmitted

load is distributed across a wide area of pavement of the proposed Nagtahan road
' I;illt *- l'uintcri the subgrade at an angle of 45". The to carry a max, wheel load of 60 kN,
subgrade bearing value is 0.14 ltlPa, while Neglect effect of dowels. fc' . 20 MPa.
DOWEL BAR
that of the base is 0.41 MPa. Design the Allowable tensile stress of concrete
ht8 thickness of pavement and that of the pavement is 0,06 fc'.
Tra nsverse Construction Ih tnn,nttt,h'0),1 base.
Solutlbn;
Joint
(A) $uil.loiilt With Dowel Bar
So/ufiron;
Flexible Pavement
r=.8=
\\I t
@
1l 0.60(20)
=3,,3nm
CE Eoard 20{,s
I 2 ^ _w
,I ,l
di2
! Compute the thickness of a flexible Joints In Concrete
pavement for a wheel load of 50 kN,
if the A=fi12 Pavements
allowable bearing pressure on the base of
the pavement is
0.15 Mpa and the
equivalentradius of the contact area of the
A A1
,.422
DOWEL I]AR r; (t + r'?)
! t=(J't+
tires is equal to 165 mm. Joints placed in concrete pavements,
fi12 Wf1
(B) Ratt Joint llith Tie Bar Solution: which are usually. placed transversely, at
Suling ffi.
r' 1t+42 regular intervals, to provide adequate
Conpound t t- expansion space for the slab to expand
= 0.564
mm
Yr rt+r)'=0.s6+ E- r when the pavement is subjected to an
increase in lemperature.
11
d t =0.564.@-,uu
Y
a) Hinge joint
0.15
t=0.s64.@ -',uu b) Contraction joint
t= 173.4 mm
Y 0.14 c) Construction joint
Fulb Bonded IIE TIAR
Ful\, Boded t=184mm r€ d Expansionjoint
I

ao HIGHW,AY ENGINEERING
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING AI

1.423 Problem Solution:

Solution; W = 0.60(0.1 5X4.5X2400)9.81
R W = 0.1 5(4XSX2400Xe.81 )
Joints placed in concrete pavements, W = 9 535.32
which are usually placed transversely W = 14126.45
W=N=9535.32
regular intervals across the width of the T=fsAs
pavement to reledse some of the tensile
}} F=!N
t_/t T= 138(tX12)'
stresses that are induced due to a F=2(9535.32)
decrease in temperature. T - 15600N
't I, tv T=F
a) Hinge joint N=W=14126.45 -1 nt
T = 19 070.64
[g' 0/ Contraction joint F=UN
T=ndLU
c) Construction joint F - 2(14126.4)5 T
d) Expansion joint Consider only half of the section
F= 28252.85 o.r 19 070.64 = n(12) L (0.83)
(Using Principles of ttechanics) L = 609.5 mm
T=F

7.424'r' Problern .' [;J(#)(3rr24oo)

= 720 L ks
15600 = 28252.8S 2L = 1219 mm (length of bars)

S = 0.552 m
Joints placed in concrele pavembnts, N = 7291 kg.
S= 552mm
which are placed transversely across the F_tJN
pavement width to provide suitable F = 1.5(7201)
nsion Joint
transition between concrete placed at length of Longitudinai Bars
F = 10801 kg
different times or on different days.
T = 300(20X0.8)
in Pavements 1.424 Problem
a) Hinge joint T = 4800 kg 1
The width of expansion joint gap is 24 mm
b) Conkaction joint T=F. in a cement concrete pavement. the lf
* c) Construction joint 4800 = 10801
A 12 mm o bars is used as the longitudinal
laying temperature is
12'C and the
bars of a concrete pavement. lt is spaced
d) Expansion joint
L= 4.44 m. at 600 mm on centers. The width of
maximum slab temperature is 50'C,

roadway is meters and the coefficient of

calculate the spacing between the
y=2lx1oa _ 2(o.8)(1o)4 expansion joints. Assume coefficient of
= 4.tl1m. friction of the slab on the subgrade is 2.0.
Contraction Joints uD 1.5(24N)
Thickness of slab is 150 mm. lf the
thermal expansion of concrete to be 9.5 x
1g+ per C'. The expansion joint gap should
allowable bond stress is 0.83 MPa,
be twice the allowable expansion in
1;42$ of the longitudinal
determine the length
Spacing of Longitudinal bars.
concrete.

Determine the spacing between contraction Bars in Pavements Solufion.' .s=oixr Solution:
joints for a 3.0 m. slab having a thickness
of 20 cm. Coefficient of friction between
concrete and subgrade is 1.5 and unit wt.
of concrete 2400 kg/cu.m. Allowable
1.428 Pro$*rn
A concrete pavement 8m wide and 1S0
I ll! ,2
Expansion in concrete

Expansion in concrete = 0.012

= --
24
= 12 mm

tensile stress of concrete is 0.8 kg/cm2 and rv

that of steel is 800 kg/cm2. Unit weight of
thick is to be provided with a
longitudinal joint using 12 mm s bars. The
,1.5 nr
A = 0.012 m.
steel is 7500 kg/cu.m steel bars having a
diameter of 1.6 cm. Total reinforcement is
unit weight of concrete is 2,400 kg/mr. a =Kt(T, -T,)
T
Coefficient of friction of the slab on the
4 kg/m2 and is equally distributed in both
subgrade is 2.0. Assuming an allowable 0.012 = 9.5 x 10"6 (50 - 12)L
directions. For plain cement concrete
working stress in tension for steel bars at
(without dowels).
b=3m 138 MPa, determine the spacing of the L = 33,24 m. {spacing between expanston prnts)
b=300cm. T
longitudinal bars in mm,
t. -
 82 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING H IGHWI\Y ENGINEERING a3

Construction Joints Solution:

Solution: Solulion;

4@W stress= I t=Jw I

r.ts 1 l"'
Contact area = = 333.33 in' A
120 LcBR r^l
Determine the spacing between S=a1 (333.33X2.1) stress = --]01 =3.71 kq/cmz
t.ts-*l
1 l'o
construction joints for 3.5 m. slab width i (6)'.
t= J+ooo
I
having a thickness of 200 mm, coefficient S = 28699.71 lb.
cBR=
3'71(1oo) Lu
of friction is 1.5. Allowable tensile stress P =4.8x/o
in concrete and steel are 0.8 kg/cm2 and -r, s 76 l= 31.74cm.

1400 kg/cm2 respectively. Use plain cement

4oooo
concrete. T = 5o loo
"'u r.433
28699.71
Solution:
T = 7.21 inches (hickness of qanutar baff)
1.5 ilr
The thickness of a pavement is 31.74 cm. The soil sample was obtained from the
A wheel load of 4000 kg with a tire project site and the CBR test was
pressure of I
kg/cm2 is acting on the conducted at field density. The sample
Thickness Of Pavement surface of the pavement. VUhat is the with the same surcharge imposed upon it
Using Expansion Pressure rnaximum CBR value of . subgrade soil is then subjected to a penetration by a
w= cupporting this load? Use the formula
! {oz){ss)tz+oo) developed by U.S. Corps of Engineers,
piston plunger 5 cm. diameter moving at a
speed of 0.127 cm/min. The CBR value of
W = 8401 kg the standard crushed rock for 0.1 inch (2.5
Solution: mm) penetration is 70.45 tg/cm2 1tOO0
N=840Lkg Gompute the pavement thickness by
lb/in2) and for 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration
T = 350(20X0.8)
L
expansion pressure method, the if 1.75
J; CBR 1
is 1500 lblin2 (105.68 kg/cm2). Compute
expansion pressure is 0.150 kg/cme and the plt
T = 5600 kg average pavement density is 0.0025
J' the CBR ol the soil sample whose results
were as follows:
kg/c62.
5600 = trN
:11 74 = "u8000
1.75
. 1

5600 = 1.5 (840)L

Solution:
CBR 8, I Penetration Load Penetration Lc..t
(mm) (ks) (mm) (ks)
L= 4.tl4m.
l=
expansion pressure
0502=
1.75 1 0,0 0 3.0 59.6
4.0 68.5
Thickness Of Base Using
average pavement density CBR 8n 0.5 6.2
15.4 5,0 75.2
1.0
o'150 1atr '
Mcleod's Formula 1= =oocm u 1.5 30.2 7.5 90.3
0.0025 l)252= ''' 86.4
CBR 8r 2.0 40.5 10.0
2.5 55.33 12.5 101.4
1'75
tl.zgz=
ln a plate bearing test, a pressure of 41 psi California Beari Ratio CBR
Solution;
was required to detlec{ a 30 inches ()BR = 6%
diameter plate by 0,2 in. A flexible runway
pavement is to be designed for a dellection
Unit load at 0.10 inchpenetration
of 0.5 in under a single wtreel load of ,O000 *
lb. with a lire pressure of 120 psi. Compute
The CBR value of a standard crushed rock t CBR(%) =
1000 lb/in'
,OO

the thickness of a granular base using for a 5 mm penetration is 76 kg/cm2 when Unit load at 0.2 inch Penetration ,,OO
it was subjected to a penetration test by a Compute the thickness ol a pavement if the CBR% = *
McLeods method. Use the value of ft =
piston plunger 6 cm. dia. moving at CBR value of subgrade soil is 6Yo. Wheel Note: The CBR valdi$lddritandard crushed
50 for the actual contact area and a a
load is 4000 kg with tire pressure of I rock for.0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration is 1500
certain speed. What is the CBR ol soil
conversion factor of'2.1 lor a subgrade
sample when subjected to a load of 105 kg kglcm2. Use the formula developed by the b/in2 fi05.68 kg/cm2) and for 0.10 inch (2.5
prossure conesponding to the actual
it produces a penetration of 5 mm? lJ.S. Corps of Engineers. mm) penetration is 1000lbfinz (70.45 kg/cm2)
contact area and deflection of 0.5 in.
-

84 HIGHWAvENc;INETRtNG HtonwavtNGtNEERrNG a5
For the a.1 inch (2.5 mm) penetration : Solution; l)llsI(;N (lt.lRVlrls l()R l'1,!lXIDLrl ROAI)S
(.41,II.'oRNIA BI]ARI\(; RA'I'Io.PER CI'NT
(Using a 5 cm diam plunger) For the0.10 inch penetation,using a plunger
Modulus Of Subgrade
diam.of 1.95 inches.
Reaction
Pressure = i I

A
Pressure = ! s lxxt {.439 Problem
^
Hressure =_
55.33 A ill
The loadings and the corresponding
i$f ^Hressure = *-.-.-.
1631 ti
il settlement readings are recorded to
Pressure. 2.818kglcm'? (1'es)'?
I ll'
t\ /z [, l)
obtained the modulus of subgrade reaclion
2'818 Pressure = 546.13 lb/in'? of soil sample. The standard diameter of
CBR- x 1oo
'0
plates used is 75 cm in diameter. Compute
70.45 ,l l)
CBR = 4%
CBR " ffi x 100 = 54.6% say 55yo
IIII
the modulus of subgrade reaction of the
soil sample.
For the 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration : For the 0.20 inch penetration, using a plunger 's

(using a 5cm.diam. ptunger) diam.of 1.95inches. Loads (kg) Settlement (cm)

I

00
Pressur" -| Pressrre = | I
500 kg 0.025
1000 kg
1

A A x' 3' 0.050

aEn t 1200 kg 0.075
^
Hressure = _ IJ.L
Pressure=
=?to' ^ =703.84|b/in, l\rt lt grultl 5tb ltr.:c I
2' 1400 kg 0.100
i$F i( ssy ( /J/? 'ljr
l 1900 kg 0.125
Pressure = 3.83 kg/cm'? 703'9 l\unl) Suh ?rtuh 2000 kg 0.150
63P = x 100 = 46.90/o say 47% ( ll R )Ot,i
'.
2250k9
6gp= 3{**166
1500 0.125

105.68 Use CBR = 55% (use bigger value between I rom the figure, the thickness of the sub-base
Solufion:
CBR.3.62% 0.1 inchand0.2inch penetration) r; B - 6 = 2 rn. and the thickness ofthe base is
,
For a settlement of 0.125 cm
(i 3=3in.
Use CBR = 4% (use the bigger value of either
P 19oo
2.5 mm or S mm penetration) ,r= - -o.43ko/cm'z
l.4gT Problem ^ +wr
1.436 Frobtem Using the design curves for
(= F
'

pavements with a given California Boa

r.438 Froblem' 0.125
0.43
Compute the CBR of the soil sample shown Ratio, compute the thickness of the
An undisturbed sample of material taken (=
if the sample with the same surcharge and sub-base of a flexible pavement with 0.125
imposed upon it is subjected to a inches surfacing on top of the base for
lrom a borrow pit has a void ratio of 0.70.
Results of the Proctor compaction test K . -
3.44 kg / cm3 aodulus of subgrade reaction)
penetration by a piston plunger 1.95 inches 12000 lb wheel load. CBR for lndicate that the material as compacted on
in diam. The CBR value of the standard graded sub.base is 35% and CBR the roadway will have a void ratio of 0.48.
crushed rock for 0.10 inch penetration is (sand)subgrade is 20%.
What shrinkage factor should be used in
1000 lb/in2 and for the 0.20 inch computing borrow and embankment l.MO Problem
penetration is 1500 lb/in2. Solution: quantities?
For CBR = 35%, draw a horizontal line Upon completion of grading operations, a
Penetration Load Penetration the intersection of the 12000 lb. wheel Solufidn: subgrade was tested for bearing capacity
Load
(inches) 0b) (inches) (lb) diag. and the CBR rating which is 35%, (e -e \ by loading large bearing plates. lt was
0.025 705 0.200 2102 the thickness 6 inches is indicated. Shrinkasefacror= ,* found out that a load ot 22290 N produced
0,050 1129 0.300 2359 another horizontal line from the intersection [j*, ,J a deflection of 3 mm under a plate 450 mm
0.075 1422 0.400 2574 lhe 12000 lb. wheet load and the CBR in diameter. Based on this load, what is the
0.r00 tltrich is 200/o and the thickness of g inches rjhrinkaoe factor = [ [0!4.],,0 = 12.94% modulus of subgrade reaction?
0.150
1631
1896
0.500 2675
indicated.
" l. 1+0.10 )
0 ,
 a6 H IGHWAY ENGINEERTNG HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 87
Solution:
P=oA 1.442 Problem 1.443 Problem T = A.f,

zzzso=o(X) ltsof T= I(16)'(138

Determine the modulus s of Upon completion of grading operations a 4'
o=0140MPa reaction for a standard plate 75 cm in subgrade was tested for bearing capacity T = 27746.55 N
The loadings and the cor by loading large bearing plates. lf the
Stress settlement dial readings as obtained resulting modulus of subgrade reaction is T=F
Modulus ofsubgrade reaction
=Deflection 30 cm. diam. plate. equal to 196.49 psi per inch, compute the T=pN
load which produces a deflection of 0.10
0'140 27746.55= 1.4(23M)S
Modulus ofsubgrade reaction - Loads Settlement (mm) inch under a plate having a radius of 9 in.
J 470 kg 0,25 mm S = 0.842 m
Modulus of subgrade reaction 0.04667 940 kg 0.50 mm Solufion:.
= N/mm3 S= 842mm
1200 kg 0.75 mm
Modulus ofsubgrade reaclion stress
= / T = n(16)x(0.76)
46670 kN m3 1390 kg
1490 kg
1.00 mm "
Suborade reactlOn =
deflection
1,25 mm 27746.55 = n(16X0.76)x
1600 kg 1.50 mm strcss
1650 kg 1.75 mm
196.49 =
0.10
- x=726mm
2x= 1452 mm
{,441 Froblem Stress = 19.649 psi
Solution:
Compute the modulus of subgrade reaction tr Stress = Ic
for a 15 cm. thick cement K= ' (modulus of subgrade reaction) A Plate Load Test Method
s-lab, travin! a 0.125
modulus of elasticity of 210000 kg/cm2, F = 19.S19 (n)(9)2
D
poisson's ratio of 0.13 and a raOius
oi | -- F - 5N0lb.
relative stiffness of 67 cm. Use
Westergaard equation:
For a settlement of 0.125 cm the load Design the total thickness of a highway
pavement using the plate load test method
Solution: P = 1490 kg Spacing of Bars in Concrete if the base course has a constant value of
,- t- Eh3 Pavements 90. The wheel load is 4100 kg. The total
1= 1......---
lrn
I
- 1490
subgrade pressure for the sape contact
I rzqr -p,1J f (30)'
area, deflection and number of repetitions
1.444 Prohlem
of the load is equal to 2100 kg. Provide 5
[ 21oooo(rs), l"o
o/=L12kf-(ffiJ
F = 2.108 kg/cm,

A pavement slab 15 m. wide and 200 mm

cm. of bituminous surfacing on the top of
the computed thickness. Use Mcleod
' -l*
x. =
0.125
thick is laid in three strips, each 5 m wide.
The coefficient of friction between
method.

ur=fooozzats.ozl'^ ,. 2.108 pavement and subgrade is 1.40, allowable

l.r) K =--
' 0,12s tensile slress in steel is 138 MPa and the
Solution:
P
allowable bond stress between concrete T=Klog,o-g
K, = 16.87 kg/cm3
20151121-
60077815.07 and steel is 0.76 MPa. Determine the
k For a standard platethe diam. islS length and spacing of 16 mm round tie
cm.
k= 2.98 kg / cm, K, a, =Ka
bars. T=90loS,o
ffi
Solufion; T = 26.15cm. (Thicknessof granular base)
16.87(30)=((/g)
w = s(0.2)(5)(2400x9.81)
K" 6.748 kg / cm3
W = 235445
Total thickness = 26.15 + 5

N-W Total thickness = 31.15 cm.

r

aa HIGHWAY ENGIN EERING *IIOHwav ENGINEERING a9

Solution:
residual shength
tn,
l*Li4 -ffi. -6'
I Ill Thickness of Sub-base of
r.q4s Prohlem Factor of safety =
edge ioad stress
,-ry i- =#t)",1
Flexible Pavement
Compute the traffic index if the
annuat 1.07 =
20.56 ./e$,
1X 1.45,2 Problem
y{y9 of equivatenr wheet toad
Gwai-is edge load shess
32,600,000. Using the design curves for a flexible
,/*o. pavement, compute the thickness of the
Edge load slress = 1g.21 kg / cm, +"
.,{r
.a:

Solution: sub-birse (silty sand) having a CBR of 15%,

The sub-grade (sandy clay) has a CBR of
,:,

Traffic index = 1 .35 1 ltt 8%. The pavement is subjected to 12000

19yy110.1 '
Traffic index = 1 .35 (32,600,000)0 11
Stress Due to Corner Load .,1,
lb. wheel loads. Use 3 in. as thickness of
in Pavements the surfacing.
TrafJic index = 9.05
,l0 Solulion:
t.&9 Problem
Residual & Wa l)llsl(;N cLRv[s ]()R t.Lttxlut,I.t R()At)s
Stress -1 5 6 7 I lo l5 2l) l0 {) 6{) 80
CAI,I}'0RNIA IITARIN(; RAl'Io-PI'R ('I.]N]
CfiR in lt.r t.nt nt 0.1 inLh purnuntt
A_concrete pavement'having a thickness lh ennpd&1l d,kl .r\tkcd .y|L innn
0
of
15 cm. carries a wheel toiO ot 5100 I I

k;: 4
I I

Compute the stress if the load is acting

i't Using the design chart for CBR Method of 6 I l-.< '4
Compute the residual strength in concrete
the corner of the slab. Use Goldbe-cks design of flexible pavements for highways and tt 7000 bwl )ry-.-
Formula: t0 az:Yt
slab (pavement) at the edge region if
the
airport runways.
t2 ,/l I

allowable flexural stress of conirete is

40 Solution: Thickness of pavement = 17 in,
l4 II
Wlll'l'l I alAt)
l6 r
kg/cm2 and the warping stress at the /7 rilrM RAtfl('i
edge 3P l8 1

is 21.8 kg/cm2. $= 20 I I

h2

S" = siress due to comer load,

Equiva lent Thickness of 22
24 rltr |
I I

Solution: (lll
kg/cm2
Gravel of a Bituminous 26
2lr
I

I
I

I
P = corner load in kg
Residual strength Concrete Surface
= allowable flexural stress - warping stress
h = thickness of slab in cm. i1
'1. Sttliu'ing
s_ 3(5100) l ()"
.t
Residual strength = 40 - 21.9
' (15)'
Compute the equivalent thickness in gravel I
I l" Rtt.st' 6"
Residual strength = 19.2 kg/cm? S"=68kg/cm, of a bituminous concrete surface course
l

i
having a thickness of 10 cm. and a
I

cohesiometer value c = 60 if a gravel sub Silty sarul Sub-hase 4"

CllR= lSo/a
Load Stress base having a thickness of 10 cm. has a
Thickness of Flexible cohesiometer value c = 15. (Suntl) Sult-grude

tr.&U8 .:, Problem

Pavement $olution:
CBIl*]lc

1.450 Problem t Draw a horizontal line from the intersection of

Compute the edge load stress for a
0
the CBR reading of 8% and the 12000 lb.
concrete pavement having a residual
Laboratory tests indicate that a certain
I
IiJ'^ curve, it indicates a thickness of 13 inches.
strength of 20,56 kg/cm2 and a factor - ,u5
Draw a horizontal line from the intersection of
t
safety of 1.07.
of subgrade has a CBR of 5. What thickness
of flexible pavement structure should be
"a= rqt
15
the CBR reading of 15% and the 12000 lb.
10 [ J curve, it indicates a thickness of 9 inches. The
specified for a 12000 lb. wheel load?
|g =13.2mr. thickness ofthe sub-base is 13 - I = 4
 90 H,GHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 9l

Thickness of Pavement Solutrbn:

Absolute SPecific GravitY of Fineness Modulus
Using Expansion Pressure EB alt Mixture
Method Stiffness factor =
Ep
1 Problem
J,.
1B {.456 Problem
t.45S " Problem Stiffness factor =
100
= 0.464
When a sample of sand having a dry weight
of 600 grams is passed through a set of
000 A sheet asphalt mixture is to be made
standard sieves, the weight in grams
Compute the pavement thickness by using the following percentages by weight retained on the various sieves are ag
expansion pressure method. if the of the total mix.
follows.
expansion pressure is 0.150 kg/cm2 if the
average pavement density is ASPHATT MIXTURE Material Specific Percentage
of Weight % of individual fraction
0.0025 kg/cms. Gravity Sieve No
2.68 80% retained in grams
Sand
0
Solulion; 1 Absolute specific gravity Filler 2.70 12Yo 3/8 in

t- 0.1 50 kg/cm'z
composite aggregates c Asphalt Cement 1.01 9Yo #4
#8
108
90
0"0025 kg/cm' 100
(, A compacted test specimen weighing 11.18 #16 150

l= 60 cm.
PP t-.+
.! + N in air was found to weigh 6.33 N when #30 66
G. Gr G suspended in water, #50 114
#1 00 72
where:
$ = absolute specific gravity O Compute the absolute specilic gravity
Stiffness Factor of the composite aggregates' Determine the fineness modulus.
composite aggregates
Gs = sp.gr. ofsand @ Compute the bulk specific gravity.
,1A5d CE Board 20{5 Gr= sp.gr. of filler @ Compute the PorositY'
Ga = sp. gr. of asphaft cement Solulion;
What is the stiffness factor of a pavement Ps= percentage weight of sand Solution;
if (.r Absolute specific gravity of the composite
its modulus of elasticity is 180 Mpa and Pr = percentage weight of filler
aggregates
whose subgrade modulus of 40 MPa. Pa = p€rCentage weight of %ol
individual Commutative Commutative
cement 100 o/o
Sieve fraction o/o passing
in relained io
G
Solutian: PPP
s+r+a No. relained grams grams
in orams

g.p =.,/ 4o 6.6p5

=
2. Bulk specific gravity (a G, Gr Gu
600-600=0
Y 180 sp.gr.) 100
3/B 0 600

u- = 2.37 #4 108 492 600-492=108

d=
W
"
80128
.. +. + #8 90
150
402
252
600402=198
600-252.348
#16
wr'w* 2.68 2.70 1.01 #30 66 186 600-186=414
t.455 Problem where: #50
#100
114
_72 0
600-72"528
600-0 .600
d = bulk sp.gr. or apparent sp.gr. @ Bulk specific gravitY 600 219(l
lf pavement and sub grade are considered wa = weight of conpacted test
ai rl= w
"a = 11.18
""- =2,31
as two layer system a stiffness factor is to in
w -w 11.18-6.33
be introduced to take into account the w, = weight of compacted test
different values of modulus of elasticity of in water Fineness uooutu, = -2Js
the two layers. lf the modulus of elasticity @ Porosity
of the subgrade is 100 kg/cm2 and the 3. Porosity: 1=
c-d= .lij---lll-
I--I 2.37 -2.31
=0.0235 Fineness Modulus = 3.66
modulus of elasticity of the pavement is
G-d
c 2.37
1000 kg/cmz, what is the stiffness factor? n= 2.53%
G
 92 H IGHWAY EruOIruEERING
HIGHWAY EN(,INEERING 93
l,/,58 Problem Solution:
{.46{ Probl,om Solution
A core of
compacted asphalt concrete u
100
_ 100
pavement was tested for specific gravity. P..P, G
_?r A sheet asphalt mixture is to be made tG, +P,Gr +P,G"
The following weights were obtainedl G. G, using the following percentages by weight
100
Weight of dry specimen in G = absotute specifrc gravity of compxite aggregates of total mix.
air = 2007.5 grams P"= percentages of coarse materials by weight
80128
__-+--,+**-
Sand (sp.gr. = 2.67) 7BYo
Weight of specimen plus paraffin coatinq in 2.68 2,70 1.01
P, = percentages of fine materials by weiglrt Filler (sp.gr. = 2,71) 12o/o
air = 2036.5 grams G = 2.37 (absolute sp.gr.)
Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 1.01) 10%
We.ight of specimen plus paraffin coating G = spxific gravity of coarse material
in
water = 1135.0 grams
"
G, = specific gravity of fine material Find the theoritical maximum density of the
Bulk so. or. = _-_L
W

Bulk specific gravity of the paraffin WW

= 0.903 mixture.
^ 100
d = bulk sp,gr,
Calculate the bulk specific gravity of 92 8
the + Solution:
core. 2.63 2.72 1 140
d=
G= 2.64 ^ 100
1 140 - 645
Solution: PPP
.-9..1 -1. 4. ? d = 2.30
(: A G" Gf G, -
G-d
D-E. 1.460 Porosttf (n) = t^J
Froblem G
100
d = bulk specific gravity of the core 78 12
.++ 10
A=weigltt of dry specimen in air A bituminous mat consisting of an 2.67 2.71 1.01 n--2.37 -2.30
2.37
aggregate mixture which is composed
D = weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in air of G= 2.30 (absolute sp.gr.)
90 percent crushed rock (sp.gr. 2.64) n = 0.0295%
E =weight of specimen = and
plus paraffin coating inwater 10 percent limestone dust (sp.gr. i.lt). Density = (2.30)(1000)
= n= 2.95% (porosrty)
F = bulk specific gravity of paraffin Determine bulk sp.gr, of the bituminous
mrxture so that the compacted mixture DensitY = 23N kg / m3
(: 2007.5
have a porosity 5 percent,
will
(2036.5 - 1 135) - l4!!ef#14
d = 2.309 Solution:
d = 2.31 (bulk specific gravity of core) ^
(f __
100 1.462 Problem
=
PP A plant mix is composed of materials
-,.c-- + . .1.-

A sheet asphalt mixture is to be combined in the following proportions by

l)L, made
t-459 PrOblem ' using the following percentages by weight
weight.

t^=
',oo'
-....... '_. ----- of total mix.
A bituminous mat 90 Grushed stone (sp.gr. = 2.70) 50%
is to be
constructed +
10
2.64 Sand (sp.gr, = 2.68) Sand (sp.gr. = 2,65) 39lo
ys_i1g
lne upper timits of grading based on 2.71 80Yo
AASHO Specifications. This aggregate G = 2.65 Filler (sp,gr. . 2.70) 12% Limestone dust (sp.gr.' 2.70) SYo
mixture is composed of 9Z% crusfiio iock Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 1.01) 6Yo
Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 1.01)
(tp.gr. = 2.63) and 8% limestone dust n=100 (G' - d), BYo

(sp.gr. = 2.72). Determine the theoritical G

maximum density of the combine
A compacted test specimen weighing The compacted mixture has a bulk sp.gr. of
E_ 100(2.65_d)
J- 1140g in air was found to weigh 645 g 2.36 after rolling. Determine the porosity of
aggregate. Note that this is also the 2.65 when suspended in y{aler. What is the the compacted mixture,
absolute specific gravity of the aggregate 2.65-d=0.1325 porosity of the compacted specimen.
mtxture.
d = 2.5175 (bulk sp gr.)
-
7-

94 HIGHWAY EToITEeRING HIOXwav ENGINEERING 95

So/ution:
Solution:
tl 00
00 1.468 Problsm:l
PPPP
r+ n+ L + L
$=
+ PPP
A bituminuous mat is to be constructed
G. G, GL G" using an aggregate mixture which is
P
o+ t + u
The proportion of the weight and specific
composed ol g0 percent crushed Ga Go G. G* gravities of a particular asphalt paving
100 rock tr
$= (sp.gr. = 2.60) and 10 percent limestone 100 mixture are as follows.
?o E
_+
50
+_+ o
dust (sp,gr, = 2.70). What is the apparent Q=
9.0 40
6.3+++ 44.7 Materials Specific Percent
2.70 2.65 2.7A 1.01 or bulk specific gravity of the bituminuous
G = 2.44 mixture if the compacted mixture will have 1.02 2.82 2.65 2 65 Gravity by Weight
Asphalt cement 1.00 10.4
c-d a porosig of 5 percent. G.2.12 Limestrone dust 2.80 12.2
n=
Sand 2.60 28.8
- G
2.44 -2.36
Solution:
Crushed gravel 2.65 48.6
n;_=*_-
2.44 \f
100

qc, * qco
1.N?" Problem Calculate the weight of a square meter of
n = 0.0328 38 mm wearing surface composed of this {
sheet asphalt mixture.
n= 3.28% ^
(l = ,___
100 From the given data of a particular asphalt
concrete pavement mixture, compute lhe
9! - -lq percent voids, if the measured bulk Solution:
2.64 2.70 specific gravity is 2.37. 100
1.404 G = 2.61 (absoltne sp.gr.)
G
PPPP
Materials Specific Percent "+d+s+!
An asphaltic concrete is made up of the G-d Gravity by Weight LrbLrLl
n= (porostty) adsq
following materials proportion by weight as -- Sand 2.64 40.0 100
shown. Crushed Gravel 2.64 44.7 G
2'61-d 10.4 12.2 28.8 48.6
o.os= Limestone dust 2.82 9.0
Crushed stone (sp.gr. = 2.67) 45% 2.61
Asphalt cement 1.02 6.3 1.oo+2.80*z.od*z"os
Sand (sp.gr. = 2.70) 44% 2.61-d=0.1305 G = 2.26 (theoritical sp.gr. of asphaft mirture)
Stone dust (sp.gr. = 2.60) 70 Solution:
W=VD
Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 0.9g) 4yo
d = 2.4795 (apparent or bulk sp.gr)
V=%ofvoids
W = (1X0.038X2.26X1000)
Compute the weight of a 50 mm thick y= G:-d) *166 W=85.88k9/m'
suface course in kg/mz, G

100
Solution:
100
G
PPPP
!+ c+ 44
'1,469 Problem
u- a
a

P"PPP
"+.+ a
Data on particular asphalt concrete
paving mixture are as lollows:
G, Gs G, G,
During a working day of I hr, a particular
G. G. G. G. 100 hot plant 'produces enough asphalt
Materials Specific percent Q=
40 44.7 I 6.3 concrete to lay 11500 m2 of wearing course
G
100
Gravity
. + __ + _ + -._
-454474
75 mm thick, compacted. Mix proportions,
+ +-... + Asphalt cement 1.02
by Weight
6.3
2.U 2.M 2.82 1.02 by weight, sp,gr, are as follows:
2.67 2.70 2.60 0.98 Limestone dust 2.82 9.0 G =2.41
G=2.5 absolutesp.gr, Sand 2.65 40,0 Materials Specific Percent
(2.41-2,37)
W=VxD Crushed gravel 2.65 44.7 v= xloo Gravity by Weig ht
2.41
W = (1) 0.05 (2.5X1000) Asphalt cement 1.02 6
For this mixture, determine the theoritical V = 1.06% (percerrtof voids) Limestrone dust 2.75 8
W=125kglm'? specific gravity of a voidless mixture. Sand 2.66 41
Crushed stone 2.77 45
 96 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWAY ENGTNEERING 97

The capacity of the mixer, counting all Solution: Solution:

ingredients is 90 kN per batch. Determine
100 Bulk sp.gr.of total aggregate (G
the number of batches that must be run to u- "u)
PPP A tabulation shown are materials and its
produce 11 500 mz of surfacing. C-+ !
Gd G.
+__e-
G"
-
^*qB l*P, properties which are used in a compacted
Solufion: '+' paving mixture:
100 d1 d2

G
00 tf-
17++73 Materiars sp.sr.
PPPP 10 47.3 47.4
u'o- 473-
+
$1[. "f,;l
a+-q+.s,.+ c
2.80 2.60 1.02 4rA Coarse aggregate 2.69 46.2
G, G, G, G. G=2.28
-,7i6 Fine aggregate 2.72 46.0
Asphalt cement 1.2
,68g 7.8
Q:
100 .A
d= G* = 2.702
684145
+++ B-C
-- Compute the asphalt absorption of the
1.02 2.75 2.66 2.77 110 aggregate expressed as percentage by
d= weight of aggregate. Max. sp.gr. of paving
G=2.47 114 - 60
mixture G., = 2.54.
W=VxD d=2.04 (butksp.gr)
-
W = 11500 (0.075X2.47X9.81) From the given data shown in the table for
W = 20898,98 kN (required wt.of sufacing)
v=ffxroo a mix design for asphalt concrete.
Solution;
(G .G )G
!-{ olo
ol
P* =100 \ * sD' D

No of batches required = ?0898q8

y = !2J-8-2 , Materials Bulk sp'gr G, G
'90 2.28
1se
sp.gr, weight
V = 10.53% (percentage of voids inthe Asphalt coment 1.03 5.3 G* = effective sp.gr. of aggregate
No. of batches required = 232.21 batches
Fine aggregates 2.689 47.3 G,o = bulk sp.gr. of aggrEate
laboratory molde d specim e n)
Coarse aggregate 2.716 47.4
Go = sp.gr. of asphalt
1.47O Problem Max. specific gravity of paving mixture P* = absorbed asPhalt

1,ATt :'rProbleilr Gr, = 2.535 P -Pb

The following data of a particular asphalt Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture G * -P PD
concrete mixture. Compute the percentage
The following are the ingredients to Gn6.2.42 -G
of voids in the laboratory molded used in preparation of a trial mixture.
G D

specimen. Compute the effective specific gravity of

1N - 7'8
Materials Specific Percent
Materials Percentage Specific
aggregate. G = 100 7.8 = 2.906
of total mix gravi$
Gravity by Weight by weight Solution; 2,U 1.02
Limestone dust
Sand
2.80 17.A Coarse 47.4
aggregate 2.716(bulk sp.gr _mD
P -P
Pt*P'
2.60 73.0 Fine aggregate 47.3 G
Asphalt cement 1.02 10
2.689(bulk s P
'm PD
t: $ = P_e
Asphalt cement 5.3 1.03 -l+--
GG b Gr G2
A cylindrical specimen of the mixture was Max. specific gravity of P.* = total loose mixfure
molded in the laboratory and weighted in mixture 46'2*46'o
air and water as follows,
= 2.535
G,, = max. sP.gr. of Paving mixture
G= =2.70s
Weight of dry specimen in air. 1 10 grams
Bulk specific gravity of " 46.2 46
mixtwe= 2.442 Go = sp.gr. of asphalt zas* Ln
Weight of saturaled surface . dry specimen
in air = 114 grams
Compute the bulk specific gravity of
( = asphalt (percenfage by tdal vt.of mirture) (isf'o=?)
Weight of saturated specimen in *
P. =100 t.r,l
c* _ 100-5.3 _2.76' (2.906) '
aggregate. 2.70s
water ! 60 grams
100-fu3 5.3
P* = 2'61
2535
 9a HT(iHWAY Ew<;rrueen ING HIGHWAY ENGINE ERIN(i 99
Effective asphalt content : VIVA = % of voids in the mineral aggregates

DD GP
mr
Compute the effective asphalt content of ',/fffi = 1[Q - s.
a =P - 'oa's
PFbioo
paving mixture which are as follows: G* Fine .aggregates, coarse aggregates,
P =30+56 mineral filler and asphalt cement are use
P, = 47.3 + 47 .4
Materiats Bulk Sp.gr. % ol for an asphalt concrete paving mixture. lf
sp.gr. weight I = g+.2
I '86 lhe maximum specific gravjty of the paving
Asphall cement 1,03 5.3 2 384 (86) mixture Gmm . 2.418 and the bulk specific
Fine aggregates 2.699 4t.? 081(94.7) VIr/A. 1oo - gravity of the compacted paving mixture
Coarseaggregates 2.716 4t.4 * =5.3-
P..
100
2.668
sample Gmb =
2.384, compute the
Vl'tlA = 23.154% of voids in the mineral aggregates
P* = 4.53 (effective asphaft content) percentage of air voids in the compacted
Max. sp.gr. of paving mixture Gr, = 2.535 mixture.

Solution: Solution:
Pt +P'z l
Q.OPP.
= (G,. -Gd)
V. = 1oo
J+ _L Compute the percentage of voids filled with (,
G1 asphalt if the maximum sp.gr. of paving
G2
The following ingredients are used in the mixture Gmm - 2.535. Bulk sp.gr. v 1oo L"{-];l,!
^* _ 47.3
47.3+47.4 preparation of an asphalt concrete paving compacted mix Gmu = 2.442. Percentage
of
^= 2.418
mixture. weight of asphalt cement is S.3 while that V
o = 3.7Vk (percentage of at voids in the
- 47 4 of fine aggregates and coarse aggregates
,689 2.zt6 compacted mfiure)
Materials percentageofTotal Specific are 47.3 and 47.4 respectively. The bulk of
G"o = 2.7A2 $ulk sp.gr.of aggregate) Mix by Weight Gravity sp.gr. of aggregates Gsl = 2.703 and the
Asphalt cement 7.0 1.030 cffective specilic gravity aggregate of
Mineral filler 7.0 3.100 G," = 2.761.
Fine aggregate 30.0 2.690(butk sp.gr.)
u _mmbP .P Coarse aggregate 56 2.6llibuk s;.;r.i Solution:
PP The proportions by weight and specific
c-c
mmb
Max. spccific gravity of the paving mixture
G*, = 2.478
Air voids (V^ ) =
(G* - G* )
G
100
gravities of each of the constituents of a
particular sheet asphalt paving mixture are
100, 5.3 Bulk specific gravity of the compacted as follows:
u- - Q.535-2.442)
100 5.3
paving mixture sample Gr6:2.3g4 v.
^ 1;
2.535 Materials Specific Percent by
2.535 1.03 V, = 3.02 (air voids) Gravity Weight
Compute the percentage of yoids in the
G* = 2.761 (effectivesp.gr.of aggresate) Arphalt cement 1.04 10.0
compacted mineral aggregates. f'ercentageof voids inthe mineral aggregate
l Limestone dust 2.82 16.5
GP Sand 2,66 73.5
Solution: VIVIA = 100
Asphalt absorption of the aggregate
+P, + o I A cylindrical specimen of the mixture was
pE^ = 1oo qi!r& Q.
s =
P D
P, VII4A = 100 -
2.442(47.3 + 47.4) molded in the laboratory and weighted in
\,s0s\, 1

,,
+-1
g2
+
g3
2.703 air and in water with the following results.
I
Vl\4A. 14.44
Weight of
*
P* = loo 4!!9
2.761 (2.702)
n.orl
'""" (J=
56 + 30 +7 l)ercentage of voids filled wrth asphalt
air=111.95grams
dry sp€cimon in
56
P* .0.81% byvtt.of aggregate
+-."+
30 7
,,.^ _ 100(vMA-V,) lrl/eightof salurated, surface.dry specimen
2.611 2.690 3.10 VMA
in air = 112.09 grams
G* = 2,668 ,,.^ _ 100(14.44-3.6)
Ytleight of saturated specimen in
= 74.58 water. 61.20
14.44
 loo HIGHWAYENGINEERINc; HI<;HwAYENGINEERING 101

Compute the bulk specific gravig of the

Bulk specific gravity : G,
compacled specimen. Pisll.em
G =-Mo Design the thickness of pavement, sub.base and base for a wheel load of 12000 lb., with the
Solution:
" vrw following data:
Bulk so.or. = -4- Vr. total volume of aggregates including Plastic clay subgrade CBR = 4
Base material CBR - 80
B-C Sandy borrow for subgrade CBR = 15
A=weight of dry spcimen vol.of absorbedwater
in air
A=111.95grams ^
Ll6 =
1206 Solution:

B - weiglt of saturated,surtace - dry sryimen in air

" --
461 40(1) Using the table shawn:
CALIFORNIA RATrO (C.B.R.)
B = 112.09 grams
G" = 2.614
0
.3 567 8 910 m2530 4 50 &7t)
i(,. I I SteD N0,2
C=weight of saturated specimen inwater I I I

ttt'-r -
C = 61.20 grams
".,]
-<t-+------ I

{.48O Probtem z 4-
.A
I

d= _-
I -41-
ttt-/
I I

B.C I t-r -/
r'-/, 'Z
. 111.95
The dry mass of a sample of aggregates
978.6 grams. The mass tn
I
-flTt-t--z--'
v
o= t0
112.09 - 61,20 surface dry condition is 2005.4 grams. ! .-l lr{ L//
7 .41 )-y
d. volume of aggregates excluding a
i:1 ofi I /fA
2.20 (bulk sp.gr.of compacted specimen)
volume of absorbed water is 732.6 (, .\\, 'Att I

z .(
- Compute the apparent specific gravity, Z l5
I I

I I I

Sotution: 3l
z.
ttt
Clll.Il. Rhnsc for P.R., ,. Soil 1l
Apparent sp.gr.: Gg U a-1 I A-41
2l
Aw mass of a sample of aggregates is W= VxD F A .5 A 2
I!-. 1978.6 = 732.6(1)(GA) A-rt
1206 grams. The mass is a siturated Ory i:l A--1
z tlighlJ phlsliL cls] Suilr -ttal D$ I safldl-t[r m
.rn.i. I Eirh;..
condition is 1226.8 grams. The volume of Ga= 2.70 sulv (nxil Bravr rYcll
' Gralcl hirh clar ru.ly Foded
the aggregates, excluding the volume of )<
SaDd,tairh cleu
O l'|ir
absorbed water is 440.6 cm3. Calculate the
bulk specific gravity of the sample of AND BY CAI,IFORNIA
aggregates. 1481
I or subgrade CBR = 4, drawn a vertical line 'I
hithPt n<1nind
Solution: The dry mass of sample of aggregates (t rarlt tnut?rial
until it will intersect the curue line (12000 lb.)
Wt. of water= 1226.8- 1.2A6 1240 grams. The mass rn a saturated ,rtd from this intersection draw a horizontal
Wt. of water = 20.8 kg condition is 1268.4 grams. The volume Ittte and read on the leftside which is 19.4 in.
the aggregates excluding the volume :;ay 20 in.
Vol'
Vor. of absorbed wa1r, =Densityofofwater
water
absorbed water is 446.2 cme. Calculate
percentage absorption.
/ or sub-base CBR = 15, draw a vertical line
it intersects the curue line (12000 lb.) and
rtntil
Vol. ofabsorbed water.4
! lrom lhis intersection draw a hoizontal line
Solution:
1 ;tnd read on the leftside 9.09 say 9 rnches. Therefore the thickness of the pavement is
Mass of absorbed water = 1269.4 - 1240
3 inches thrbkness of base material is
Vol. of absorbed water = 20.8 cm3
I or the base material CBR = 80, draw a
Bulk volume = 20.8 + 440.d
Mass of absorbed water = 29.4 grams
vcrtical line until it intersects the curve line
6 inches and the sub-base material is
28'4 11 inches.
(12000 lb.) and fron this intersection draw a
Bulk volume = 461.40 cm3 Percentageof absorption=
. xl[o
1240 lrtrizontal line and read on the left side 3.3 in.
Percentage of abs orplion . Z2g% ::ay 3 inches)
 1a^2 HIqHWAY ENGINEERING HIGHWA.Y ENGINEERING 103

{.483,r.,,Fi1r&}em 1.48,* Widening Required for a

Pavement Width on Curves
Design the thickness of a rigid pavement
{concrete) having a modulus of rupture of Determine the thickness (uniform) of a
equal to 700 psi. The modulus of subgrade reaction Extra widening required:
based- on plate l;a; te;il; 200 psi, concrete pavement to carry an 18000 lb.
wheel load is 75000 tb. Use a factor of sifety equal
to 2. axle load on dual tires using Sheets

Solution:
formula for doweled joints with modulus of Y1=nt *-!-
rupture of 700 psi and a modulus subgrade 2R g.oJR
reaction of 100 psi per inch. Assume a
factor of safety of 2. where:
W = extra widening requied
l9 Solution: n = number of lanes
\ L = standard wheel base of vehicle (6.1 m)
\ \ \ L Y
1.1 V = design speed (kph)
(: t8
- radius of hoizontal
.( R curvQ
$1 r\ \ 1.0
;\ 2' \ \ /) +i t7

\ \ \ 0.9 {.485 Problem

\ \\ \ \ '7--._
l6
0.8
Determine the extra widening required for a
\ \
\ \\ \ \ f:: 15. 0.7
pavement width of 7 n. (2 lanes, at 3.5
100 200 lm 4(x) -50() mllane) on a horizontal curve of radius 250
.= Motlulus rtf suhgrutle rctu'tkn K
\ l-", l.t.S m, if the longest wheel base of the vehicle
expected on the road is 6.1 m. Design
( // r.r i speed is 70 kph.
,,/
7
r I

Y t- 1.92W
Solution;
a) d2
w.(* 2R 9.5./R
u
,4 \ \ i\ From the diagram 2(6.1)'? 70
,11,.'
x w_ +
7
'/rt ; l0 C = 1.0 2(250) 9.5./250
/rt ( 9
W =4.il0 (0.305 m.on inner and outside

'/ lJsing aiactor of safety of 2 of thecurue)

'/ /// 8 ^ 700
5=
/) t/
\( -2
7
S = 350 psi
Length of Transition Curves
.-1 /, 1,92W c
ral and Cubic Parabola)
6 e-
d . 0.0702v3
"cR
2
Refer to table From the table at left, locate 350 psl and
draw
Using factor of safety = 2 horizontal line until it lnlersecls the curue K ,." _ 1.92(18000X1)
JJU-
Modulus of rupture = 700 psi (modulus of subgrade reaction). From thrs point d' C = allowable rate of change of centrifugal
700 a vertical line until it rnlersecfs the load line of acceleration in m/sef
ulress = d = 9.94 inctes
lb. At this point of intersection draw a horzontal R = radius of the cicular curue
-
2
and read on the ight side which the required V. design speed in m/s
Stress = 350 psi -
af the pavement, 14.75 in. say 15 in. L", length of transition curue
 105
1U^4 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING HIOTTWAV ENGINEERING

Rate of Increase of Compensated Gredient Solution:

tan 15" = I
Dynamic energy consumption of each barrel:
Centri I Acceleration LR

Ea=(0.60-0.20)(50)
L^ = 29'86 m
Eo = 20 kN.m = kib-joules

A sharp horizontal curve has a limiting Khetic aergY of a ar roving at 90 kPh : tan 15'= 1!
The design speed for a spiral curve is 100 gredient ol 6.7Yo.lf the radius of the curve
V=
s v

kph, The length of spiral is 70 m. lf the is 50 meters, compute the compensated =25m/s
Y = 13.06 m
3.6
radius of the central curve is 400 m, gredient after allowing for the curve
determine the rate of increase . of resistance. 1 x=Ln -y
KE= mV'
centripetal acceleration in mlsec3. 2
x=29.86-13.06
Solufion;
6E = 11zoooyzs1, x= 16.80 m.
Solution:
'R
Grade comoensation = 4
, _ 0.0702 v3
.RC KE = 625000 Joules

'50
Grade comoensation = 4 = 1.52o/o Distress Rating of
KN = 625 Kj
.^ _ 0.0702(100)3
Limiting gredient = 6.7%
Pavements
No.of banels requked:
400 c
Compensated gredient = 6.7 - 1.52= 5.18%
625
C=2.51 m/sec3 N= =31.25 say 32banels
20

A Davement rating method uses 6 distress

Sidewalk Flow Evaluation types to establish the DR (distress rating)'
Crash Cushion Minimum Length of
No. of points Weighing
Guardrail factors (W)
Crash cushion are used to
decelerate {d)
enant vehicles to a stop, greatly reducing the Corogation 6 points 2

A newly construc{ed building at the l.T. severity of the head-on impad with a fixed Alligator 4 points 1
Park is expected to add 1200 pedestrians object by spreading the energy of impact over crackinq
time and space. A vaiety of crash cushions 2 points 0.75
to a 6 m. sidewalk during the peak 15 Compute the minimum length in meterc ol Raveling
minute period. The sidewalk has already a includes rows of banels, entrapment ndts and quardrail required to shield a hazard Longitudinal
4 points 1
flow of 1800 pedestrians during the peak anays of containers filled with sand or water. iocated I m. from the edge of a roadway cracking
season. Because of parking meters, light which has two'waY oPeration' The Ruftinq 3 points 1

standards and other obstructions, subtract guardrail is to be located 3'5 m. beyond the Patching 3 points 1.5
angle is
0,8 m. from the actual sidewalk width to [avement edge. The encroachment
obtain the effective width. Compute the 15" Determine the distress rating for the
new pedestrian volume per width of A crash cushion is to be placed along the
pavement (DR).
sidewalk per minute. Solufion;
elevated SCTEX to safely decelerate a 2000 t.. B
Solution:
kg car traveling at 90 kph. Laboratory .r = l.ength of guudrail -- f -
Solution; tnl rt hurricr DR=100-I(d'W)
studies have indicated that a dynamic force wdal
Total pedestrians = 1800 + 1200 = 3000 + 4(1)
of 50 kN is required to crush one barrel U DR = 100 - +
t(6X2) + (4)(1) 2(0.75)
Pedestrianvolume : from its original diameter ol 0.6 m. to Lr=8m + 3(1) + 3(1.5)l
for a 6 - 0.8 = 5.2 m. width of sidewalk approximately 0.20 m. Determine the DR=100-29
number of barrels used as crush cushion
soo DR=71
P= =J8.46 that will stop the car. t1fl&. *
15(5.2)
 r06 H IGHW,AY TNGINEERINGI'
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 107

Priority Numbers of
Pavement Section Under Space-hours if 12% are vacant:
D=4416+4416{0.12) v
r 400 cars parked between 7:00 a.m. and
D = 4946 space-hours
p.m. at the parking lot of Ayala, Makati.
10% parked for 2 hours Space-hours af demand in 5 years:
30% parked for 4 hours D - (1.05)5 (4946)
A pavement section has been observed to 60% parked for I0 hours
D = 6313 space-hours
tf lYo of pa rking bays are
exhibit cracks for approximately 20% of its
th roughout the day and assuming Additional space-hours = 6313 - 4946
lengttr. About 15%
ot the section has
previously been patched. The ADT efficiency factor of 0.86, determin Additional space-hours = 1367
(average daily traffic) is 3400 and the number of parking bays in the parking
No. of parking bays required:
cost of Ayala, Makati.
per km. is P6800. The priority ranking is 0 BoN (10) = 1367
8
tor maror structural problem only. What
priority ranking would this Solution: N= ,7, spaces
section
received? Space-hours of demand:
D = 0.10(400)(2) + 0.30(400)(4) +
So/ution; Speed Limits of Vehicles at
D = 2960 space-hours
cos t / km priority ranking for Intersections l),
Priority number - * major structural
Total space-hours (assuming 10% vacancy)
ADT D=2960+2960(0.10)
problem only
t
6800 D = 3256
'
Prioritv number =
3400
+s
3256 = 10(N)(0.s6) 0smefra Blvd. and P. Del Rosario St.
By ratio and proporlton

Priority number = 10 N = 379 spaces intersect perpendicularly. The minor road Dr- 38
traffic (P. Del Rosario St.) is controlled by a
Therefore,this sectionwill receive a priorihl of 10.
yield sign. Speed limit of Osmefta Blvd. is
D, Dr -10
72 kph. Both roads are 2-lane roads. A
building is located 38 m. from the ^"' _- 108.25(38)
Parking Areas and Space centerline of the outside lane of Osmena io-g2s-ld
Hours Demand Around 600 cars parked between 9; 00 Blvd., and 10 m. from the centerline of the D, = 41.87 m.
to 7:00 p.m. in a parking area of nearest lane of P. Del Rosario St,
Hotel. Determine the speed limit on P. Del Rosario v:
8% parked for 2 hours St. to avoid collision. Assume friction tt2gf+ '
D- =V-
30% parked for 4 hours factor. 0.35 and perception and reaction
A parking area of Solaire Casino had 300
S2o/o parked for 10 hours time of the driver lo be 2.5 sec. V,
12% of parking bays are vacant
cars parked between g a.m, and 6 p.m.
the day and the demand IS expected
41.87 =V"Q.S\ 1', ' 4 2(9.81X0.35)
12% parked for 2 hours
28% parked for 4 hours tn crease by 5Yo per year over five
Solufion; -L-
Vi V'? + 17.17Vt -287.52.0
60% parked for 10 hours Ass uming an efficiency factor of D =Vt*2s( r)
Determine the space.hours of demand. delermine the umber of pa rking
V, = 10.42 m/s
requ ired lo accommodate the cars.
72
Solution: V, = =2omls vr = 10.42(3.6)
3.6
Solution;
Space-hours of demand:
Space-hours of demand: D =20(2.5)+
(20)'- V
, ' 37 .52 kph (speed limt of P. Del Rosano Sf.)
D " 0.12(300)(2) + 0.2S(300Xa) + 0.60(300X10)
D = 0.0s(600X2) + 0.30(600Xa) + 0.6(600X10) 2(e 81)(0.35)
D = 2208 space-hours
D " 4416 space-hours D, = 108.25 m.

!i
 104 HIGHW.AY ENGI NIERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING r09
Traffic Signal Timing at C) tmtn = minimum yeltow intewal at an
intersection. O Min. yellow interval at the intersection Marial luisa Subdivision contains 300
Isolated Intersections W+L V households with an average 6 persons and
t =
.W+L v
l+_+_ t mV2a
=t+ 3 cars for each household. Determine the
V2a 48 -+-
average number of trips per day in that
V= =13.33m/s subdivision.
t = perception reaction time 36
in sec.
V = speed limit in m/s a = 3.4 nlsec2 (@nstant brd<ing deelerdbn) Solution:
L = length of vehicle in meters t = 2.5 sec. (perception - reactnn time) T=0.80+12P+2.24
V a = constant rate of braking deceleration
| 12+6 13.33 T=0.80+12(6)+2.2(3)
xc
in m/s2
W = width of intersection in meters
'
--1 +
13.33 2(3.4) T " 14.60 tripslhouseholdlday
-+-
t*" = 4.31sec. No. of tnps in the entte subdivision:
N " 14.6(300)

Dilem ma zone xt @ Distance of vehicle from the intersection

N = 4380 tripslday
where it has to stop to avoid collision
when the caution signal is on
v
The width of an intersection of two
\12 Reduction of Transit
NoZa
=\/|+l
perpendicular roads is 12 m. ilaximum Passengers Due to
xo allowable speed on the approach road is 4g
(-11'33)' Increase in Fares
kph. Average length of the vehicle is 6 m.
long. lfthe corctant rate
X = 13.33(2.5) '* 2(3.4)
brakingof
deceleration is 1.4 m/s2, perceptionl X" = 59.46 m. from the intersection
iA) Xc = the distance within which a vehicle reaction time = 2.5 sec.,
traveling at the speed timit V during the tO Distance of the vehicle from the The current ridership is 2000/day at a fare
yellow interual "rnin" sec. cannat stop O Compute the minimum yellow interval intersection allowed to go through the of P6, if the fare is increased to P8 due to
before encroaching on the intersection. (caution signal) in sec. intersection during the yellow interval increase in the prices of gasoline and
Vehicles within this distance at the stat @ Determine the distance of a vehicle diesel, compute the new ridership if for
from the intersection where it has to Xc-V,[min-CIV*L)
of the yellow interual wilt have to go each 1% increase in fares, there will be 1/3
through the intersection. stop to avoid collision when the X" = 13.33(4.31)- (12 + 6) of 1% reduction in ridership.
caution signal is on. X"= 39.45 m.
Xc= V tnin- {W + L) @ Determine the distance of the vehicle Solution;
from the intersection allowed to go Elasticity of Demand
through the intersection during t[e
where: Estimate of Tri Per percentage change in volume
V= speed limit in m/s
rmin = minimum yellow interual at an
yellow interval.
=('/-@t
intersection in sec. Solution: 1 AV/V
Ax=8-6.2
W = width of intersection in meters I 3 Ax/x
L = length of vehicle in meters
i)
I
A multiple regression analysis shows the 1 xAV
following relationship for the number of VAx
trips per household. 6 .AV
B) Xo = drslance from the intersection T=0.80+1.2P+2.2A -=
1

where vehicles has to stop to avoid

2 2000 2
collision. where: 2(2oo0)
xo (rrn I Av = =222.22sav222
T = no. of trips per household per day 18
Xo2a
=vt+Y1 2rr
P - no. of persons per household New ridership = 2000 - 222
A,= na. of cars per household 78 passengers
New ridership = f
 I

r10
HIGHwA EN GI NEERIN G HIGHWAY EN(iINEERING 111

Ca I Lanes Solution:
Concrete Mixture @ Required weight of dry sand
Weight of concrete = wt. of cement and water
+ wL of dry rodded aggregate
The.capacity of an existing highway 1 + weighl of sand
is 1500
23.6(1)=4.61 +5.10+W'
:."h/lr- yjl!
av.erase r.r,iir, iccr6rr.ioi The basic data for proportioning trial
] f ?eoPle: A carpool tane has been i.,: ,F
mixture for normal weight concrete with an
W' = 13.89 lrltl
tnrroduced to lessen the traffic
during peak average 28 day compressive strength of 24
hours. The carpool tane is restriciei io I
more passensers. tf rhe ;il";r ! MPa are as follows: tr603 GEBoard'MayrlgQ,Q
:Iy 1"1
rane carries 900 vehicles/hour, determine T
the equivalent numbers of vehicle SlumP = 75 mm to 100 mm O Which of the following gives the
per froui number of bags of cement required for
without carpool lane. Assume Water-cement ratio = 0.62
tfre growtfr Ramp
Quantig of water (wet mixing) = 180 kglm3 a 25 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2.5:5 mix.
rate is 4yo in the 6 months
of opirrtion l'z=5(r k|h Volume ol dry-rodded coarse with the following data given.
without a carpool lane.
.s
aggregates = 0.37 m3
Solution: Unit weight of concrele = 23.6 kN/m3 Malerials SpecificGravity Density
No. of passenger/vehicle using Unit weight of coarse aggregate = 13.7 kNIm3 Cement 3.10 1506 kg/m3
the carpoot
lane: f vr=1u. 1,,1, Sand 2.65 1680 kg/m3
For 1 cu.m. of concrete
Nr=800(3)=l4gg
O What is the combined weight of cement
Gravel 2.50 1525 kg/m3
No. of passenge r/vehicte without
carpool tane: and water in kN?
Nz = 1500(1,2)(1.04) s= V'-v,' Asgume: 1 bag per 0.028 cu.m. of
@ What is the weight of dry-rodded coarse
Nz = 1872 passengers/veh
2g(f + 61 concrele. Use 26 liters of water per bag of
aggregate in kN?
Diff. in passenger/vehicle cement.
= 2400 _ 1g72 _ 105 @ Find the required weight of dry sand in
Diff. in passenger/vehicle . S2g passengers 1

3.6
kN, @ lillhich of the following gives the
quantity of sand, required for a 25
Diff. in vehicles/tr, tT Solufion: cu.m. of concrete of 1;2.5;5 mix. with
= = U0 vehictes / hr V, = 29.17 m/s
1.2 t-1) Combined weight of cement and water the following data given.
,, - 56 @ Which of the following gives the
' 3.6
weioht- of water = 18019i1 quantity of gravel.
1000
Velocity of Cars at Exit V, = 15.b6 m/s Weight of water = 1.7658 kN
Ram Solution ;
from Ex Water cement ratio = 0.62 O Numberof bags of cement required:
'l 5' - 2g(f
Y'-vr', Weioht of water
- = U.62
' cement:
1525(0028)(5)
=0.0136cu.m.
+ 6; Weight of cement 2.50(1000)
drivins at a speed of 105 kph
*:,:llS
arong the NLEX. He intends
t_a
t-- N
weiohtof cemen,=
17658
sand'
1680(0028X2 5)

expressuray using an exit

to teave t'tre s " 062 2.65(1000)
=0.0444cu.m.
ramp going io I Weight of cement = 2.848 kN
San Fern_ando, pampanga witfr
speed of 56 kph. At what point
i niaxirium .
l=--
3.4
cravet'
1525(0'028)(5)
=0.08s4cu.m.
on the Combined wt. of cement and water 2.50(1000)
9.81
erpressway should the motorist.t.p,
j5 in order to reduce fris speeO
on
f = 0.35
= 1.7658 + 2M8 Water: 26 liters = 0.026 cu.m.
!-rrl.t io = 4,61kN
ailowed by the exft ramp
*l-*lT:T lusi
$= Qe.fif
oerore entering the ramp if the rate of - Total vol. ofconcretelbag = 0.1694 cu.m.
oeceleration is 3,4 m/9s62. The
section of 2(e.81X0.35 + 0.03)
? Weight of dry-rodded coarse aggregate
25
rne. expressway has a
downward grade of
W=VD No. of bags of cement needed =0.1694
S - 81.65rn W = 0.37(13.7)
W = 5.10 kN No. of bags of cement needed = 147.58 bags
 112
HIGHW,AY ENGINEERI NG HIGHWAY ENGINEERTNG 113

tD Quantity of sand required:

Vol. of sand=142.5S(2.5)(0.02S) water =* = 0.668 cu.ft. @ Requirement in kg of gravel per cu.m.:
Numberofbagscement= 25 Weight of gravel = 360 (3.25)
Vol, of sand = 10.33 cu.m 4.1447 Total volume = 4.205 cu.ft. Weight of gravel = 1170 kg
Numberofbagscement = 1TZT7 bags
G) Quantity of gravel:
Volume of concrete = 10 cu. m, @ Water-cement ratio of the concrete mix:
Vol. ofgravet = 1aZ.5S(5)(0.28)
@ Volume of sand required: Volume of concrete = 352.88 cu.ft" Volume of water
Vol. of gravel = 20.66 cu.m. 3s2.88 137
S_and = 172.71 (2) (.0283)
Bags of cement = =
Sand = 9.78 cu.m. 4.205 T160
Bags of cement = 83.92 bags = 0.137 cu.m. = 137 liters
@ Volume of slone required:
1.5A4 CE Board Nov. 1988 Stone = 172.77 (4) (.0283) water cement ratio
,2) Volume in cu. m. of sand:
Stone = 19.56 cu.n.
O Which of the following gives I Sand = 83.92(2) =
S = 14.1 titers/bag of cement
the Sand = 167.84 cu.ft.
number of bags of cement required @ Volume of water required:
for
Water
Sand -
4.76 cu.m.
a 25 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2:4 mix
with = 172.7t(26)
the following data.
Cement: Sp. gr.:3.i0
Water = 4492.02liters
Water = 4.492cu.m.
,3) Volume in cu. m. of gravel: {.5O7 GE Board May'1989
Gravel = 83.92(3)
Density = 1506 kg/mr
Gravel = 251.76 cu.ft. The following are the given'data required
Sand: Sp.gr.=2.65 Gravel = 7.13 cu.m. lor a 25 cu.m, of concrete of 1 :2.5:5 mix.
DensitY=1680 kg/ma CE
Materials SpecificGravity Density
Stone: Sp.gr.=2.50
Density=1525 kg/m3 O Which of the following gives l.5OO GE Board May 1995 Cement 3.10 1506 kg/m3

number of bags of cement required Sand 2.65 1680 kg/m3

Use 26 liters of water per bag of 10 cu. m. of concrete of 1:2:3 mixed A 1.0 cu.m. design mix was proportioned at Gravel 2.50 1525 kg/m3
cement. if
gallons of water per bag of cement 1:2.25:3.25. Water content was specified at
used. 137 kg. per cu.m. maximum, and cement O Which of the following gives the
@ Which of the following gives the content is 9 bags per cu.m. (40 kg. per bag number of bags ol cement required.
volume of sand required. One bag of cement (1 cu. ft.) of cement). The specific gravity of cement of
the following gives the
@ Which
@ Which of the following gives the = 94 lb, sp.gr. = 3.10 is 3,15 and that of the fine sand is 2,65 and volume of sand needed for the mixture.
volume of stone required. One cu. ft. of sand weights coarse aggregates is 2.68. @ Which of
the following gives the
@ Which of the following gives the = 105 lb., sp. gr. = 2.65 volume of
gravel needed for the
volume of water required. One cu.ft. of gravel weighs O Which of the following gives the mixture.
= 100 lb., sp.gr. = 2.70 requirement in kg, of fine sand per @ Which of
the following gives the
Solution: cu.m. volume of water needed for the mixture
O Numberof bags of cement: @ Which of the following gives @ Which of
the lollowing gives the in liters.
Materials Volume
volume in cu. m. of sand . requirement in kg of gravel per cu.m.
@ Which of the following gives @ Which of the lollowing gives the water- Assume: 1 bag per 0.028 cu.m. of
cement =':9ry
3.10(1000)
= 0.0137 cu.m.
volume in cu. m. of gravel . cement ratio ol the concrete mix ? concrete, Use 26 liters of water per bag of
cement,
1989( 283X2) Solution:
Solution;
sano =
2.65(1000)
= 0.036 cu.m. O Numberof bags of cement required:
ru Requirement in kg. of {ine sand per cu.m.: Solution:

st ru =
1T:!9?8-3X41
= o.o6ecu.m.
cement =
#&h = 0.086 cu. ft. Weight of cement = 9 (40)
Weight of cement = 360 kg/cu.m
O Number of bags of cement needed:
1 506 (0.028) (5)
2.50(1000) 10s (2)
Sand Cement: = 0.0136 cu.m.
Water' = 0.026 cu.m.
=
2.65 (62.4) = 1.270 cu.ft. Ratioof mixture = 1:2.25:3.25 3.10 (1 000)
Weight of fine sand = 2.25 (360) 1680 (.028X2.5)
Total volume = 0.144T cu.m. Grayel . 100 (3)
2.70 (62.4) = 1.781 cu.ft.
Sand:
2.65 (1 000)
. 0,0444 cu.m
Weight of fine sand = 810 kg/cu.m
 114
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
Hlcrrwav ENGINEERING 115

1525 (.028) (5)

Gravel:
2.50 (1 000) = 0,0854 cu.m. U.l ta Solution: Solution:
Water: 26 liters = 0.026 cu.m.
l Weight of moist sand: O No. of bags of cement required:

Weight of cement = 8.5(40) = 340 kg e4(1)

Cement
3,10(62.4)
= 0,49 ft3
Total vol. ofconcrete/bag
= 0.16g4 cu.m. O [Vhich of the following gives the cost of Weight of sand * 340(2.5) = 850 kg
cement.
Weight of moist sand = 1.05(850) Sand
110(2)
2.65(62.4)
. 1.33 ft3
@ Which of the following gives the cost of
No. of bags of cement needed 25 Weight of moist sand = 892,5 kg 1 00(4)
sand.
=
0.16e4
@ Which of the following gives the cost of
Gravel
2.60(62.4)
= 2.47 $
No. of bags of cement needed
gravel. ,, Amount of water to be added if sand has 7
= 14l.i8 bags Water
745 = 0.94 ft3
5% free water:
Solution: Vol. of concrete/bag =
Excess water = 892.5 - 850 = 42.5 kg
@ Volume of sand needed for the mixture, O Costofcement. 523 ft3
Vol. of concrete required = a (6) (0.2) Amount of water to be added = 140 - 42.5
Vot. of sand = 147.58(2.5)(0.028)
Vol. of concrete required = 4.g cu.m.' Amount of water to be added = 97.5 kg .
Vol. of sand = 10.J3 cu,m Volume of concrete 25(3.28)3
Cement = 4.8 (9) Volume of concrete = 882.19 ft3
@ = 43.2 say 44 bags @ fiA = p4940 , r, Amount of water to be added if coarse
Volume of gravel needed for the mixture.
Vol. ofgravet = 147.5S(5)(0.28) aggregate is to have 2% absorption: No. of bass neeoed =
93#
@ Cost ofsand.
Weight of coarse aggregate = 340(50)
Vol. of gravel = 20.66 cu.m.
Sand = 4.8 (0.51 = 2 4 cu.m No. of bags needed = 169 Dags
@ 500 Weight of coarse aggregate = 1700 kg
Sand = P1200
@ Volume of water needed for the mixture in Water absorbed = 0.02(1700) = 34 kg
liters. @ Costofgravel. Amount of water to be added = 140 + 34 @ Damp loose volume of sand:
Vol. of water = 26 l14T.Sg) Gravel = 4.8(1.0) = 4.8 cu.m
@ 450 Amount of water to be added = 174 kg Dry volume = 169(2) = 338 ft3
Vol. of water = 38il.0g liters Gravel = p2160
Damp loose volume : 338(1"20)

Damp loose volume = 405.6 ft3

405.6
Damp loose votume =
A cy.m. design mix was proportioned 132g13
9ne It is required to produce 25 cu.m. of
A proposed concrete pavement has
at 1:2,5:5. Water content was specified at
a concrete mix of 1:2:4 using 7 gallons ol Damp loose volume = 11.49 m3
dimensions of 4 m. wide anO O m. long by max. of 140 per bag of cement and cement water per bag of cement with the following
conte.nt is 8.5 bags per cu.m. (40 kg per
200 mm in thickness. Unit cost tor ttri
kglbag of cement is p110.00. Unit cost of
d bag of cement). Specific gravity of ceirent,
data.

sand and gravel @ Damp loose volume of gravel;

sand and gravel are pI00 and p4E0 per is 3.16, 2.61 and 2.d Materials Specific Gravity Density
cu.m. respectively. Use the table of respectively. Dry volume = 169(4)
Cement 3.10 94 pcf
concrete proportions per cu.m. of concrete. Sand 2.65 110 pcf Dry volume = 676 fP
Use class A mixture of this type of O Which. oJ the following gives the weight
Gravel 2.60 ,l00 pcf
:
-O% Damp toose volume 676(1.06)
pavement. of moist sand if it is found to have
free water. Damp loose volume = 716.56 ft3
rD which of
the following gives the
CONCRETE PROPORTIONS @ Which of the foltowing gives the number of bags of cement required. 716.56
CIass Mixture amount of water to be added in kg if the (2) Which of the following gives the damp Damp toose votume =
Gement Sand
40 ksl s0 ks cu.m
Gravel
cu.m sand is found to have 5% free water. []g]
loose volume of sand needed in cu.m. if
AA 1:1.5:3 12 9.5 0.50 1.0
@ Which of
the following gives the the bulking factor of sand is 1.20.
Damp loose volume = 20.31 m3
A 1:2:1 9.0 amount of water to be added in kg if the
7.0 0.50 1.0 ro Which of the following gives the damp
B
c
1:2.5:5
1:3:6
7.5 6.0 0,5{, 1.0 coarse aggregate is to have Zo/o loose volume of gravel needed in cu,m.
6.0 5.0 0.50 1.0 absorption.
if the bulking factor of gravel is 1.06.
 116
HI(iHWAY EIvoITvEe RING HIGHWAYENGINEERING 117

@ Weight of gravel needed:

Solution: Q) Weight of sand
Wt. ofgravet = 156(!)(100)(1.02) r Proportion of the mix: = 6.42Q.65)(62.4)
A mixture has
a proportion of
^concrete
T.h.
.
Wt of gravel 47136ib. 1 cu,yd = 27 cu,ft, = 1062 lb.
requirement fer bag of
1:1.i. .
cement is 6.5 ^warer
gallons. The votume- of 47736$.81\
=.+
2.2
Cernent :
tt%m = 0.48 ft3
€r Weight of gravel
concrete under construction is
20 cu.m. - 12.26 (2.65) (62.4)
Water
Materials Specific Gravity Density
= 212859 N
' ,*t = 0.80 ft3
= 2027 lb
= 212.86 kN =.","..".-
Cement 3.14 94 pcf 1.28 ftJ
Sand 2.65 110 pcf
Gravel 2.60 100 pcf @ Weight of waterto be added at the Absolute vol" of cement paste in a cu.yd of
Amount of mixing water that is concrete = 6.5 (1.28) = 8.32 ft3
O Given the following data for a concrete mix
[tlctr of the.foilowing gives the weight
of sand needed in kN if it contains Eyn
in the aggregates Absolute vol. of mixed sand and gravel
ot 1:2;4. Use 6.5 gallons of water per bag
= 27 - 8.32 = 18.68 ft3
of moisture. = 156(2)(110)(0.05) + r5613;1, of cement. One bag of cement = 1 cu.ft. ,

O of the foltowing gives the weight = 2652\b. Volume of concrete = 40 cu.m.

ltr-ictr
of gravel needed in kN if it contains Vot. of sand = = 0.65 ft3
I% @9?J@
@
of moisture,
of the foilowing gives the weight
Total weight of wrr., =
Vol.ofgravet
^ffi
=ffi ' = 0.62 ft3
Materials
Cement
SpecificGravity
3.11
Density
5070
ryTch
of the water to be added to the
mixer in
Total weight of water = g45g lb.
Sand 2.60 48o/o
kN. Amount of water to be added to
the Since 1 cu.ft. of sand is to be mixed with
Gravel 2.76 53%
= 8459 - 2652 2 cu.ft. of gravel.
Solution:
= 25894 N Absolute vol. of gravel = 0.62(2)
O Which of the following gives the weight
O Weighl ofsand needed: of cement in kg.
= 25.89 kN Absolute vol. of gravel = 1.24113
s4(1) @ Which of the following gives the weight
Cemenl Vol. of sand and gravel = 0.65 + 1.24
3.14(62.4) = 0.48 fC of sand in kg.
Vol. of sand and gravel = 1.89 ft3 @ Which of the following gives the weight
Sand
110(2)
= 1.33 ft3 {,5{2' Absolute vol. ot sand =
,0.65 (18.68) of gravel in kg.
2.65(62.4) g

Gravel
100(3) -1f
Absolute vol. of sand = 6.421t Solufion;
2.60(62.4) = 1.85 d A concrete rs to contain 6.5 bags
per cu, yard and ts to have
of Absolute vol. of gravel = 18.68 - 6.42 O Weight of cement:
water , ffi = 0.87 ff
e water
ratio of 6 gallons per bag, The
Absolute vol. of gravel = 12.26 ft3 Cement : 1 (0.50) = 0.50 ft3
dry
Vol. ofconcrete/bag of sand ln the mtx ts to be one half
that
Sand : 2(0.52) = 1.04 fF
Required dry vol. of aggregate per cu.yd of
4.53 ft3 gravel.
concrete:
Gravel : 4(A.47) = 1.88 ft3
b.5
Materials Specific Gravity Sand =ffi =g.aatt'
Water | Ag = 0.87 ft3
Density 7
No. ofbags needed
=29ffi Cement 3.14 94 pcf Total vol.ibag =
No. of bags needed 156 bags
=
Sand 2,65 108 pcf Gravel =ffi = fi.77tf 429 fP
Gravel 2.65 102pct
Weight ofsand = 156(2)(110)(1.05)
Dry vol. of sand per bag of cement No. of bags of cement needed
Weight of sand = 36036 lb O Which of thefollowing gives
proportion of the mix biseO
36036 on =
%T = 1'52 cu n" "ry#=32ebags
= 2T(9.81) aggregates.
@ Which of the following gives the Dry vol. of gravel per bag of cement
= 160688 N ot the sand. Wt. of cement = 0.50(3.1 1)(62.aX329)
. 160.69 kN @ Which of the following gives the
=
T# = r.oo o.
Wt. of cement = 31924 lb.
of gravel.
Required proportion is 1 : 1.52:3.M Wt. of cement = 14,511 kg
 118 HIGHWAY EruciIrueeRING 119
HIGHWI\Y ENGINEERING

@ Weight of sand
= 1.04 (2.6) (62.4) (329)
{.515 Ftqblenr s
['. l.516.r','.',:Problem {,;5'17 ,,,:lProhltent
= 55,512 lb
0n a paving job for the skyway project A concrete mixture of 1:2:3 is to be used in
Types of joints in cement concrete
= 25,233 kg pavements
Taguig, Rizal, it is required to a concrete pavement the sand has a loose
@ Weightofgravel
the length of pavement that can be laid weight of 115 pcf and a moisture content of L Expansion join
hr-day, if we allow 1 min per batch. 12% based on surface dry'weight' How ll. Contracting joint
= 1.88 (2.76) (62.4) (329) I
thickness of the pavement is 8 inches many cubic yards of sand will be needed lll. Warping joint
= 106524 lb
the width is 26 ft. Water.cement ratio
per mile of pavement, using 8 inches
= 48,420 kg unilorm thickness and 24 ft wide. Use 6.5 I and ll only
gallonslbag of cement. Use 1;2;4 mixtui a)
gallons per bag of cement. b) I and lll only
4 Problem Materials Specific Gravity Unit Unit }.lleight
c) ll and lll only
Cement 3,10 94 pcf
Materials Specific Gravity
94 pcf
os d) All of the above
0n a paving job the following materials Sand 2,65 110 pcf
Cement 3.10
are to be used in the proportions 1:2:3 by Sand 2.65 115 pcf
Gravel 2.60 100 pcf
weight with a water.cement ratio of 6 Gravel 2.60 110 pcf
gallons of water per bag of cement. t:${8 ProHem
Determine the quantities of materials Solution:
required per mile of pavement using g.in Solutionl The laysr of the pavement which finally
Materials Volume (cu.ft.)
uniform thickness and 24 ft. width. carries the load from the road is
94(1). Volume (cu.fi.)
Materials
Cement:
3.10(62.4) = 0.49
e4(1)
a) sub-base -.
Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weight b) wearing surface
110(2) Cement: = 0,49
Gement 3.10(62.4)
3.14 94 pcf Sand; - I,JJ c) base course
2.65(62.4)
Sand
Gravel
2.65 110 pcf
100(4) Sand.
11

2.65(62.4)
5(2)
-410 [s d) subgrade
2.60 100 pcf Gravel: .2.47
2.60(62.4)
1 10(4)
Solution; 5 Gravel: = 2.03
Water: 2.60(62.4)
Materials 7.48 -.= Q.6J
Volume (cu.ft.) 6.5
e4(1) Water: = 0.87
Cement: 7.48
3.14(62.4) = 0.48
Total volume The component of the road structure which
= 4.96 ft3
110(2\ receives the traffic load and transfer it to
Sandr = 1.33 Total volume/bag = 4.78 ft3 the subgrade.
2.65(62.4)

Gravel:
100(3)
= 1.85
ru0. oroarches =H a) sub-base
2.60(62.4) of (23i wearing surface
b
No. of batches = 320 batches Tottat vol. concrete needed =5280 I [g
b)

Water: c) base
= 0.80
7.48 Totat vol. of concrete needed = 84480 cu.ft d) formation
Total vol. of concrete for 320 batches 84480
Total volume = 4.46 = 320(4.96)
No. of bags needed=n6-

VoL of concrete needed: = 1587.2t| No. ofbags needed = 17,674 bags

52so#(24) = 84480 cu.ft. 1i87.2=, (# )eu)

Vol. of sand needed = 17674(2X1.12) Soil stabilized roads with cemenUlime
Vol. of sand needed = 39589.76 cu.ft. cannot be used as:
L = 91.57 ftlday
No. ofbags neeOeO =
ffi vol. of sand needed
39589.76
=--Tl- a) sub-base
No. of bags needed = 20308 bags l9 b, wearing surface
Sand = 20308 (2) 40616 cu.ft.
" Vol. of sand needed =1466.29 cu.yards c) base course
Gravel= 20308 (3) =60924cu.ft.
d) sub-grade
 t2U^ H IGHW.AY ENGINEERING

,f-rohliitii.,, i.Wl $
Bitumen stabilization is suitable when the
soil is made up of;
A,layer consisting of properly designed The layer of natural soil over which the A road made of coanie aggregate
mix od course aggregate fine aggregate, a pavement of a road is laid is called: mechanically interlocked by rolling and
* a/ filler and a bituminous binder is iitteO: bonded together with screening dust is
sandysoi/s
b) Ig a) subgrade _.
called

c)
clayey soils a) bitumen carpet
b) sub-base a) rigid
d)
silty soils b) penetralion macadam
c) base lg bl water bound macadam
peaty soils
* c/ asphalticconcrete wearing coarse
d) bitumen macadam
d)
c) flexible
d) lone of the above

A prime coat over a road surface consists

ofa_. The layer a
in road pavement which An application of hot bitumen material
A,.mixture of bitumen, fine aggregate and provides resistance to wear and tear due to
* al thin fitm of low viscosig filler in suitable proportion heiied-to about
given to the old surface to
provide
traffic is called: adhesion to the old and new road surface
bituminous cutback 200"C in special cookers and laid is calledl
b) application of bitumen over which a) sub-grade
is called_ .

stone chippings are spread a) surface dressing b) sub-base a) seal coat

c) thin application of bitumen blinded r€' b/ mastic asphalt
c) base b) prime coat
by sprinkling sand lrf d) wearing coarse * c) tackcoat
d) grant of bitumen over which key
d)
asphaltic concrete
bitumen carpel d) surface dressing
stones are laid

The part of the road structure which is A layer of stone chippings coat laid over a
The layered structure placed over a soil imrnediately above the sub-grade and hot to make the surface water-proof is
One or more layers of crushed aggregate,
which are bonded by bituminous mateiiats sub-grade for forming a road is called: composed of stone boulders or superior _.
called
soil is called:
and a seal coat laid on top is called: a) seal coat
a) sub-base
a) sub-grade [€ 0 prime coat
a) tar carpet b) sub-grade
c) tack coat
b) penekation macadam c) base
ug" b) sub-base
c) bituminous macadam !g- d/ pavement
c) base d) surface dressing
Bg' d/ surfacedresslng
d) wearing coarse

The application of one or two layers of

bituminous material over a prepared base
A pavement which has negligible flexural each layer covered with an application of
A 20 mm thick premix bitumen layer over The top surface of a road structure is
strength is called: cover material and rolled is called
which is laid a seal coat is called: termed as:

a) surface dressing a) rigid a) sub-grade

a) seal coat

b) penehation macadam rs" b) sub-base

b) prime coat

*' c)
b) flexible
[s-
c) tack coat
hitumen carpet macadam c) base [g 4 surtacedressing
d) bitumen macadam d) all of the above d) wearing coarse
-

122 HIGHWAY ENGIN EERING HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 123

{.S3?r:r:.:Probl6m
1,$4? ProHain
L r.ry thin surface applied over a Wherever work of constructing a Refers to the structural adequacy of the
bituminous pavement, to make it aorar*l A type of rigid pavement, which has no
cement pavement is suspended, the join{ transverse joints, except construction pavement section.
rmperytous is called
provided is called
_. joints or expansion joints when they are
*a) pavement deflection
*a) necessary at specific positions such as at
sea/ coaf a) hansverse joint pavement distress
bridges. This type of pavement is typically b)
b) prime coat b) longitudinal joint used on high.volume, high.speed c) pavement roughness
c) tack coat c) expansion joint d) skid resistance
roadways.
d) surface dressing 0s d) construction joint
a) Plain concrete pavement
b) Simply reinforced concrete
1.548 Problein
1.538' 'Probtem pavement
*c) Continuously reinlorced Describes the effectiveness of a pavement
The time for mixing of ingredients for concrete pavements to prevent or reduce skid related crashes.
a A type of rigid pavement, which has
concrete cement road should be done d) Flexible concrete pavement
for temperature steel or dowels lot the
at least _ .
transfer, This type of pavement is
a)
b)
crack resistance
patching resistance
mainly on low.volume highways OI c) raveling resistance
a) 2.5 min. *c/ 1.5 min. cement stabilized soils are used as re
b) 3 min. d) 2 min. base material. 1.546 Problem d) skid resistance

*- a/ plain concrete pavement The measurement of the extent to which a

{.53$ Froblem b) Simply reinforced road surface deviates from the plane is 1.549: Problem
pavement called:

The number <if days final curing for c) Continuously reinforced The following are the type of stresses that

concrete cement pavement is done

a
pavements a) pavement deflection are developed in rigid pavements.
ior d) Flexible concrete pavement
b) pavement distress
rs c) pavementroughness a) Stress induced by traf{ic loads
a) 21 days * c/ l4days d) skid resistance
b) Shess due to temperature changes
b) 12 days d) 18 days
c) Stress induced by bending
{ !g O Ail of .the above

{
t.55O Problem
Joints provided in
concrete cement Refers to the condition of a pavement in
pavements at right angles to No Passing Zone is defined as:
the centre line terms of its general appearance.
of,the pavement is called .-.-
. throughout the slab,
a) pavement deflection
a) any section of the road is not
passable
* a/ transversejoint a) Plain concrete pavement Bs b) pavemenf disfress b) any section of the road is closed
b) longitudinaljoint [9 b) Sinply . reinforced concrete c) pavement roughness temporarily for traffic
c) expansion joint pavement d) skid resistance * c) any section of the road with a
d) construction joint
c) Continuously reinforced concrete passlng sight distance of 460 m.
pavements or ress
d) Flexible concrete pavement d) All ofthe above
 124 H IGHW AY ENGI N TERI NG HIGHWI\Y ENGINEERING 125"

Capacity for two-lane highways

Effective
roadway width due to WI:1
Determine the length of the gap in sec. The geometrical shape of School Crossing
from:
ranges of signs.
between vehicles A and B traveling along
if
the highway the headway between a) Octagon c)
a) 1000 to 1S00 passenger oar vehicles A and B is 4 sec. The length of the
[s' 0) Pentagon d)
Circle

equivalents per hour lead vehicle is 6.2 m. long and travels at a Triangle
b) 1500 to 2000 passenger car Given: speed of 12.5 m/sec. The length of gap will
equivalents per hour Approach width of road = 9.15 m. determine the number of cross street
* c/ 2000 to 2800 passenger car Distance from the parked car to the stop vehicles thal can enter the intersection per
equivalents per hour line = 10.7 m. cycle.
d) 2800 1o 3000 passenger Green time (K) = 26 sec. The geometric shape of No Passing Zone
car
equivalents per hour Compute the approach roadway width due Solution: warning signs.
to the effect of the parked vehicle.
GaP=1i -
L a) Pentagon
Loss of width = 1.tB -
o'9(z ' 7'6)
ui b) Trapezoid
K
62 c) Octagon
Gao=4-
' =3.5seconds 0g' d) Pennant with longer dimension
Solution: 125
horizontal
Factors affecling capacity and service 09(9 15- 76)
Lossofwidth= 1 66- = 1 s7m
volumes on freeways and multilane
hiEhways. Effective approach roadway width = 9.1S - 1"57 {.563' ,'Ftthl6m
a) Roadway factor
Effective approach roadway width = 7.ig m The geometrical shape of warning signs The geometric shape of recreational use
b) Traffic factor
used in traffic control, guide signs.
c) Conlrol factor
a) Rectangle c) *_
fl€ 4
Trapezoid
a) Circle c) Trapezoid
Alloltheabove b) Pentagon !g 4 Diamond b) Pentagon d) Octagon
The time interrral between the arrival of a
vehicle wishing to cross an uninterrupted
stream of vehicles on an intersecting path {;S8'i[r' "Pibblom;
ahd the arrival of the next vehicle in that
stream is known as; The geometric shape of Stop sign.
The geometrical shape of regulatory signs
Vehicles attempting to make a left turn and
caught within the intersection at the end of
* a/ tag c) headway
used in traffic control: a) Circle c) Trapezoid

b) d) * a) b) Pentagon rg d) Octagon
the signal phase are expected to discharge gap time delay Rectangle c) Trapezoid
at headways ol _ sec. and delay the b) Pentagon d) Diamond
cross traffic accordingly.

a) 1.5 sec. c) 3.0 sec.

[g' b/ 2.5 sec. d) 2.0 sec. The separation between the corresponding The geometric shape of Yield sign.
points on two successive vehicles minui
the separation occupied by a vehicle is The geometric shape of guide signs used * a) Equilateral triangle with one
known as: in traffic control. point down
b) Trapezoid
a) lag c) headway * a) Rectangle c) Trapezoid c) Rectangle
[S b) gap d) time delay b) Pentagon d) Triangle d) Circle
 126 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING Hreuwav ENGtNEERTNe 127

The geometric shape used for Railroad Localized upward buckling and shattering
Cracks approximately at right angles to the of the surface
Progressive disintegration of the slabs at transverse joints or cracks.
Crossing Advance warning sign and for pavement centerline. These may be
caused between the wheel paths caused by They can occur when transverse joints are
Civil Defense Evacuation Route Marker.
by shrinkage or differential thermal stress dripping of gasoline or oil from vehicles. filled with incompressible solid malerials.
of the asphalt concrete or maybe reflective
*a/ Circle cracks. a) Spalling * a) Blowups c) Spalling
b) Triangle b) Flushing b) Raveling d) Faufting
Trapezoid a) Alligator cracking c) Bleeding
d) Pentagon b) Block cracking !.,,- d) Driptrackraveling
[9 c)
d)
Iransyerse cncking
Longitudinal cracking
t.576 Prohlem
The breakdown or disintegration of slab
edges at joints or cracks, usually resulting
in the loss of sound concrete and the
A series of interconnected progressive widening of joint or crack.
or interjaced The exuding of bitumen onto the pavement
cracks caused by fatigue failure of the surface, causing a reduction in skid
asphalt concrete surface under repeated a) Joint abrasion
Cracks approximately parallel tothe
resislance. lt is generally caused by
traffic loading. b) Joint raveling
pavement centerline. These are excessive amounts of asphalt in the mix or
caused by
poorly constructed construction joints low air voids content. lt occurs when
*cl Joint spalling
* a/ Altigator cncking shrinkage of asphalt concrete su*ace,
and
asphalt fills the voids in the mix during hot d) Joint flushing
b) Block cracking weather and then exudes out onto the
c) Transverse cracking a) Alligator cracking surface of the pavement.
d) Longitudinalcracking b) Block cracking I Problem
c) Transverse cracking a) Spalling
os d) LongitudinaI cracking
b) Raveling Abnormal sudace wear, usually resulting
IIH c) Bleedingorflushing from poor quality surface mortar or coarse
1,568 d) Abrasion aggregate.

Cracks forming large

*a) Surtace attrilion
interconnected
polygons, b) Surface polish
usually with sharp corners or
c) Surface spalling
angle. These cracks are generally caused
Wearing way of the pavement surface d) Surface raveling
by hardening and shrinkage of thi asphalt
cau_1e! by dislodging of aggregated
and or reflection cracking from underiying particles and binder. This is uiuatty Elevation differences between adjacent
rayers such as cement.treated base. a
result of insufficient asphalt binder in the glabs at transverse joints. lt is usually the
mix or stripping of asphalt from particles of result of pumping and is a major source of 1.578 Problem
a) Alligator cracking Portland concrete pavement failure.
aggregate,
rs, b) Block cracking
Loss of the original texture due to the
traffic action.
c) Transverse cracking a) Joint or crack spalling
a) Spalling
d) Longitudinal cracking b) Flushing x$'b/ Faulting
a) Surface attrition
c) Bleeding c) Bleeding
os polbh
os d, Raveling d) Raveling bl Surface
c) Surface spalling
d) Surface raveling
 12A Hre irw,qy EruorrueERl
HIOnwav ENGINEERING 129
Solution: ,
O Vol. of traffic across the bridge @ Total revenue with the new toll fee
I
Metro Cebu has a population of 1g M
V=3400-10C X
R=VC
V = 3400 - 10(40 + 0.4V) R. 7000(350) . P2,450,00a per day

4v
people with an average vehicle ownership The volume of traffic passing thru the new
of 2 |
cars per person. Each car wiil - Marcelo Fernan Bridge connecting
consume 15 km per liter. lf it is
driven I;j133;4oo Mandaue City and Lapu-Lapu City is 8000
30,000 km per year, how much tax increase I vehicles per day when the toll fee is P3 per
per liter toraise 800 M for highway V = 600 vehictes/hr vehicle. lf the toll lee increases by 50
Itr$S&::l::r::r,Ffrohl*tnn
maintenance per year? I centavos, the volume of traffic will
O Vol. of traffic if the toll fee of 30 ..nturo{
decrease by 1000 vehicles/day.
The speed of the car taking the Kennon
was added in orderto cross the bridoe il Road to Baguio City is 60 kph. A warning
Solution:
C=40+0.4V+30 " I o Determine the toll charge in order to
sign is placed 100 m. from the hazard
No. ofvehicles = 18,000,000(2) = 36,000,000
No. of km driven per year = 36,000,000(20,000)
;=ffiii:, t @
maximize the revenue,
Determine the traffic volume per day after
ahead due to landslide, The reading
distance of the driver is 20 m. while in

"'
motion and the perception reaction time is
the toll fee increases.
721 1 0n (0 5 sec. lf the skid resistance of the level
No. of liters consumed per year = Determine the total revenue with the new
road is 0.40, determine the legibility
15 J = liSi_ ;:l':;,' I toll fee.
distance ol the warning sign from the
No. of liters consumed per year. 4g00 x 106 liters 5V = 2700 I Solution:
driver.
V = 540 vehictes/hr
Letx=taxincrease
(il Toll charge in order to maximize the revenue
Solutian:
4800 x 106 x = 800,000,000
@ Amount of toll fee to yield highest
I V Booo-
looo(x)
x= P4.17 =
50 '!, ; '1"
for case "a"
c=40+0.4v+T New toll fee charge : C = 300 + x (centavos)

R=VC 'l
. .580 V.3400_10(40+0.4V+T) i
1000^
V=3000-4V-107 ft= 8000 - (300 + x;
I 50
The San Juanico Bridge connecting 20 trr lkrk irr!
betureen Samar and Leyte was constructed
5V=3000-107 I P =(8000-20x)(300+x) Disunca Ilistrr.c
.r
with a total cost (excluding toll fees) to ,,- 3000-107 kgibility dislane.
travel across the bridge, which is 5
$dx = leooo - 20x)(1) + (300 + x;1- zo; = o

expressed as a cost function:

:
6 (40 + 0.4V) where C is in cents per Revenue generated : 8000-20x=20(300+x)
Reaction distance = Vt
vehicle and V is vehicle per hour. 8000-20x.6000+20x
R=VT 6oooo
Demand funclion is 3400 - l0C. 40x = 2000 v= = 10.67
D_ (3000-10T)T x = 50 centavos
3600
5 Reaction distance . 16.67(5)
O Evaluate the volume of lraffic (in
x+ 300. 350 centavos = P3.50 (total charge ' 83.35 m

vehicles/hour) across the bridge. ^

t( =
3000T -
____ 10T'? to max. revenue)
Brakinodistance=
v2
-2g(f+G)
@ lf a 30 cenlavo toll was added to the J "
original cost function, what is the new
_dR= 3000 - 207 O Traffic volume per day after the loll fee
volume of traffic (veh/hr) crossing the (16'67)'
bridge?
dt5 -- =L) increase
-
Brakinq distance =2(e.81)(0.4 + 0) = 35.41
looo(50)
@ Evaluate the amount of toll fee to yield _l=-=l5ocentavos
3000 V=Sooo-
AN
20+83.35r35.41=x+100
the highest revenue for the first
condition. V =7(ffivehicls I day
x= 38.76m
T= P1.il
,r-

130 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING

I
Chapter
TRANSPORTATION and
,.583
A driver of a car moving at 50 kph observes
So/ufion;
x = increase in toll fee in centavos
I

-
2 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
Soox
a warning sign ahead of him. After moving v-s120-
50
32 m., he starled to read the sign then the
distance traveled while reading the sign V=5120-16x
until he finished reading the sign is 20 m.
Toll iee.x+200 . Toll Booth
At the moment he finished reading the
sign, it was observed that side mounted Total revenue:
sign has a lateral offset of 1,80 m. from the *. a
R=(5120-16x)(x+200)
path of the driver and the limit of rl il!
tll
I
comfortable vision of the sign is 10" for -
dR
= (5120 - 16x)(1) + (x + 200)(- 16) = 0
side mounted sign. Compute the legibility 0x
distance of the warning sign from the point
where the driver observes,the sign. 5120- 16x = 16(x + 200)
',i
32x.5120 - 16(200)
Solufion:
x " 60 centayos
Iti*t liilrli l)tt,) \rrj,h,

. Curve Highway
:0 nr
I Frqblem
A local tourist will pay P300 for each hour
L = legibility distance save when marking a trip from Manila to
L=x+20+12 Baguio which is 280 km from Manila.

tan 10'= llao Cost of Travel lime oftravel

X By air: P6000 2 hrs.

x = 10.21 m
By train: P4500 4 hrs.
By car: P3000 7 hrs,
L= 10.21 + 20 + 32
Which mode will make this trip economical
L= 62.21 m.
and how much will it cost him? . Train
So/ution:

l;584' Probliiih By air: Total cost = 6000 + 2(300) = P6600

By train: Total cost = 4500 + 4(300) = P5700

The current demand (flow of haffic) of the By car: Total cost * 3000 + 7(300) = P5100
Old Mactan Bridge is 5120 vehicles per day
when the toll fee is P2 per vehicle. The
By car is economical with a cost of P5100
demand will decrease by 800 vehicles per
only.
day for each 50 centavos increase in toll.
Determine the amount of toll increase in
order to maximize the revenue.
 ATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 133
pter
Cha
Trasnportation & Traffic E ngineeri
2 -oj:+ "#fr6 .Sl')e .ffi.*,1'ln tr..rffi, 2.71 Problem,

Ihe crossing of two or more traffic streams The speed distribution of vehicles at a
traveling in the same general direction point on the roadway and it is the average
olong a significant path of highway without ol instantaneous speeds of observed
the aid of traffic signals' vehicles at the sPot'
2,, .,,CE,Eoard.May,2O{6 I Z.a Problem
a) Crossover a) instantaneous sPeed
It is defined as the number of vehicles per The max. number of passenger cars b) Cross moving b) average sPeed
unit distance occupying a section of can pass a given point on a lane ItrY g) Weaving
c) space mean sPeed
roadway al a given instant time and is roadway during one hour under the d) Permanence
og 4 time-mean speed
usually measured in vehicles per mile or nearly ideal roadway and traffic
per km. which can possibly be attained,

* a) a) Traffic volume 2.8 Problem

Densig c) Flow
b) Capacity d) Volume b) Traflic capacity
of a vehicle at a
c) Traffic density The instantaneous speed

rg d rpecified section or location. The average speed maintained by a vehicle

Basiccapacig
over a particular stretched of road, while
2.2 Problem a) average speed
running speed
the vehicle is in motion, This is obtained by
b) dividing the distance covered by the time
The number of vehicles moving in a
I?.5., .., Broblem c) travel speed
during which the vehicle is in motion.
specilied direction on a given lane or lr,)' d) spofspeed
The max. number of passenger cars
roadway that pass a given point during a) spot speed
can pass a given point on a lane
specified unit time and is usually roadway during one hour under rs b) running speed
expressed as vehicles per hour or vehicles
per day.
roadway and traffic conditions. 2,9 :,, ,,P?oDIGm c) travel speed
d) space-mean sPeed

[9 *a) Possible capacity The average of the spot speeds of all

a) Trafftcvolume
b) Practical capacity vehicles passing a given point in the
b) Traffic capacity highway.
c) Basic capacity
Traffii densig
c)
d) Basic capacity
d) Theoretical maximum capacity
,'" 2.1! Problem
a) average speed
b) running speed
r',blrl*lii The time interval between the passage of
2i6 ::' :l:ri' c) travel speed
successive vehicles moving in the same
2.t d) spot speed
lane and measured from head to head as
The max. number of vehicles that can
they pass a Point on the road'
The ability of a roadway to accommodate a given point on a lane or roadway
traffic volume. lt
is expressed as the one hour without traffic density being
great as to cause unreaSonable
2"1,O ::, Pro&l*m 0g a) Time headwaY
maximum number of vehicle in a lane or a
Time of travel at a spot speed
road that can pass a given point in unit hazard, or
restrictions the to The average speed of vehicles in a ce(ain
b)
a time
freedom to maneuver under lhe c) Time o{ travel at mean
time, usually an hour, that is vehicles per road length at anY time. speed
hour per lane or roadway. roadway and traffic conditions.
d) Time of travel at a space-mean

a) Traffic volume
,* a) Practical capacity a) instantaneous sPeed speed
average sPeed
ra b) Tratfrc capacity
b) Possible capacity
,."
b)

c) Traffic density
c) Traffic capacity C) spacemean sPeed

d) Basic capacity
d) Theoreticalcapacity d) spot speed
 134 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
TRANSF,oRTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 135

t"
tr,&{f ,:::r:i i,rii pnilil&lh,:
The distance between successive vehicles
moving in the same lane measured from An expressway with full control of
Minimum sight distance required on a two. The location of super elevation
head to head at any instance, lane, two-way highway that will permit a development onto circular curves has been
lg a) space-hoadway
a) Freeway driver to complete a passing maneuver continuous concern to
designers
oe b/ Expressway without colliding with an opposing vehicle throughout the world. This concern is due
b) merging
and without cutting off the passed vehicle. to the fact that design super elevalion is
c) clear spacing between vehicles c) Parkway
1l
not available for the curve radius at the
d) space between vehicles d) Highway
a) overtaking sight distance P.C. This results in the
vehicle
experiencing 2 to 3 sec. where lateral
b) non-passing sight distance
acceleration tends to force the driver to
.et5 *c) passing srghl distance adopt a natural spiral curve during entry
2.t9 d) stopping sight distance and exit. This problem can be prevented
The didance ahead that must be clear by:
to
permit safe passing is called:
An arterial highway for
a) Widen the curve to give drivers this
rg a) passing sigff distance
traffic with full or partial control of
extra width as well as to give
and usually located within a park.
b) sight distance additional width for swift path of
c) non-passing distance large vehicles.
d) braking distance a) Freeway The length of super elevation development r€ D) Provide a proporlion of supu
b) Expressway from zero cross slope to futl design super elevalion run off. This proportion
* c) Parkway
elevation in a circular curve alignment.. tends to minimize the adverse
d) Highway
*a)
etfects of lateral acceleration and
improves the salety of the
Super elevation run ott
The ratio behveen parallel forces divided
b) Tangent run off
transition ftom tangent to
by the normal forceg is known as: circularcurue,
c) Transition curve
c) Provide traffic lights at the point of
a) skid resistance d) Tangent distance transition from tangent to circular
b) coefficient of friction
curve.
c) coefficient of adhesion and Minimum sight distance required for d) Provide pavement markings at the
hysteresis point of transition from tangent to
driver to stop
r€ 4 Ntoltheabove
vehicle after seeing
circular curve.
object tn the vehicle's path without 2.trS] Frcttem
that object. This distance ts the 3Um of
distance traveled during The length of super eleyation development
reaction time and the distance
from the normal cross slope to the zero
during braking.
cross slope point onthe tangent,
Divjded arterial highway for through traffic
with full or partial control of aciess and a) The longitudlnal profile along the
sight distance
a) Transition curve centerline of the road. lt is made up of a
generally with grade separations at major b) braking distance
rg' series of grades and vertical curves.
intersections. Tangent run out
c) passing sight distance
b)
c) Super elevation run off of a portion of
a) Freeway 0€ d) stoppingsightdistance
a) Cross-section the
[8 b) Expressway
d) Tangent distance roads on ve(ical curves
b) Elevations of point on the curve
c) Parkway
c) Tangent offsets
d) Highway
rg' d, Vertical alignnent
136 TRA NSPORTA Tto N & TRAFFI c E NG
NE ER IN G TRANSPoRT,ATIoN & TRAFFIC TNGIN EERING 137

M inimum Radius of
v2 6) Max. speed at which a car can Solutron;
Curvature for Horizontal R
round a curve without
s(e+0
Curves skiddin
\12
u'f1ooo )'
tan(0+ot)=l 0:15
w
ft= | 3600 i gr
s(e+0
O= angle of banking
V2 \
R tanct=u
(3.6)'zg(e + f)
wvz /gR V = max. speed in m/s

R=127(t v' r= radius of curue

+ s1 gr
g = 9.81 m/secz
Si

'.!
Min. radius of curvature
e
2.28'.t.'- GE Board Hov. 1998 R
V'
R=
127 @+11 A highuay curve has a super elevation of
R = min, radius of curuature 7". Find the radius of the curve so that For small angles Sin e = tan 0
e = super elevation in m/m there will be no lateral pressure be$reen
w
f= coeff. of side friction or skid
the tires and the roadway at a speed of 40
Sino=
015
reslsfance mph? 1.5
w
wY2tgR V= design speed in kph
0.15
Solution: tan0=-
V = design speed in kph
V=40mph 1.5
.?.l ree of c urvature:
e = super elevation ,,_ 40(5280) a-E
gr
WV2
tan0=-
f= side fiction ^
_ 1145.916
grw
3600(3.28)
R = min. radius of curuature in m. R
V = 17.89 nfsec. v2
D = degree of curyature in degrees
It2
R tane=
R = radius of curuature in meiers gr
tan(o*q1=S( tane=l 0
gr
gR l, Centrifugal ratio or im pact 0.15 V2

W factor; 1rn 7'=

(17'89)'
1.5 9.81(420)
I t2 9.81r
tan(s+q)={ =I
lmpactfactor V = 20.30 m/s
r = 265.71 m.
gR gr
gr \/_ 20.30(3600)
tano+tan0
'-
V = design speed of car in koh
tan(o+o,) 1000
1-tanotanrr g = 9.81 m/secz
r = radius of curvature in meters Y = 73.70 kph
tan o =e (suprebvatian)
Z.ZFi;iCf Board llov. 2OO{
tan q, =f gldefridion) '4'.
ldeal an e of embankm ent:
tan(o+s1--!11 A raihvay curve having a radius of 420 m.
1-ef tano=f has a distance between their rails of 1,5 m.
1 - ef = almost to zero
gr and the outer rail is 15 cm.'higher than the 2.2A GE Board illay 2O15
Eual
9 = 9.81 m/se inner rail. Find the max. speed that a train
v2
=e+f 0 = angle of embankment could move along this curve so that there Compute the impact factor for a horizontal
-gR V = vel. of a car in m/s will be no lateral pressure on the wheels curve radius of 400 m lf the design speed
r = radius of curue in m. and the rails. is 120 kph.
 13a TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 139

Solution:
\12
.
tano=
WV, V' \12
tan(o+01 = R=
lmpact factor = -a -. gM gr 127(e + f)
gr
.v2
tano=-
,, _ 120000 gr tan 49.4'' I ft=
gr 127(0,08 + 0.16)
3600
.
lana= ' (13.33)'?
'
V = 33.33 m/s V'? = 9.81(100) tan 49"4' R= 82.02
9.81(121.e5)

(33 $)'? g = 8.45' rl

ll V = 33.83 m/s
lmpacr factor =
9.81(400)
. . 33.83
(3600)
2.32 Problem
lmpactfactor - 0.283 1000
When aligning a highway in a built up area,
V = 121.79kph
it was necessary to provide a horizontal
The rated speed of a highway curve of
circular curve of radius 325 m. lf the design
m. radius is 65 kph. lf the coefficient
speed is 65 kph, determine the super-
friction between the tires and the road
elevation rale.
A highway curve having a radius of 400 ft. 0.60, what is the maximum speed at
is banked so that there will be no lateral car can round the curye *nn.rl Super-Elevation of
Solution;
pressure on the car's wheel at a speed of skidding? Horrzontal Curves
Super-elevation to fully counter-act centrifugal
48 kph. What is the angle of elevation of
Solution: force use only750,6 of the design speed.
the embankment?
e.Slt (0.75 V)'
Solution:
e=-
127 R
A delivery truck of Johnson and Sons lnc.
w
passes thru the expressvuay exlt ramps at a _ [0.75(65)]'?
N design velocity of 50 kph connects with a 127(325\
w local road in a T-intersection. A separate
lane is provided on the local road to allow e = 0.058
ramp traffic to turn right without stopping
wv2/, WV2/gr at an acceleration of 1.57 m/s2. The turning
roadway has stabilized shouldes on both
tr
cides and provide for a one lane one-way
a33
operation with no provieions for a passing Compute the ruling minimum radius of
,,_ 65(1000)
stalled vehicle. Super elevalion on the
3600 horizontal curve for a design speed of 80
N tuming roadway is 0.08. Determine the kph.f=0.15,e=0.067.
V = 81.06 m/s. minimum radius of curvature for the ramp
in metirc. Solution;
r=
400 tane = { (V + 16)'
gr p =(f + e)(127) For rulinq min.increase fhe
3,281 Solulion;
- (18'06)'? design Jpeed by 16 kph.
R = 121.95 m. 13n g = ._a
l--
e.81(100) g
f = 0.15
V = 48kph
0 = 18.4' e = 0,067 (standard values)
,,_ 49000 .
t- 1.57
tan o = 0.60 (80+16)'?
3600
g=31"
9.81
^_
0.217(127l,
V = 13.33 m/s f = 0.16
R.33Lt10m.
 "l

140 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC EN G N EERI N (,

TRANSPoRTI\TION & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING 141

2.34 Problem 2.36 Problem

A pavement 12 m. is to be super.elevated
FUNDAMENTALS OF ffiiTEEd
- the actual distance along the raad
The radius of a horizontal curve is 100 TRATFIC FIOW
meters. lf the design speed is 50 kph and to allow safe negotiation of a 2"30, circular sulace at which a driver from a specifbd
the design coefficient of lateral friction is curve at a design speed of 60 kph. What height above the caniageway has
0.15, calculate the eguilibrium super. will be the theoretical difference in
A. Theoretical max. capacity in visibility of objects which are either
elevation if the pressure on the inner and olevation between opposite edges of the vehicles per hour stationary or moving.
outer wheels should be equal. pavement? ^! - the length of the road visible head to
the diver at any instance
Solution: Solution: t, t"

lfthe coefficient of friction is neglected or D = 2"30' sn

D Distance:
assumed to be zero, the required super-
*= sD=vt +
v'
elevation required to counteract the centiiugat
# =4sl.3tm
^ _1000v
2gt
force will be equal , f=h the super- R-
\t2
s
127e where: Braking Distance:
elevation e provided will cause the pressure
(60)' Q= capactty of traffic lane in w
on the inner and outer wheels wilt be equal..
V'
4s8.:z =
127e
vehicles/hour b :.! )
v2

R= e.0.06184
V = speed oftraffrc in kph
127e S = average center to center spacing of r=f N
Diff. in elevation = 12(0.06184) vehicle
(Sof I
,=BEking Distance
too = Diff in elevation = 0.742 m.
127e B. Braking distance
Using Work-Energy Equation from O to @:
e.0,197 lw
!+ | , v'=02 Positive Work - Negative Work
2.S?:,.,,.;'r, fiICrti r{,t''-d EgI'nF = Change in K.E.
2.35 ' :.'Frot'|em A ramp from NLEX going to Angeles City
,t*n" V,+ t,+ Vz=O

gonnects with a local road forming a T.

,-llril[iDB t)isuncc
.6'b
41.b r=rkriD '6.-r
Determine the radius of a horizontal curve rin.
where:V in kph
intersection. The design speed on the
^ lmv
"
for a design speed of 50 kph as specified expressway is 48 kph. An additional lane is (/=- C invehicles / hr
vtt
sI)
D

by the specifications in lateral friction and provided on the local road to allow vehicles
s
S rn melers
super-elevation.
on the ramp to turn right onto the local
road without stopping. The turning road S=SD+ I- 0-FD=yfu: -v,\t
Solufibn;
has a mountable curb which will provide SD. safe stopplng distance
29"
f = 0"15 inclination 0 with the horizontal for a one.lane, one.way operation with
should not exceed 4'. provision for passing a stalled vehicle. lf sD=vf+
v' 1ir*r1ro1 -t N o=Y0-v')
2sf 29'
tano=e the curve has a super.elevation of 0.0g and
a frictional faclor of 0.16, compute the where:
e = 0.06993
minimum radius of the turning road. V=inm/s -f w D=-Lv'
\t2 29
R= ' + f = coeff. of fiction
127$ e) Solution: t= reaction time g=v' 15rr1r;nodrbtance)
(50)' R=127(e v' S.D. = reacllon distance (lag distance) Zsf
ft= + braking distance
+ f1
127(0.15 + 0.0S993) Reaction distance = Vt whereV is in m /s

R = 89.51rn f= = 75.59 m
rt2
v
127(0.08 + 0 16) "
Brakino distance=
2sf
Stopping distancu SD =W *
#
 142 TRANSPORTA TION & TRA FFIC EN GI NE ER IN G TRANSPoRTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 143

E. Stopping Distance (in terms

of acceleration 2.49 Proilem 2.& Problem v'=vf -Zas,
s = (22,36)'? - 2(10)5,
t/ -rrrr> Vr+ v z=o
The time linked with the two stages Distance traveled by the vehicle after the
a
-'i> perception and intellection based on a application of the brakes until it will stop. S, =25m'
particular traffic situation like fear or anger
S= 44.72+ 25
v which has a vital influence on the fi;al
'
'" a) braking distance
SD
message or decision sent by the brain to b) lag distance
S = 69.72 m.
the muscle is called: c) reaclion distance x=tl-69.72
V'=V,' -2aD a) Perception c) Volition
d) stopping distance x= 10.28 m.
ug' ry Emotion d) lntellection
0=V,' 2aD 2.49 CE Board eorS
V,,
ff: 2.41 Pnililbm The driver ol a car travelling at a certain
2a speed suddenly sees an obstruction ahead A driver traveling at 50 mph sees a wall at a
The time of taking a decision to produce and traveled a distance of 58.3 m. during cerlain distance ahead. The driver applies
SD= Vt +D
1
action to a particular traffic .situation is the perception time of 1.3 sec. Determine the brakes immediately (perception time is
called: the cafs speed of approach in kph. 3 seconds) and begins slowing the vehicle
SD= vrt + Y
2a a) Perception time Solution:
at 6 mlsec2 (decelerating). ll the distance
b) Emotion time
S"Vt
from the stopping point to the wall is 12 m.,

2.38 * c/ Volitiontime how far was the car fiom the wall upon
Problem d) 58.3 = V(1.3) perception?
lntellection time
V- 44.846 m/s
Time required for transmission of
the kph Solution:
sensations received (through eyes, ears 2.42 Problem
Y = 161.4
vt V Y14
and body) to the brain and the spinal chord .--.lr- ."-.!>- -+-
by the nervous system, to a particular The total time required for perception, 2.4s: Board ilov, til
ttaffic situation. intellection, emotion and volition that is
from the instant the object comes in the A driver traveling at 50 mph is 80 m. from a
[s a/ Percepfion time
line of sight of the driver to the instant he wall ahead" lf the driver applies the brakes s
arrives a decision, say to slow down or
b) Emotion
ove(ake, under normal circumstances is
immediately (perception time is 2 seconds)
c) Volition and begins slowing the vehicle at 10
called; m/sec2 (decelerating), find the distance V = 50(5280)3600(3.28)
d) Intettection
a) Perception-volitiontime from the stopping point to the wall. Y = 22.36 mls
b) Perception-emotiontime
Solution: S,=Yt
A;ag ',.,lftobtC*fi...',: c) Perceptionreactiontime
s, - 22.36(3)
ug 4 Reaction time vt vr4
+ S, = 67.08 m.
After perception occurs, the formation of
new thoughts and ideas, recall,ng old Yi =Yl '2as,
memories of similar occasions to a
&4$ .';11.;rP.is61g*'-
(0)'? = (22.36)'? - 2(6) S,
particular traffic situation. Distance traveled by the vehicle during the
total reaction time.
S, = 41.66 m.

a) Perception V*50mph
S, =Vt Distance from wall upn perception
b) Emotion
D€ b)
a) braking distance
,,_ 50(5280)
s, S=67.08+41.66+ 12
c) Volition lag distance 3600 (3.28)
= 22.36(2)

€ d) lntelleclion c) reaction distance

V = 22.36 m/sec.
S, = 114.72 m.
S" 120.74 m.
d) stopping distance
 144 TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTI\TION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERING 145

2,.48 Solution:
yr
Solution: ,,
v=-80000
l'_=t20 kph Y=90 kph
3600
Determine.the safe stopping sight distance
for a car moving at a speed of 60 kph for a u2 V =22.22m1s
two.way traffic in a single lane road. S, =Vt
Perception plus action time is 2.5 sec. and Sr=255 39 :=156 18

the frictional resistance is 0.60. s, =22'22(0.5)

l'or the120 kph car :
Solufion; S, = 11.11 m
f = C.50(0.6)
(v') V2
S=V t+ \{a/g l= 0.30 s2
2gf 4% @
,Sf
6oooo V= =33.33 (22.22)'1
Y. = = 16.07 m/s J,O
3600 t12
v
",- 4g.g1x04)
v:-v: S =Vt+2s(f + G) S, = 62.91
S=16.67(2.5)* -,!19,97]' =6i.28m
2(e.81X0.60) "- 2g(f -c) (33 33)' S, +S, +1=/$
-a
S = 33.33(2) ' +2(e.81X0.3) ,11 + 62.91 = 76
2l4e,,' Prohleni t--
g S, = 255.39 m.
11

x= 1.98 m
Calculate the stopping sight distance on a -I-- 3.41 tor the90 kphcar :
highway at an ascending gredient ol 2% lor 9.81 90
a design speed of 90 kph with a total V-
reaction time of 2,5 sec. and a coefficient of
f = 0.35 -3.6
=25m/s
2.5? Problem
friction of 0.42. 1U (25)'
S:'=25(2)+
Y= 3.6
r ' 2(9.81X0.3) A car was traveling at a speed of 80 kph,
Solution: The driver saw a roadblock 80 m. ahead
S = 156.18 m.
S=Vt+ V' v 28.29 m/s and stopped on the brake causing the car
2g(f + G) 56
Sight distance to avoid head on collision to decelerate uniformly at 10 mlsec2.
Yr=
= 156.18 + 255.39
Assuming perception-reaction time is 2
9oooo 3.6
Y= =25mls sec, determine the distance from the
3600 = 411.57 n. roadblock to the point where the car will
%= 15.56 m/s
stop in meters.
S = 25(2.5)+ =138.N)m (n.N)'- (15.56F
2(9.81)(0.42 +0.02) $=
2(e.81X0.35 - 0.03) Solution;
S = 88.9/m v v v14
2.5O Probtem A car moving at 80 kph on a level road
suddenly see$ an obstruction 76 m. ahead.
A motorist traveling at 104 kph on an lf the perception time is 0.5 sec. and the
s,
expressvyay intends to leave the coefficient of friction between the tires and
expressway using an exit ramp with a the pavement is 0.4, how far from the 80m

maximum speed of 56 kph. At what point Two cars are approaching each other from obstruction will it stop?
8oooo
on the expressway should the motorist the opposite directions at a speed of 120 v = =22.22m1s
step on her brakes in order to reduce her kph and 90 kph respectively. Assuming a Solution:
V v+ Vz=a
' 3600
speed to the maximum allowable on the reaction time of 2.0 seconds and a S, = V,t
ramp just before entering the ramp, if this coefficient of friction of 0.60 wtth a brake S, = 22-22(21
sectionof the expressway has a efficiency of 50%. Compute the minimum
downgrade of 3Yo? Acceleration is sight distance required to avoid a head on -s=16.
S, =,14.44 m
3.4 mls2. collision of the two cars.
-
 146 TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATTON & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 147

v'z=vf -2asz
2.SS ljjiiai
g _ 2(10) S,
= {22.22),
A motorist traveling at 80 kph Oown al A test of a driver's percoption-reaction time A vehicle travel a distance of lo m, before
S, = 24,69 m
grade of 5% on a highway observes aI ls being conducted on a special testing collidlng with another parked vehicles, the
S, + S, +y=69 crash ahead of him involving an overturnedl kack with wet pavement and a driving weight of which is 75 percent of the former.
truck that is completely blocking the road,tr cpeed of 50 kph, When the driver is sobei After collision, if both vehicles skid
44.44 + 24.69 + x= 80 through 14 m. before stopping, compute
lf the motorist was able to stop his vehichl 0 stop can be made iust in time to avoid
x = 10.87 m 10 m from the overturned truck. what warl hitting the'obiect that is visible 40 m. the initial speed of the moving vehicle.
his distance from the truck when tre firctl ahead. After a few drlnks of San Miguel Aseume frlction coefficient of 0.62.
observed the crash? Assume perceptionl beer, under eractly the same condition' the
reaction time is 2.5 sec. and the vehichtr driver falle to etop in time. and stdkes the Solution;
v1* v2+
object at a speed sf 30 kph, Oetermine the {nL ,{r\-
driver's perception-reaction time after he rO:J# .tdtE+--€!i
A test vehicle moving
stopped by applying the brakes and the
at 40 kph was ffi;-at3.44m/sec2?
v v v
I was drlnking. Aseume coefficient of friction
ls 0.60.
1,,
-+o
m-- I

length of the skid mart was 12.2 m. lf the v, v--

average skid resistance of the level Bhttr \ot dprtil,l hpte :Stt Solution;
pavement is 0.70, determine the brake sr s2 l0m
__rm--
t{ee+l} ----o,*[-lm-
ffiGfffi=Gil
Yr-50 kph Yr=30 lph
efficiency of the test vehicle. s ll

v Yro
Solulion; Soooo
Y. = =22"z2mls
3600
vy' D=vz-v rl2c I
v Y14 s, =22.22(2.5) l4

s, = 55.55 m
After mllision:
,, _ 50000
Wa '' - 3600 -(w. +wo;ts, =
*#u;.v;)
=f N
s
w
.€ a
V, = 13,89 n/s
0-v'?
IE =rw ,,u'-
_ 30000
-f S^ = '
'29
,, _ 40000 s
3600
=fl vf = 2gf s,
3600 r_
t-
a
- V, = 8.33 n/s vl
V' = 1(9.81X0,62X14)
11.11 n/s s Ne\f
3'4 v: .v: V, = 13'05 n/s
^v2 f=
9.81
=0.35
2gl Momentum before impact
2gt
(13.89)'z -(8,33)'z = momenfum afterimpact

2,2 =
(1'11)' s2
2g(f - G)
^_- W,V, _ (W. *Wo) ,,
" 2(9f 1xo"6o)
2(e.81X
Sr= D = 10.49 m.
s-g"
f .0.516 2(e.81X0.35 - 0.05) 4 =o'is4
40=V t+ D W" V, _ (W. +0.75W") ,,
s,
Effciency'
ffit''*l
= 83.88 m

S=S1 +52 +10

40=13,89t+10.49 s-s"
Efrciency=f3.71 l=2t2ser,. 4 = 1.75v,
S=55.55+g3.gg+tO vz = 1.75 (13.05)
S = 149.t43 m vr=22.84m(s
 AA TRANSPORT,ATION & TRAFFI C ENGINEEF1ING TRANSPORT,ATION & TRaTTIc ENGI NEERI NG 149
Before collision
S= ' V'
-w. f s. = S,u: -r,, S.V * V=
8o
1t
2g(f - c) ' 2g(f + G)
3.6
= 22.22mts
(33 33F-
' +2(9.81X0.3)
(11.1 1)'
vl 'Y,' S v'
- 0.62 (40) =
14=
2(e.81Xf - 0.05)
= 33.33(2) S-9=
2g 2g(f + G)
f S, = 255.39
(223q'? -v1'? = 0.50 (22.22)'2
-o 62 (40) - For 9a kph:
S-9=
2(e.81)
v^ = a 2(e.81X0.5 + G)

(22.84)'1 - V:= -486.576 ' 3.6

=2.22mrs ,, _ 90
s-9= 2510
V = 31.75 nls Y,'-v! + (0.5 G)
$= V. =25mls
,, _- 31.75(3600) 2g(f - c)
(25)'
^v2
J=
', -1ooo
40=
v1, - (2,22), "+
s, =25(2)
2(9.81X0 3)
2g(f - G)

V, = 114.31 kph
2(e.81X0.50 - 0.05) S, " 156^18 m.
^ -
b:
(22.2A'1

2(e.81X0.5 - G)
V, = 18.92 m/s Sight distance to avoid cor,," 1n

= 156.18 + 255"39
^ --
b=
25.16
&58 .Pid&lsiti V, = 18.92(3.6)
(0.5-c)
. 411.57 m.
A Pajero lntercooler skidded into
V, = 68.12 kph 25.16 25.16
(0.5 - G) (0.5 + G)
an
intersection of Magsaysay Avenue and
Quirino Avenue and struck a bystander and
i2.59 protrem
Solving for G = 0.044 = 4.4%
it hit one of the column
continued until
support of the skyway. Based on the
il The driver of a vehicle traveling at 80 kph
^
b=
25.16

damage to the front of the car, the police 0.5 - 0.044

Two cars are approaching each other up a grade requires 9 m. less to stop afler
report estimated that the car was doing g the opposite directions at a speed of S = 55.18 m.
he applies the brakes than the driver
kph at the moment of impact on the column kph and 90 kph respectively, Assuming a travelling at the same initial speed down
support. The Iength of the skid marks was reaction time of 2.0 seconds and the same grade. lf the coefficient of friction
a
recorded to be 40 m. The road has a coefficient of friction of 0.60 with a between the tires and pavement is 0.50,
downhill grade of - 5%. A test car skidded efficiency of 50%. Compute the min what is the percent grade and what is the
14 m. on the same section of the road when sight distance required to avoid a head on braking distance down the grade. Two cars in opposite directions are moving
the brake is applied from a speed of 40 kph collision of the two cars.
to the halt. Determine the probable speed towards each other at a speed of 90 kph.
Solution:
of the car involved in the accident when the The total perception and reaction time is
Solution: ! 2zQ
brakes were applied in kph. 2.5 sec. with a coefficient ol friction of 0.60.
Y=120 kph Y=90 kph v'-S5o lf the brake efficiency is 80%, compute lhe
Solution:
<_ minimum required sight distance to avoid
collision of the two approaching cars.
vl Vz=8 S f255.44 'lz'156.1 ll
ttlr
_> ..+- brukel.
(4)fll((l
Solution:
kph
f = 0.50(0.6) v v2
f = 0.30 v
S Vt +
a
Fw12A kph: y= 9oooo
ofe = 25 m/s
v'-#=11'11mls 3600
v= ]4 = 33.33 m/s f = 0.60(0.80)
J.b
f= 0.48 ".,
 150 TRANSPORTATI()N & TRAFF'C ENGINEERING TRANSPORTI\TION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 151

S = 25(2.5)+
Qsr 2,63 Problem V, =V, *at 2,66 Problem
2(e.81X0.48)
Toooo
ln a certain accident investigation, r). - 8t A vehicle traveling at 40 kph was stopped
S = 128.87 m traffic enforcer tries to measure the 3600
wtthin 1.8 sec. after the application of
Sigttt distanceto avoid collision attwo of the skid marks on the roadway t = 2.43 sec. brakes. Determine the average skid
recorded it to be 36.20 m. Assuming resistance.
approxhing cars : coefficient of friction between the
S=V t- 1 at'
,2
and tires is 0.10 and the road is flat, Solution:
Min. sight distance = 2(128.87)
was the velocity of the car at the time
Toooo
Min. sight distance = 257.74 m brakes were applied? 5= (2.$\ -8(243)'
3600 2 V l>& V=0
Soiufion: S = 23.63 m.

2,62 Pr.oblem v1 v Distance the car stop from the stalled vehicle

= 30 - 23.63
'w
Gompute the intermediate sight distance =6.37 m.
for a freeway with a design speed of 80 kph Vr=ltat
if the perception time is assumed to be 2.5
seconds with a skid resistance of 0.70. v: .v: o=
4o(1ooo)
-r,.,"u,
$= 3600
Assume brake efficiency to be 60%. 2g(f + G)
a = 6.17 m/sec2
-(0F
Solution: 36.20 = ln a braking test, a vehicle traveling at a F=ma
2(9.81X0.16 + 0)
speed of 30 kph was stoppod by applying
V
"'>-
v Y=0 V, = 10.66 nls brakes fully and the skid marks were 5.7 m tw={a
g
= 10.66(3.6)
in length. Determine the average skid
Y resistance of the level pavement surface.
v V, = 38,38 kph
f=9
IAg DiltdA(e Brokinll s

S =Y t 13.6+V t
z -Y o2 l2g(3
Solution:
. 6.17

V 9.81
Y=0 f = 0.63
,, - 80
3.6 A driver traveling at 70 kph sees a
V =2..22m1s car 30 m. ahead, lf the driver applies a
brakes immediately (perception .
V' time is zero) and begins slowing
S=Vt*
2s(r) vehicle at 8 m/sec2. 30 A vehicle was stopped in 1.4 sec. by fully
deceleration) how far from the stalled \,/= jamming the brakes and the skid mark
S = 22.22(2.5) +
(22.22)'?
will the car stops to avoid hitting -3.6 measured 7 m. Determine the average skid
2(e.81X0.42) stalled vehicle? V = 8.33 n/s resistance on the level pavement surface.
S = 11547 m
Solufion; ^V,
5= Solution;
lntermediate sight distance = 2(115.47) 2g(f + G) Vt Vz=2
kph rr.l.>
+ Stalled Car
., (8.$)2
u t --
lntermediate sight distance = 8A.94 m
onrlyq
f = 0.62 7
 152 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRATFIc TNGINEERING TRANSPORTATI()N & TRAFFIC ENQI N EERING 153

V =V -at
0=V -at
After Collision : 2.O&lir: Problem *;?0, Prqhlofi
M+W)
_.4 p,fg.=.a (W+W)
o,N: _V:) A cargo truck of weight 6000 lb. hits a
V, =at A van having a weight of 8000 lb. hlts a
g'29 Mercedes Benz having a weight of 1600 lb. parked Toyota car of weight 2000 lb. and
vj =vl + zas and both the vehicles skid together
0-v'z, both vehicles skid together through a
o=(at), 1 2aS -fS^= through a distance of 5 m. before coming distance of 6 m. before coming to stop.
a2 *12 =2aS
'2s to stop. Compute the initial speed of the Compute the velocity of impact if the van
cargo truck if it does not apply brakes applies brakes and skids through a
a= *2S v,'?=29f s, before collision. Ass.
coeff. of distance of 4 m. before collision. Assume
t2. friction = 0.60. coefficien ol friction is 0.50.
F=ma
v,' = 2(9.81X0.6)(10)
Solufion: Solution;
flru=Ia %=10.85m.s
V3.-1- Vd=0+,'*
0
Momenfum before impact = momenlum after impact l VAN V Vz+
r_
t--
a TOYOTA
s WV^ d z
(W+W)
t a D? t,

-15
I = -;--
gs -

are Toyola cff

applied
t'g 4000U _ (4000+2000)
After coalition

. 2(7\
gs V.
-(w *w,)fs, -
(W, *Wr)
(v;'v3')
Vglocity oJ Impact
vt+ Va=Q-S-
= 0.728
(1.4)'? (9.81) 29
,, _- 10.85(6000) V,.VJ
-looo -fS2= o ' Impact
" 29
2;68 . F&blem Vz = 16.275 mls
0-v:
- 0.60 ($ = ----i- After colfision:
Beforecollision:

!f#
A cargo truck having a weight of 4000 lb. 29
skids through a distance of 46 m. before -V,,) V, =7.67 nls (vel.of imPad) .*r, uf _vf
colliding with a parked Toyota land cruiser .Wf S = W,(V; = )
ar2g Nlomentum before impact
having a weight of 2000 lb. After colllsion
both vehicles skid through a distance F=(W +Wr)f
Vz .V2 = momenfum afterimpact
equal to 10 m. before stopping. lf the -f$ = t
*w,)
coefficient of friction between tires and '29 W, *W,
=
(W, *Wr)
V" -(w, +w,)f s, - (w,
(V;.V;)
pavement is 0.6, compute the initial speed
(6'275r 'V" sg 29
of the cargo truck. - 0.60(46) - 6000v, _ (6000 + 1600)V" V,.V:
2(9.81) -fS = o '
Solution: s s '29
V7+ (16.275)'1 - Vl =- S+l.StZ
6000V, =7669Y
Vz+ 0-vl
Vr = 28.40 nYs - 0.50 (6) = ------i-
,, _
- 7600(7.67) 2g
6000
Sr=46m ,, _- 28.40(3600)
" V, =7.67 rnls (veloctty at impact)
'' -1ooo Vz = 9.72 m/s
vs+ Va=Q+-
Collision
= 102.23 kph ,, _- 9.72(3600) ,, -
_ 7.67(3000)
\, looo
" looo "
V, = 3L99kph V, = 27.61 kph
 154 TRANSr,oRTATIo N Stnarrrc ENGINEERING
TRANSPoRTATIoN & TnaTTIc E:NGIN EERING 155

Solution:
56
V = = 15.56 m/s
Compute the minimum required sight 3.6
distance to avoid a collision for two.way
traffic . with single lane with ear
approaching from the opposite directions if
a
fTfTi-r--- =ffi
Single lane
S=Vt+ ' +
\t2

2s(f G)
Compute the headlight sight distance for a
freeway with a design speed of 75 kph.
Assume time of perception to be 3 sec. and
both cars are moving at a speed of g0 kph, Y=80 kph Y*tl0 kph S = 15.56(2) + (15 56)'z
skid resislance to be 0.60. Use 80% brake
Total perception and reaction time is 2.5 2(e.81)(0.5 + 0) efficiency.
sec. Coefficient of friction is 0.40 and brake S = 55.80 m.
efficiency is 50%. Solution:

Solution:
80
V=-- 2 =0
J.f) V,

ll Il ll l-+-
Singl.e ltnt
-ffi V.22"22n\s

S=Vt* V'
One vehicle is following another on a two-
lane two highway at night according to the
safe driving rule of thumb of one car length
Y=80 kph
2g(f + 6;
Y=80 kph spacing for each 16 kph of speed. lf both
(2222)' 75
S=22.22et+ vehicles are traveling at 80 kph and the V =
J.b
= 20.83 m/s
2(9.s1)(0.5 + 0.02) lead car crashes at that speed into the rear
\,2
S = 92.83 m of an unlighted parked truck, at what speed g=[1+ -v
will the following vehicle hit the wreckage? 2s(r)
Safe stopping sight distance
Assume a car length is 6 m., reaction time
u=
# =",,,,, + (20 83)'
= 2(92 83) is 0.5 sec. and a coefficient ol friction is s = 20.83(3)
2(e.81X0.48)
= 185.67 m 0.65,
S=u+-W- S = f08.56m.
+ 2g(f G) Solution:
Vr-80 kph Yr-80 kph
(22. 22)'
S = 22.22(2.5) + parking
2(9 81X0.4 + 0X0.5)
S = 181.37 m.
S=30 m
Sight distance to avoid collision Vehicles often travel city streets adjacent A truck driver is traveling at 50 kph behind
to parking lanes at i6 kph or faster. At his another car and decides to overtake the car
=2(181.37) Yr=80 kph Y2
speed and setting detection through fr pru'kitrg
and accelerate. lf the rate of acceleration
= 362.74 m response-initiation time for an alert driver
at 2 sec. and f = 0.50, how far must the is qiven
-dt as !Y=1.2-0.015V where "t/'is in
driver be away from a suddenly opened car
door to avoid striking it?
m/s and "f is in sec. Find the rate ol
T (V')'-(V')' acceleration after I seconds and the time
S=Vt+ taken to atlain a speed of 100 kph,
Compute the required safe stopping sight Solution: f, 2s(f + G)
distance for a two way traffic in a single
y=Q=22.22nrs Solution:
lane to avoid collision with a iar 3.6
approaching from the opposite direction if Yr=56 kph !Y= 1.2 - o.o1bv
both cars are moving at a speed of g0 kph.
Y z=a Q222\, - N \, dt
Total perception . reaction lime of the 2(9.81)(0.65 + 0) _ dV
driver is 2 sec. Coefficient of friction =dt
Cdt V, :15.90 m/s 1.2 - 0.015V

I dV
between the tires and the pavement is 0.80.
Slope of roadway is +2%. V, = 15.9(3.6) = 57.24 kph =fot
0.015V r
J 1 .2 -
-_
156 TR,ANSPo RTI\ TION & TN.ATTIC ENGI
NEERING TRANSPoRTI\TION & TFiAFFIC ENGI N EERING 157
u=1.2-0.015v
du = - 0.01SdV
Tractive Force, Ro ng Ii
Res stance, Aerod ynam ic I

r - 0.015dV t Resistance and Grade An old Mitsubishi Pajero having a weight of

J r:-o'ors, =J-oo15dt
Resista nce 10800 lb. is
driven on a
level paved
101
ln(1.2 - 0.015V) = - 0.01St + C surface. lt is known that at max. speed, 50 248,25 =0.348 13+ c
whent=0 hp is expended to overcome rolling
V=50kph= 13.g9m/sec resistance. lf the coefficient of rolling 0.348+G=0.407
ln [1.2 - 0.015(13.89)]
= - 9.61u,0, *a resistance is 0.019, determine the cars
A 2000 lb. car is traveling on a
maximum speed in mph. G = 0,0594
C = ln 0.99165 surface along Osmefia Blvd.
horsepower required to overcome a rolling G- 5.94%
ln (1.2 - 0.015V) = - 0.0151+ tn (0.99165) r Solution:
resistance I8 50 hp. lf lhe speed of
the fWV
, ( t.z-o.o1sv ) r$ 60 mph, determine the coefficient
of the hp= t
'nl oosros ,j=-oo''t' rolling resistance. 550 Proh'enn
1.2 - 0.015v
0.019(10800)v
Solutlon: 50=
0.99165 fWV
550 An engineering student at Silliman
hp=l- University is driving on a level roadway
V=134
1,2 - 0.01 5V = 0,991 65e{oo15t 550 and sees a construction sign 600 feet
,, _ 134(3600) ahead in the middle of the roadway. The
0.015V = 1.2 - 0.9g165e{i15t 60(5280)
v= = 88 fps student strikes the sign at a speed of 35
3600 5280
v = 80 - 66.1 1e4015' mph. lF the student was traveling at 55
(2000)(88) V =91.37 mph mph when the sign was first spotted, what
g[=
whenl=8sec.
550
was the student'$ associated
V.80 - 66.11e{015(8) perception/reaction time? Assume that the
f, = 0.156 (coefficientof resistance) deceleration is 1 1,2 fUs2.
V : 80 -.66.11e{12 I

V = 80 - 66.1 1(2.71A28)41, Solufion:

A driver of the service car of Solair Gasino
55(5280)
V =21.37 nls Hotel is traveling at 55 mph on a wet road. V= = 80.67 hs
3600
An object is spotted on the road 450 ft.
a=1.2-0,015V
A 2000 lb. car (INNOVA) has an avaitable *head and the driver is able to come to a 35(5280)
just V= =51.33f0s
a= 1.2-A,US(21.37) tractive force of 255 Ib. the car is travelino $top before hifting the object. ' 3600
along an inclined pave surface at a certaii Assuming standard perception/reaction
Distancetraveled from 55to 35 mph
a= 0.879m/ sec, (acceleration)
The speed of the car is 70 mph. time of 2"5 sec. and practical stopping
.grade. v2 -v2
whenV=100kph ItUhat is the maximum grade that dislance, determine the grade of the road if 'z
this iar $='t
could ascend and still maintain the 70 the car has a deceleration of 1 1 .2 fps2. 2a
V = 80 - 66.1 1e{015' mph
speed if the aerodynamic resistance is
b6
Solution:
c _ (8067)'? -(51.33)'?
27.78 = 80 - 66.1 1eoo15r lb. and the rolling resistance is 34 lb.
2(11.2)
vi
52.22 = 66.11ea015,
Solution: D:Vt+ S - 172.90fi,
ootr Tractive force = aerodynamic resistance 2si 1 +6
0.7$99 = *
ln (0.7899) = - 0.015t tn e
+ rolling resistance \.s |

)
Dr =600-122.90

D1'427lafr.
-0.2359=-0.0151
255=86+34+2000G .. ' '
v= 55(5280)
G = 0.0675 ' 3600 D, =Yt
t= 15.72 sec. G= 6.75% V, = 80.7 fPs 427 .10 - 80.67t
t = 5.29 sec.
 r5a TRANSPORTATION & TR,AFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATIc>N & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING 159

Solution: S=60m
An lsuzu truck is traveling at 120 kph and
v v ^v'
" 2s[nu*t-c] (33.33F-
has a braking efficiency of g0%. The brakes 60=
60m Brakeefficiency 2(e.81) 0.54 +0.015-0.03
are applied to miss an object that is 50 m.
from the point of brake application, and lhe 1.WV, 360(0.02)
$: 616.a1=(33.33), -V,,
coefficient of road adhesion is
Coefficienl of rolling resistance is 0.016g.
0.85. ,sFry -il n =0,80-
45
Y, =22.20 nls
n = 0.64
Neglecting the mass factor accounting for p : coeff. ofadhesion = 0.80
moments of inertia during breaking and p=adhesion=0.95 o- v? 2 J
-v:
* coefl. of rolling fiction u--F_-illllillillllll-
aerodynamic resistance, determine how [ = 0.018
2gl nP. +t -6
fast the car will be going when it strikes the v= @ =33.33n/s 1

v= *J.b =26.67m/s 3.6

Q2.2\'? -V:
='s4 ' ofi5' - oJ3]
object if the surface is level.
30=
"" - ,(9f 1)[o +
1t(2667)'
Solution:
Vr* V)+
66=
olrk, 2(e.s1)lnp + 0.018] 309.02-- (22.22)' -V:
S = 97.34 m
np+0.018=0.628 V. = 13.59 m1s

n=0.80 (efficiency) n(0.80)+0.018=0.628

v, = 13.59(3.6)
p = 0.85 (coeff.of adhesion) n = 0.763
Y., = 48.93kqh
{ = coeff. of rolling resistance
n-76.3% The service car of Resorts World Corp. is
V = 4 =35.56m/s traveling at 120 kph down a -3% grade of
3.6 poor, wet pavement with a coefficient of

$=
adhesion of
0.60. The car's braking
efficiency is 90%. The brakes were applied
29 np+[ *c] A cargo truck of San Miguel Brewery is to 90 m. before impacting the object. The car An SUV is traveling 120 kph on a road with
(35.56)'? - be driven down a 4o/o grade at 120 kph. The had an antilock braking system but the a -3% grade. There is a stalled car on the
50=
2(9.s1) 0.80(0.85)+0.0168+0 coefficient of road adhesion is 0.95 and it is system faiied 60 m. after the brakes has road 300 m. ahead ol the driyer. The
been applied (wheels locked). What speed driver's vehicle has a braking efliciency of
Y, = 24J rnls was the car traveling at just before it 90% and it has antilock brakes, The road is
Vr . 24.1(3.6) = 86.71 kph strikes the object? lgnore air resistance. in good condition and is initially dry but it
Coefficient of rolling resistance is 0.015. becomes wet 48 m. before the stalled car
(and stays lvet until the car is reached).
Solution: What is lhe minimum distance from the
vt+ Yr+ v!+ (\'j.tl stalled car at uvhich the driver coul( apply
A level lest track in Sydney, Australia has a -
the brakes and still stops before hitting it?
coefficient of road adhesion of 0.g0 and a lgnore air resistance, Coefficient ol road
60 l0
car being tested has a coefficient of rolling adhesion is 1.0 when dry and 0.90 when
friction 0.018 for all speeds. The vehicle ii wet. Coefficient of rolling resistance is
y.=U=33.33n/s
tested unloaded and achieves the Solution: 3.6
0.013.
theoretical minimum stop in 60 m. (from
Find firstthevelocity whenthe car started to skid.
brake application). The initial speed was v Solution:
96 kph. lgnoring aerodynamic resistance,
$= v V2--*- V
what is the unloaded braking efficiency? 29 np+f -G
Assume a mass factor of 1.04 accounting
for moments of inertia during braking. np = fl.$$([.ffi)= Q.54
s/ Sr=48
 r60 TRANSPo RTATION & TRqTPIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 161

^-2
S='J
v: -v:
+[ -c]
Total stopping distance of futh cars are the
Space Mean Speed - Time 2.92 Problern
zs[np Mean Speed, Mean Free
Vt"+ -I1 -.-=y1 V2
The maximum sustained 15 min. rate of
48.
-0 zgln,u + ' [.] 2gln,1t+f, flow, expressed in passenger cars per hour
2(e.81) 0.90(0.9)+0.013-0.03 per lane, which can be accommodated by a
26.67(2.5)- 2.89 ;:.: :' 1.::,:Pi{iblil1n
,uniform freeway segment under prevailing
V, = 27.33 m/s -=-(26!7f-
2(e.81)ln, (0.80) + 0.013]
traffic and roadway conditions in one
The basic traffic maneuvers: direction.
26.67)'?
sr =26,61(2) +
+fI 2(9.81)[0.75(0.80) * o.ore l.
29 np G Diverging * a) Capacity
66.66*
J625 ll. Merging
b)
v, = =$33n/s - - =112.48 lll. Crossing
Traffic flow
# 0.80 n, + Q.Q13
lV. Weaving c) Density

33"m)'? - (27
36.2s d) Design hourly volume
$=
2(9.81) 0,90(1)+0.013-0.03
osO n, + *r, = +s'AO
o* a) l, ll and lll only
0.80 n1 + 0.013 = 0.79 b) l, lll and lV only
S=21 m,
c) l, ll and lV only
0.N n, =9.777
d) All of the above
Distance from the stalled car that the driver n, = 0'971
could apply the brakes and stop before hitting
Breaking efficiency of BMW is g\.llo The maximum number of passenger cars
il=21 + 48 = 69rn, that can pass a given point on a lane or
roadway during one hour under the most
nearly ideal roadway and traffic conditions
When a vehicle moves obliquely across the wtrich can possibly be attained.
Problem
path of another vehicle moving in the same

Two cars, a BMW and a Mercedes Benz, are A brand new HINO truck traveling direction, at relatively emall angle of a) Traffic flow
at
crosslng, the action is termed as: b) Traffic volume
traveling on level terrain at 60 mph on a kph has a braking efficiency of lio/o.
road with a coefficient of adhesion of 0.g0, coefficient of road adhesion is 0.70 and c) Traffic density
The driver of the BMW has a 2.5 sec. that of rolling resistance of 0.014.
a) Crossing
Bdl Road capacity
aerodynamic resistance, determine the b) 0vertaking
perception/reaction time and the driver of
the Mercedes Benz has a 2.0 sec.
theoretical stopping distance on a level *c/ Weaving
perception/reaction time. Both cars are grade. d) Merging
traveling side by side and the drivers were
able to stop their respective cars in the Solution:
same distance after seeing a roadway .. 128
obstacle (perception and reaction plui The difference between the time the front
J.b
ve_hicle stopping distance). lf the brairing of a vehicle arrives at a point on the
efficiency of Mercedes Benz is 0.7S] V = 35.56 n/s The number ol vehicle occupying a unit highway and the time the front of the next
determine the braking efficiency of the length of lane roadway at a given instant, vehicle anives at the same point.
v2
BMW. Coefficient of rolling resistance for S usually expressed as vehicle per km.
bdth cars is 0.013. 2sI nu+[ a) Regression tine
a) Trafficcapacity Jg', b) Tineheatvay
Solufion; $= b) Traffic volume c) Time leg
!9 0.75(0.7) + 0.014] [g c) Traffic denslty d) Gap
Y = = 26.67 rn/s
3.6 S = 119.57 m d) Theoretical max. capacity
 162 TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFrIC ENGINEERING 163

.2.99 I
r.i, Space mean speed
lf.{03 Problem I

The distance between the front of a vehicle The process by which a vehicle in on traflic TS
pu
and the front of the following vehicle, stream joins another traffic stream moving llrc difference between the time a vehicle It,
in the same direction such as a ramp lhlt merges into a main traffic stream
a) Lag vehicle joining a freeway stream. rnnches a point on the highway in the area
where:
b) Gap ol merge and the time a vehicle in the main fS = sum of distances covered by the
* c) Spaceheadway a) Weaving '* c) Merging rlream reaches the same point. cars in "t" sec.

d) Spacing of vehicles b) Diverging d) Converging

a) fulean time +'Varianc6l:. of the space

2.96 Problern
b)
c)
Space headway
Time gap
distribution eeds I
2.rOO Problem lr,,\ d) fime lag p, =p. + --=
o'
The arithmetic mean of the speeds of tl"
The process by which a vehicle in a traffic
vehicles passing a point on a highway where:
stream leaves that lraffic stream, such as a
during an interval of time. os2 = variance of the space distribution ol
vehicle leaving the outside lane of an
a) Space mean speed expressway. Tlme Mean Speed - the arithmetic speed

b) Average speed a) Weaving c) Merging

mean of speeds of all vehicles passlng a os = standard deviation
pt = time mean speed
* c) Time mean speed [s' b/ Divergtng d) point during a specified interual of time
Converging Us = SPEC€ mean SPeed
d) lnstantaneous speed
rftl+*llirilEt*il
fu rrr Standard deviation of the space
p,=-
'n distribution of s s
where: os: standard deviation
The harmonic mean of the speed of The process by which a vehicle firct
ui =observed sped of i th vehicle
vehicles passing a point on a highway merges into a stream of traffic obliquely
n = no. of vehicles observed
during an inlerval of time. lt is obtained by crosses thal stream, then merges into a pr = time mean speed
dividing the total distance traveled by two second stream moving in the same
or more vehicles on a section of a highway direction. Time Mean Speed, Space
by the total time required by these vehicles
*a) Space Mean Speed - the arithnetic Mean Speed, and Variance
to travel that distance. Weaving c) Merging
mean of speed of vehicles occupying a of the Space Distribution of
b) Diverging d) Converging
*a/ Space mean speed
relatively long sectlon of sfreef or highway Speeds
at a given instant. lt is the average of
b) Average speed
vehrble speeds weighted according to how
c) Time mean speed
2.102 Problem long they remain on the section of the 2,1OA Problem
d) lnstantaneous speed
road.
The headway in a maJor stream, which is Three cars travel over a 60 m. section of
,l9,
evaluated by a vehicle driver in a minor Space mean speed highway at constant speeds of 20 and
stream who wishes to merge into the major 25 m/s.
nd
The maximum speed that can be attained stream. ll =-
on a highway as the flow tends to zero,
" :t, O Compute the time mean speed for this
a) Lag where: condition.
a) Space mean speed Bg= b, d = length of roadway section @ Compute the space mean speed for
b) Time mean speed
c)
Gap
n = no. of vehicles observed this condition.
c) lnstantaneous speed
d)
Space headway
Mean headway
li = observed time for the tth vehicle to @ Compute the variance of the space
,€ d/ Meanfreespeed travel a distance "d" distribution of speeds.
 164 TRarusT:oRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINE ERIN TFIANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING r6s ll

So/ution: Solufion:
O Time mean speed Space Mean Speed Versus Vehicles Soot Soeed (koh)
6'
fp !,=!.+-
'p. Distance 1 13.40
F,=....... 2 43.50

19+2-o+25 22=20+ { n:
3 44.60
,, = =21.33m/s 20 4 45.20
3
^o2
l= lrom the following data of a freeway
@ Space mean speed -2A rurrveillance, there are 5 vehicles under
ubeervation and the following dislances
Solufion;
o
ll =-
nd = 6.32
rre the distance each vehicle had traveled Space mean speed : where n= 4

It, when observed every 2 sec.

n

t1
U,
d

Space Mean Speed Versu

Vehicles Distance (S) m.
24.4
p,
4
_1 1 1 1
I

60+60
-) lr, = 43.40
1

It, = +_
60 2 25.8
-+-+-44.60 45.20
19 20 25 3 24.7 -+ 43.50
ft = 8.56 sec, *iit$O P,*ohlem 4 26.9
1
5 22.9 I -ur =00911
,,-#.21.03m/s The following data were taken on
Compute the space mean speed in kph
vehicles traveling a 1.5 km portion 4
NLEX. 1l=
s
@ Variance of the space distribution of '| 0.0911
Solution:
speeds
Vehicles 43.90rph
lr-'ntIS
Time{minute} u, =
,o,
p, =u. + ---1 1 1.2
u. 2 1.0
+ 25.8 + 24.7 + 26.9 + 22.9
ol 3 1.4 ,,= 24.4 lr(4
21.33=21.03* 4
21.03 '
5
1.3
1.1 t. = 12.47 mls
2"100.r'..,:'' Protl&
o'
21.03
' = 0.30
Determine the space mean speed in 1 2.47(3600) For the 5 vehicles observed at a certain
o3 = o'gl '
il=
1000 segment of the South Super Highway
Solulion: passea through point A and recorded the
p,= 44.89kph following time of travel for each vehicle
Distance
Ill s=_ and its corresponding spot speed.
Ave. time
Time Mean Speed, Space Compute the epace mean speed of each
vehicfe.
Mean Speed, and Standard Average line - 1'2 + 1'o + 1'4 + 1'3 + 1'1 Space Mean Speed Versus
Deviation of the Space 5 Spot Speed Vehicle Time of passing Spot speed
Distribution of S peeds Average time = 1.2 minutes (sec.) (kph)
1 1.70 62.6
2 6.20 72.4
u. =
]j too)
There are four vehicles passing through
3 8.60 75.6

the poilon of the South Super Higway in a

4 12.02 68.4
What is the standard deviation if the space V" = 75kPh
certaln period of time. Compute the space 5 15.00 65.3
mean speed of a certain car is 20 m/s and
its time mean speed is 22 m/s. mean speed in kph.
 N EE R ING 167
ll too rRANspoRTATroN & TRAFFTc ENGTNEERTN( TRANSPORT ATI o N & TRAFFIC ENGI

Solution: Time mean speed : Determine the time mean sPeed Standard Deviation
n 3,733
,5=-
U F,= Solution; 2;i*& Probleim:r
IJ S
fu
11 11 U, = 0.7466 km/min ur -; The following data were obtained from
a

r l,1.l =-+-+ +_+_ p, = 0.07466(60)

ir..rr., tr*-.ill.n." of 5 vehicles passing
tp/ 62.6 72.4 75.6 68.4 65.3 p. =
55.40 + 56.80 + 53.60 +48.90 ilfui a certain point of the freeway with
Pt = A.8kqh 4 ir," i,rii"ior.r spot speeds. Determine the
r [1] 0.07295
ir, =53.68kph standard deviation ol the space
\p l distribution of sPeed.
Space rnean speed
Space Mean Speed Versus Vehicles Spot Speed (kph)

P. = *-;--
n Time Headwa Space Mean SPeed Versus 1 41.08
2 48.51
I(J ) Free Flow S eed
8r{{{ ,',,,:'',Probl6m 3 50.64
4 46.82
0.07295
= 68.54 koh
There are 9 vehicles observed in a 2.113 Problem 5 44.14
seclion of ltlcArthur highway. lf the
time headway is 4 sec., compute the spat The Southern Luzon ExPressway was
Solulion:
mean speed of the vehicles in kph. desioned to carry a free'flow speed of 50
Time Mean Speed Versus -anrt
a capacity of 4000 vehicles per
TimemeansPeed
kph
Time Solution: hour. At a certain Point near the pr
Iu'
=
9 intersection of a road leading to Laguna n
41.08 + 48.51 + 50.64 + 46.82
+ M'14
2,11ll DensitvoftrafficK=
' =30vehicles/km there were 3600 vehicles counted, what is
0.30 F,=
the space mean speed of these vehicles? 5
36.00
Traffic flow q = 900 vehicles per
The following travel times were observed '4= Solufion:
p, = 46.23 kph
for 5 vehicles traveling a one km segment Space mean sPeed;
q=Kp. JamdensitY
of the NLEX. lt is required to determine the
n
time mean speed of these vehicles. 900 = 30p,
K -r{
_
4q,@p Ll =- s
P, = 30r(Pl,
J
r(il)
Vehicles Time(minute)
1.19 _ 4(4000) * * 1 * 1
* 1 1 1
1
K -(,,)-
t[[
2 1.22 50
J-ar.oa +a.ur s0.64 46.82 44'14
J

3 1.36 I Time Met#tpeed Versus K = 320 veh/lm

4 1.48 I Spot Speed and Time I

r r1l = 0.10872
5
,|.51
! u, -x, u+q=o (p i
1z.,.. p,'
Solution:
320
u, - 320u * 3600 = 0 '! s 0.10872
= 45.99 kph
Four vehicles passing through the
pt _rf has the following observation.
50 Stmdud devidiona :
n u'-50p+562.5=0 7
6'
11111 - p,=u.+-
,I g ti
=-+-+-+-+-
1.19 1.22 1.36 1.48 1.51
Time of passing Spot V= 32.91kqh p,
6'
(q 46.23=45.99*
+S.S9
733
1 t )=,I

12.0 sec. 48.90

a = 3.32
 16a TRANSPO RTA TION & TRA F Ftc E N G NEERI NG TRANSPoRTI\TION & TRAFFIC E:NGINEERING 169

Density of Traffic Versus ' Space mean speed @ Space mean speed
Time Mean Speed and
--s1
' =!!
n
The data below shows the result of the flow u p.
Mean r,t Lp,
of haffic at a certain part of a highway by
observing the arival times lor ioui It = 7 58 + (9.18 - 3) + (12.36- 6) + (21.74 - 12) 5
vehicles at two sections A and B that are P"= 1so + 14s + 140 + 130 +
150 m. apart. The total observation time at ft = 26.86 sec. +
Two sets of students are collecting traffic section A is 15 sec" Space mean speed ; lt"= 38.7 kph
data at the two sections A and B 200 m.
apart along a highway. Observation at A Vehicles Section A Section B us = 4(150) =22.34nts
I
shorm that 5 vehicles pass that section at 1 T T + 7.58 sec. 2686 @ Density
intervals of 8.18 sec., g.0g sec., 10.23 sec., 2 T+3sec. T + 9.18 sec. p, = 22.34(3.6)
11.68 sec. and 13.64 sec. respectively. lf 3 T+6sec, T + 12.36 sec, K=a
p,
the speeds of the vehicles were g0, 22, 64, 4 T + 12 sec. T + 21.74 sec. P, = 80.42kPh
56 and,O kph, compute the following: t=3+4+3+5
O Determine the time mean speed in [ph, r.ti flq\iv st seslion A in vehicles per hour
O Density of traffic in vehicles per km @ Determine the space mean speed in t = 15 sec.
@ Time mean speed in kph kph. o=I (vehicle/hour)
@ 't ltgooot
Space mean speed in kph @ Determine the flow
vehicles per hour.
at section A in '
o=
15'
4(3600)
Solutio.n: o=
'15 =g1ovelt/hr q = 1200 veh/hr
O Density of traffic Solution:
12oo
5 O Time mean speed 6=
K= Speeds of vehiicles; 38,7
2.117 . Problem
0.200
Dist K= 3lveh / km
K= 2Svehicl* / kn g =
Time
Traffic data collected a two sections A and
@ Time mean speed 150
U. ,= =1g.79m/s B of a highway, which is 450 m apart. Five

pr
Iu' 7.58 vehicles pass section A at intervals ol 3,4,
Space Mean Speed and
= 3 and 5 sec. respectively. The vehicles
n u' =;* =24'27Ns cpeeds are 50, 45, 40, 35 and 30 kph Distdnce Observed
. _80+72+U+b6+49
p, - -------l-- lt
respectively. takes each vehicle 20
.
\= 64kqh
u,
,lh = 23.58 n/s seconds after the first vehicle passes
through the section.

u'= (D Determine the time mean speed. From the following data of a freeway
@ Space mean speed ffi=15'4m/s rD Determine the space mean speed. surveillance, there are 5 vehicles counted
lJ =-
nd Time mean speed :
(3) Determine the density. for a length of 300 m, and the following
It positions are obserued on the lwo
utn=I! Solution:
photographs taken 2 seconds apart, the
5(200)
,r) distance "S" that each vehicle travel.
8.18 + 9.09 + 10.23 + 11.68 + 13.64 Time mean speed
,, _ 19.79 +24.27+23.59+15.4
H. = 18,93 m/s
"|-_c-J-- pt =
fu, O Compute the density of flow in
n vehicles/km.
18.93(3600) U, = 20.76 m/s
ll=
rs ' ' 50+45+40+35+30 @ Compute the space mean speed in kph.
1000
20.76(36m)
u =- @ Compute the flow traffic in of
ur
_ 5
= 74.74 kph vehicles/hour.
P. = 68,r6frpr, 1000
lt, = 40 kph
 17A TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSF)ORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 171

Position Position Solution:

Vehicles S (m) 2- Problem Cars Speed (m0h) Laps Covered
V *v, * V. *4 *\d
1 2
1 195 32
1 268,3 m 292.7 m 24.4 U, = time mean speed =
n Four racing cars are traveling on a 2.5 mile 2 184 30
2 215.4m 234.2m 18.8
44+42+51+49+46 tri-oval track at Rizal Memorial Stadium. 3 190 31
3
4
175.0 m
143.2m
199.7 m
170.1m
24.7
26.9
u =_ 5
The four cars are traveling at constant 4 180 30
speeds of 195 mph, 190 mph, 155 mph and
5 95.20 m 118.1m 22.9
It, = 46.4 mph 180 mph respectively. Assume you are an Solution;
observer standing at a point on the track 195+184+190+180
Solufion:
O Density of flow in vehicles/km for a period of 30 min. and are recording P.=
4
the instantaneous speed of each vehicle as
K-- 5 it crosses your point as shown on the V" = 187.25 mPh
0.300 table.
K= 16.67 vehicles / km The speeds for vehicles A, B, C, D
were 50, 54, 56, 58 and 60 kph Cars Speed {mph) Laps Covered
@ Space mean speed
Assuming all vehicles were traveling A 195 39 Space Meaft6peed Versus
constant speed for a distance of i.5 B 190 38 Distance each Vehicle that
llrs =1
'S nt
determine the space mean speed. c 185 37 Travels for a Time "t" A
D 180 36

u,_E
.. _ 24.4 + 18.8 + 24.7 + 26.9 + 22.9 Solution:

Fr=
n Compute the time mean speed for this 2.124 Problem
!. = 11.77 m/s *-f-*-+.4 E
vehicle in mph.
From the following data taken from 4
1 77(3600) vehicles observed from photographs taken
U.=
IU=''
1
s 1000
11111
+_.+ +_+_ Solufion: 2 seconds apart, compute the space mean

U" = 43.37 kPh

50 54 56 58 60 P, -
195(39) + 190(38) + 185(37) + 180(36) speed of the vehicles.

!, = 55.381ph
--.-3g*3g*37*36 Vehicles Distance (m)
@ Flow of haffic V, = 187.67 mPh 1 36,2
q=K!, 2 34.6
3 35.8
q = 16.67(43.37)
4 37.0
q= 723 vehicles/hr
From the following table of traffic flow 2,123 Problem Solution:
certain point along a point of a Space mean speed ;
roadway of the proposed extension of Four racing cars are traveling on a 3-mile
(NLEX) Nofi Luzon oval track in Melbourne, Australia. The 4 u =1
rs
Compute the time mean speed. cars are traveling at constant speeds of 'S nt
The speed of 5 vehicles were measured 195 mph, 184 mph, 190 mph and 150 mph
(with radar) at the midpoint of a 0.5 km 36.2+34.6+35,8+37
Lane Soeed (kohl respectively. The observer standing at a F,=
section of the Bataan provincial 1 30 point on the track for a period of 30 min. 4(2)
Expressway (BPEX). The speeds for 2 45 and are recording the instantaneous speed F" = 17.95 m/s
vehicles 1,2,3,4 and 5 were 44,42,51, 49 3 60 of each vehicle as it crosses the
and 46 kph respectively. Assuming all observation point. Compute the space 1 7.95(3600)
'!
vehicles were traveling at constant speed
Solution: mean speed from these cars for this time
u=
'| s 1000
'

over the section, calculate the time.mean period.

speed. ,. _ 30(1.0) +45(1.5) +60(2)
1t" = 64,62kph
tr, = =tfi.33kph

-;r;ii-
 172 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATION & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING 173

2;{28::iir Boai:d MAy 2'{}OO ',l2.l?fl ,Piobhm Rate of Flow Versus Space :di ga::i::':: pil$|6iit
Mean Speed and Density of
The rate of flow at a point in the highway is Six (6) vehicles are observed in a 200 m.
1200 vehicles/hour. Find the space mean section of a highway. lf the average time
Traffic Assume you ars observing traffic in a
single lane of McArthur Highway at a
speed if the density of traffic is 23 vehicles headway is 4 sec., determine the following:
per mile.
O Density of flow in vehicles/km
2.129 GE Board May 2OO2 specific location. You measure the average
headrvay and average spacing of the
@ Flowoftraffic in vehicles/hr vehicles as 3.2 sec. and 50 m. respec{ively.
Solution: Compute the rate of flow in vehicles per
Space mean speed:
O Space mean speed in kph hour if the space mean speed is 30 mph
Determine the traffic flow,

So!ution: and the density is 14 vehicles per km. Solufion;

Q=KUt
1200 = 25p, @ Density of flow in vehicles/km Trafrcflow
A Solufion;
1t" = 48 mph
=Slvehicles/km ps = space mean speed
^= O.;, a=fitioool
@ FIow of traffic in vehicles/hr u= ' ' 30(5280)
s 3.281(1000)
'!
q= 1125
q. %= 0.25 vehiclelsec.
Since it is not possible to measure density q = 0.25(3600) tr, = 48.28 kph

directly at a point, a measure called hnl q- 900 vehicle/hr. q.Kp.

occupancy has been developed for freeway 2,.132"' Problem
surveillance. lf six vehicles are distributed @ Space mean speed q = 14(48,28)
along a highway 300 m. long have lengths q=KPS lf the density of traffic in Aurora Blvd. is 30
of 5.48 m, 6 m, 13.7 m, 4.6 m, S.4 m and 6,7 q= 675.92vdricles I hr (rateof flan)
900 = 30 Us km/hr and the average headway ls 4 sec.,
m. respectively, compute the density of
compute the space mean speed. Spacing
traffic in vehicles/kms. 1ts= 30 kph
between vehicles is 4.8 m. apart to avoid
bumping of cars.
Solution:

R,. Fvehicle lengths Volume of Traffic Solution;

Length of roadway sections Twelve vehicles are obeerved in a 400 m. K=30
sectionof the extension of SCTEX. t hr.
D _ 5.48+6+ 13,7+4.6+5.4+67 Average time of headway is 4 sec. = 3600 sec.

' 3oo The spacing of the cars moving along the

Determine the space mean speed.
q
1

= _: (3600)
same lane of an expressway is 40 m. center 4
R, = 0.1396 Solution:
to center. lf the average velocig of the car
q=900
Average length of vehicle is 80 kph, determine the volume of traffic.
'
Densitv K = ]1 = 30 vehicles/km
0.4
_ 5.48 +6 + 13.7+4.6+ 5.4+6.7 Solution: q=Kp.
1
o 1090 =
Traffc flow . (3600) = 900 vehicles/hr 900 = 30 p,
= 6.98m.
No. ofvehicles F€rkm
'40 = =zS (dens,(/ 4

= 0.00698 km vehicles / hr Spac-e mean speed r pr" = 30 kph

VelOCltY= - vehicles / km
=16[
0 1396 900
'
Densitv of traffic = Volume of traffic = vehicles/km ll=
'30-
0.00698
o^ _ vol. oftraffc
Density of traffic = 20 vehictx / km - tt= 30kph
25
Vol. of traffc = 2lll0vehicles t hr
 174 TRa NSPORT,ATION & TRAFFIC E:NGIN EERING SPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 175

Peak Hour Factor @ Peak hourfactor Ca ac of Roads Time Hea

DUE _ Vol. during peak hour
Peak hour factor = the ratio of totat
hourly volume to the maximum rate of
60
x
(Vol. during peak 15 min. l,{
flow within the hour. 15 wihin peak hour)
Private cars are moving at an average Compute the minimum time headway for
rpeed of 60 kph along an Expressway. The cars moving at an average ol 60 kph' The
1551
3.{38,- ,rtllrobl&m:, Rt15= =p.gru csrs haye maintained an equal spacing of average length of the car is 4.5 m' Reaction
-6! r+rzr 16 m. center to center. Calculate the time is 0,7 sec,
Compute the peak hour factor if the hourly
15' capacity of the single lane in vehicles/hour.
volume of traffic is 1800 vehicles/hour and Solution:
the highest 15 min. volume is 750. @ Design hourly volume of the approach
Solution; llinimumtime headwaY
Peak-hourVol. Capacity of single lane :
Solution: ^r,r_Peak-hour factor
Spactng of vehicles :
1000v
Note:No.of 15minin11rour= I 1557
c=- S=Vt+L
=4 DHV= S
= 1048
0.945 60
^ 1000(60) [=
PHF =
Hourly volume
16 -3.6
Q (hiohestvot.t
C=3750vdticles/hour V = 16.67 m/s
15'" 2.r35
S:16.67(0.7)+ 4.5
PHF- 18oo =0.60 From the tabulated table shows the pru
Q rzsor following traffic counts rnade during a
S = 1 6. 17 (averqe center to center spacing of cars)
15' study period of one hour. Capacrty of the road:
A car has an average speed of 50 kph and

2.'134'' "Probtdm
Time Period No. of Rate of flow a length of 4.2 m. The car is moving along a ^ 1000v
Vehicles (vehicleslhr) ringle lane roadway. lf the drite/s reaction S
7:00 - 7:15 1000 4000 time is 0.8 sec., compute the capacity of
The table shows a' 15 minute volume 7;1 5 - 7:30 1,l00 4400 the single lane in vehicleslhour' ^ 1000(60)
u=-
counts during the peak hour on an 7;30 - 7:45 1000 4000 16.17
approach of an intersection. 7:45 - 8:00 900 3600 Solution:
C =3711 vehicles/hour
Capacity of single lane :
Time Volume of Traffic
Compute the design hourly volume (DHV). hedway
6:00.6:15 PM
Time :
375 S=Y +l-
6:15 - 6;30 PM 380
6:30.6:45 PM 412
Solution:
V=
S ^ 3600
u=-
Peak hour vol. = 4000 + 4400 + 4000 + 3600 =13.89m/s t
6:45 - 7;00 PM 390 3.6
Peak hour vol. = 16000 vehicles/hr s=13.89(0.8)+4.2 36oo
O Determine the peak hour volume. 3ztt =
@ Determinethe peak hourfactor. Pea*hourfactor: m. (averqeufiertocenter spar;ing)
t
S = 15.31
@ Determine the design hourly volume
16ooo | = 1.03072 sec. (min.time headwaY)
(DHV) of the approach. PHF= =0.91 ^
u=
1000v
90 r++oor S
So/ufion: 15' -iooo(so)
O Peak hourvolume Designlnuly volume: 15,31
Vol.=375+390+412+390 16o00
Dnv= C=3ffiv$hlp"slhour
Vol. = 1557 =fi.583
0.91
 l

176 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERINC

TRaTSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 177

Jam Density Versus Free ,2.139'',. Problem

Flow Speed and Space
Mean
2.1,4O :,, ;,,,rProhl&in
o=r lr-(l
'L u'
l
The mean flow speed at a portion of
highway is 62,8 mph and a jam density ln a given instant, there were 2400 vehicles
lrElllr.Ttt{il 110 vehiclelmile. counted at a specific point along the 3344 =240[, 4l
portion of the TPLEX. The highway was
designed to have a capacity of 3000
L 601

40 O Compute the density when the 60u-u'

K='@ maximum. vehicles per hour with a free flow speed of 13.93=
, lr, 60 kph, Compute the max. value of the jam 60
@ Compute the maximum capacity
where: vehicle/hour. density that could possibly occur during
836=60u=u2
@ Compute the speed of maximum heavy traffic.
l\ jam density (vehicle/hour)
=
u'z - 60u+836=0
Qcap= ttt?X. CapaCity Solution;
Solution; u . 38lrph
pr = free flow speed O Density when the flow is maximum K
4q
U J
p,
p.=tr,-=(K)
K
I

6,60
4(3ooo) 2,142 Problem
2. Space mean speed q=Ku"
= =2uvetricles/ km E

A section Cebu.Balamban of the

u. H,K Trancentral Highway has a free-flow speed
tr"=t+-i-6) qE pf
of 95 km/hr and a density of 175 vehicles
^[ K
I 2.141 Problem per km, lf the space mean speed is 30 kph,
where: 62 8K' determine ttp jam density in vehicles per
/./s = SpOCC l?leOn Speed
o = K(62.8)
'- 110
A portion of the extension ol SLEX is km.
known to have a free-flow speed of 60 kph
pr= free flow speed
!1 2(628) and a capacity of 3600 vehicles per hour. lf Solution;
K-o
K1= jam density dK=62.8- 110 in a given hour 3344 vehicles were wherc:
K = density countered at a specified point along this
K= SSvehicle I mile v=sp6cerneanqpeed'
highway, compute the space mean speed
U=U, u,={reoffow@
@ Max. capacity
of these 3344 vehicles.
[, f) !<=density invehides / km
K = jamdansity inveltides / km
3. Av volume of flow
o* =rtozer-llf r,
Solution:
U, 95 K =175 u=30
use:q=-
p,K
K
I q* Or'
[, f] ,=r,
K)
q= ln
K
=55(62.8)-
H whercK = jandensv [',-
-I
KI
where: g* = 1727 vehicles / hour u.
space mean speed
175
u,=freeflow sPeed 30=95
q = averry volume of flow in q'flaw of trafrc K
vehicles/hour @ Speed of max. flow (space mean speed) I

Jam density : 175

pn= speed nax. flow U 0.316 =
u, =pf -
1
(K) K
,=!lr,
K= densly Kr I
t<
t(1= jam density 0.684 = E
p. =62.8-
# O,
K
)
4(3600) _
60
240
K =256
K
l

F" = 31.4 nPh )

 -I
I

178 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TnaTTIc TN(iINEERING TRaTSeORTATION & TRATFIC TNGINEERING 179

Space Mean Speed Versus :

Solution: Solution:
Jam Densi p, = 40 kph (space mean speed) K, = 110 veh/km (lan *nsrtf)
Ki = 130 vehicle/km $am density)
Given from an observation along E K = 45 vehicle/km (density on the approach) pr = 64 kph (meanfree speed)
during rush hour.
u
Mean free speed - 64 kph
tt.=ir,-i(K) o =
Kiu,
Jam density = 120 veh/km K
The jam density on the approach of the I
4
traffic flow on a single lane of Juan Luna
Street is 120 vehieles per km, with a
O Determine the maximum flow of traffic, 4o = u, - !t t+st o'md - 110(64)
=176oveh/hour
density on the approach of 40 vehicle per
@ Determine the velocity at which 130' 4
flow of traffic is maximum.
hour. lf the space mean speed is 40 kph, v, = 61.2 kph (meanfree speed) Upstream flow = 0.80(1760)
determine the mean free speed in kph.
@ Determine the density at which the
of traffic is maximum. Upstreamflow= ltl08veh / hour
Solution:
Solution:
!, =U, - r (K)
U
tO Max. flow of traffic
K" I
Kp, Observation of the traftic flow approaching
'oar a signalized intersection indicates the
4
Og=pr fU (40) following data: A car moves along Florida SR-400 at a max.
120', 120i64\ speed of 64 mph. ll the maximum flow is
'@Y Mean free speed = 60 kph
4 1849 vehicles per hour, determine the
uf Jam density' 140 vehicle/km
Og=Hr
1
g*.1920vdt / hour Density of the approach K = 45 kph
density at which the flow ie maximum in
vehicles per hour.
120=3p,-p, @ Velocity at which the flow of Determine the velocity of the stopping
traffic Solufion;
maximum wave in m/sec.
* = ffikPh Kp,
Y =%ltt
Y
Solution: '4
=/,(64)=32kph Velocity of stopping wave
K (M)
r'
@ Density at which the flow of traffic P,K
u,= x
1849 = 4
maximum
A vehicle is approaching a signalized K=%(amdensity)
Kr = 115.56 vehicles/mile
intersection at a speed of 35 kph. The
density of traffic is 50 vehicles/hour. The
K=%{120)= 60veh/hour , = ooi+s) 140
= 19.29 koh Densfi atwhichtheflow is maximum
red phase of the traffic signal is 20 sec. lf 19'29 _ 115.56
the jam density is 110 vehicles/km, p, - - s.36n/ s
2
3.6
determine the speed of stopping shock
wave. = 57.78veh / hr

The following data shows that the

Solufibn;
flow on a single.lane approach to
(K) signalized intersection.
u =-u, '
Due to the closure of certain lanes of a
K
I Jam densig on the highway (under repair), the capacity is
approach = 130 vehicle/km A section of the extension ol the Davao-
reduced to 60% of its normal capacity. lf
35(50) General Santos route has a free flow speed
Density on the approach = 45 vehicle/km the jam density of the highway is 110
of 50 kph and a capacig of 3200 vehicles
110 Space mean speed :40 kph vehlkm and the mean free speed is 64 kph,
per hour. Compute the density at maximum
g* = '15.9kPh determine the upstream flow if it is only
Determine the mean free speed, flow,
80% of its capacity.
180 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TnaTTIc ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGTNEERING 181
lr

Solufioa: y-45=m(x-30)
4o t,
K
I
-r. y-45=-
1
(x-30) You are the engineer observing a traffic at Given the following data as observed by a
5 DPWH engineer at a specified point along
a specific location along the (NLEX) North
_ 4(3200)
K
,
50
= 256 vehicle/km y* I =55
Luzon Expressway. lf you measure the the (SLEX) South Luzon Expressway.
J average headway and average opacing of Jam density = 240 vehlcleslkm
1
passing vehicles as 3.2 sec. and 50 m.
Densityof max. flow = ;2 (256) Free flow speed = 55 kph
respectively, compute the flow of traffic, if
Free flow speed = 55 kph
No. of vehicles counted in a given
It has a space mean speed ol 40 kph.
Density of max. low = 128 vehicle / kn hour = 2100 vehicles.

l2.l$2, Problern Solution:

Compute the space mean speed in kph.

2.{Sl , Pioblem 1 Solution;

The space mean speed of the cars 0=-
3.2 K
Two platoons of cars are timed over a along the North Diversion Highway is J
-K u+q=0
u2
distance of 0,5 km. 'Their flows are kph. The average spacing of the cars q = 0.3125 vehicles/sec, p,
recorded. The first group is timed at 40 6.5 m. Determine the jam density
seconds, with the flow at 1350 vehicles per vehicles per, km if the highway has q = 0.3125(3600) 240
,'-240u*2100=o
hour. The second group takes 45 seconds capacity of 3420 vehicles/hr. 55
q= 1125
with a flow of 1800 vehicles per hour. u'?-55u+481.25=0
Determine the free llow speed. Solutron:
u= 44.08kph
Solution;
Jamdensity=
# =r* 2.I55.,, ',,Problom
Groupl :
0'5(3-600) 2,,15?,
Average speed - = 45 kph
Given the following data as observed along
40 2.{53 Problem the extension of (SCTEX) Subic-Clark-
1359 Tarlac Expressway: Four racing cars competing on a 2 km tri.
Densitv
'45
= = 30 vehicles/km
A section of
the (TPLEX) Tarlac Free flow speed = 55 kph
oval track at Rizal Memorial Stadium. The

Pangasinan . La Union Expressway has

' four cars are traveling at constant speeds
Group 2 : Traffic capacity ' 3300 vehicles/hour and the coneeponding laps covered as
o 5(3-600) following flow density relationship: Densi$ = 40 vehicles/km shown in the table.
Average speed= = 4o kph q=50K-1.56K2
45 Compute the jam density in vehicles per
where q = flow in vehicles per hour Cars Speed (kph) Laps Covered
Density = lU
km.
K = density in vehicles per km A 195 39
'40 = +S vehicles/km
B 190 38
Compute the space mean speed in kph
x = density the density of flow is 14 vehicles per km.. Solution: c 185 37
y = speed D 180 36

y, -v" Solution:
=4
x,!,
Compute lhe time-mean speed for these
m=:- q=50K-1.56K2 vehicles in kph.
Xt tX,
q=50(14)-1.56(14)2 K
_ 4(3300)
45-40
m-- -45
q.394.24
I
55 Solution;
30 Timemean speed
K =2ill)
-5 Q=KFs
m=-
I

195(39) + 190(38) + 185(37) + 180(36)

394.24 = 14jt"
15 u,=
39+38+37+36
= 28.16 kph
m:-- 1 1,ts
pt .187.67 kph
3
 I

182 TRANSPORT,ATION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING t83

2.1S8 Problem 2;{6A ' Problem la 2.1 P

The free mean speed on a roadway along A section of the TPLEX (Tarlac The space mean speed of traffic is 4{ mph The capacity of
NLEX (North Luzon
Quirino Avenue is found to be 80 kph, Pangasinan - La Union Expressway) has and a jam density of 240 veh/mile. lf the Expressway) is 3200 vehicles per hour and
Under stopped conditions. the average the following flow density relationship; free flow speed is 55 mph, find the density has a free flow of 50 kph. At 9:00 AM, 2000
spacing between vehicles is 6.9 m. in vehicle/mile along the Roxas Blvd. vehicles were counted and observed to
Determine the capacity flow in vehicles per q= 50K- 1,56K2 pass by at a specified Point of the
hour. where q = flow in vehicles/hr Salufion: expressway. Compute the jam density in
K = density n vehicles/km vehicles/km.
Solution: -Fr
KI
,,
Compute the spaca mean speed in kph -lK,]
looo Solutron;
Kr= the density of flow is 14 vehicles/km.
6.9 49*
K K =
44 =55 '240 l
p.
K = l45vehicles/kn gamdensity)
Solution:
q=50K-1.56K2 K K
_ 4(3200)
14s = 19 0.8=1- )
50
80 q=50(14)-1.56(14)2 240
q= 394.24 Kl -256vehicles I km
q= 2900 L = 0.20
Q=KU, 240
394.24 = 14 lt" K= t{8veh / mile
I
6.28.16 kph
2.'l65. Problem
2.{SS" Prohlem 2 Studies have shown that the traffic flow on
a single lane approach to a signalized
ln a given hour 2100 vehicles were counted '2-to{., intersection on US 87 and l'40 in Texas
at a specified point along the (SLEX) South A section along McArthur Highway is Expressway'has a iam densitY of 130
known to have a flow of 1796 veh/hr and a veh/mile on the approach. Determine the
Luzon Expressway. lf the jam density is
240 vehicles per mile, determine the space You are the engineer observing a traffic at free flow of 50 mph. lf the density is 44 mean free speed if the density on the
a specific location of (NLEX) North Luzon veh/miles, compute the jam density in approach is 45 veh/mile and the space
mean speed at these vehicles in mph.
Expressway. lf you measure the average vehicles/mlle. mean speed is 40 mPh.
Assume a free flow speed of 55 mph.
headway and average spacing of passing'
K Solution;
Hint: ' u'.K, u+q=g vehicles as 3.2 seconds and 50 m. Solufion;
F, respectively, compute the flow of traffic if it
P,K
has a space mean speed of 40 kph. !,=U,-
'=o [^'[] K

Solution:
Solution: rzso = so -
(M)' K=45 K, =130 U, =40
K

f n-o u+q=o [++

1 I
0=- H'(45)
' 3.2 (M)' 49=r, -
" 130
ts sz = 44 -
240 q = 0.3125 vehicles/sec K
u' -z4ou+2100=o l 5200 = 130 U, - 45 pr,
55
q = 0.3125(3600) 1g36
u2 -55u+481.25=0 =g.og 85 p, = 5200
K,
Q=1125veh/ hr.
u. tM.08 mph
K,= 240 9, = 61'2 mPh
"t84 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TnaTTIc ENGINEERING TRaTSpoRTATION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERING 1As

HTGHWAY SAFETY AND ffi 0. Min. time headway m

ANAI.YSIS -d
L- u -36N
U, =
t.
--.1-
,c ft=
R,

Ave.lenghof vehicles
1 Accident rates for 100 million n
H1= time headway in sec.
vehicle miles of travet (HMVM) K=densiUof trafficinvehicles / km
d = length of a segnent of the road
'for a ment of a highway: C= capacrty in sec.
ti= time of obseruation D _ sumof vehiclelengths
4UA0,0A0,000) n = no. of vehicles ^_10N(V)
'" - lrngthof ,rud*uy ,rrtbn
ft= S
ADT xN x365xL
6. Rate of flow: V = average velocity in kph
15 ce about the space
R = the accident rate for 1a0 miilion
g=Kus S = spacing belween cars
vehicle miles speed
A = the number of accidents during
S=Vt+L
q = rate of flow in vehicleilhour
period of analysis t = reaction time in sec. c2
K= density in vehicles/hour/mile U, +u
3
--n
ADT = average daily traffic
u, = space mean speed L= length of one car in meters us
N = time period in years
as2 = vaiance about the space mean
L = length of segment in miles
ffi spsed
q= time meas speed
2. Accident rates per million o r. _Vdumeof trafrcinvehides / laur fu,
u,=-
entering vehicles (MEV) for an higlest vol. every 5 min. x 1 2 ,n ui = space mean speed
intersection:
ut= time mean speed
ci of vehicles J6- 5 min. peak hour factor:
D- A(1'000'0a0)
Zui= sum of all spot speeds (kph)
ADT xN x365 No.of vehicles per km P.H.F, = peak hour factor
n = no. of vehicles
Vol.of traffic invehicles / uE_ sum of flow rate in one hour
R = the accident rate for one million hour D
enteing vehicles ave.speed of car in km / hr max.peakflow ratexl2
ADT = the average daily traffic enteing
'{2. Space mean speed
Average density = no. of vehicles per km
the intersection from all legs
N = time period in years vehicles-
10N =--n
u,1
Spacingof
ave.density I Average Daily Traffic -
Note:1km=1000m.
u 1
Accident Rates
ratio
1
_ fatal+injuryaccidents I-U, = sum of the reciprocal of spot
fatal + injury + properly damage 9. Capacity of a single lane in
vehicles r hour: speeds
The average of 24.hour traffic counb
S= Vt+l n = no. of vehicles
collected every day in the year. These
4. Space mean speed of a us= space mean speed counts are used to estimate highway user
vehicle: S = aye. center to center spacing of cars
revenues, compute accident rates, and
nd V=
in meters
ave. speed of cars in meters M establish traffic volume trends.
u
' =-rt, t = reaction time in seconds
L- Length of one car in neters K=L *a) Average annual daily traffic
u"
Iti= sum of alltime observallons (AADT)
n = no. of vehicles ^JAfi(W b) Average daily traffic (ADT)
S K = density of traffic in vehicles/km
d = length of a segment of the road c) Peak hour volume (PHV)
us= spaco mean speed
C= Capacity of a single lgne in q = flow of traffic in vehicles/hr
d) Vehicle miles of travel (VMT)
vehicles/hour us = spoc€ mean speed in kph
 I

186 TRANsT:oRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINE ERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEEF?ING "t87

l.{6? Accident Rates Versus 2, t?t{i],,::,:'GE::BOert: 20{O:l Solution:

A(100,000,000)
The average of
24-hour traffic counts p=
The number of accidents for 5
years
(ADT)(NX365XL)
collectod over a number of days greater
than one but less than a year. These
o Accidents for 100 million recorded in a cerlain section of a highway

counts are used for planning of highway

vehicle miles of travel for a is 5432, lf the average daily traffic is 476, _ 28(100,000
-n---lrtr.4/ 000)
-,." ,-
ntofa hi hway determine the accident rate per million 7s00(1)(365X6)
activities, measuring current traffic entering vehicles.
demand and evaluating existing traffic Afl0a,000,000)
170'47(4)
flow. ft: Appropriate value of crash rate =
Solufion; 25
6DDNg65)(L)
a) Average annuatdaily kaffic (AADT) where: - _ A(1,000,000) Appropriate value of crash rate - 27.3
oS b/ Averagedaitytraffic (ADT) R = the accident rate for 100 miltion A0T(NX36s)
c) Peak hour volume (PHV) vehicle miles
_ 5432(1'000'000) _52r'
d) Vehicle miles ol kavet (VMT) A = the number of accidents during the R
476(5)(365)
period of analysis
ADT = average daily traffic Left turn crashes (per year over the past 4
years) were 10, 20, 18, 34.
2;ti68 Piublem N. time period in years
L = length of segment in miles Cause of crashes: High speeds, no left turn
t
phase
A measure of travel usage along a section
of road. lt is the product of the volume Data on a traffic accident recorded on a
Average daily traffic (ADT) past
(ADT) and the length of roadway in miles to
rates per 4 years = 8600
certain intersection for the past 5 years has
which the volume is
applicable. This
entering vehicles for an
an accident rate of
4160 per million
Average daily traffic (ADT) after
implementation = 9800
measure is used mainly as a base for entering vehicles (ARMV). lf the average
lf the crash reduction factor CR = 0.54,
allocating resources for maintenance and
improvement of highways and to establish ^_
4(1,000,000) {
I
daily traffic entering the intersection is 504,
compute the expecied reduction in crashes
find the total number of accidents during
highway system usage trends.
(ADT)(N)(}65) t the 5 year period.
if the countermeasures are implemented.
where: {
a) Density of traffic R = the accident rate for 100 miltion I $olution;
Solution:
b) Traffic volume vehicle miles I + 20 + 18 + 34
c) Traffic capacily ADf = average daily traffic entering the I c_ A(1,000,000) Average crasnes per year =16 4
rg d/ Vehicle miles of travet (VMT) legs
intersection from all
{
ADr (NX365)
Average crashes per year:22
N = time period in years A (1'000'000)
I ,1160 = 22(0.54)(e800)
504(5X365) urash prevented per year =

l\= 3826 (number of accidents)

crash prevented per year = rs.s ,lf0l+ ,rr"r,r"
The maximum number of vehicles that
pass a point on a highway during a period The number of accidents for years 6
of 60 conseculive minutes. This volume is recorded in a certain section of a highway
used for functional classification of is 5892. lf the average daily traffic is 476,
highways, geometric design standards determine the accident rate per million From the given data of traffic counts for a A 20-mile section along Route 60 with
selection, capacity analysis, development entering vehicles. certain portion of SCTEX are tabulated as partially controlled access with an average
of operational programs, and development showril daily traffic (ADT) of 60,000.
of parking regulations. Solution; Length of segment = 6 miles Before: (Partial)
Average daily haffic (ADT) * 75gg
a) Traf{ic volume I, _ A(1'000'000)
Number of crashes per year = 28
Total crashes = 15 (accidentrate)
b) Traffic capacity ADT(NX365)
Number of fatal crashes per year : 4
After upgrading: (Full)
* c/ Peakhour volune (PHW 5892( 1,000,000) Determine the appropriate value ol
Total crashes = 10 (accident rate)

d) Density of kaffic
ft: .5652
crash rates per year.
the Find the yearly reduction in crashes by
476(6X365) upgrading to full access control.
 I
I

l8a TRANSPoRT,ATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING TRA,NSPORT,ATION & TRAFFIC TNGIN EERI NG 1a9

Solution
Before: Daily Expansion Factor for a rural primary
- (DEF)
ft: A(100,000,000) It is observed that 50 traffic crashes road

(ADI)(NX365XL) occuffed on a 20.mile long section of The raie for fatalities per 100 million Day ol lllleek DEF

Route 120 in one year. lf the average daily vehicle.mile has been slowly decreasing Sunday 9.515
1E _ A(100'000'000) traflic on the section was 5500 vehicles, for both automobiles and light trucks Mondav 7.012
60000(1)(365x20) determine the rate of falal crashes per 100 (pick-ups, sport utility vehicles and Tuesday 7.727
million vehicles.miles if 6% of the two minivans). For the years 2007 to 2012,ihe Wednesdav 6.s82
A =65.70 lolalcrashes function Y = - 0.08x + 1.16 can be used to
crashes involved fatalities. Thursdav 7.012
After upgrading: estimate the rate of fatalities per million Friday 5.724
Solution: vehicle miles for light trucks during this Saturday 6.510
D _ A(100'000'000) poriod and the lunction y = - 6.Q$1 + 1.01
100,000,000)
(ADT)(N)(365X1) ft= can be used to estimate the rate of Monthly Expansion Factor for month of
(ADTXLX365) fatalities per 100 million vehicle-miles for
""
_ A(100,000,000)
_ 50(100'000'000) automobiles during this period. For both
Jan. (MEF;= 1.756
60000(1)(365)(20) R = 124.53
5500(20x365)
functions, x is the number of years since Compute the annual average daily traffic
A =43.8 total crashes 2007. Base on this data, estimate the year (AADT),
Rate offatal crashes = 1 24.53(0.06) in which the latality rate for light trucks
No. of crashes recorded = 65.70 - 43.8
Rate offatal crashes = 7.42 crashw equaled the fatality rate of automobiles. Solution:
No. of crashes recordd = 21.9 say 22 crashx 24 - hour volume for Monday conected for {HEF)
Solution:
400(29)+ 530(22.05)+ 65q18,80)+ 700(17,1 0)+ 650(18.52)
y=-0.08x+1.1.6
5
- 0.08x + 1.16: - 0.03x + 1.01
V = 19903
0.05x = 0.15
The average annual daily traffic (AADT) of
Local residents in Tarlac attempting to 15,000 vehicles per day occurs at a
xr3 Correction for (D EF) Monday :

pass a heavy traffic highraay has an highway segment 0.2 miles lang. ln a three. Year in which fatality rates are equal Total 7-day volume = 19903(7.012)
accident rate of 8 for 1,000,000 vehicles year period, there have been 6 crashes =2007+3 Total 7-day volume = 139560
miles of travel. lf the length of the road is resulting in death and or injuries and 12 = 2010
1q560
involving property damage only. The 1
12 miles with an average daily traffic of
average crash for similar types ol roadway
Average 24-hour volume = ,
480, determine the estimated yearly
reduction in total crashes if the crash is 380 per 100 million vehicle.miles for a 3.
year period, of which 120 involved death
3,{8O, ,', rProblefi Average 24-hour volume = 19937
reduction factor is 0.28.
Conectionfor MEF :
and 255 caused property damage only.
Compute the traffic base and lhe average A traffic engineer of MMDA observes the AADT = 19937(1.756)
Solution:
3-year crash rate for this type of facility. traffic on Monday morning of January on a
. _ A(1,000,000) rural primary road. The tabulated results AADT - 35009

ADT(1X365) Solution: were as follows;

A(1,000,000) (A4?!1!X!I365)
$= Traffic base 1131 =
00,000,000 Volume
Hourly ,!;{,8{ll',,rr:r,: Prlrblgiil
480(12X365) 1
Time of Expansion
of
15000(0'2)(3X365) ob6ervation Factor
A = 16.8 Traffic base (TBl - Traffic
(HEF)
The maximum allowable rate of crashes al
1 00,000,000
7:00-8:00 AM 400 29
intersections is 9
per million entering
Estimated reduction in crashes = 0.28(16.8) Traffc base (TB) =0.03285v$ / mile vehicles. At an intersection of 2 roadways,
8:00-9:00 AM 530 22.05
average daily traffic (ADT) values are
Estimated reduction in crashes = 5 crashx / yr Average 3-year crash rate = 3(120) +255 9:00-10:00 AM 650 18,80
10,000 and 8,265. Determine the maximum
Average 3-year crash rate = 615 crashes 10:00-11:00 AM 700 fi.74 number of crashes per year before
11100-12:00 noon 650 18.52 corrective action is needed.
190 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TnaTTIc ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING r91

Sorutbn;
Solution: Solution: Total number of accidents = falal + injury + PDO
ADT = 10000 +8265 2,183 Problem No. ofhhl accidenb =3 + 1 + 5 +8 +7
Number of fatal accidents = 4 + 2 + 6 + 8 + 5 + 10
ADT = 18265 No. offatal accidents = 24
Data on a traffic accident recorded for the Number of fatal accidents = 35
_ _ A(1,000,000) past 5 years on a certain stretch of a two. No. ofinjury accidents
Number of injury accidenb
ADT(N)(365) lane highway is tabulated as follours.
=40+52+60+74+96+24
=46+52+70+65+82+98
_ A(1,000,0m) Year Property lnjury Fatal
= 346
^ Damage Number of injury accidents = 413
18265(1)(365)
2010 110 42 4 A= injury acoidents includesfatal accidents Number of property damage (PDO)
A = 60 crashes 2011 210 54 2
2012 182 60 5
A=346
= 120 + 200 + 190 + 140 + 180
2013 24 74 7 Average ADT
2014 175 91 0
Number of property dam4e = 1070

Total: 917 324 24 12000 + 12500 + 13000 + 13500 + 14m0 A=35+413+1070

5
The accident rates for tlXl milllon vehicle A=1518 (Wal numhrof accidents)
Compute the severity ratio.
miles of travel caused by people = 13000
Average ADT
attompting to pass a heavily traffic, 2 lane A(100,000,000)
rural highway is 6,0. The length ofthe road Solulrbnl
ft= 10000 + 10500 + 11000 + 11500 +12000 + 12500
ADr(NX365XL)
is 10 miles with an average daily traffic fatal + injuy
0
ADT of 36@0. Determine the estimated uevemv ra[o =
yearly reduction in total crashes if the
' Hal + injury + property damage ft=
346 (100,000,000)
AverageADT= 11250
13000 (5) (365)(20)
crash reduction factor is 0.25: . 24+324 fl: A(100,000,000)
'
Seveflu ratto =
24 +324+917
R= 7292 accident rates fw injury accidents ADT(N)(365)(L)
Solution:
Severity ratio = 0.275 _ _ 1518(100,000,000)
_ _ A(100,000,000)
1 1250(6X365X15)
ADT(1X365) 2'!,ffilj,r Pruhlolrt
R = 41.0 accident rates of all accidents
A(100,000,000)
6.0 = A l5-mile section of the Kalayaan Road had
36000(10)(365)
the following reported accidents lor
A = 7.89 say I crashes per year
eia{ period of 6 years from 1992. lt is required
a
Critical Crash Rate Per
Estimated reduction in crashes
to compute the accident rates of all Million Vehicle Miles or Per
A 20 mile section of the Cavite Coaetal accidents.
Road had the following reported accidents Million Enterin Vehicles
= 0.25(8)
including propeily damage only accidents
=2crash*/ year (PDO). lt
is required to compute the Year Fatal lnjury Property Ave. Daily
gp=nyp*9!rr,
accident rates for injury accidents for a
Accident Accident Damago
(PDO)
Traffic
TB ^@
YIB
period of 5 years from 1980. ,l992
4 16 120 10000
where:
Year Fatal lnjury Propoily Ave. Daily
1993 2 52 200 10500
CR -- crtfical crash rate per 100 million
Ratio Accident Accident Damage Traffic
1994 6 70 190 11000 entering vehicles
1995 8 65 140 11500 AVR = average crash rate for the facilrty type
(PDO)
fatal iniury 1980 3 40 110
1996 5 82 240 12000 .
IF fest factor, standiird deviation at a given
' ratp=
12000
Sevenv ',
fatal injury + properly damage 1981 1 52 215 12500
r997 10 98 180 12s00 confrdence level
1982 5 60 170 16000 TB = trafftc base per 100 million enteing
1983 I 74 250 13500 yehlcles
19&4 7 96 160 14000
 TR.ANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERI NG 193
192 TRANSP()RTATION & TNETTIC ENGINEERIN(i

2;{A8 Froblam 7: Traffic intensity

2.{86 Pmblem
arrival rate
Given: At a single location along NLEX, three ^_
Given: selic,e rde
Length of segment highway = 0.3 miles countermeasures with crash reduction
Average annual daily traffic
ADT before improvement = 6624 factors of CRr = 38%, GRz = 26%, P= :1

@hereP is called traficintensity)

(AADT; = 1600 vehiclesldaY over a 3-year period) CRs .
220/o are proposed. Determine'the lt
ADT after improvement = 9200 overall crash reduction factor,
Test faclor = 1.96 for 95% confidence level
CR reduction factor = 30%
For a 4-year period: Average crash rate per
million entering vehicles. Number of crashes occurring Solufion:
la Expgcted number of units in
Property damage :250 year : 10, 12,14 (over the 3-year the m
improvement period) CR = CRr +(1-CRr)CRz +(1-CRr)(1-CRz)CRr
Fatal injury (death) = 129 2
Calculate the critical crash rate.
Determine the expected reduction E(n) =
sp = Q.l$+(1-0.38)(0.26)+(1-0.38)(1-0.26X0.22)
number of crashes occurring after l-p
='"
implementation of the countermeasure. CR= 0.642 where:
Solufion;
AVR=4(120)+250 E(n) = ,rlrrrr, number of units in the
Eolution: syslem
AVR = 730 equivalent crashes/million entering vehicles
10 + 1? + 14 L= arrival rate
_. _ N(AADT)(LX365) Ave. number of crasheslyear = aqeqq p = service rate
3
100,000,000 A queue is formed when anivals wait
Ave. number of crashes/year = 1 2
_^ _ 4(16000)(0.3)(365) for a service or an opportunity such as
100,000,000 Crashes prevented the anival of gn accepted gap in a 19, Expected number of units
main traffic stream, the collection of waiting to be served
TB = 0"07008 vehicle/mile per 100 mitlion vehicie/mile N(CRXADT ater improvement)
- tolls at a tollbooth or of parking fees af
TB = 1.96 (ADT before improvement) parking garage. L'
a Ehl =
Critical crash rate:
_ 12(0.3Xe200)
tt(tt- L)
Oversaturated queues , are those
cR=AVR*
TB \I TB
o5
*rr.E 6624
which the arival rate is greater than the
Average waiting time in the
= ScrasDs service rate. 4

CR=730*
05 *',nu.["q- Saturated queues z are those in which queue
07008 v 0.07008
0
the arrival rate rs /ess than the service

CR = 987 crashes
rate. E(w1= ^.L
Overall Crash Reduction ul u- ,r)

Crash Reduction Factor to Factor for Multiple

' Mutually Exclusive U nder-Saturated Infinite 5 Total delay (average waiting
Determine the Reduction in ueues time of an arrival, including
Crashes Improvements at a Single queue and service)
Site Under-saturated infinite queues when both
N (CRXADT afrer improvmqt) arrivals and service times are exponentially
Crashes prevented = E{v)
(ADT before imp rovement) CR = CRr +(l _ CRI CRz distributed and there is one channel,
+ (1 - CRI(1 - CRz) CRt+
1t'L
where: 0 'Oc*

f/ = expected number of crashes it where: i5) Average length of queue

is not implemented
countermeasure
CR = overall crash reduction factor
and if the traffic volume is the same P2
Cfu , , --$ o
CR = crash reduction factor for a
speciftc
CRz CR3 = crash reduction factor for a {5T\e d;hr. reF C 1 P
specific counterme a su re 0=O.k
countermeasure
ADT = average daily traffic
194 TRANSPORTATION & TRETPIC EN(iINEERING
TnaruseoRTATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING 195

Probabilities of a Queue Probabilities of a Queue

(under-saturated,' infinite (u nder-saturated, finite 2.t9O Problem II

queue) Vehicles arrive at the entrance booth of Vehicles arrive at a stop sign at the corner
MGM Hotel in Las Vegas to see the boxing of P. Del Rosario St. and Osmefla Blvd. at
rl Probability of more than N Probability of "n" units in the match oI Manny Pacquiao at the rate of 4 an average rate of 250 vehicles per hour.
vehicles in the system system vehicles per minute. lt took the attendant Average waiting time at the stop sign is 12
30 seconds to process the parking tickets. sec. per vehicle. lf both arrivals and
Determine the rale in which the vehicles departure are exponentially distributed,
P(N)= L ,@)=l{h7'" move after getting their tickets in what is the average length of queue.
p vehicles/min.
Solution:
Solution: ),=250 (arrival rate)
where: where:P=L
lt E(u)= _
.. (1X3600)
L=tufrcintensity # =0.5min. ,1?
lt e Expected number of units in E(v) =
pr = 300 vehicles/hr,

N = no. of units in the system the svstem p l. 1

P=2 (trafficintensity)
1
0.5= u
p -4 250
a2 Probability
"t" in the system
of spending time ',,,=[#)[ ,*t4::l49] 0.5pt-2=1
P=
308
-0.833

Average lengh of queue :

0.5pt = 3
- glttt't21
02
P(t) =l
u=6 o =;--= (ave.lengthof queue)
1-P
Under-Saturated Infinite o. (0.s33F
i.3) Probability of waiting time "t" = 4.15 say 5 vehrbles
es 1 - 0.833
or less in the queue

2.{89 .F,roHem Vehicles arrived at the entrance of San

2r{'93:, Problenr
P(w) = 1-L e"('^/t1)^t Juanico Bridge in Tacloban at a rate of 180
lt An off-ramp traflic must stop at a single
vehicles per hour. Vehicles mrct stop at
the tollgate where vehicles will have to pay 0n a given day, 425 vehicles per hout
tollbooth at the entrance of the Highway 78.
a toll fee upon entering the bridge. lt would arrive at a toll booth located at the end of
The arrival rate at the tollbooth ls 80
an off-ramp of the South Super Highway. lf
take 15 sec. per vehicle for the attendant to
.4 Percentage of ' time the vehicles per hour. lf the service rate is 86
lssue a trip ticket. Compute the traffic the vehicles can be serviced by only a
operator of a toll booth will be vehicles per hour; determine the number of
lntensig at the bridge. single channel at the service rate of 625
be free vehicles waiting to be served.
vehicles per hour, determine the average
Solution: number of vehicles in the system,
Solufron: T
Anival rate:
P=1-L ^2 Solution:
p N= ^
l, = ]!9 =3vehrmin.
u(u - r)
60 No. of vehicles in the system = -1---
u-),
ru = (80)'
86(86 - 80)
AveraqedeD. rate u
' =E
15
= 4 veh/min.
- 425
No.ofvehiclesinthesystem
625 -425
N = 12,4 say l3vehiclx 3
Trafficintensitv
'4= = 0.75 No. of vehicles in thesystem = 2.125 say 3
 I

196 TRANSPORTATION & TRI\FFIC ENGIN EERING TRANSPORTA,TION & TRATTIC ENGINEERING 197

2.194 Problem 2.19fi Problem

Solution: 2.tgg Problerrr
('=- P2
The arrival of vehicles at a toll gale of
1-P
The number of vehicles that can enter the Passenger cars arrive at the stop sign at
r
Marcelo Fernand Bridge connecting
on-ramp of Subic-Clark Expressway is average rate of 280 per hour. ,_ P, Mandaue City and Lapu-Lapu City is 40
controlled by a metering system. lf the waiting time at the top sign is 12 sec. 1-P vehicle per hour. Average service rate is
vehicles can enter the expressway at a rate both arrivals and departure 1.2 min. per vehicle.
of 500 vehicles per hour, and the rate ol exponentially distributed, what would P2 =4-4P
arrival of the vehicles at the on-ramp is 400 the average delay per vehicle in mi P? +4P-4=0 O Determine the length of queue
vehicles per hour during the peak hour. Assume both arrival and departure excluding the vehicle being served.
Determine the expected number of units are exponentially distributed. P= 0.828 (traffic iftensrty) @ Determine the probability that no more
uaaiting to be served in the system.
Solufion; ^_
f--
r than 5 cars (including vehicles being
served) are waiting.
p
)" = 280 @ Determine the average waiting time in

=4
Solution; the queue in minutes.
(1)3600
12 0.828
E(m) = --a- '12
Ll= p
Solufion:
p(u -
^) -
p=300 p = 362vehicles / hour (service rate) O Length ofqueue
(400)'
E(m)= ' ', Average delay per vehide in seconds or
l, = 40 vehicle/hr (anival rate)
500(500 - 400)

E(m) = 3.2 trr,

waitingfime:
2.19.4 Problem ' 9
u=
1.2
= 50 vehicle/hr (seruhe rate)

T
w=-
p(p - r) Lenoth ofoueue
L'
=p(r.r - r)
Cars have a long queue on a stop sign. lf
280 the total time delay of queuing is one
(40)'
w= minute, compute the traffic density if the Lenoth ofoueue =50(50 - 40)
2,195 Problenr 300(300 - 280)
service rate of the road is only 360 vehicles
w = 0.04667 hrs.
per hour. Assume both arrival and Length ol queue = S.2vehicles
Off-ramp traffic must stop at a single departure rates are exponentially
w = 0.04667(60) distributed.
tollbooth. The arrival rate at the tollbooth is @ Probability that no more than 5 cars are
45 vehicles per hour. lf the service rate is w ='2.8 minutq waiting
60 vehicles per hour, determine the number Solution: / ,N+l
of vehicles waiting excluding the vehicles Total fime of delay :
P=[11
being served, l. p,l
t= 1

I z.tst Probtem tr-1. p= (. +o )"' = 0.252 pnbability hat more

Solution: t = 1 minute = 0.01667 hrs. I, uo .l
than 5 cars arewaiting
^2
A The average queue length at
N= intersectlon of the two roads with P=(1_0.262)
=360 - 1.
1
a
p(p - r) 0.01667
sign is 4 vehicles, lf the arrival rate P= 0.738 probaillity that no morethan
(45)' vehicles at the stop sign is 300 360-1.=60 Scars arewaiting
N =60(60 - 45) per hour, determine the service rate of
road in vehicles per hour. Assume 1. = 300 vehicles/hr.
@ Average waiting time in the queue
2.2ivehiclx arrival and departure rates
N=
exponentially distributed.
Traffic density : )._40 = 0.08 hrs'
I) 50(50
=! =S
rr(u - - 40)
p / km
= o.833vetr icr.o
p 360 l= 4.8min.
19A TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC E:NGIN EERING
TRA,ruSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 199

r:i) Average waiting time in the queue @ Probability that there are no more than 5
T cars at the gate including the vehicle
ln a toll booth at the end of an off-ramp of An off-ramp toll booth is hlw) = being served
installed r)
the TPLEX, 400 vehicles/hr arrive and the rr(p -
vehicles coming from the SLEX. The
service rate of the toll booth is 600 rate is 50 vehlhr. and the service rale t(w) = -
50
P(n>N), (tl"
vehicles/hr. 60 vehlhr. 60(60 - 50)
E(w) = 9.9633 no.
O Determine the percentage of time that O Determine the number of
the operator of the toll booth will be waiting to be served excluding
-
E(w)= 5 minutes
P(n>N)=
[#)'.'
= 0.178

free. vehicles being served. Probabilily that less lhan 5 vehlcles at the gate
@ Determine the expected number of @ Determine the length of ramp requi
P=1-0.178
vehicles in the system. to accommodate all exlting veh 2"2A2 Problem
@ Determine the waiting time for the 80% of the time. Assume P =A.822
vehicles that wait. vehicle length is 6 m. and The arrival times of vehicle at the entrancr.
between waiting vehicles is 1.5 m. @ Waiting time of a vehicle
Solution: of a baseball stadium has a mean value of
@ Determine the average waiting time ),
O Percentage of time that the operator of the the queue in minutes.
30 veh/hr. lf it
takes 1,5 min. for the t[Wl =
issuance of parking tickets to be bought p(p-r)
toll booth will be free
,x- '" =-40(4030
for occupants of each car.
Solution: E(*) = 0.075 hrs.
P(o)= 1
O Number of vehicles waiting to be served - 30)
u O Determine the expected length of
L =400vehicles/trr (anivat rate)
excluding the vehicles being served
queue, not including the vehicle being E(w) = 1.5 ,in.
p (seruin rate) E(m) =
l' served.
= 600 vehicles/hr
- i.)
u(rr tD What is the probability that there are no
! = * =0.667 traffic intensity I more than 5 cars at the gate including 2.241 Problem
p 600 p
= 50 vehicles/trr
the vehicle being served?
= 60 vehicles/hr @ Whatwill be the average waiting time of
P(o)= 1 - 9.6U,
400 vehicles per hour arrive at a single toll
a vehicle in the queue in minutes?
P(o) = 9,333 rt*l= = 4.tT vehictes
P(o)= S3.3Yoot *r,*, #kl Solufi'on;
booth located at the end of an off.ramp on
the TPLEX. lf the vehicles can be serviced
(t) Expected length of queue, not including at the rate of 600 vehicles per hour,
@ Length oframp determine the percentage of time the
€) Expected number of vehicles in the /^
the vehicle being served
\N+1 operator of the single toll booth will be
system
P(n)= i 1 r

Q='
D2
free.
t(n)
l.
=p-^ ^
\p, 1-P
l" = 30 veh/hour Solutionr
(1-0.80)= l,gl'.' l, = 400 veh/hour
[60/ 6o
E(n)= -100 - =2vehicles
600 - 400 0.8333N-' = 0.20 ' = 1.5
u = 40 veh/hour tr = 600 veh/hour
For the opratw to b fr*,the numbr of
N+1=8.82
@ Waiting time for the vehicles that wait -1"-
P= vehicles inthe system must be zero.
N = 7.82 say 8 vehicles p
E(v) '-
=p-/,
1

Ramp lengrr = 8(6) + (8 - 1X1.5) P=t-1

3o
P= =0.75 u
Ramp lerqh = 58.5 m 40
E(v)=
1

=0.005hrs. P(o)= 1 - "

1

^_
600 - 400 (0.75)'z
-
Raop L)grh = 8(6)+18.1 )( I
"l):58.5 nr tl
E(v) = 16.*. yfr* :*t'L. ji*% ;dr*.: =ost r.rt ! :-rJ!d 1 - 0.75
=aet p(o)=1-1Q
- 6 r.5 6 LJ 6 1.5 6 l.-t6 l-r 6 1.56 t.5 6
Q =2.25vehicles 600
=0.33:l

I
 20a TR,ANSPoRTATIoN & TR,A FFIC ENGINIERING TReNSeORTATION & TR.AFFIC E:NGI NEERING 2U^1

U nder-Saturated Fin ite @ Expected number of vehicles on the ramp |D Percent of time the ramp is full @ Average waiting time
ueues during the peak hour N=8 n=8
P
E{n) =[ ll[1 - (N + 1)P\ + I NPN'1
P(,)=[s]P. w

L1
-PlL _Pn'' ] 1
2tt(1 - P)
w z average waiting time

The toll booth on the on.ramp of SCTEX ,,,,.[#][ 1- + 1Xo.B)'o + 1

- @ Average total delay time

controls the number of vehicles that can 1 - (0 8)(10
1)

'(')=[frffi](0,), (queue time plus service

enter on the ramp at any one time, lt allows
only a maximum of 10 vehicles to be on the ,,,,=[#]f _t1-1.81+o.B59l rt')=
time)
ramp at any one time. lf the vehicles can
0.08se 1 -
J
I
[##)ro,",r 2-P
enter the SCTEX at a rate of 750 vshicles/hr E(n) = 2.97 tr, , P(8) = 9 633"
2p(1-P)
and the rate of arrival of vehicles at the on.
ramp is 600 vehlhr, The ramp is only 3.88 percent of the time. B. When both arrival and service
rates are assumed to be
O Determine the probability of 6 cars (e) Expected number of vehicles on the ramp ential distributed
being on the ramp. during peak hour
@ Determine the percent of time that the The maximum number of vehicles that can N=8 O Average queue length
ramp is full. enter the on.ramp of SCTEX is P -(ru * r)P' * ruP'"'1 p2
@ Determine the expected number of ,,n, =[ l[t
vehicles on the ramp during the peak
by the metering system which allows
vehicles to be on the ramp at any oen L1
-PJL -P''', l 1
Q='
1-P
hour. due to heavy traffic in the expressway. The
- (g)(o ao)' * o(o ao)' @ Waiting time
rate of arrival of the vehicles at the on; e(nr = 980 [r I
Solution:
O Probability of 6 cars being on the ramp
ramp is 420 vehicles/hr and ther ate that 0.20 1 1-(0.80)' l
L
the vehicles can enter the expressway is
E(n)-2.6 say 3vehicles
w=_
p(p - L)
p=l 525 vehicleslhr
p
O Determine the probability of 4 carc @ Total delay time
), . 600 veh/trr. being on the ramp. 1
l-
p = 750 veh/hr. @ Determine the percent of time that the Stochastic 7t-).
ramp is full.
6oo
P= =0.80 N = 10 vehicles @ Determine the expected number of A. When rate of arrivals follows a
750 vehicles on the ramp during peak hour. Poisson distribution and the (Stochastic Queue)
,(,)=lffi],, Solution:
rate of service can be assumed
to be exponentially distributed
Both rates of arrival and
0, Probability of 4 cars being on the ramp departures are
P(6)=[ffi]ror),.r.ru, P(')=f#]'" O Average queue length nential distributed
q=2P
-P'
@ Percent of time that the ramp is full p= I 14 N=8 2(1-P)
p = 525 =0.80
n=4 where: A stop sign is installed in one of the road-
n,i=[g], rrar=[ffi]toar p=L {rancintensttV)
intersection. Rate of arrival at a stop sign is
300 vehicles/hr and the average,waiting
p
time at the stop sign is 10 sec. per vehicle.
n,,,=[d#,]r,,r =,,,,
PU\=( o'20 l,o.ooru,
L= arrival rate inveh / hr lf both arrivals are exponentially
=o.oe46 p= seruice rate inveh / hr distributed, determine the average queue
[ 0.86578 /' length.

lX
 [,t
2O2 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENG]NEERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERTNG 2a-3

Solution: Solution: 2;O{S Service Rates of Ramps

l" = 600 veh/hr. p= 4 (average departure rate) Fre s
36o0 1 The following data of an off.ramp of TPLEX
'10
u= =36oveh/trr. P= =0.2S (A) On Ramp

Averagequeue length:
i ftrtensrty) is given as follows:
Arrival rate = 40 vehicles/hr which follows a
)u=3 (averageanival rate) Poisson distribution
p= tr = U Rate of service to vehicles which is l9| +{ ' ,}rl
p 360
=0,g33
w=- P
2rr(1 - P)
assumed to be exponentially distributed
wilh'a mean of 1 minute.
o=*=ffffi =4.t6vehbtes 0.75 Determine the average waiting time a driver
L a=l50 mtol80m
2(4)(1 - 0,75) waite before being served at the toll booth
(that is, the waiting time in the queue in
w = 0.375 nin / vehicle minutes). (B) Oll Ramp

Vehicles aniv6 at a stop sign at lhe corner

2.2l0l0 "'protlbiri Solution:
of D. Jakosalem and P.Del Rosario Streets
at the rate of 200 veh/hr. The waiting time P
97,'+l ' I

for each vehicle at the stop sign is i2 sec.

w=-
NLEX has an on-ramp consisting of 2rr(1 - P)
lf both arrivals and departures are single lane directly to a toll booth at
exponentially distributed, what is the end of the ramp. ll the rate of arrival at
tr = 40 veh/hr. La=lrngh ol Decelcration Rate
YR
average delay per vehicle in seconds, expressway follows a Poisson 60
with an arrival rate of fl) veh/hr and u=-
'1
Solution: service rate of 60 veh/hr which is
Average delay per vehicle to be exponentially distributed, p = 60 veh/hr. 2.2'l,1 GE Board May 2O16
l, = 200 veh/hr. the number of vehicles waiting to __ r
served at the booth, that is the number r-- A ramp meter operates during the morning
3600 p
p= vehicles in queue not including the
'12 =3ooveh/trr.
being served.
peak period. Ramp meter cycles vary with
o- 4o time as shown in the table below. The
l"
w=_--.*- Solution:
60 metering scheme allows one vehicle per
p(p - x) cycle to pass the signal. The table below
P = 0.667
O2 gives the number of vehicles demanding
200 Q= '
1-P P service on the ramp during particular time
300(300 - 200) w=- intervals, tho cumulative demand for the
2p(1-P)
w = 0.00667 hrs p=! ramp for the morning peak, and the ramp
0.667 meter cycle for each interval. What are the
w = 24 sec. tl w:-.- service rates for meter cycle 12, 10 and 6?
2(60X1 - 0.667)
o- 5o
w = 0.01669 Meter
60 l5 min. Cumulativ€
Time period Cycle
P = 0,833
w= l minute volume volume
(!oc/vehacle)
Consider lhe entrance to the Ocean park
where there is a single gate at wtrich all 6:30.6:45 AM 75 75 6
2(0.833)-(0.m3)'
vehicles must stop. lf the arrival rate of the ^_ 6:45-7:10 AM 100 175 10
vehicle is 3 vehicles per minute and the 2(1 -0.833) 7:00-7:15 Ail 12s 300 12
avsrage depafture rate is 4 vehicles per 7:15.7:30 AM 110 410 12
Q.2.% say 3vefrictes
minute, determine the average waiting time 7:30-7:45 AM 80 490 10
in the queue in minutes per vehicle. 7:45-8:00 AM 65 550 6
 204 TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATI()N & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 205
Solution: Demand @ Max. queue (no. ofvehicles)
Time (Vehicles/hour)
servtce rate = _
time interval Max. queue = 1580 vehicles
peter rycle Vehicles arrive at the entrance of the new
9. 10 AM 4000

extension of NLEX, There is a single 10-11AM 3500 @ Max. queue length in meters if one car is

seryrcerate= '
15(60)
' tollgate at which all vehicles must stop 11 - 12 Noon 2500 assumed to be 5 m. long
12 where a toll attendant distribute a trip 12-1PM 2000 15,0
1.2PM 2000 No. of vehicles per lane = = sss
Service rate . 75 vehicles
ticket. The toll opens at 6:00 AM at which 4
time vehicles begin to arrive at the rate of 8 2.3 PM 2000
Total length ofqueue = 395(5).1975 m.
5(60) vehicles per minute. After 20 minutes, 3.4 PM 2000
Servtcerate=
1
' '
arrival flow rate declines to 2 vehicles per
10
minute and it continues at that level for the
Service rate = V) vehicles remainder of the day. lf the time required to lf the estimated capacity of the 4 lanes with ,&rl'5
distribute the trip ticket is 15 seconds, 2 lanes open is 2960 vehicles/hour,
A traffic accident occurred along the North
servtcerate= '
15(60)
' determine the total number ol vehicles that
Diversion road at 6:00 AM. The flow rate
6 have arived and departed until no more O Compute the time when queue occurs. on the expressway at this time of day was
Service rate =150 vehicles
queue exist. @ Compute the max. queue (no. of 46 vehicles per min. The normal freeway
vehicles) capacity is 65 vehicles per minute but it
Solution: @ Compute the max. queue length in was reduced to 24 vehicles per min. due lo
meters if one car is assumed to be 5 m. the traffic accident. The traffic was cleared
Let t = time afler 6:00 AM so that there will
long. by the MMDA after 20 minutes.
no morc queue exlsfs
t;l{}',:,l:,,,,ptar&lgm
Arrival 20 min" after = 8(20) O Determine lhe max. length of the queue
Solution; before the blockage was removed?
A ramp meter operates during the morning Arrival 20 min. after = 160 vehicles
peak-period from 6:00 to 12:00 AM. The 0 Time when queue occurs @ Determine the time that the vehicles
Arrival after 20 min. = 2(t - 20) waited for the long queue before the
following data gives the number of vehicles
Cummulative Cummulative blockage was cleared.
demanding service on the ramp of SLEX 6o Time
160+2(t-20)= t Demand Capacity @ What time was the queue cleared?
during the time between 6:00 to 6;40 AM. 15
Determine the service rate for'lhe meter, 10:00 4000 2960 Solution:
which allows one vehicle per cycle to pass 160+2t*40=4t 11:00 7500 5920 (D lvlax. length of the queue before the
the signal between 6:20 to 6:40 AM. 2t= 12A 12:00 1 0000 8880 blockage was removed
1:00 1 2000 11840
t = 60 min.
20 min. Meler 2:00 14000 14800
Time Total number of vehicles which anived and
Volume Cycle 3:00 16000 17760
departed at 7:00 A[il
6:00 - 6;20 AM 80 10 4:00 1 8000 20720
6:20 - 6:40 AM 120 12 . 8(20) + 2(60 _ Z0)

= 244 vehicles
Time Demand-Capacity J.l
65
Solution: 10;00 4000 - 2960 = 040
20(60) 11:00 7500 - 5920 =
Service rate = 12:00 10000 - B8B0 = 1120
12
1:00 12000 - 11840 = 160 Y2
Service rate = 100 vehicles Scheduled maintenance will close two of 2:00 14000 - 14800 = - 800
3:00 16000 - 17760 - 1760 24
the four westbound lanes of a freeway =
its
4:00 18000 - 20720 - 2724
during one weekday for the period from = 40

9;00 A.fttl. to 4;00 P.M. The demand on the

Max. queue occurs at 11:04 A.M.
ti
two lanes are as follows: x
 1

2.U-6 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 207

h=24 (20) Solufionl

2000
h * 480 vehicles hr = 60(30)

fz= 46 l20l hr = 1800 20 r900

y2= 920 vehicles hz = 80(30)
L r 800
Max. queue = 920 - 480 ha = 2400 h
I 1700.

@
Max. queue = 440 vehicles

Time that the vehicles waited for the long

L=hz-hr
L = 2400

L = 600 cars
- 1800
l-
30 min.
-l
I
h1
r

1600
700

550
I
r 300
queue before the blockage was cleared. r 500
Total length of queue = 600(4.5)
10 min 15(
4A0
t.=-
'46
Total length ofqueue = 2700 m
r400
r 350 I 350. 400"
t, = 9.56 min. I 300
Nl ax. dela 30(
Time the vehicles waited for the queue
A toll plaza at the entrance to the NLEX 1200
= 20 - 9.56
consists of 3 booths each of which can
I ,r1
= 10,44 min. handle an average of one vehicle every 6 ll00 L

sec. The peak traffic of a toll booth is I 100

@ Time the queue was cleared recorded as follorrvs from

7:00 AM to 1000
M lx. queut
8:00 AM. 300 300
y3=46x
900
10 min. Cumulative
Y+=65(x-20) Time Period
Volume Volume 800
Ye=Yt+ 440 7:00 - 7:10 240 200 800
46x=65(x-20)+440 7:10 -7:28 400 600 700
19x-1300+440=0 7:20 - 7:30 500 1 100
600 // 300
x 45.26 min.
7:30 - 7:40 250 1 350 500
' 7:40 - 7:50 200 1550 r00
Time the trafiic was cleared = 6:tli.26 AM 7:50 - 8;00 150 1 700 500
500
O Determine the service rate of one toll 400
booth every 10 min. 300
2.216 @ Determine the maximum queue.
300
@ Determine the longest delay to an
The Northern Luzon Expressway (NLEX) is 200
designed to have a roadway capacfi of @
individual vehicle in min.
Determine the total delay in vehicle-
200 { .L

120 vehicles per. minute, But due to min. /

resurfacing ol the portion of the 100
expreEsway, the
road capacity was Solution:
reduced to 60 vehicles per minute, The O Service rate of one toll booth every 10 7:00 7: l0 7:2A 730 7:40 7:50 8:00
lraffic arrivals are 80 vehicles per minute. min.
The traffic then resumes after 30 min. 1o(60)
Compute the maximum length of the queue service rate =
6
if the average length of one car is 4.5 m.
Service rate' lNveh px10 min.
204 TRANSPORT,A.TION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRI\NSPORTATION & TRATTIC ENGINEERING 209
Q) Maximum queue Solution:
o=1100-(200*300+300) O Time the queue on the ramp begins and
ends 464 queu( ends here
o = 300 vehicles 450
Serylcerate= i
1 0(60)
440
@ Longest delay to an individual vehicle in 6
min. Service rate = 100 fiom 6:30 - 6:40 420
Longest delaY = 10 min.
servtce rate = r
0(60)
1 400
400 100
10
@ Total delay in vehicle-min
Service rate = 60 fom 6:40 - 6:50
Area of diagram = total delay 380
10(60)

'22lqlE *
(-1-09-1390)
Totatdetav= 1161
12 360

* tso),.,0, Service rate = 50 from 6:50 - 7:00

(300 +250),,,01 (250 340
* *
22 Servrcerate=
1
'
0(60)
' 330
10 320
* ]{rrol Service rate = 60 fiom 7:00 - 7:10
1 r00
300 80
10(60)
Total delaY ' 80N veh'nin' servicerate-
6 280
Service rate = 100 from 7:10 -7:20 270
260 Max no. of yel icles
i|278',t ; Problem, r,; Servtcerate=
10(60)
'
6
' in li te ramp qt ue
I
240
Morning peak period starts from 6:30 AM Service rate = 100 from 7 :20 - 7 :30 @
up to 7:30 AM in an .off-ramp meter of 220
Queue sfals from 6:40 and ends up 60
TPLEX which allows one vehicle per cycle
to pass the signal. The tabulated data 7:30 AM. 200
shows the number of vehicles demanding I
service on lhe ramp during a particular @ Max. number of vehicles in the r80
time interyal. ' queue 170
r60
Max. number of vehicles in the queue

Time Period
10 min.
Volume
Cumulative
Volume
Meter
Cycle = 270 - 190
140 1'
(sec) . 80 vehicles 140
6:30 - 6:40 80 80 5
t20
6:40 - 6:50 90 170 10
@ Total delay due to queuing on the ramp 60
6:50 - 7:00
7:00 - 7r10
7:$-7:24
100
60
70
270
330
400
12
10
6
Totaldelay =
ry * (30*Q (to)
r00

80
80 r
7:20 -7:30 50 450 6 * (891!0)1rq * CI91!Q1101 gueue \lartli here
60
O Determine the time the queue on the
/
ramp begins and ends. * flrror 40
2'
@ Determine the max. number ol vehicles
in the ramp queue. Total delay = 2400 veh-min. 20
/
@ Determine the total delay due to Total delaY = tl| veh ' hr' /
queuing on the ramp in veh-hour.
6:30 6:4O 6:50 7:00 7:10 7:15 7:30
 I

2"to TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRATSpoRTATIoN & TRerrIc ENGINEERING 211

ri) I\ilax. queue.

15 min. Gumulative
15(60) Time Period
= 150 veh/18 min. Volume Volume
The metering scheme of a ramp meter installed along the Pampanga-Subic Expressway 6
one vehicle to pass the signal. The cumulative demand for the ramp for the morning peak
8:00 - 8:15 800 800
15(60) 8:15 - 8;30 1000 1800
ramp meter cycle for each interval are ehown in the table. = 90 veh/15 min,
10 8:30 - 8:45 1200 3000
Meter 15{60) *75veh/1bmin, 8:45 - 9:00 800 3800
10 min. Cumulative
Time Perlod
Volume Volume
Cycle
12
9;00 - 9:15 700 4500
lsec]
Max. queue = 95
9:15 - 9:30 1000 5500
6:30 - 6:45 75 75 6
O Determine the max. queue.
6:45 - 7:00 100 175 10 @ Determine the maximum delay to Solufon:
7;00 - 7:15 125 300 12 vehicle. Q) Maximum delay to any vehicle = 15.5 min.
7:15 - 7:30 1r0 410 12 @ Determine the total delay.
O Time the queue clears = 9:15 AM
7:30 - 7:45 80 490 10 o Total delay
7:45 - 8:00 65 555 6
Totatdetay=ry-!f @ Max. number of vehicles in the
rrsl queue = f200
Solution: 600 (60 + 95),.,u, (95 + 85)
* + (15)
@ Longest delay suffered
5t5
Mox. delay to
22 vehicle = 15 mrn.
by any

550 ' any tehicle

* Errsr
525 I 5.5 min 2' @ Total delay
500 Total delay = 3750 veh-min. Area of diagram :
475
Total delaY = 62.5 veh - hr. 500 + 1200
450 Totaldelay = ql'- 2
5)

425
4t
- U:U#gQlrsy*
400
$rrsr
375 The capacity of the SGTEX is 8000 vehicles Total delaY = {Q500 veh-min,
Mar. queue 95
350 per hour in each direclion under normal
Total delaY = 675 vdt - hr.
325 conditions. On a certain holiday, an
300 I
accident occurs at 8;00 AM at a portion
75 near Tarlac. After the accident, the capacity
275 of the expressway in this direction Nofe:
is
250 reduced to 2000 vehicles/hour. At 8;45 Aftl,
Service rate from I : 00 to I : 45
225 the vehicles involved in the accident is
removed from the traflic lanes, which 2ooo(15)
200 =
lncreases capacity past the point to 4000 60'
175 vehicles per hour and at 9:00 AM is
150 removed. completely, which restoies = 500 vet/15 min.

125 capacity of 8000 vehicles per hour. Seruice rate from 8 : 45 to 9 : N

90
100
't5 (l) Determine the time the queue clears. _ 21000
(15)
75 @ Determine the max. number of vehicles 60
50 in the queue.
= 1000 veh/15 min
25 O Determine the longest delay suffered
by any vehicle.
6:30 6;45 7:00 7:15 '1;3O 7:45 8:00 r0 Determine the tohl delay.
 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 213
2"t2 TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
Solutlonl
6000 .r.) Time at which the number of vehicles in @ Total delay in vehicle-hour
queue is 150 is at 7:45 AM.
5600
Totar deray - 100(15) + (100 + 150)(15)
'22
5200 O Number of vehicles in the queue
5500.
* (150 + 250),,51 * (250 * 200),,u,
4800 Service rate per booth =
1

-;
s(60)
' 2 2 '-',
4500
4400 Service rate per booth = 150 veh/15 min. * ruo(s)
2
peue clears Service rale for 2 booths = 300 veh/15 min.
4000 here Total delay = 10500 veh-min.
3800
Service rate for 3 booths = 450 veh/15 min.
3600 Total delay= 175v&-hr.
Max. queue = 250vehiclxat8:(N AM
3200
3000
2300
2800
Max. qu 2800 22m I
2400
rm( 2 r00
longest 2050
2000 20u)
I 800
zoo-]
I 600 i 900
500
I 800
ttso'
lJuu 500 I 700
ROO I 65C
800 4\t booths open)
I 600
qu(t|e tarts here Mat.,
400 1500

1400
B: l-5 8:30 8:45 9:00 9: 15 9:30
I 300

t2u)
45t (3 booths
I 100
1 100

l0u)
s00

A toll booth in the Marcelo Fernan Bridge can handle on the average of one vehicle every 6 800

Morning peak period traffic volumes starts from 7:00 AM to 8:30 AM due to some workers in 450 (j booths ryen)
700
free zone in Mactan lsland. Before 7:00 AM, two booths are open. At 7:30 AM, a third booth' 6na
600
opened until 8:30 AM. roo --71
500
500
O Determine the time at which the Time Period
15 min.

number of vehicles in queue is 150. Volume Volume 400

// 300 (2 booths tpen)
-
@ Determine the max. queue and the time
it occurs.
7:00
7;15 - 7;30
200
400
200 300

200
2N r l

@ Determine the total delay in vehicle- 7:30 -7:45 500

100
hour. 7:45 - 8:00 550
8:00 - 8:15 400 2050 l

8:15 - 8:30 250 2300

7:00 7:15 7:30 7:45 8:00 8: 15 tl:10
 I

214 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING

TRANSP()RTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 215

Protlem ,r, Number of vehicles in queue at 7:45 AM O Determine the time when the queue is
15(60) maximum.
The toll booth in the totl bridge of San Juanico Strait in Tacloban City controls the flow service rate per booth - @ Determine the max. length of queue.
of traffic 6
thru the bridge. The toll plaza consists of two booths, eich of which can handle one vehicle @ Determine the total delay due to
every 6 sec. ServiQe rate per booth = 150 veh/15 min. queuing in the ramp in vehicle.minute.
The volume of traffic and its corresponding times during morning peak period is tabulated
as
shown. Service rate of 2 bo oths=3N veh / I5 min .

15 min. Cumulative Solution:

Time Period
Volume Volume r:)j Max. number of vehicles in O Time the queue is maximum
7;00 - 7:15 200 200
O Determine the number of vehicles in the
queue at 7:45 AM. queue =150
service rate for 6 sec. cycle
7:15 - 7:30
7:30 - 7:45
250 450
@ Determine the max. number of vehicles
" 14,r,
350 800 in the queue.
7;45 - 8;00 400 1200 :t, Total delay in vehicle-minute Service rate for 6 sec. cycle = 200 veh/10 min.
@ Determine the total delay in vehicle.
8:00 - 8:15
-
250 1450 minute. Totarderay= lSP * 150'1!91rs1 Service rate for 12 sec. cycle =
8:15 8:30 200 1650
(150 + 100).
{fltrl
Solution: + __:r(15) -. .
f-
100(15)
Service rate for 12 sec. cycle = 100 veh/10 min.
2 2
I 7(X)
I 650 Total delay = 4\Nveh.min. Service ratefor 10 sec. cycle =
I 6(X)
{ptrl
I 5(X) 3tx)
Service ratefor 10 sec. cycle = 120 veh/l0 min.
t"1.s0 .
1.1(X)'
IiX)
300
350
2.2fr ' Problem Queue is mafimum at 5:10 PM.

200
r 200 300 l
During Christmas vacation, ramp meters @ Max. length ofqueue = 790
along the expressway are open during the
100 150
evening peak period from 5:00 PM to 6:00
PM. The metering system of the SCTEX
000 @ Total delay due to queuing in the ramp
allows vehicles per cycle to pass the signal
100
900 I so that (for instance) 6 sec, cycle a Totatdetay=ry-G!!9itrol
t{u)_ corresponds to a service rate of one
8U)
t* -5()
i
vehicle every 3 sec. or 1200 vehicles per (50 + 190)(10) (190 + 30)(10)
+ +
7fi) I
hour. The cumulative volume and meter
cycles in each 10 min. period is recorded
22
600 I -100 30(10)
as follows: +
l_
l 2
I
500
450 Total delay = 29N) vdt - nin.
400 :
Time l0 min. Cumulative Illeter
Period Volume Volume cyclersec
300 ------T l
l0 150
I 5:00"5: 150 6
2oot- 5:10-5:20 120 270 12
ll
I
5:20-5:30 150 420 10
5:30-5:tll) 140 560 10
i

I
5:40-5:50 {60 720 6
7:00 7:15 7:30 7:45 8:00 8: 15 8:30 5:50-6:00 170 890 6

T
 216 TRANSPoRTA,TIoN & TnaTTIc ENGINEERING TRANSP()RTATION & TRI\FFIC ENGINEERING 217

O Determine the time the queue clears. @ Max. number of vehicles in the queue = 900
@ Determine the max. number of vehicles
in the queue. @ Longest delay suffered by any vehicle
@ Determine the longest delay suffered .
Longest delay from 10:45 to 11:00 AM
/ by any vehicle.
I @ Determine the totaldelay. @ Totaldelay
i9)1ts1
I Solution: Totatderay =
ry, * lamJ
72Or O Time the queue clears

Service rate =
4000(15) + o-qlli
(900 + 700)
2
60
Total d. iay = 30000 veh-min.
Service rate = 1000 veh/15 min. from 10:15 to 11 :00 AM
560 2W Total delay = fflJveh-hr.
Service rate = 2000 veh/15 min. from 1 1 :00 to 11 :15 AM
190 Time the queue clears is 11: /5 AM. (seefigure)
190
8000
120
50_ 760A
7500
7200

6800

6400
150 6200
6000
I 100
5600
I
I
2m0
5200
4900
4800

4400
5:00 5:10 5:2O 5:30 5:40 5:50 6:ff) 4100
4000
Mu , queue 100 )
3600

3200
3200
2800 100 )
A newly constructed expressway (TPLEX) 26ry,
has a capacity of 8000 vehicles per hour 15-min. 2400
Time Period
(2000 vehlmin.)in each direclion under Volume
2000
normal conditions. On a particular day 10:00 - 10:15 1200
roo )
(Sunday) an accident occurs somewhere in 10:15- 1 1400 1600

Pangasinan at 10:00 AM. After lhe accident, 10:30 - 10:45 1500 1200
1200 /
the capacity of the freeway in this direction 1 - 11:00 800 4900
800
is reduced to 4000 vehicles per hour (1000 11:00 - 11:15 1 100 6000
vehicles every 15 min.) until the carc 11:15- 11;30 1500 7500 400
involved in the accident is removed at
11:00 AM. 10:00 10:15 10:30 10:45 1l:00 ll:15 ll:30
 21A TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING TRANSPORTA.TION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERI NG 219

Problem Solution: Solufion;

-
I
Arrival rates:
Arrivat *
Vehicles arrive in a freeway on-ramp meter Jit.z o.st)ot
Trucks begin to arrive at a truck weighing flO
at a constant rate of 6 vehicles per minute
station at the entrance of South Super = I veh/min for 2o min.
starting at 6;00 AM. Service begins at 6;00 Anival=1.2+93f 60
2 Highway (with a single scale) at 6:00 AM at
AM such that p(t) = 2 + 0.5t where p(t) is in 1&
vehicles/minute and t in minutes after 6:00 Anival = 1.2 + 0.1512 a time varying rate of l,(t) = 4.3 0.221 - 60
= 3 veh/min for t > 2o min.
where l,(t) is in vehlmin and t is lime in
AM. What is the maximum queue length (in Departure = 12(t- 10) min. The departure rate is a constant 2
vehicles)? Q 't'
Timeta clear the queue (arrival = depaiure) veh/min (time to weigh a truck is 30 '15
Departure rates: = = 4 veh/min for all

seconds). When will the queue that forms

Solution: 1.2t+0.15t'?=12(t-10) will be cleared? e(eo) +l (t'zo) =a1

Anive = dt = 6t
J6 0.151'?-10.81+120-0 180+3t-60=4t
Solution;
Departure = Ot = (2 + 0.50dt t2 -72+800=0 Arrivat rate = t = 120 min. = 2 hr. after 8:00 AM
Jrtt) J,t(t)ot
1= 13.72 min. Time the queue will dissipate .10 : N) AM
Departure = 2l+ 0.251'1 Arrivat rate =
J(a.s-o.zzt)ot
Queue = rate of arrival - departure rate Arrival rate = 431-A.1\2

Q(t)=6t-(lt+Q.l$1'z;
2.227 Problean Departure l.16. JZOI 2;23O Problem
Q(0 = 4t'O.zst'? There are 10 vehicles in queue when an Departure rate = 2t
attendant opens the toll both of a parking Vehicles begin to arrive at a toll booth at
ln order that there will be no queue
Max.queue lengh: space of MGM Hotel and casino to see the 7:50 AM written arrival rate of
dQ
conce( of Elvis Preslyr llore vehicles Arrival = departure l.(t1= 4.1 + 0.001t with t in min. and l,(t) in
=4-0.5t=o arrive at the toll booth at a rate if 4 vehicle vehicles/min. The toll booth opens at 9:00
dt per minute. The aftendant opens the booth 4.31-01112 = 2t
AM and process vehicles at a rate of 12
t=8 and the service rate was given as a 2.31 - 0.1 1t2 .0 veh/min throughout the day when will the
function p(t) = 1.1 + 0.3t where p(t) is in queue dissipate?
Arrivals = 6(8) veh/min. and t in minutes. After how many t= N.91 min.
'48
minutes will the queue be clear? Soluffon;
Departure= 2l-0,25t2
iu(t)=3.3+2.+t
Solution:
Departure = 2(8) + 0.25(8)'? = 42 2.22T. Froblom From 7:50 to 8:00 AM, t = 10 min.
Anival rate = * tO
J,l.t
Max. queue = 48 - 32= 16 cars 10.3.3 + 2.41
Vehicles arrive at entrance to the parking
Anival rate = 4t + 10
lot ol Sil Seaside Mall. fhere is single gate t = 2.792 min.
Departure r.16 = + o.3t dt at which all vehicles must stop where a
J(t.t )
pa* Time at which seruice becomes constant at
Problem attendant distributes parking tickets,
Departure rate = 1.11 + 0.15t2 The parking opens at 8:00 AM at which 10veh / min:
Vehicles begin to aniv6 at a parking lot in To clear the queue , arrival rate = departure rate
time vehicles begin to arrive at 360
vehicles per hour. After 20 minutes the t=10+2.792
Sil Seaside at 6:00 AM with an arrival rate arrival flow rate declines to 180 vehicles
4t+ 10= 1.1t+0.151,
per minute of p(t) = 1.2 + 6.3t where t is in per hour and it contlnues at that level for t= 12792nin.
minutes. At 6:10 AM, the parking lot opens t'?-19.33t-66.67=o the remainder ol the day. lf the time
and processes vehicles at a rate of 12 per required to distribute the parking tickeb is
minute. After how many minules will the l= 3 min.
15 sec., at what time will the queue that
queue be clear?
began to form at 8:00 AM will dissipate,
 22(.J^ TR,ANSPoRT,ATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGIN EERI NG
TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 221
when Q() = 6
ntt;rr, rate - Departure rate
5.21-0.10t' -20=0 Q(t1 =
Stopping Sight Distance for
Vehicles begin to anive at a toll booth at
8;50 AM with an arrival iate of
t2 -s2+200=0 Q(t; " S.31- O.OU,' - ,, Horizontal Road Surface
t = 4.183 min. (timethe 21thvehicte arives) For max.Q(t):
'
l,(t; 4.1 + 0.001t with t in min. and f(t) in vl v YJ{]
vehicleslmin. The toll booth opens at g:00
AM and process vehicle at a rate of 12
#=$=3uut'/,nin' !!0=3.3-o.1ot-u=o !d$&tr',,,, ffir'q.,,,,,'i!ffi&t;', i
dt :- Xei0rDkre :- Bruts8Dlse.
-
veh/min throughout the day. When will th Rnival.
Jirdt
. vt .....y1,......
queue dissipate? 3.3-u ?dr*6)
Arrival = 3t '- -
0.10
S = SappioS $ighl dist*
Solution: Q(t) = 31- ,O
Q(t) . 1.31- O.OUtz - rt' Vt = velociU in metbrslsec.
Arivat= Q(0=o
Jr.(t)dt | = perception-reaction time
Arrivat = J{+.r
* o.ott)ot 3t-20=0 + =es[33-p )-oosl33-r ]'-rl 33-s ]
l.0.10, l\0.10J'(0.10J
f = coefficient of friction between tires and
t. 6.667 (time the 2athvehicle departs) pavemenfs
Anival =4,1t+0.00512 G = average grarle of roadway
Wait=6.667-4.183 Solvingfw 11.2.11v$ / min.
Departure = 12(t- 10)
\t\tsil= l.lglfin.
9:00 - 8:00 = 10 min. afler anival

Anival = departure (sothat queuewiil dissipate

or so thbt there will be no queue)

4.1t+0.005t, = 12(l- srcHT nt$TANiCf 'rOR Determine the minimum stopping sight
10) distance on a - 3.5% grade for a design
t= 15.34 min.
HORIZONTAL SURFACE speed of 110 kph. Coefficient of friction
Vehicles begin to arrive at a remote between tires and pavement is 0.28.
lot aftor the start of major sporting Driver's reaction time (including perception
They are arriving at a deterministic but Sight distance = is lhe length of roadway time) is 2.5 sec.
time-varying rate of ),(t) = 3.3 - 0.1t ahead visible to the driver.

?, (r) ts tn Yeh/min. and tn mtn, The parking Passing sight distance the srghl' Solution:
Vehicles arrive at a toll booth according to lot ailendant proceSses vehicles distance long enough to enable a vehicle
the function ),(t1 = 5.2 - 0.201 where l,(t) is V:30.J6 nis Y=30J6 rds
spaces and collect fees) at a to oveftake and pass anather vehicle on a Srop

in vehicles per minute and t is in minutes. rate at a single station. A queue -.-i ::L-! .t':1\. {. -a:'\
two-lane highway wihout intelerence
.' . .

The toll booth operator proce$ ;f!fitt..=,:60$&ea6&-.-"-TJi& t

one four vehicles will back up onto a from opposing traffic.
vehicle every 20 seconds. Determine the street, and is to be avoided. How ' 16..10 194.29
time that the 20th vehicle to arrive waits vehicles per min. must the Stopping sight distance = the miniimum -
from its arrival to its depa(ure. process to ensure that the queue does not distance required stop fo vehicle a S - $r0ppin* righl disrane

exceed four vehicles? traveling near the desrgn speed before it

reaches a stationary object in the vehicle
Solutian: V=ry=3056m/s
X(t)=5.2-O.r* Eolution: path. This stationary obiect may be J.b
another vehicle or some other object Stopprng srgirl drstance r
4n;rr6 = J,a,1t;ot Arrivatrate =
J,tltyor within the roadway. rt2

Arrivat rate = Minimum stopping sight distance

S=Vt + v
J{s.s o.r0ot
Arrivars = - -
Jts.z o,zot)ot 2g(f + G)
Arrivals = 5.21- 0.10t') Arrival rate = 3.31- 0.05t2 = is equal to the distance traveled from
(30 56)?
the same time the object is sighted to the S = 30.56(2.5) +
Q(t) = Anivals - Departure Departure rate = instant the brakes are applied plus the 2(9.81X0.28 - o.o3s)
Jldt
Q(0 5.21- 0.10t'? - zo distance required for stopping the vehicb. S=76.40+194.29
" Departure rate =,ut
afrerthe brakes are applied.
S = 270.69 m.

I
 l

222 TRANSPORTI\TION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTA.TION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 223

Braking Distance to Avoid vxnTlcAI Solution:

Collision CURVES ^u^=g,L

'
A vehicle traveling at a speed of 80 kph ' 9, -9,
which accelerates 3.41 m/s2. The Vertical Summit Curves -0'041
perception reaction time for the driver h 46=-
0.04 - 0.06
2.5 sec. lf the maximum grade of the road
ln an inlersection collision one of
vehicles leave 48.78 m. of skid marks. A
the
is - 47o, compute the minimum sigrht 2.217 Problem l= 120 n
distance. 1l

skid mark analysis indicates that the The length of a summit vertical curve is
vehicle was traveling 80 kplr at the onset of
200 m. Tangent grades for the vertical
braking. Assuming the
median.brake
reaction time of 0.66 sec., estimate He
Solution: curyes are +3% and .2%. Compute the tf,!ffi
radius of the summit curve.
distance fiom the point of impact to the On a railroad, a + 0.8% grade meets a -0.4%
v
vehicle position when the driver initially grade at sta. 2 + 700 and at elevation 30 m.
Solution:
reacted, Deceleration rate of the vehicle is
1.5 m/s2. _1200
Q= - =-_]i-=4lM)m.
The maximum allowable change in grade
per station is 0.2%. Determine the length of
9, 9, 0.03 - (- 0'02)
-
the curve.
Sight dish@
Solution:
Solution:
L* V=?22X ntls Sr =Vt
-_9,-9,
sr Sr=48J8 d '" #
=""*t A vertical summit curve has tangent grades
n

0.8 + 0.4
s S,=22.22(2.51 of +5% and -3.8%. The horizontal distance u.l=
n
from the P.C. to the highest point of the
80
S, = 55.56 m. (tagdistance) curve is 113.64 m. Determine the length of n=6
-
V= = 22.22m1s
the curve.
3.6 v2 L = 6(20)
s2
v'1 =vt'z -2asz 2g(f t G)
Solutrbn; l=lNm
-a
""'-- q -q
(22.22)2 =Y,z - 2(1.5X4S.7S) I=- 9,L
s
V = 25.30 n/s

S, =Yt
f",ffi=0.35 113.M =0.05o'05- 0.038
L

A vertical parabolic curve has a length of

S, L=2N)m
= 25.30(0.66) 280 m. lt has an initial and final grad$ of
sr= +3% and -4o/0. lhe elevatlon of the P.C. is
2(e.81X0.35 - 0.04)
S, = 16.70 m.
30 m. and is at station'10 +'120.
S, = 81 .18 m. (braking distance)
Distance from the point of impact to the vehicle
position when the driver initially reacted : Minimum sight distance : O Find the value of K (length of curve for
A vertical summit curve has its hlghest every 1'of change in slope).
S=S, +S, S=S, +S, point of the curve at a distance of 48 m. @ Find the stationing of the highest point
from the P.T. The back tangent has a grade of the curve.
S=16.70+48.78 S=55.56+81.18
of +6% and a foruard tangent grade of -4%.
@ Find the elevation of the highest point
S = 65.48 m, S= 136.74 m. lf the statloning of the P.T. is 10 + 100, of the curve.
determine the length of vertical summit
curve in meters.
 fi
224 TRANSF:ORTATI()N & TRAFTIC E:NGI N EERING TRaruspo RTATION & TRAFFIC EN(iIN EE R N (, 225
Solufon:
Check:
O Value of K

K= |A H-f{0,-0,)
A symmetrical vertical summit curve has
h2 tangents of +6t7,
,_ 280(3+4) ,n6 .4%. lf the stationing
A'9,-9, II- 100
and elevation of the P.T. is l0 + 020 and
8(1oo)
n=s-(-a) 225
1!2.63 m. respectively, compute the
H=2.45 elevation and stationing of the highest
A=7 point of the curve. Length of curve is
v 2.45
280 5=325 m 120 m.
K= = 40 m. (120)' (140)'?
125 rr

7
y=1.8 Using slope diagram method Solution:
€r Stationing of the highest point of the curve Elev. A = 30 + 0.03(120) - 1.8 h, = area of shaded section

S-Kgr Elev.A=31.8m .n= 0.02fi25\

S = 40(3)
,2 ' /

h, = 1.25 m u.
S=120m t42
(10+D0) P.T,

6{)m 60 rr
Check:

^ s,L
s= ",",=120m
"' = 003(280) A grade is followed by a .270 grade
Elev. A. 1%.60 - 22i(0.02) + 1.25

9, - 9, 0'03 + 0"04
+5.2010
Elev"A= 191.35m.
of a vertical summit parabolic curve at 120-r , =4{i
Stationing of highest point station 2 + 230 with an elevation of 194.60
= (10 + 120) + (120)
m. The parabolic curye is 450 m. long.
I : Stationing of point C whose elevation is

=10+240 O Compute the length of curve per 1' I 1s5.35

il_
Ustng s/ope diagram method:

,t. (l
change in grade. t85..t5 lt
By ratioand propotbn
@ Elevation of the highest point @ Compute the elevation of the highest r=27.1.1i6 m '.7.

Uslng slope diagram methad: point of curve. 0.06 0.04

@ Compute the stationing of point C

325
120 -x x
x=48m
t+0
whose elevation is 185.35.
,n^=0.052(32s)
' ' .
h area ofshaded porfion
I
Solution;
ofhe
h
O Length ofcurve per l"change in grade h, = 8.45 m. sloped diagram

A =9, -9, y1 =191.35-185.35 .n=0.04(48)

' '
I
A=5.2-(-2) Y, =6m
h = 0.96
A=7 2 Using square properly of parabola.
120 r 6{)
L 8.45 Elev. of highest point of curve = ,l42.63 + 0.96
K= 9=62.im _ 6
h = area of shaded section
r
A= 7.2 $2q'? x', Elev. of highest poinl of curve = 143.i9 m

.h= 120(0.03)
' '
x = 273.86 Stalioning of highest point of curve

2
@ Elevation of the highest point of curve Stationing ofA. (l + 230) + 100
=(10+020)-48
S=Kgr StationingofA=2+llg
h=1.8m = (9 + 972)
S = 62.5(5.2)
Stationing ofC = (2 + 330) - (273.86)
Elev.A=30+1.8 S = 325 m. (location of highest point of
Stationing of C = 2 + 056.14 m
curve from P.C.)
Elev,A=31.8m
226 TRAN SPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRaTTIC E:NGINEERING 227

By ratio and proPortion Solutron: h = area ofshaded section

0.03 0.02
t Length of the vertical curve
o.o3(140)

A vertical summit parabolic curve has s, 250 - sl l5i)+(l(l

h=
2
=21m
E1. = a8 n /// tlitha! pnil ol<uv.
tangent grades of +2'8% and '1.6%' lf the S, = 150 m. ftom P.C. Elev. of P.T. = 48 - 210(0.03) = 41.70 m
length of the curve is 110.46 m, compute Elev. P.C. = 190,50 - 125(0.03)
the radius of the vertical curve. Elev. of A = 41.70 + 2.1 = 43.80 m
Elev. P.C. = 186.75 m h
P.T.
Clearance between A and aossrod :
Solution; h = area of shaded area diag. P.C.

L=KA
fll.=l?.50m Cro.$nrrl C=43.80-37.50
_ 150(0 03) t sd*r0
h = 2.25
A=2.8-(-1,6) I Lt2 70 {Ll2t,1t) C = 6.3m

A=4.4 Elev. of highest point of curve = 186.75 + 2.25 s2

110.46 = K(4.4) Elev. of highest pint of curve = f89 m' @ Length of curve based on appearance
criteria if V = 120 kph
K . 25.10
V > 60 kph and A> 2o/o
R=100K (Lt2)+7o (Lt2)-7O
where:A=6-t3)=9
R = 100(25.10)
By rafioand proportlnn Use Lrn. .2V
R= 2510 m.
A vertical summit curve connec{s a 0.06 0.03 Lmin. = 2(100) = 210 m.
grade to a -3% grade at the P.l. at station :, +70
150 + 00 whose elevation is 48 m. , 70

crossroad is located at station 150 + 70. ! +20 =(L ,,)(ffi)

Elevation ol the centerline of the 2
lz Vertical Curves
is 37.50 m.
A back tangent grade of a crest vertical ! +20 =(t- .zo)rzr
O Compute the length of the vertical I [2
curve is +3% intersects a minus 270 $rade
at station 4 + 350 and at elevation of 190'50 curve needed to make the
m. the length of curve is 250 m'
lf point on the vertical curve come out
! +20 =l- 140 A grade of.57o is followed by a grade of
2
determine the elevation of the highest point exactly over the centerline of, the +1ol0,the grades intersecting at the vertex
L+140=2L-280
of the curve. Use slope diagram method. crossroad at station 159 + 70. (Sta. 10 + 060). The change of grade is
@ Compute the clearance between the L= 420 m. restricted to 0.4% in 20 m. Compute the
Solufion: profile grade on the vertical curve length of the vertical parabolic sag curve in
,++350
the centerline of the crossroad' ,rr Clearance between the profile grade on meters.
lf the design sPeed is 120
B1 I 90.50
@ I the vertical curye and lhe centerline of the
determine the minimum length ol crossroad Solution;
150+Ul
curve required considering appearanc0 El. = 48 nl
. _ 9, -9,
h criteria.
,50+00 n
P.C. El. - ltt6.75 rn LI. = 4lt rl I {ith!! port oJ t r^a'

h 0.4=1*5
2T.
c n
41.70
El =:17.50rn 0r)!r,?rzl n=15
h l5(h 7l)
i P.T,
0I)2
L = 15(20) = 3(N m
t.l. = 37.50 m Cr.)rr ral/
.t 250-S

_l':l:"
l't2 ?o \Ll2)'70
280 140
s2
-

224 TRANSP()RTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING :TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 229

2248 GE Board May 2O{5 Solufion; Solution:

_80
260
A -6% grade and a +2% intersect at 10

STA 12 + 200 whose elevation is at 14:375 T,

t'.(:.
h
lr,T. A 300 m. vertical parabolic sag curve are
m. The two grades are to be connected by
connected by tangent grades of -5% and
&_
,.\6._ +l% which intersects at station 10 + 050
a parabolic curve, 160 m long. Find the I.05 m
and elevation 374.50 m.
elevation of the first quarter point on the
l2+125
curve.
8l,.25 Eler'. 14.2
O Compute the length of curve per 1'.
Solution: change in grade.
n= (0,-s,) 260-,S @ Compute the distance from the P.C. to
80 80 f S= 108.31 the lowest point of the curve.
n= @ Compute the elevation of the lowest
t.c. u.:1.
$t-ooo-ooz) point of the curve.
{).042
t.o.n.il ybr tItttr.
H=-1.6m. (sqcurue)
Solufion;
(40)'? _ (80)'?
0.30 nr O Length of curve per 1

EI.14."t75
Y, 16
1.35 m
change in grade
I .()5 nr
)/1 = 0.40
r=!A
H=f{s,-0,) Elev. of P.C. = 25.632 + 80(0.06) = 30.432
A=gr_9.,
Elev. of tirst quarter point:
A=1-(-5)
H= (0.02+rs6; Elev. = 30.432 - 40(0.6) + 9.46
T Elev. = 28.432 m.
By ratioand propaftion A=6
H = 1.6 0.042 0.03
x=S
v H
260-S S 6
K= 50 m.
(40)' (80)' 0.072S = 260(0"03)

S = 108.33
..
Y -
_ (40)'(1.6)
(8or
A descending grade of 4.2% intersects an
h = area of shaded section
@ Distance from P.C. to the lowest point of
ascending grade of 3% at sta. 12 + 325 at the curve
)/ = 0.40 elevation 14.2 m. These two grades are to 0.03(108.33)
be connected by a 260 m. vertical parabolic "_ Sr=Kgr
2
Elev. A = 14.375 + 40(0.06) + 0.40
curve. A r
einforced concrete culve( pipe Sr '50(5)
with overall diameter of 105 cm. is to be h = 1.625
Elev.A=17.175m. 3t = 250 m. from the P.C.
constructed with its top 30 cm. below the Eiev. P.T. = 14.2 + 0.03(130)
subgrade. What will be the invert elevation r 50 r50
of the culvert? Elev. P.T. = 18.10 P.C I

Elev. of A= 18.10 - 1.625 h

t30 r30
h'ia ponil o/.rr'( t
Elev. of A = 16.475 m.
A -6% grade and a +2'/o grade intersect at P.C. P.T.

STA 12 + 200 whose elevation is at Elevation of invert of culvert = 10.475 - 0.3 - 1.05
25.632 m. The two grades are to be
connected by a parabolic curve, 160 m
1.05 m
Eievation of invert of culvert . 15.12 m
long. Find the elevation of the first quarter l7+3?5
0.05
point on the curve. lilev. I 4.2
ll zso TRA,NSeoRTATToN & TRAFFIc ENGTNEERING TRANSPoRTATION & TRaTTIC ENGINEERING 231

Check; Using slope diagram Using slope diagram miltd. Elev.A=51.10+0.80 Solufion;
0.05 0.01 180-S_ S Elev.A=51.90n,t. Lt2 l-t2
s1 300 -s] 0:025 0.01 Elev. B * 50.90 * 0.008(40) P,a,' f0't- ll'J1)'1tt
,,1.
15 - 0.06 S1 1.8-0.01S=0.025S h
Elev.B=51.22m
Sr =250m.ft0mP.C. 0.035 S = 1.8 tlol'
0.75
y=51.90-51.22
Check: S = 51.43 m. 5t).4{) nr
200+70
y = 0.68 E.=I50 nl
S.= 9rL Check usingformula:
' 9, -9, g,L
^
b=s H=! (e, 9r)
5. =
-o o5(3oo) p.C. -
'9, 9,
8 u=! (gr -9,)
= 250 m. from
' -0.05-0.01 s
c _ 0.01(180) H=!
8
(- 0.01 2 0.008)
r=! Io or - 1-o.oosy]
@ Elevation of the lowest point of curve: 0.01- (- 0.025) 8
using slope diagram H=- 0,002501 (negative sign indicates
S ='51.43 m. ok H = 0.001881
Elev. of PT = 374.50 + 150(0.01) a sagcurue)
t \2 ,. \2 Etev. A= 150 + 70(0.01)
Elev. of PT = 376 m.
x-90-51.43 (5) _ (b-40)
.
Area of shaded diagram

oo(50)=g.25
h
x = 38.57 m.
H- oss
Elev.A=150.70m.

Elev.B=150.40+0.75
6= L2 -401{1600
2 Stationing of lowest point = (100 + 00) + (38.57) L2 -_____-4-
Elev.B=151.15m
Elev.ofA=376-0.25 Stationing of lowest point = lN + 38.57 4(0.00251) 0.68
y = 151.15 - 150.70 m
Elev. of A = 375.75 m L - 1601 6400
L2 +

0.01 4(0.68) Y=0.45m

y
2'72L
-12 - 16oL + Moo t' ,2 =H
0.01 (i - 70J (l)'
A -2.5Yo grade is connected 1e 3 +1.0% A vertical curve ioins a -1.2o/o grade to
grade by means of a 180'm. verlical curve. +0.8% grade.'The P.l. of the vertical 272L=t - 1601+6400
0.45 0.001881(4)
The P.l. station b 100 + 00 and the P.1. is at is at station 75 + 00 and elevation 50.90 ( -nzt+&too-o
:---; t
elevation 100 m. above sea level. What is above sea level. The centerline of the (!-r0)'
the stationing of the lowest point on the roadway must clear a pipe located at L= 416.M say 117 m.
0.45 0.00752
vertical curve?,, station 75 + 40 by 0.80 m. The elevation of

Solulion:
the top of the pipe is 51.10 m. above seh (r-to)' L

level. What is the minimum length of thq

eQ
x
90
sJ
vertical curve that can be used? (t-zo)'-
\z
0'451

' 0.00752
Solution: A vertical curve joins a 4.5% grade to
+1.0% grade. The P.l.
a
(t -zo)' = 5e,841 lil
of the vertical curve
Ltz l-t2
is at station 200 + 00 and elevation 150 m. l2
I{ above sea levEl. The c€nterline of the :- -701+4900=59.841
h roadway must clear a pipe located at
3c1t' station 250 + 70 by 0,75 m. The elevation of f -zaot+19600=239.361
the top of the pipe is 150.40 m. above the
rr L'z - 51 9.361 +1 9600 = o
sea.level. yUhat is lhe minimum length of
.10
Pt,
180-s ,' &ll.=50.r0 n1
vertical curve that can be used? L= 418.39 m.
 232 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 233

2.255 Problem l't

A EI.
'-"--_- =62.tt0 n
..---tr; '{r.02i,n,'
Unsym metrical Parabolic Solving for L1:

-./ =\ rn,r)7tnr
_ t,,
Curves 2H (gr - gz) Lz

[ =
' -_ ,,
(l m
The length of a sag vertical curve is 420 m. .,.n. ,,,, n,
'n 'tl? L1+t{
with langent grades of -2% and +4% t,,t1t4 rtt\.
/-rf ' A vertical highway curve is at
times
ft - Ar.,,lr,n \l
designed to include a particular elevation at a
2H\+ 211sr= Lr Lz (gr - gz)
intersecting at a point whose stationing is
at 160 + 00 and elevation of 60 m. above certain station where the grades 0f the forward - - 2ul - 211s, llii
L1[r, (S1 9z)
sea level. A pipe is to be located at the Elevation at point A .64,2A - 1.4 and backward tangents have already been
lowest point of lhe vertical curve. The Elevation at point A = 62.80 m. established. lt is therefore necessary to use a
roadway at this point consists of two 3.6 m.
Elevation of the top of the pipe
curve with unequal tangents or a compound .Lt=66,11,;1fr
2HL2
lanes with a normal crown slope ol 2Yo. lt curve which is usually called 'unsymmetrical"
the lowesl point on the surface of the = 62.80 - 0.822 or asymmetrical parabolic curve where one
roadway must clear the pipe by 0.75 m, = 61.978 m parabola extends from the P.C. to a point
Applying the squared property of parabola, in
what is the maximum elevation of the top directly below the vertex and a second
solving for the vertical offsets of the parabola,
of the pipe? parabola which exlends from this point to the
P.l. ln order to make the entire curve smooth
Solution: and continuous, the two parabolas are so
n,f,'lio ,$rirtlem constructed so that they will have a common
tangent at the point where they joined, that is
0.02(3.6)
!t
ir)?2 n A vertical sag curve has tangent grades of at a point directly below the vertex.
'' O.75 m o.lttz nr P,C,
J-6 rn 3.6 m 1.5% and +3.5%. lf the length of curye
Lel us considerthe figure shown below: ' 1,.7.

o 1% change in grade is 32.13 m, find

maximum speed allowed to pass through
xt
LI L2
x2

this curve in kph. 8tL2 YrH

L-410 m ht (xr)'
-=..-(Lr)'
Solufion: ,-/
K=32.13 I YzH
,-=..-
A = - 1.5 - (3.5)
L2/2 * (x2)' [z)'
L2

R=-5 (sag) kL1+L2 ! Location of the highest or lowest point of the

Lt = length of the parabolic curve on the left curye.
L=AK
side of the vertex.
2IJO
L = 5(32.13) L2 = length of the parabolic curve on the right a) Fromthe e.c. wnenL$ .n
-002 L. 160.65 side of the ve(ex.
l)riltg thyt dialruut g1 = slope of backward tangent

9,L
l=
AV2 gz = slope of lonruard tangent
,r'#
'-
o 395

9., -9, 5V' Consideing tiangles AVD and ABC.

s, s2
160.65 = 2H (gr -gz) Lz
^ _- lr =
- 0.02(420) 395
o, L1 +12
-002--oo4 V =112.661Oh
(gr - gz) Lz
S, = 140m H=2(t;E
Elev. of P.C. = 60 + 2t0(0.02) ht
Elev. of P.C. = 64.20 m. n,=1,
.. [* 140(0.02) =1.4m nr=tt
2 I-t 1.2

lJ
 I

234 TRANSP()RTATION & TRATTIC ENGINEERING

TRANSPoRTATIoN & TneTTIc EN(iIN EEIRING 435
Let 93, be the slope of the common Sr = location of the highest or lowest
tangent of the parabolic curve. Solving for g
s in equation @.
of the curve from the P.C.
2H: 12!6 - L2!2
.i An runsymmetrical parabolic curyo has a
s1 Likewise, the location of the lowest ot forward,tangent of - 8% and a back tangent
8r @. rc)L/2
highest point of the curve could bd _
(O g3=
2H+Lzgz
of *5%. The length of cure'on the left side
\, computed from the P.T. of the curve, this t{ of the curve is,40 m. long,nthile that of the
\
Ln 0,
-83L,12 holds true when is greater than
right side is 60 m. long. 'The P.C. is at
P.C
t' H,,
station ,6 + 780 and hasangbvationof
Considering the ligure shown, let usj Substrtute equation @ in A.
Lt 110 m. An outcrop is found at station 6 +
Considering the symmetrical parabola
assume that the highest or lowest point ofl o _ gzlz
o2-gr-g, 800 hc an elevation.of 108.40 m. Compute
the curve is found on the right side of the| the.elevation of ,the highest:point of the
AVF, the location of the highest point of
the sag is obtained from the relation.
parabota. il gzlz ourye.
S2 - 2A + Lzgz
--f

o s,' =g!L bl
Lt gt
L2
'9t Solufion: I

FromtheP.T.when >H
9r-9s 2 :

8*)u2
^ 9z$z\2 I 20
Substitdintg lhese yalues and solving far
gJ, we have:. 52=
gzLz2 "2=ril;I;;lL#s,
2H gzLz
52= from the P.T,
L, 2H
o H=7(or-9s) s2
&780
t:l.=!!{tn Lr-ArJ t".4,
2H=1191-1193 Lr 0r
> H, the highest or lowest point 2H Lz@t - gz)
9aLr=Ltgr-2H
When
f = *h
of the curve is located on the right side of the 14 L1
L191-2H
93=-- 8t. curye. ..412(.st-gz)
'
L1
- H= 2G;6
^2H
tl) 9e=91 - Ll (60) I0.05 - (- 0.08)t
$ ,,
u _ 40
tt-
A o when 2(40+60)
Fron equation O subsltute equation L2 H = 1.56
@.
0r L. use, s2=ff fromtheP.T.) lli\h?st toi,1r

"1
-g', -g., Considering the right side of the parabola,
St25.6l
VFCD.
grlr
^'l2H\
5r:-- v
Lr 0n

9r-\9r - q
@ When t.n
/ L2l2(&-gz) s2
E.=l08.d0m

9r L1
I.,
Use: 51=# ffromtheP.C.)
e78{)
LF4o Lz=60
51 =
(gr Lr - 2H)
9r- L1
Lr gt 40 (0.05)
uLt2 L2 2 2 = 1.0 < H
Sr =,
grLr- Lt+2H 0o Lr o,
(, 5r=- Lo2
L1 ' 9r-92 Sr =1f fromP.C.

L,
€) H=i(s3-s2) c -_ 0.05 (40)2
,r=ff "1
&
2 (1.56)
= 25.64 m.

I
 296 TRANSPoRTAT|oN & TRAFrtc E NGINEERING TRarvseORTATIoN & TRAFFIG TNoI N EER I N G 237
HYz
=rr#ry s iral Curves 6 angle of interseclion of spiral 3. Offset distance from tangent at S.C.
t+F easement curve L2
f, = ----L
tz=--[py
1.56 Q5.64\2
- 71. angle of intersection of simple ' 6R,
curve
Y2= 0.64 B T.S, tangent to spiral 4. Offset distance from lhe tangent at
Elev. of E = 1 10 + 0.05 {25.64) - 0.64 9R. radius of simple curve any point in the spiral
Elev. of E = 110.642 m. 10. l3
Dc degree of simple curve
X=XrL'l
11, L.T, long tangent
12. S.T. short tangent
13. Es external distance of the spiral 5. Deflection angle at any point on the
spiral
curve
A. 3% grade meets a +5% grade near an
14. L.C. = long chord of spiral transition .S
l-
underpass. ln order maintain the to 15. Xc offset from tangent at S.C.
-
3
=
minimum clearance allowed under the
16. Yc distance along the tangent from
bridge and at the same time introduce a
vedcal transition curve in the grade line, it
=
6. Distance along tangent at any point in
l=42 the T.S. to S.C. the spiral
is necessary to use a curve that lies 200 m. 17. X offset from tangent at any point
L5
on one side of the vefiex of the straight \,=l
grade and 100 m. on the other. The station
on the spiral
' '+oniL]
--

18. Y distance along tangent at any {

of the beginning of the curve (200 m. side)
point on the spiral
is 10 + 000 and its elevation is 228 m, 10 e 7 Distance along tangent at S.C. from
vc spiral angle at S.C.
Determine the stationing of the lowest ,r;, ,R,, T.S.
point of the curve.

Solution:
20. i deflection angle at any point on
the spiral, it is proportional to
the square of its distance.
v --L A
40 R:
Lt h 200 (0.03) 21. Lc Iength of spiral
2 =-i- =3m'>267
22. L length of spiral from T.S. to any 8. Tangent distance for spiral
The lowest point of curye is on the right side. point along the spiral _ L (_ x)
T=*-L+lR +--rltan- 1

200 100
' 2 [' 4) 2

SUMMARY OF FORMULAS
t'{.
t:l.223 it
s2
FOR SPIRAL CURVE 9. External distance
1
E R + *-!- sec Rc
1. Spiral angle at any point on the spiral s c
4 2

i(I|2(X) t (rao)
O, Lr2
Elements of a curve: 2R. L.[ n / 10. Angle of intersection of central simple
curve
2H
1. lc = l-2s" 0
^ -Tdfrf0.05 (100)2 S.C.= spiral to curve 2. Spiral angle at S.C.
sz=
2.. C.S. = curve to spiral DL
Sz = 93.63 m. 3. S.T. * spiral to tangent cc 11. Length ofthrow
"40
Sla. oflowestpoint of curve = (10 + 300) - 93.63
4. Ts = tangent distance r- [rao\ p
X

4
Sta. of lowest point curye. 10 + 2A6JT 5. T. = tangent distance for the curve ' 2R.( n /
 23A TRANSf5oRTI\TIoN & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERI NG TRA.NSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERING 239
12. Super.elevation where K = velocity of
car in kph
x=_ L3

0.0079 K, 6RL
-_ c
A spiral easement curve has a length of An 80-m spiral connects a tangent with a
R
100 m. with a central angle having a radius 180-m radius circulaf curve. The maxlmum
velocity in kph lhat a car could pass
13. Super.elevation considering 75% of K
to counteracL the super.elevalion x I&l_
6(300x100}
of 300 m. Determine the degree of spiral at
the third quarter point. through the curve without skidding is
nearest 1o:
0.004 K, Solution:
6= _
(75)r
R x: D=
1145916 Solufion;
6(300)(100) @egreeof simplecurve)
14. Desirable length of spiral
R . 0.036v'
x, = 2.311. _
D=
1145.916 'R.
, _ 0.036 Kl
300
"R D - 3.819"
0.036v3
80=-
- 2
180
15. Deflection angles vary as the squares Deoree of soiral when L = Y L V =73.68kph
of the length from the T.S. 4

i_1, A spiral easement curve has a length of L= 9ttoot

iL2
LC 120 m with a centrai curve having a radius
4',
L=75m
of 300 m. Determine the offset distance
16. Degree of curve varies directly with from the tangent to the third.quarler point D,=D i
A spiral 80 m. long connects a tangent \rith
the length from the T.S, of the spiral. LL. a 6.5" circular curve. Oetermine the
D=L D1 3.819 detlection angle at the first quarter point.
_
D. L"
Solution: 75 100
Solution:
D, = 2.86'

X2
s
C
,
A spiral easement curve has a length of
100 m. with a central curve having a radius Z0
r.s The degree of curve of the central curve of
,
of 300 m. Determine the offset distance
=Bo
T-5.:n0{?nt bvtuil f.S.-t0!!.il tu \\tll
from the tangent to the third.quarter point S.C.-\pirdt tu ..t/t! a spiral easement curve is equal to 6'. ll the S.{..vnn k,&^/
of the spiral. max. design velocity of the car passing i-lditn,,UNL'rt I. )t)
S-\ilnl a\h ut 1..,)t)
thru the spiral curve is 75 kph, determine
Solution: the required length of spiral.
x=- L3
r
6RL Solution; S=-rad.
2RL
Xa
(90)3
_ '-'--=5=190.99
fl =1145.916 1145.916 ac

s.c 'D6 __ 1145.916

6(300x120)
, _ 0.m6v3 6.5
x = 3.375 m
tR.
r..t. L R = 176.29
7.5.-toil8crt kt
S.C..tpiill to.ut\\,
vhdl
L
_ 0.036(75)3 _
79.52" L" .99
190.99 whenl=
44 =21y
 24a TRANSPoRTATIoN & Tnarrlc ENGIN EERI NG TRANSPORTATI()N & TRAFFIC E:NGI NEER I NG 241

20)' Solufion:
$= L 180
----.S-- .
2(176.2e)(80) S
2Rc 7\.
A fitlin. value of centrifugal acceleration:

S = 0.01418 rad. Compute the deflection angle at the end

(80) (1 80)
^80
u"7{T-v
point of the spiral if the length of spiral is S
c _ 0.01418(180) 2(1e2.U)
1t
80 m. with a degree of curve of the centrat
curve of a spiral easement curve is 6.5".
lE
^80
u=fr;m
s. = 11 88"
S = 0.8125'
C = 0.516 m/s3
Solulion: S
.J
t- -
3
'3 @ Length of spiral curve:
. 0.8125 i =
1188
=3.g0'
Lc-
0.0215 V3
3 CR
3

i= 0.27' r.s
. 0.0215 (80)3
L. =
T.S. nn$dh)till
o^sG76
i,.iel\\iln'
S.-\tta!.ntL.rt
ankk at S.('.
S.C- 2.26lE Problem Lc= 82'05 m'

2.?S5 .r'Problem *" = 1q# =176.2em A spiral easement curve has a length of 80
@ Lengthofthrow:
m and the radius ol the central curve is 200
The length of the spiral curve is 82 m. and L' m. Determine the niax. velocity that a car
P=7
x"
" =.2 R" 'tL
the radius of the central curve of the spiral S .1180
could pass thru the spiral curve.
curve i$ 260 m, Compute the length of r2
Lc
throw.
s= 8o .l!9=r:. Solution;
--
X, =
6-E
' 2(176.29) n 0.036 v3
I
.R
=-
-_ (82.05)2
Solufion; c
". - 6 (260)
''=?=f=a'rs' 0.036 v3
80=- Xc= 4'32
200
D _4.32
t-
I5 V = 76.3 kph 4

(.s. P " 1.08 m.

7.

,a R
The spiral easement curve has a length of
spiral equal to 80 m and the radius of the
2.269 ; Problem
central curve of the spiral curve
2.270,,. Probldtn
is
192.84 m. Compute the deflection angle at The design speed of a car passing thru an
the end point of the spiral. easement curve is equal to 80 kph. The The tangents of a spiral curve forms an
radius of the central curye ol the spiral angle of intersection of 25' at station 2 +
Solution: curve is equal to 260 m. long. 058. Design speed is 80 km/hr. For a radius

P= t'
t2 of central curve of 300 m. and a length of
24R O Compute the value of the rate of spiral of 52.10 m..
centrifugal acceleration in m/sec for
o - (82)' this speed. O Find the stationing at the point where
24(260) @ Compute the length of the spiral curve the spiral starts.
I.S f.S.=Lnetil n'\?nll
based on the centrifugal acceleration. @ Find the stationing of the start of
P=1.08m @ Compute for the length of throw central curve.
i, -d.11; tni 0!1. 4t s .(
5 , = rpr!il dttt. it s.<'

@ Find the length of central curve.

-
242 TRANSPoRTA.TIoN & TRATFIC ENGINEERING
TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRaTTIC ENGINEERING 243
Solution: Length of cenlral curve:
O p= Ll
I r
Stationing at the point where the spiral
slarts. S=R 24R"
'"180
R, -R" =P A simple curve having a radius of 200 m.
2+0.5ti JL
'
S = 3oo(15.05")
180 _ 1 145.916
has a central angle of 50'30'. lt is required
to be replaced by another curve by
I=25', R,=-
T S = 78.8 m. D connecting spiral (transitinn curve) at its
o _- **6--
1145,916 ends by maintaining the radius of the old
'., curve and its center but the tangents are
T
Rr = 190.99 m.
moved outwards to allow transition. Part
Ic=300
of the original curye is relained. The new
(80)' intersection of the tangents is moved
1s0.00-R -
A simple curve having a degree of curve " 24R" outward by 2 meters from its original
equal to 6" is connected by two tangentg position along the line connecting the
having an azimuth of 240' and 280' 4583.76 R. - 24 Rl = 6466 intersection of tangents and the center of
respectively. lt is required to replace thisi the curve.
curve by introducing a transition curve 8ll R: - 190.99 R" + 266.67 =o
m. long at each end of a new central curve O Determine the length of the transition
which is to be shifted at its midpoint away -Rt= 190.99 r 188.18 curve (spiral) at eaefi end ol the central
T,=?-1*"-ffi)r,I from the intersection of the tangents. 2
@
curye.
Compute the spiral angle.
R" = 189'59 rn
52-10 (.52'10)'?I
O Determine the radius of the new central @ Compute the central angle of the
25
T. =
' 2 * 'lgoo * 24(300)'-
tan
2
curve if the center of the old curve is
retained.
central curve from the S.C. to C.S.

T, 92.64 m. @ Determine the distance which the new ta) Distance which the new curve is shifted Solution:
curve is shifted away from the away from the intersection of the tangents. O Length ofthe transition curve
intersection of the tangents.
Stationing @ T.S. = (2 + 058)- 92.64 h=Rr-Rc
@ Compute the length of throw, :lo'
Stationing @ T.S. = 1+ 965.36
h=190.00-189.59
@ Stationing of the start of central curve. h = 1.40 m. (amount the new curve is
$olution:
Sta. @ S.C. = Sta. @ T.S. + L O Radius ofcentral curve: shifted away from the intersection
Sta. @ S.C. = (1 + 965.36)+ 52.10
of the tangents) sr'
7
Sta. @ S.C. = 2+ 017.46
{)' \:i./-'
OA lihgent f,'. ',p

@ Length ofcentral curve.

.V,"'
'.ri,'
@ Length ofthrow:
^ L" 180
D-=3X_
' 2R" rr p= (L')'
P=2Sin64"45'
52.10 180
^D =_X_
" 2(300) n
\ ll,:
'. ti' i ,'
24R"

(80)'
P = 1.81 m.

-i'. \'.',1 f"n","i' r - zrrrggsg)

s. = 4'975'
. r'l
p= (1.)'
"'.\rlt/-.' P = 1.41 m. 24R,
l.=l-2S. ''y' 1.2=P(24)R.
b=25-2(4.975) L2 = 1.81 (24)(200)
lc = 15.05' Lc = 92.95 m. (longllt ol :;pnnl)

I
 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TR,qTTIC TNGINEERING 245
1l zaa rRANspoRTATroN & TRAFFTc ENGTNEERTNG
L, = De (200)
2.2701,,; Fi(i]tlear,,rl
(2) Spiral angle. Solution: L, = 3.6(0.08X200)
L" 180'
^
b=- , _ 0.m6v3 Given a horizonlal curve with a 410 m. L' = 57.60 m. say 60 m (multiple ot 20 nt)
" 2R. n R radius, estimate the length of spiral,
necessary for a smooth transition from
c -_ 92.95(180") 250 - 0.036(140)3
tangent alignment to the circular curve if
'' 2(2oo)tt R the design speed is 90 kph, 2,27', Problcri
R = 395.14 m
s. = 13"19' Solufion:
A circular curve with a radius of 350 m. is
V'
R= .R
0.036v3 connected by 60 m. spiral lransition curves
(9 Central angle:
127(e + f1 to tangents with a deflection angle of 0.349
rad. lf the stationing of the TS is 105 + 40,
l.=l-2S. (4q'1 0.036(90)3
395.14 =127(e + 0.20) L
!
410
determine the stationing of the ST.
l' - 50'30'- 2(13"19')
L s =64m
e = 0.19
l"= 23'52' (central angle ofthe new curue)

2,277 Problem.;r
2.273 ,Probleh
A twoJane highway of the Northem Luzon
A horizontal curve has a radius of 400
Expressway has a width of 3.6 m. per lane R:350
Compute the minimum length of the
Given a horizontal curve with a 400 meter with a design speed of 100 kph. lt has a l0S + Jl)

radius have a design speed of 90 kph. necessary fpr a smooth transition 400 m. radius of central-curve. Determine
Compute the minimum length of transition tangent alignment to the circular r

the lengfih of spiral if the difference in

Assume that the maximum su Solution;
curve nscessary for a smooth transition grade between the centerline and edge of
rate should not exceed 0.08 and a 0 = 0.349 radians
from tangent alignment to the circular travelway is
limited to
1/200. Assume
side friction value of 0.12. friction factor f = 0.12.
curye.
t= 0.349(1' 80)'/L
Solutronl Solution: Solufion;
0=20'
, _ 0.036v3
_v2
R=-
D = width of one lane

127(e + l) L" = length ofspiral L" =R0

R
V2 e = super-elevation rate L. = 350(0.349)
, _ 0.036(e0)l 400= -
127(0.08 + 0.12)
400 200. L" = 122.15 m.

L= m
De_ 1
65.61 V = 100.80 kph
L, 200 Stationing of S.T.
Length of spiral :
L, = De (2oo) = (105 + 40) + 60 + 122.15 + 60

,sR
_ 0.m6v3 = (105 + 40) + (2+ 42.15)
illfittl ,rPlbblqlitl
R=127(fV'+ el = (107 + 82.1i)
, _ 0.036(100.8)3
A l-km long racetrack is to be designed ' 400 (oo)'? ," II
with turns 250 m, length at each end. 4og =
L, .92.17 m. 127(0.12 + e1 t
Determine the super-elevation rate for a
design speed of 140 kph and a side friction e = 0.08 (supbrelevationrate)
lactor of 0.20.
246 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 247

Distance between the passing vehicle at

and Distance Length of Acceleration the end of its maneuver and the opposing
- Lane vehicle = 84 m.
Design speed the maximum safe speed that can be maintained over a specified secton of
highway when conditions are so favorable that the design features of the highway governs.
2,279,:.:; Problem Solufion;
The driver of the overtaking vehicle ,4 s/ows
Stopping sight distance = the dlstance requied lo see an object 150 mm high on the roadway. lt
is intended to allow drivers to stop safely after sighting an object on the roadway large enough to A high power/mass ratio passenger car down to the speed of slow moving vehicle B
enters an acceleration lane at 48 kph and for a short time duing which he assesses his
cause damage to the vehicle or lost of cantrol.
merges into traffic lane at 70 kph. Estimate chances for oveftaking.
the desired length of the acceleration lane
when the acceleration rate is 3.4 m/s2.
('
Distance on a Level M. 'ry
So/ufronr
Passing Sight Distance=the s(htdistance longenoughtoenabteavehicletoovertake 4
pass another vehicle on a twoJane highway without inteierence from opposing traffic. t!td)
.\t n,l th..r ( (
ffi-*:"tr" A
0ml @ qD
Iofalpassrng sight distance: S = dr + dz + ds+ da -re &lD*@ Em
llt kph Ril4
s ' :.r,4
where: -'
tlt l, ,1,
"'
dr = the distance traversed during perception and reaction time and during the initial acceleration to
v = i[ = 13.33 m/s
point of encroachment on the left lane. ' 3.6 V = speed of the oveftakingvehicle A

dz = distance traveled while the passing vehicle occupies left lane

V = speed of s/ow movingvehicle I
V,=*=19.44m/s
ds = d/stance between the passrng vehicb at the end of its maneuver and the opposing vehicle ' J.0 v = !9 = 26.67 m/s
dt = distance traversed by opposing vehicle for two-thhds of the time the passing vehicle occupies V2 =V2 +2aS
' 3.6
left lane or sometimes taken as 2/3 dz v !l =24.44mrs
(19.44)2 = (13.33)' * Z(S.a)S ' = 3.6
Opposing vehicle appears Atthe moment, the driver decidestooveftake
when passing t,ehicle S= 29.t14m.
reac:h.e s point A.
Vr=Vr-24'44 * t
l'ussing r.'tltiL lc
.B
1^ '
A First
Passing Sight Distance
d,=V1t1+rat'

(Overtaking Distance) in a d, - 24.44(2.s) r

mm EllFBl* Two-Lane H )e.nles),
d, = 68.60 m
dr t/3d2 M i n. tta l; i g ht d i stunt.'c d, =V, t,
1ttr,t s i

Second d, = 26.67(10.4) = 277 .37 m.

@ Compute the passing sight distance that

vehicle A could move while overtaking the
d, =84m.

+ffiWB slow moving vehicle B before meeting the o,=10,

on-coming vehicle C.
2t3d2 a, =l{zn.ztl= 184,e1
Speed of car A - 96 kph
d1 d2 dj d.a
Perception-reaction time = 2.5 sec. Passing srght dstance:
Passing sight distance Average acceleration = 2.4 m/sec2 S=d, +d, +d3 +d4
Time the passing vehicle occupies the left
S = 68.60 + 277.37 + M + 184,91 = 614.88 m.
lane = 10.4 sec.
 248 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRaTTIc ENGINIERING TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC TNGINEERING 249

:Piriiblgml Sight Distance for Vertical O For stopping sight distance Design standards for stopping sight
Curves fu = height of eye level from the distance or sight distance for sag vertical
pavement curves are based on an assumed headlight
Compute the minimum passing sight
distance for the following data: A. For crest (summit) vertical hr = 1.08 m height of
600 mm and an upward
curves. hz. height of object divergence of the headlight beam of 1'.
hz = 0.60 m
Speed of the passing car = 90 kph
Speed of the overtaken vehicle - 80 kph a) WhenScL A=gr-gzin% @ For passing sight distance
Time of initial maneuver = 4 sec.
. hr = 1.08 m
Average acceleration 2.4 kphlsec.
hz = 1.08 m
0 WhenS<L
Time passing vehicle occupies the left r 12
lane = 9 sec, h2 . ,1.)

Distance between the passing vehicle at

P.C.
^s
P.T. @ Design standards used in the 12U | 3.5S
the end of its maneuver and the opposing L Philippines
vehicle = 80 m. Sight Distance Driver Eye 0bject
AS2 @ WhenS>L
l= Type Height (m) Height (m)
Solution:
r\ t, ttt L t. Lr, l, fio(,[zh,.,lrt\) Car Stopping
1.08 0.60 , _rc
L-LO--
120+3.5S
\1r "t",tt.'
t,t\\it\ t,|il, Sight Distance
tl l, A
rt&h(\ Nltt A
Truck Stopping
2.33 0.60
Sight Distance
b) WhenS>L Maneuver Sight
1.08 0.60
@ Comfort Criterion:
Distance
14h. ru$nr ri .eht il;h,ti t,
Passing Sight
.
L---
AV2
I
P.T. 1,08 1.08 395
hi h2
Distance
*@D Car Headlight A. gr- g, in%
&B
to Road V = design speed kph
2t1d) 0.60 0
n)
Surface Sight
L= length of vertical curve
r Distance
Irl!\in! listin(!
-'*{'[i '{i)'
sighr
Truck to Car
'- 'u A TailSisht 2.33 0.60
@ Appearance Criterion:
[Iin. passing sight distance = d, * Ou * do Distance
f a) When V > 60 kph but A < 2%
c) When hr = 1.08 m. and hz = 0.60 m.
@ California slandards length of vertical
butd.=?d- L.60 m
" 3' L=
curves "L"

Min. passing sight distance =

A

d, * O,
# rvhens<L a) When design speed V < 60 kph
Use L= 60 m b) When V < 60 kph
i L= 2s-T whenS>L L.60 n
d
, = distance between passinl vehicle at the b) When grade breaks { : gr - gz is less
end of its maneuver and opposingvehicte lhan2olo c) WhenA<2%
Usel=60m
d, =Vt d) L=6q L=60m

o, = 9{ffiQ =22s m.
K = length of vertical curue in meters c) When V > 60 kph and grade
for 1% change in grade break> 2o/o d) WhenV>60andA>2%
L A=gr-gz Use L= 2V L= 2V
Min. passing distance = + 80
5(225)
Min. passing distance . 380 m.
d) When V > 60 kph but grade
e) R=100K break < 2olo

R = radius of parabolic curve Use L= 60 m

 25O TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPoRTATION & TRAFFIC E:NGI NEERING 251

Assume S < L Stopping Sight Distance for O Compute the max. speed of the car that
can pass lhru this curve
A 5% grade intersects a - l.4o/o grade at
Summit Vertical Curves @ Compute the length of the vsrtlcal
station 1 + 990 of elevation 42.30 m.
l: AS2
curve in meters for every 1% change in
Design a vertical summit parabolic curve ioo(f( - Jn\)' I
grade.
connecting the two tangent grades to @ Compute the equivalent radius of the
conform with the following safe stopping A_9, _9,
A vertical summit (crest) curve has tangent vertical curve.
sight distance specifications. a = s (-s.+) grade of +0.5% and a -1.0o/o grade for a
- road which will provide a stopping sight
Design velocity 60 kph A=8.4 Solution:
Height of distance of
190 m. Height driver's eye
driver's eye from the
pavement = 1.37 m.
road
, (8.4)(83.32)'? above the pavement is 1.07 m and the ' (i) t\4ax. speed of the car

Height of an object over the pavement heighl of the object ahead is 0.15 m. Assume S > L
roo(vDtrs4 - rD(o 10))' Compute the minimum length of a crest
ahead = 100 mm.
Perception-reaction time 2 1L
sec. L. 131.92 m. > 83.32 okasassumed
vertical curve lor a design speed of 2oo(fi-6)'
Coefficient of friction 1 00 kph. L=2S-
between the road A
pavement and the tires = 0.15.
(z) Elevation of highest point of cuwe: Solution: A=9,-9,
O Determine the stopping sight distance. Assume S>L A=2.8-(-1.6)
@ Oetermine the length of curve. S/=18 52
@ Determine the elevation of 2oo(fr,-- A=4.4o/o >
point on curve.
highest .
F,t.12
L=2S-
fi;)' 2o/o

Solufion;
?., A
L = 2(130)
2001 (J*.S;)'
A=o - 0^
O Stopping sight distance:
12.56
4.4

'- -L=l3t A=oo5-(-1) L ' 121 .38 m. ok as assumed

r,,i.Jr * ^t
t,lffit r,,=,ijt,,r,
h2 ,o( doz * J015)'
L=2V
s,= 9,L L=2(1eo)- 121.38 = 2Y
9, -9, 1.5
V = 60.69 kph
5 =y1+(f+G)
Y2
L=110.5m ok S>l
e _- 0.05(131.92)
"' 6.[5+6334 Check:
v'ffi = 16'67m/s S,= 78.52 m.
Check for Ap pe arance C r ite rion
V>60,andA>2%
Grade break = 1.5% < 2%
(rooz) L=2V
s=rooz[1]* H=:(9,-s")
I

Use L*," = 60 m.
[ 4, 2(e.81X0.15 + 0 05)

S - 83.32 m. fl
131.92(0.05 + 0.034 @ Length of the veilcal curve in meters for
=
B - every 170 change in grade
H = 1.39 Sight Distance for Vertical L=KA
@ Length ofcurve y _ 1.39
Summit Curves 121.38 = K(4.41
(53.4)'z (65.96), K" 27.59 m
0l!
y = 0.91
ht Elev. of highest point A vertical parabolic curve has a sight @ Equivalent radius of the vertical curve
P,C,
distance of 130 m, The curve has tangent R=100K
= 42.30 - 12.56(0"034) - 0.91
grades of +2.8olo and .1.6%. lf the height ol
= 40.963 m. R= 100(27.59)
the driver's eye from the pavement is 1.08
m. and the height of the object is 0.50 m., R= 2759 m.
 252 TRaruspoRra TION & TRAFFIC E NGINEERING
TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING 253
Passi ng Sight Distance for Headlight Sight Distance
Crest (Summit) (Stopping i Sight Distance) 2.287 Froblom Note: For small total grade chango catt be
Vertical Curve for sharp to cause discomfoi without violaling
Vertical Curve srght distance sfandards. AASHTO
Determine the minimum length of a sag
Pi6blem vertical curve between a - 0.7o/o grade and
suggesl a comfort standards whlch is
DPWH requirements:
a + 0.5 grade for a road with 110 kph eoualto f=-AV2
Compute the length of
Headlight heighl = 0.60 m design speed. The vertical curye must ' ?oA
vedcal curve that
will provide passing sight distance for provide 220 m. headlight sight distance. where: A=gz-gr%
a
design speed of 100 kph at the intersection A one-degree upward divergence of the light V- desrgn speed in kph
of + 1.49 % grade with a - 0.60 % grade. beam is used in computing the length of ihe Solution;
sag ve(ical curves. Assume S < L Note : Appearance criterion
Solution:
, AS2
@ When V = 110 kph > 60 kph
S=Vt+ V' O When S<L 120 + 3.55 Grade break = 1.2o/o < 2o/o
(f+G)
, AS2 A=g, -9., Use Lnrin = 60 m.

v=ffi=16'67m/s 120 + 3.5 S

n o.s- (- o.z (O When V < 60 kph
= )
Grade breaks < 2%
$: 16 6?[ 3 + (16.67)' A= 1.2
i 2(9.81X0.15 + 0.05)
@ When S>L
1.2 220
Use L,n, = 60 m"

S = 83.32 m.
L_ @ When V = 100 kph > 60 kph
Grade brakes > 2% t
L=2S-ftzo+rss1 120 + 3.5 220
LA] L=65.3m
UseL=2V

Fioblem where:
Therefore, use L = 60 m.
L = length of sag curve
ButS>L notok
Compute the minimum length of vertical S
" the distance between the vertical and Iry S>[
curve that will provide 1g0 m. stopping point where the one degree upward
sight distance for a design speed of'lld single of the iight beam interseits the ,_ru_(rzo*e.ss)
kph at the intersection of a + J.5o7o gy66" surface of the roadway or stopping [A)
and a-2.70%grade. sight distance Compute the minimum length of vertical
120 + 3.5(220\/
A = algebraic difference in grades in (yo) L=2t2201-
\/1.2 \ sag curve that will provide 130 m. stopping
Solution: sight distance for a design speed of 80 kph
Usin g appearance criterion.
L =-301.7m
-- at the intersection of a -2,30% and a +4.8o/o
grade.
V>60kph
@ Comfort criterion Since L<0 , noveiical curue is needed to
A> 2o/o Solution:
UseL=2V . AV2 provide stopping srghf dlstance, Assume S < L
395
t= z (tto) O Comfort criterion
A=4.8-F2.30)
where:
L=220m.
L = length ofsag curve
. AV2 A=7.1
Use 1,220 m.
A = algebraic difference in grades in (%)
395 . AS2

_ r.z(fi0)'
where V= 1 10 kph 120 + 3.5 S
V = max. velocity of vehicle passing thru ..
A=3.s- (-2.70) the sag curve in kph 395 7.1(1 30)'?

L = 36.76 m. 120 + 3.s(130)

A= 6.2%
L= 208.68 okasassumed
 2.54 TRANSPO RTATION & TRZTTTIC ENGINEERING
TRANSP()RTATION & TRAFF.IC ENGINEERING 255
Check for appearance criterion:
Using comfort criterion for sag curve.
V=80>60kph nC=l S (approximately) (AD;: = 6z + ft2- P2 + 2 RM - M2
' Grades brakesT .l > . AV2
(AD;z'62+2RM-M2
2o/o
20a (i )'= r' +2 RM-M2
Use L =2V (AC)2=(AD)2+M2
L = 2(80) , s (roo)'
L= ' '
c2
i =2nn't (AClz=62+2RM-M2+M2
395
L=160m. (AC)2=62+2P14
L = 126.58 m.
52
Check for comfort criterion: fill=
Assume S<L 8R (AC),=(?)2+zRM
. AV2
395
. AS2 M = clear distance from center of roadway
120 + 3.S S to lhe obslruction
7.1(80)'? g
S = sight distance along the center of Let AC
,_
L = s (rgo)' I
395 roadway

* =*# -,*,
L = 115.04 m tzo+es(1e6) R = radius of center - line curve
L = length of curve
Use L = 115,04nr L=2N.94m. okasassumed
D = degree of curve
32=52-2SL+12+gRIr/
UseL= /26.58rn R-M
cos0= R 8RM=2SL-12
StoppinE Sig ht Distance for
R-M=RCoso
Sa Curves M=R-RCoss
Sight Distance for M=R(1-Coso) ,,UffiII
Horizontal Curves
@ When S>L
Compute the minimum length of vertical O When S<L
curve that will provide 190 m. stoooino
sight distance for a design ,p.eo oijod
kph at the intersection ot-a _'Z.OZ, A highway curve has a radius of 80 m and a

anda+2.40%grade.
trale length of 90 m. lf the required, sight distance is
60 m, how far off the center of the road could
M you allow the bushes to grow?
Solution:
V = 100 kph > 60 kph
P, ,,R Solufion;
A=gr -g, R'-, .'R 80m
R
A =2.6 - (.2.4) ,,?1,,...."'

A=5
L+2d=S fi'
,tt
Using appearance criterion S . sight distance
S.L i

V>60kph L = length of curve d=- 2 n' R

(AC)2=gz+14P;z n.{ ft
A>2% (AC)2=(AD)2+M2 8m
(AD;z = gz - (R - ty;z
ThereforeL"2V
(AOlz = Pz - (R2 - Z Rtrl +
.

n4z)
(AD)2=(A0)2-(R-W2
80=
gf
L = 2(1oo) - 2oo m. (A0)2=(AE)2+R2 8m
(AD)z=2RM-M2
(AD)2 = (AE)2 1 Pz - 1R - tvt;2 rn = 5,625 meters
256 TRANSPORTATI()N & TNATTIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 257

Solution:
Z-2gll . Problem M-
S' (D Side slope of the section ,Prehlem
8R ".29,4.
The clearance to an obstruction is 40 m. and S' The following notes are for irregular cross-
the desirable sight distance when rounding a
5.8 =8(120) 2.1 section. Compute the cross-sectional area.
horizontal curve is 600 m. Determine the 1) Width of roadway is 12 m. with side slopes
minimum radius of horizontal curve if the S = 74.62m < L (Use smallestS fordesrgn 2.3.S Bt2 Ill2 s ol 1:2.
length of curve is 550 m. long speed of cars utilizingthe road)
6..15 4.5

V'
c2.67 C3.33 C4.00 C2,83 C2.33 C1.67
Solution: .l=600 m.
S=Vt* B
11.U 8,00 4.00 0 s.00
/,
l-=550 nt 2g(f + G)
i +2,3S=6.45 9.34

P.C T,
74.62 =VQ.S\
B
+ S =4.5 Solution:
2(9.81X0.35 + 0) 2
1.3 S = 1.95
V'1 + 17 17V - 512.42= 0
It ft S=1.5
V = 15,62 m/s
:J;
V = 15.62(3 6)
L(2s'L)
M - (D Width of road base
1.61 l.a
8R V = 56.25 kph 3.14 5 l l.l4
B
L(2S-L) -+ S- 4"5 0 Li4
^_ 2 f.14
8M
B
550[2(600)-550]
D_ -+ 1.5 = 4.5
8(40) Eafthworks 2

R= 1117.19 n. l| = 6 m. o=4#Q1sy*G$-M roe+l

Areas of Cross-Section Notes
of an Earthworks -
334(.6i) * 11.!!3)1a1
2.29.2 Prohlem
G) Area ofthe cross-section 22
2.293 Problem m
.jr
*
(8 + 2.67),,
*) _
2.67(5.34)

A building is located 5.8 m. from the centerline 22

of the inside lane of a curve section of Given the cross.section notes of an ..1
A= tB.14m2 -

highway with 120 m. radius. The road is level.

earthworks for the proposed extension of .5
.0

NLEX.
Perception+eaction time is 2.5 sec. and 3.45 1.5

coefficient of friction is 0.35. Determine the sTA.10 + 100 6.45 ,1.5

appropriate speed limit in kph considering the Left Center Right

stopping sight distance.
6.45 0 4.5
*23 *1.5 +1.0 A
_ 3(2.3) + 1.5(6.45) + 1.5(4.5) + 3(1)
Solution:
2222 The cross-sectional area of a road with
width of 10 m is 42.9 square meters. The
O Compute the side slope S of the A= 13,16 m2 cross-sectional area is as follows:
) section. 9.8 0 7.4
@
r, ',R .r'.
@
Compute the width of road base.
Compute the area of the cross-section.
zlit.z
a'-. i ,,R Determine the value of x
\t
25A TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRAruST'ORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGIN EERI NG 259

Solution:
2.297 Problem
;r _ 9.3 h'-4 2
|') 1.2 + 3.2 12+Zhr - 12
,t.2.54m 6h,-24.12+2ht
24 Find the area of the given cross-section if
1.2 the width of roadway is 12 m, l),J -a=6.76m 4h,. 36
Left Center . Right 1
hr=9m
9.u '7.4
A = -(1.96)(3 2) = 3.136 m'
sjq 0 fi.2 "2'
h,-hl
A=Ar+A2+43+44 3.2 2.8 4.21
r,,.
)e.s+lit.z)
+ s.s(1.2) r llfo.rl zhL+n+2h,= 12
2

42.9 = %(5)lQ.4)+ %(xX9.8)+ %(xX7 .4),+%11.2)

Solution; 9-hL 1
x= + 3.91
)tztxr.rt 2h;;12*18 =6
A,,,, = 9,404 m2
:r.2
54-6hL=2hr+30
2.296 CE Board Nov.2O16 8h1
' 24
9.8 ,t.2 hL' 3 m.
A particular station has the following l.299i,',ilr,r,piii{iliiff
earthwork cross-section. A = %(6)(3.2) + %(2.8)(e.8) + %(2.8)(11.2)
6 66 n
9.0 4.5 +2.0 4.5 x
+%(6){4.21).
A highway fill at stations 5 + 040 has a
y +4.0 +2.0 +1.0 uniform ground slope. lt has a side slope
of 2 : 1 and width of roadway is 12 m. Find 9
A= 51.63 m2
lf the widlh of the road base is 9 m. and the the area of sta. 5 + 040.
side slopes are lV:1.5H, the quantity of x
and y is equal to: sTA. 5 + 040
!? .4 .5 .6 t (3 + 9)(36) 6(3)
Solution: b 0 6 ?
n1 - 2 - 2 -18(9)
2
Given the following cross-section notes for
Skrlx'i:1.5 9:.
a road grading work: At = 126 m2
Solution:
+-1.2 +-1.2 +-2.8
Slope l:1.5
-3.2

yi
X, 0 3.5 r, STA 5 + 040
lr.0
The road bed is 9 m wide and the side
.1.5 1.5 4.5 slope for cut is 1:1 and for fill is 1.5:1.
X
Determine the area of cut of the section.
a 1.5 \ The cross section notes of the ground
-=-
1.0 1.0 Solufion;
-h1
surface at sta. 1 + 200 of a road survey,
a=1.5 x2=7.3 n I shows that the ground is sloping at a 10%
hrl grade downward to the right. The elevation
x=4.5+a 9.3 a
2.8
of the ground along the center line of the
l9{l 12 +2h7 proposed road at this station is 150 m. and
x= 6 g l .0 h14 that of the finished subgrade is 152 m.
3.t{ Width of subgrade is 7.00 m. with side
v -1.0 2hL+12 + zhr slopes of 1.5 : 1, Compute the digtance of
4.5 1.5 .i.5
hr -ht
the right slope stake from the center of lhe
rr =9.J tr road,
y= 3
ll aoo rRANsr,oRTATroN & TRAFFTc ENGTNEERTNG TRANSPORTATION & TnapTIC E:NGINEERING 261

3.5 ).5h,. Solution;

Eccentricity of the Centroid Volume of Earthworks
O Rod reading for grade at station 5 + 100
of the Area from the
wn' hl3
R=54.35-55.03 (1)
h,
R=-0.68m. (fill)
Centerline of the Road End area Nethod
(A,
O"ri v= z* + Ar) L

@ Rod reading = 9.76 r.

* 3..5- I .5ft, *
Elevation of ground = 55,03 0.78
The Engineering Battalion of the Phil. Army
h.-2 .
1n Elevation of ground 53.57 m. constructed a road of the vicinity of z.si
3.5+1.5hr -100 -v tu Amount of fill = 55.03 - 53.57 = 1.46 m. Maguindanao. The width of the road at the t.0
formation level is 20 m, with side slopes of
h.-2:0.35+0.15hr 1:1 for cut and 1:2 for fill. The original
(O True distance from the center 4.5
0.85 h' = 2.35 ground transverse to the center of the road
hr = 1.35 + 0.68 = 2.03 m
has a slope of 1.5, lf the depth of excavation
h,= 2'76 Dr=6+5hr at lhe center of the section is 0.80 m,
Distance ol right slope stake . 3.5 + 1.5 hr D'=6+5(2.03) compute the eccentricity of the centroid of
2
D' = 7.105 m. which is less than 10.05 m the area in cut measured from the centerline
Distance of right slope stake = 3.5 + 1.5(2.76)
of the road.
Distance ol right slope slake = 7.64 m. 3.9 !
Therefore, the paint should be I! ._:6.9-_
Solution:
towards the center of the roadway.
{
l.30'lr:,',', Problem 2h, l0
ht (2) Prismoidal Formula
, Car
h ih2
A roadway had a base of 12 m and side I .35 t0 h
slopes %:1, At station 5 + 100, the elevation
of the proposed grade is 55.03 m. and the 3

7
H.l. is 54.35 m.
t0.05

O What is the rod reading for grade'at 1005=6+5h, 0.80

station 5 + 100? - 1

@ ]f the rod held at the surface of the

10.05 = 6 +0.50(h') x5
0.50 h, = 4.05
ground rea{s 0.78 m, what is the x=4m.
h' = 8.10 m,

@
amount of cut or fill at his point?
ln setting a slope stake a total distance
h,
=1
vr=f {nr +4Am+Az)
Elevafion at a point 10.05 m. away h, +14 5
from the center of roadway is 10.05 m. A, = area of mid-section
the center of the roadway, having a
and the rod reading at this point is 1.33 h, =35
slope of %:1 is equalto:
m, Should the point be moved towards
or away from the roadway? What is the Elevation = 55.03 - 8.10 = 46.93 m. AD=+(14)=7
amount of cut or fill at this point?
(3) Volume uiith Prisnoidal Correctlon:
But the elevation of point B 0D=7-4=3 (Applicable only to three level sectlon)
= 54.35
* 1.35 = 53.00 m.
l:leL- 55.03 e=3+ *(10.5)
H Dt I)t -l
Therefore, the amount of cut at this point e= 6.5 m.fromtherenter
I.115
= 53.00 - 46.93 = 6.07 m.
Dr Ar At
t(1.05
262 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 263

10+3Cr+10 Solufion:
2.303 I CE Board t{ov. ?6{ [= 0) Width of base:
Ve = volume by end area 2
)',
V., = prismoidal correction 'Dr= l l ''10
The areas in cut of two irregular {2)(72J=(20+3C,)C,
I
65 m. apa( are 36 sq,m. and 72
V.p=t(Cr-C2)(01-02) 3Ci+20Cr-144=0
respectively. Base width is 10 m., .i
l+2.0

(4) Volume with cuuature correction

slope of 3H: 2V. Using prisoidal
formal, find the corrected volume of
c;+6.67c, -48=o
C,
ti ir.,
lr
cu,m. between the two stations. = 4.35
-*--"6.6----. -l
Prismoidal Conection :
et
I Solutionr
V,r=
I
-C,XD, -0,)
Dz=13.5 'l
i5
- t)1 11 17 i(C, 1
2,It0
(t
l0+3C.r
v.. =
g (2 5e1 -4.35X12 .71 -z3.osll
-_---D,=44j----- '
_ t.-5c l0 t.-sc _
" 12^
-
Vr. = 50.307 B!2 tlt2
ic, n,*e g,i 1.2
V=4-Y.
1
l0 l0 V=3510-50.307 q
7 6.3 = 2.2S +
I 2
i_ --. P"z=23.05 . V = 3459.69 m3 q
7.2 = 2.8S +
25
'- 1.5c2
".. lll*icz 2
-- l0 t.5(_'.

0.9 = 0.6 S
g, S=1.5
er =
1

j Dr @ositive lf fhe excess area is ic, A2=72

23o,4 Problern
AS = 2.2\1.5) +Bl
away from the center of curue)
1
t0 From the given cross section of an B=6m,
er =
3 0r @egative if the excess area
Vol.of end area:
earthuorks between A (20 + 200) and B (20
+ 220) assuming both have same slope and @ Value of cut at station B:
is towards the center of curve)
width of base.
DC
@ositive if the excess area ls
v-=[36*72)rosr
'(2 )' STA. A
0
'#.ry.TrS=,uu,
e2 =
a 6.60 4.8
6.75x = 9.32
m' +2.4 +2.0 +1.2
away from the center of curue) 4 = 3510
x= 1.38 m.
Dt STA, B
10+3C +10
e2=
T @egative rTfhe excess area is {: 2
(C,) 6.3 0 7.2 @ Volume using Prismoidal correction:
+2.2 ? +2.80
. 48(2) , 1.2(3)
- 2 -, 6.6(2)
towards the center of curue)
^ _2.4(3)
A1
2 - 2 - 2
.. (At+Az)L
vt=' 2 A=36
(20+3C,)C, =71
O Compute the width of the base. At = 16.80 m2
I
V. = (/s1 e1 + As2 e2) @ Compute the value of cut at station B if +
1p 3Cf+206,-71=g it has an area of 16.82 m2, ,,
vE-_(41 A2) L

(curuature correction) 2
Ci+6.67C1-24:0 @ Compute the volume between n airO A
_ 145.916
H= 1
with Prism6idal Correction. ,/ _(16.80+16.82X20)
D c, = 2'591
Vol.=Ve+Vc Ve 336'20
"
l-
264 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIc ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC INGINEERING 265

vo=${ct-e)et - Dz) 3-t.54 ,r = t(0,)

v,=ff{z- 1.38X11.40 - 13.s) A highway fill stretches between stations

,., =
I

9. i8 9. o
5 + 040 and 5 + 140 with a uniform ground { 1:01
vp-'2'17 slope. lt has a side slope of 2 : I and width
el =- 12 (neg. towards the center of cunte)
V=VE-Vp of roadway is 12 m.

V=336.20-{12,17)
Stations Area !
V = 338.37 cu.m. Sta.5 + 040 126 mz 24
Side slope = 1.5 : 1 Cut Sta_ 5 + 140 206.75 m2
l2
, _ (10 + 37.54) (9.18)
F- Compute lhe curvature correction between
2 the two stations if ihe road is on a 5 degree
A = 218,21 sq.m. curve which turns to the right of the cross
ln determining the position of the balanie
seclions in cu.m.
line in the profile diagram, a horizontal
grade line is drawn such that the length of A Volume of cut: 7 (15)
the cut is 850 m. and that of fill is 1200 m. Vc = 218.21 (850)
6 l8
As2=2s6.ru tgP +
L
(2)
The profile area between the ground line
and the grade line in the cut is 7800 sq.m.
while that of fill is 8500 sq.m. lf the road
Vc= 185,500 cu.m.
3
,/ir i, 9
As2=74.7U^2

bed is 10 m. wide for cut and 8 meters wide - 14.16-- t --t+.tO- ,z=t Dz
I

for till and if the side slope lor cut is 1.5 : I

while that lor fill is 2 : 1.
,, . { loty
7 :7.08
Assume a level section with an average 9 66 15
e2 = - (neg. towards the center ol cuve)
value of cut and lill for each stretch.
t2
O Determinethe volume of cut. 36.32
1 145.916
@ Determine thevolume of fill. ft= D
@ lf the shrinkage factor is 1.2, determine Sideslope=2:1Fill
the volume borrow or waste. Solution: *=1qll! =22em.
. _ (8 + 36.32) (7.08)
A-
Solution;
Average depth of crt:
2
v, =
fi 1,4s1 e1+ As2e2) II
A = 156.89 sq.m. {)

i--'i*,-: -:j
v,=ffi
-Jflm-
\g @ Volume of fill:
Vr = 156.89 (1200)
3

Vc= '370.58
(48){- 12)+ 74.25 (- 15)l

nf
V1= 188,000 cu.m.
^
,, =
7800
T56-
@ Volume of bonow:
C = 9.18 m.
Vol. of bonow = 188000 (1.2) - 185500 5 (12)
Average depth ot fill:
As1=126-Pl!) +
I (2)
. 8500 Vol. of bonow = 40100 cu.m. 2
'- 12oo As1 = 43 *2
f = 7.08
 266
I
TRANSPORTATION & TNATTIC ENGINEERI NG 267
TRANSPORTATION & TRATTIC ENGINEERING

Finished Grade of Roadway 8:it(m (14.60 + 9) (1 40)

2.309 Prabl6iii A-
^
_
2

2 GE Board 2008 From station A with center h eight of 1.4 From station 0 + 040, with center height of A = 16.52 sq.m. (fill)
tn filt, the ground makes niform slope 1.40 m. fill, the ground line makes a
,_ (10 + 18.40) (2 8)
The center height of the road at sta. 7 + 1 10 iYo to station B whose center height l$ uniform slope of 5% to station 0 + 100, A- 2
is 2 m, fill while at sta, 7 + 160 it is 1.2 m. m. n cut. Ass uming both sections to whose center height is 2.80 m. cut. A = 39.76 sg.m. (cut)
cut. From sta.7 + 110 to the other station level sections havir ng width of roadway Assume both sections to be level seclions
the ground makes a uniform slope of 4.g%. 14 m an d side slope for both c ut with side slopes of 2 t 1 lor fill and 1.5 : 1 @ Volumes of cut and ftll:
fill, compute the cross-sectional area of for cut.
O Compute the slope of the new road. 48 m. from sta. A. Distance from sta. A O Find the grade of the finished road
@ Find the distance in
meters from sta. B is 60 m. surface.
station 7 + 110 in which the fill is @ Find the area at each station.
extended, Solution:
@ By end area method, find the amount ol
@ Compute the stationing of the point 5tt cut and fill.
where the fill is extended. (D Between these two stations, is it 60-r
o id 2.8
borrow or waste?
trtro.oSI
Solution: t.+ i Roadway for fill is 9.00 m. and for cut it .r
Y
:o2 is 10.00 m,
-T
Aft,snd r=20
Srt/itrP 2tl t2 Solution:
7+l l{)
4't -
6Gr=4O A Slope of roadway:
h=2 A 6{)
t.-10
{) t))l 6(5(Ix1
I 2.8 0.(i5r
t.2 t4 1.40
2 2
5(Lr {) .I
50n
0+040 0+1.00
-60 1.40-0.02x=0.05x

0t l4 i.g2 ' - 1.20 0.07 x = 1.40

Slope ofthe new road: Slope of roadwaY = -6-
21.84 x=24
Sbpe"ffi Slope of roadway = - 2% (downward)
=g.P16
By ratioand proportion 60-x=40
@ Area at each station:
x 60 -x - 2.lJ * 9.t) -' 2.x -
rD Distance in which the fill is extended 1.4 2.8 i vot. oi rrn =LrlAt + Az)
0.048x = 1.2 + 0.916159 - r, 2.8x=M-1.4x I.,10 .40
0.064x'2 x=20m.
x = 31.25
vot. of fiil,f t,u.r, * ol
14.60
28 4A Station 0 + 040 Vol. of fill= 165.20 cu.m.
<O Stationing of the point where the fill is d 2.8 r 8.,10
extended: d = 1.96
sta.=(7+110)+(31.25)
Vot. of cut =l@, r arl
2.8
Sta.=71+141.25 (14 +21.u)
A=
2
(1 e6)
,- 4.2 .- l0 -' ,1.2 -
vot. or cut=
f trn ,o , ,,)

A* 35.123 sq.m.
Station 0 +100 Vol. of cul. 795.20 cu.m.
 264 TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 269

@ Slnce the volume of cut is excessive than Vol. of cut = Vol. of fill STATION END AREAS (m'?)
Limits of Free Haul and
the volume of fill, it is then necessary to
throw the excess volume of cul as wasle Economical Haul b(100-x) _ a(x) CUT FILL

by an amount equal to 22 1+000 40

1+052 33
795.20 - 165.20 = 63.00 cu.m. 7;*.ll €E Board By ratioand proportion
1+272 3.021

3= 40 1+300 0 (Balancing point)

The grading vvorks of a proposed National x 300 1 +322 3.845
road shows the following data. 1 +502 40.18
I
i. FHD:50 m, LEH:450 m, d-
-15
A 1 +600 60
Cost of haul = P0.25 per meter station

The ground makes a uniform slope of 5.2%

Compute the cost of borrow. b60 Assume the ground surface to be sloping
from STA 8 + 890 to Station B. At gIA 8 +
Solution:
100 - x 300 uniformly from one end to the other end.
890, the center height of the roadway is 1
CC 5=_(100-x) O
4.13 m fill. At the other station, the center LEH= D +FHD
Determine the overhaul volume.
height is 7.57 m cut. lf lhe finish road has a C @ Determine the volume of borrow
uniform grade of -
2.6To, what is the
Co(20)
(100 - x)(100-x)
=
z (x\ @ Determine the volume of waste.
stationing of B? +so=
0.2s
*r, 5(2) * '[rJ
Solution:
Solution: c; = Ps.oo r= 1 ttoo - r)' 0 Overhaul volume
15 10'
2.67o
5.2Yo
.li^
0.026L
.57
0.0-s2z -F
liJ
=100-x IrHD=5o
iali
J
i o
-1.t3

0.8165x=100-x
t t8

B- 4 .t3 \) .o26L The cross.sectional area of station Z + 210

8+8q) L is 40 mz in fill and at slation 2 + g10 is 60 x = 55.05
m2 in cut. The free haul distance is ,l00 m: Stationing of limits of free haul along the fill -LEH-45(4
The balancing point is at station 2 + 010.
0.0521 = 7.57 + (4.13 -'0,0261)
The ground surface is sloping upward from
= (2 + 510) - 55.05
0.0781=7.57+4.13 station 2 + 210 to station 2 + 510 and also . 2 + 451.95 (3.845 +
L* 150 uniformly upward from station 2 + 510 to Overhaul volume=L 40.18)(180)
,
- station 2 + 810. Determine the stationing
H*, * Hr,,. (along fill) of the limits of lree haul.
Overhaul volume = 3962.25
Formula: 1= 2.313
Gn*no -G*
(40.18 + 60X98)
L- 4.13 + 7 .57
Solution: The grading works of the portion of the (z; Volume of waste =- ,
0.052 - (-0.026) proposed expansion of the North
expressway shows the lollowing notes. Volume of waste = 4908.82 cu.m.
L=150 haul m,
FHt):1il,
60
Free distance ' 50 Limit of
Sta.ofB=g+990+150 economical haul = 450 m. (33 + 40) 52
Sta.ofB=9+U0
x @ Volume of borrow -
t0 2
Limits ol free haul distance is from
Volume of bonow = 1898 cu.m.
sta.1+272to1+322.
l(x) lfi) Llmits of economical haul is from
sta.l+052and1+502
27O TRANSPoRTATIoN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING 271

Mass Diagram O Determine the volume of waste in m3.

@ Length of overhaul:
@ Determine the volume of bonow in m3.
,a,l{i0i::ir::, pf,llit'' @ Determine the overhaul volume in C^C
ir
cu.m, A single summit mass diagram from 1gu=fi +FHD
@ Determine the length of overhaul if the station 0+ ofa proposed
100to0 + 800

From the mass diagram shown of an extension of Santander Highway. Has the
earthworks, the following data were
total cost of hauling is Pl92,000.
lollowing technical data.
+s0=ffi +so

computed as follows: Solution:

P25 per cu m. i meter station
Free haul distance = 60 m. O Volume of waste Mass ordinate of the initial limit of Cn "
Cost of borrow = P10/m3 oconomical distance = +600 m3
Overhaul = P5.00 per meter station
Free haul distance = 50 m. Total cost of haul. P1 05750.00
Compute the cost of overhaul.

Lr_-\ Limit of economical haul = 450 m.

105750=&9#q
\k i Cost of bonow = P500 Per cu'm.

Mass ordinate of station 0 + 100 ='80 m3

L= 211.50 m.

2lxxi {''i l:u*r n,'

irnx). Mass ordinate of station 0 + 800 =' 130 m3
I JXX|

?8 ill
+200
(D Compute the overhaul volume in cu.m.

Solution:
(2) Compute the length of overhaul in Total cost of bonow:
meterc if the total cosl of hauling is "4)
Cost of overhaul :
Vol. of borrow = 200 + 1 30
..80
P105,750.00
Overhaut vot. = 2000(78 _ 60) + 1000(80 - 60)
, l.r0 iD Compute the total cost of borrow. Vol. ofbonow " 330 m3
+ 1000(66 - 60) + 2000(68 - 60)

Overhaul vol, = 78000 cm3 Volume of waste = 200 + 80

- Cost of borrow = 330 (500)
Volume of waste 280 m3
cost ofoverhaur = Iqg90(5) = p19s00 Solulion;
2A Cost of borrow = P165,000
t) Overhaulvolume:
@ Volume of borrow:
Volume of borrow = 200 + 130
600
2.31$.,:i, hrorSiLifr Volume of bonow = 330 m3
r

The following are the data on a simple

summit mass diagram.
@ 0verhaul volume:
LEH_45O
Overhaul volume * 600 - 200
STA MASS ORDINATE (mr) Overhaul volume = 400 m3
0+000 .80 .80
0+500 .130
@ Length ofoverhaul:
lnitial point of limit of freehaul 120(4oo) x
distance = +600 192.ooo = - r30
20
lnitial limit of economic haul '+200
Freehaul distance : 60 m. x= 80 m.
Overhaul volume = 600 - 200
Limit of economical distance = 400 m.
Cost of haul " P120 per cu,m per meter Overhaul volume = 400 m3
station.
Chapter

3 PORIS & HARBOR

0 s and Harbor
-

A. Natural Harbors
The basic criteria to be considered in

6r'ijtia! developing a proposition as to the roles of a

lslantl
country's ports may b e classified into the
) following four groupsl

I ku'bor (D The national and regional development

policies of the country
(D The transportation infrastructure of the
hintedand and its prospects
3r Existing port capacity and potential for
development

3) Cargo forecasls for each port

ljtrdk\at.r

6@rlt.CIr1,
+:bu
Busiest Ports in the World
/ as of 2013
Hurfux'

Rank Port Country

1 Shanghai China
2 Singapore Singapore
3 Shenzhen China

4 Hong Kong Hong Kong

South
B. Artificial Harbor 5 Busan
Korea

Ningbo-
6 China
&r, Zhoushan
7 Qingdao China

8 Guangzhou China

o United Arab
Dubai
Emirates
10 Tianjin China
 274 PORTS.AND HARB()R PoRTS,AND HARBoR 275
Probl*fi ,hlipm
3,7 I

Harbors can be broadly classified as: For harbor basins, the width required to
Generally the width of the harbor entrance
When more than one ship has to be
l. Natural harbors should be
accommodated along the berth, a
permil a ship to swing freely into a berth is
ll. Semi-naturalharbors clearance length ol _ should be
for berths at 90'.
lll. Artificialharbors a) 30m
provided between the adjacent,ships. a) 1 ,5 times the length of the ship
lV. Commercial harbors nls i/ between 0.7 - 1.0 times the @' b) 2 tines the length of the ship
length ol the desrgn ship a) 20m
c)
*a/ I, lland lll only c) -
between 2 6 times the beam of b) 40m
8 times the beam of the ship plus
30 m,
b) l, llland lV only the design ship c) 60m
d) 6 times the beam of the ship plus
c) ll, lll and lV only d) 50m []r? d) 0.1 times the length of the 180 m.
d) All of the above Iargesf shrp

The safeg distance between two moored

tankers or moored tanker and a passing
The maximum current velocity through the ship, will depend upon the overall layout of
A port is a harbor in which terminal harbor entrance should not exceed For a single-berth pier, the clear water area the harbor, the number of tugboats
facilities are provided. The.different types
of ports are as follows:
between two piers should be _ to allow assisting in the berthing or unberthing
a) 2.5 m/s or 4 knots for tugboat assistance, operation, the environmental conditions
l. Ocean port Bb/ 1.5 mls or 3 knots
and the population of in the area,
ll. lnland port n*, a) 2 times the beam of the largest
The safety distance between a moored oil
lll. Entry port
c) 3 m/s or 5 knots
ship plus 30 m.
tanker and a passing ship shall be:
lV. Free port d) 1 m/s or 1.5 knots
b) 2 times the beam of the largest a) from 30 - 50 m.
ship plus 50 m. rs b/ from 50- 150 m.
a) l, ll and lll only c) 200 m c) from 150 * 200 m.
b)
c)
l, lll and lV only
ll, lll and lV only
d) 2 times the length of the ship plus d) from 50 - 100 m ,
30 m.
rs. d/ All of the above
The stopping distance of a ship will
depend on factors such as ship speed, the The size of water area for anchorages will
displacement and shape of the hull, and therefore primarily depend on the number,
3,3 horsepower ratio. The stopping distance of
For harbor basins, the width required to
type and size of ships, which require
a loaded ship _ permit a ship to swing treely into a berth is
protection and the type of mooring system
available.
The harbor entrance should, if possible, be for berths at 45".
located on the .-.-_ of the harbor. a) 100 m The water depth at an anchoring area
b) 150 m ,* should preferably not exceed
a) 1.5 times the length of the ship approximately _ due to the length of
a) windward end c) 10 to 12 times the ship,s length
2 times the length of the ship the anchor chain of the ship. The bottom
b) outer end rg d/ 7 toStimesthe ship,stength
b)
c) 8 times the beam of the ship plus condition must not be too hard, olherwise
!€ c) lee srde 30 m. the anchor will be dragged along the
d) innerend d) 6 times the beam of the ship plus bottom and not dig into the sea bottom
180 m, a) 30-50m. c) 25-50m
rsb/ 50-60m. d) 60-80m.
 276 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS I\ND HARBOR 277

Wind, and Tides t,a7 3.2, Problem I

Problem

3.{3 ,F,rsblsm An instrument use to measure the

of wind.
i
The pressure against a vertical wall due to
waves is called:
Waves of this type have very long periods,
typically from 30 sec. up to the tidal period
of 12 hr. 25 min. and are mostly found in
Waves continue to grow after they reach a a) Buchanan's scale
d) Wave decay
enclosed or semi.enclosed basins such as
velocity equal lo _
but at a decreasing b) Fiboracci scale
b) Dynamic pressure
Rankines active pressure
artilicial port basins or bays.
rate, Energy losses from friction, transfer * c) Beufortsscale
c)
of energy into currents and the
d) Antwerp scale
ttrF 41 Clapotis a) Swell waves
development of white caps means the [g' b] seiching waves
wave will not grow until the wave speed
reaches the wind speed. The wind speed is 3.t8 Problem
3.22 Problem c) Breaking waves
146 kph.
A change in the dissection of travel of the
d) Wakes
A wave generated in deep water,
a) 36.5 c) 32.6
reaching shoaling waters, changes
wave with change in depth of water which
rs' b) 48.67 distributes wave onergy along the 3.46 ,Problom
d) 46.87 only in its height but also in its length seashore unevenly is called:
the period will *-**.
luF a) Waves created by large, sudden impacts,
wave refraction
* a) remain constant
such as earthquakes, volcanoes or
3.14 PiiihlCffr b) wave diffraction landslides that ends up in the ocean.
b) increase c) wave reflection
The ratio of the wave length to its height c) decrease d) wave frequency a) Storm surge
for ocean waves is between: d) None ofthe above b) Swell waves

a) 9 and 15 3.23 Problem * c) Isunamis

r€ b) 3.1 e CE Board:Itlov. 2d d) Clapotis
17 and33 Waves generated by wind that are acting
c) 12 and 18 An open water of navigable depth is ca on the sea surlace bordering on the port
d) 20 and 34 site. 3.27
a) Shoal
b) Skewd uu. a) wind waves Waves in which the ratio of water depth to
c) Significant depth b) ocean waves the wave length is greater than 0.5.
r€ d/ Fairuay c) breaking waves
a) lntermediate water waves
A very long standing wave on a large but d) depth water wave
b) Breaking waves
limited body of water generally occurring
S;2O Probleth c) Shallow-water waves
when a storm dies down after producing a
wind tide is calledl
3.2* :Problem l$- 4 Deepwaterwaves
Waves are formed by the frictional drag
wind across the water surface. This is Wind generated waves which are created in
* a/ Seiche c Ebb process of transferring energy from the deep ocean at some distance from the
3.28',',:.u:,:,t:F6i0flgm
b) Shoal d) Skewd to water. Water particles are moved port site and the wind that created them
their position by the wind, and may be too distant to be lelt in the port or Waves in which the ratio of water depth to
retumed to the original position by may have stopped blowing or changed, its the wave length is less than 0.50 but
which is a restoring force. These waves direction by the time the wave reach the greater than 0.40.
called: port,
Waves generated by storms, which occur [€ a) nterm edi ate w ater w av es
outside area of observation.
a) Deep waterwaves ]rB 6) Swell wayes
b)
I

Breaking waves
b) Significant waves b) Seiching waves c) Shallow-water waves
* a/ Swe/ls c) Skewd
* c) Gravigwaves c) Breaking waves d) Deep water waves
b) Shoal d) Ebb d) Equivalent depth water waves d) Wakes

]-
 27A PORTS AND HARBOR AND HARE}()R 279
3;2g::
3i3t,,'i:,:r,' ir..P*Abl,B.-m 3.4,1. Pr6hlcnt'
Waves in which the ratio of water depth to The arithmetical mean value of the
the wave length is equal to or tess than one-third of the Waves for a stated The horizontal extension of the generating The type of tide which will occur at or near
0.40. area in the direction of the wind is called: the time when the moon is new or full that
a) Average wave height
is when the sun, moon and earth fall in line
a) lntermediate water waves b) Critical wave height a) trough and the tide generating forces of the moon
b) Breaking waves * c/ Significant wave height b) shoal and sun are additive.
eA c) Shallow-water waves d) lntermediate wave height c) seiche
d) Significant waves ItE d/ fetch ,* a) Spring tides
b) Lunar tides
c) Diurnal tides
,3.$O.,.,,':
'.Frcbtolli 3r38 Problem d) Ebb tides
An abnormal rise of the sea level thai
Waves which fall fonrrard since the forward
occurs when a typhoon passes by Th is
velocity of the creasl particles exceeds the The difference in height betlveen the mean
nse above normal level on this open
velocity of propagation of the wave itself, higher high water and lhe mean lower low
is due to atmospheric pressu re 3.42 ,Problsrn
ln deep water, this normally occurs when as well as due to wind stress.
water is called:
the wave length L is less than 7 times the
wave height (L < 7 H) and in shallow water a) Hurricane ,* a) Diurnal range The PPA (Phil. Ports Authority) requires that
when the depth d is approximately equal to b) Tsunamis b) Mean sea level water level that guarantees about water depth
1.25 H (where H is the wave height). n* c/ Storm surge c) Mean range for safety of the ships berthing on a certain
ports and harbor, below the mean lower low
a) lntermediate water waves d) Tornado
d) Residual water level
water should be equal to:
r€ b/ Breakingwaves
c) Shallow-water waves
d) .Significant waves .3-3s P,ory 3,lS;j:riii:pfObleit
a)
b)
0.15 m to 0.30 m
0.12 m to 0.40 m

Waves with an extremely long period that

*c) 0.15 - 0.40 m
The highest tides which occur at intervals
mainly occur when there is a sudden large
d) 0.12 - 0.50 m
of half a lunar month is called:
ti8{: scale sea floor movements associatid * a/ Spring tides
severe, shallow focus earthquake.
The distance that the wind blows over the b) Semi-lunar tides
sea in generating the waves is known as: a) Significant waves c) Semi-diurnal tides
3.43 Problern
a) clapotis c) !Q- b/ Tsunamis
d) Ebb tides
seiche
b) wakes r€ d) fetch
c) Storm surge When the lines connecting the earth with
d) Deep water waves the sun and the moon form a right angle,
that is the moon is in her quarters, then the
actions of the moon and sun are
The datum line for design of port facilities subtractive, and the lowest tides of the
3;3Ol
The ratio of the wave height to its wave in accordance with charts, which is being month occur, this is called:
length is called: The falling tide is known as: used by the Phil. Ports Authority (PPA).
,* a) Neap tide
a) wave period * a/ Ebbtide * A) MLLW c) RWL Lunar tide
b) wave propagation
b) Flood tide b) LWL d) HWL
b)
Diurnal tide
c) slope
c) d) Ebb tide
ls d/ sfeepness
d)
Neap tide
All ofthe above
 2AO PORTS I\ND HARBOR PoRTS AND HARBoR 2al

!-$t{r'i:;::: : PfOblem
Owing to retardation of the tidal wave in The difference in height behveen high Waves formed by gravitational attraction ol
The distance that a wind blows across the
the ocean by frictional force, as the earth water and low water at a tidal station is the moon and sun.
water is called:
revolves daily around its axis and as the called:
tide tends to follow the direction of the
a) seiching c) wakes

moon, the highest tide for each location is

a) diurnal range
b) swell os d) fides a) off-shore l

not coincident with conjunction and

ls bl fidalrange b) shoal

opposition but occurs at some constant c) mean range c) on-shore ii

d) extreme range [S d) fetch
time after new and full moon. This interval Problem
which may amount to as much as two and
a half days is known as: The spread ol energy along a wave crest is
3.48 Probtem called: 3.57 Probtem
a) Diurnal tide
a) refraction
b) Lunar tide When the daily high waters are usually at
b) The time that a wind blows across the
[s c) Age of the tide their least height and the daily low waters
c)
reflection
shoaling water is called:
their greatest height soon after the moon is
d) Semi-diurnaltide
in quandralure. This tides are called: tB d, diffraction
o) diffraction
* a) rVeap tr?es b) refraction
3.45 Problem b) Spring tides 3.5t Problem
c) period

c) Flood tides ra d, duration

Generally, the average interval between d) Ebb tides The bending of waves as they slow down.
successive high tides, which is hal{ the
time between successive passages of the
n* a) refraction
moon across a given meridian is: e;4Sr Froblem b) reflection
c) shoaling
a) 12 hrs. and 15 min. Waves formed by moving ship or boats are d) diffraction The average of the highest one-third of the
waves are called:
b) 11 hrs. and 45 min. called:
c) 12 hrs.
rg d) 12 hrs. and 25 min.
* al wakes 3.54 Problem a) Average wave height
b) Critical wave height
b) swell
*cl
Waves under the influence of the winds
c) breaking waves
that generated them are called:
Sig n if ica nt wav e h eight

3.46 d) seiching d) lntermediate wave height

a) wakes c) swell

ln many parts of the world, the high waters

!g b/ sea d) seiching
reach their greatest height and the low 3.5O Problem 3.59. ,,rProblem
waters at the least height, soon after the
Waves formed by earthquake disturbances.
time of full and new moon. Thesetides are 3156 Probl,em The highest tide which occurs at intervals
called: a) Storm surge
Waves that have propagated beyond the
of half a lunar month when the sun, moon
and earth fall in line.
b) Ereaking waves
initial winds that generated them
*a) Spring fr?es * c) are
Tsunamis called: *a) Spring lides
b) Flood tides
d) Wakes
,*
Neap tides a) wakes c) swell
b) Neap tides
Flood tides
d) Ebb tides
b) shoal d) seiche
d) Ebb tides
2a2 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARBOR 243

3,60 'Problem 3,64 Problem 3.68 Problem 3.72 Problem

The lowest tide of the month when the Prevailing winds which are seasonal A scale use to measure the intensity and The highest tides in the world where a rise
lines connecting the earth with the sun and blowing in one direction over part of the force of winds. of 100 ft. has been recorded occur in
the moon form a right triangle, that is when year and in the opposite direction the
the moon is in its quarters are called: remainder of the year.
trA a) Beautort's Scale
* a) *a) Bay of Funday
*a/ Neap fides Monsoon b) Antwerp Scale
b) Miami, Florida
b) Spring tides b) Winds in inter-tropical zone c) Richter Scale
San Francisco BaY
c) Diurnal tides c) Windward side d) Buchanan's Scale c)

d) Semi-diurnal tides d) Leeward side d) Venice, ltaly

3.69
3.73 Problem
3.61 Problem , i 3.65,,,.,Froblsm,,,,,,,r
The periodic rise and fall of the ocean
Tides that occur twice its lunar day is The side of a structure facing the direction waters produced by the attraction of the The average of the high water over a 19'
called: from which the wind comes. moon and sun. year period is known as:

a) Neap tides
a) Forward side
Ebb c) Wake a) Mean higher water
b) Backward side
a)
b)
c)
Ebb tides
Diurnal tides
g c) Windward side
b) Wave rg d) Iides b)
c)
Higher high water
Highest high water
ns d) Semi-diurnal tides
d) Leeward side rs d) Mean high water

3.7A , Problom
3.62 Problem 3.66 . Prohlcm '. ,:
t.74 Problem
Tides which occurs only one high tide a
The opposite side of a structure facing the day is called:
High crested waves caused by the rush of
direction from which the wind comes. The average height of the higher high
flood tide up a river or by meeting ol tides a) Neap tides waters over a 19'Year Period'
are called: a) Fonrvard side b) Spring tides
b) Backward side
*c) Diurnal tides
*a) Mean higher high water
a) Storm surge c) Windward side
rs b) Tidal bores q' a/ Leewardside
d) Semi-diurnal tides b)
c)
Higher high water
Highest high water
c) Swells d) Mean high water
d) Shoal
3.7'l

3.63 Problem lf one of the two daily tide is incomplete'

3.75 ,Problem
The graphical representation of the
that is it does not reach the height of the
direction, frequency and intensity of winds Average of the low water over a 19'year
The circulation of masses of air more or previous tide, then the tides are referred to
at a particular location over a period of period is called:
less parallel to the earth's surface. as:
time is known as:

a) Monsoon a) Tropical wind gauge a) Neap tides a) Lowest low water

Lower low water
o€ b, wind b) Wind intensity gauge [g' b) Mixed diurnal tides
b)

c) Wind pressure *c) c) Diumal tides

r€ c) Mean low water
Wind rose
d) Breeze
d) Wind index
d) Semi{iumal tides d) Mean lower low water
 284 PORTS AND HARBOR P()RTS AND HARB()R 245

The higher of the two high waters of any The lowest height of water of spring tides.
diurnal tide day. Regular occurrence at certain locations are A maximum wave height and wave period
high crested single or solitary type of'wave of the maximum wave height in wave train.
a) t\tlean higher high water
u* a/ Lowest low water caused by the rush of llood tide up in the
lQr b/ lligher high water
b) Lower low water river or by the meeting of tides as in the a) Deep water wave
n\ Highest high water
vl Mean low water Bay ol Funday where the highest tide of b) Equivalent depth water wave height
100 ft. is recorded in the world is referred !€
d) Mean high water
d) Mban lower low water
c) Highestwave
to as:
d) Significant wave

a) Shallow water wave

b) Deep water wave
c) Solitary wave
The height of the mean high water above rm d)
The lower of the two low waters of any Tidalbore
mean low water.
diurnal tide day. Waves which occur in water having a depth
less than one half of the wave length and
a) lt/ean higher high water
a) Lowest low waler
b) Higher high u,rater
the influence of the bottom changes the
Bg" b) lorm or orbital motion from circular to
Lower low water *_ c/ Mean range elliptical or near'elliptical.
c) Mean low water
d) Mean high water
d) Mean lower low water A wave at a point where the water depth is ,* a/ Shallow water wave
equal to '/z ol the wavelength or greater to
b) Deep water wave
be expressed in terms of the parameters of
Significant wave
significant wave. d) Highest wave

The mean of the height of mean high water

The average height d the lower low waters
over a 19-year period.
above the mean low water is referred to as; '* a)
b)
Deep water wave
Equivalent depth water wave height

,* c) Highest wave
a) Lowest low water
a) Mean sea level d) Significant wave
b) Lower low water b) Mean lower low water Waves break under the following
conditionsr
c) Mean low water c) Mean range
IB d) Mean lower law water
d) li/ean high water
l. When the lorward velocity of the cresl
particles exceeds the velocity of the
I
propagation of the wave itself
A hypothetical wave having a wave height ll. When the wave height exceeds (1/7)
and period equal respectively to average ofthe wave length in deep water
The highest height of water of spring tides.
The difference in height between the mean values of the wave height and period of the lll. When the wave reaches shallow water
higher high water and the mean lower low largest 1/3 of all waves in the train as where the depth is equal to about one
water. counled in the order of greater wave and one quarter of its height.
a) Mean higher high water height.
b) Higher high water
d) I\4ean sea level a) Deepwaterwave a) I only
* c) Highesthigh water b) Mean lower low waler b) Equivalent depth waler wave height b) ll only
d) Mean high water Mean range c) Highest wave c) lll only
ua dJ Diurnal range os d,l Signilicant wave r€ 0 Ailoftheabove
 2A6 PORTS AND HARB()R PORTS AND HI\RBOR 247

3.9O Problem blem

The length between two consecutive crests
The water level that guarantees about gg% Shape of the wave and wave speeds are Large waves (long period) can be
is called: governed by the displacement of water
of tide is safe to ships seems to be suitable generated only when the fetch (distance
from the expression of
the technical particles and the functions of the following over which the wind blows) is large. Waves
a) wave period
resolution of the lnternational Water Wave variables. continue !o grow after they reach a velocity
[g. b) wave length Congress. Such water level, which is of _ ol the wind speed, but at
c) wave amplitude 0.15 m. - 0.4 m. below MLLW should be
l. Wave length
decreasing rate.
a

d) frequency used for design of ports.

Il. Water depth
lll. llllave motion
lV. Wave shoals
a) A3 c) '/,
,* a/ Design Low Tide (DLT)
3€ 0 1/3 d) %

b) Low Water Levet (LWL) a) I and ll only

The height between the trough and the c) Residual Water Level (RWL) b) l, ll and lll only

crest of a wave is calted: d) High Water Levet (HWL) c) lll and lV only
d) All ofthe above
The flow ol energy along the wave crest in
a) period
a direction at right angles to the direction
b) oscillation
of wave travel is called:
u€4 amplitude
d) frequency a) reflection c) refraction
Residual water level (RWL) for gravity type b) 'deflection rg d/ diffraction
ts expressed as: The elevation of the crest above the
through of the wave.
* a/ 1/3 (HWL - LWL) + LWL
The wave form travels oyer the water
surface and the time for two consecutive
b) 2/3 (HWL - LWL) + ;_yy1-
a) Wave length

cresls to pass h point is called: c) 1/3 (HWL - LWL)

b) Wave shoals A type of wave where the depth is less than
1/z
Wave period ol wave length but greater than 1/25 of
d) 2/3 (HWL _ LWL)
rs
c)
the wave length.
lg a) wave period
d) Wave height

b) oscillation *a) Tran sition al water w ave

c) amplitude
b) Shallow water wave
d) frequency
c) High water wafe
d) Deep water wave
Residual water level (RWL) for sheet pile
3.93 Problem type is erpressed as: The interval of time for two wave crests to
pass the same position in space.
,lsm
The speed of the wave form which travels a) 1/3 (HWL - LWL) + twt
over the water surface for a certain wave
period.
rs bl a3 fiwL - LwL) + LWL a) 2 seconds
A $pe of wave where the depth is less than
b) 3 seconds
c) (HWL - LWL)
113
*cJ
1/25 ol wave length.

a) Steepness of wave d) (HWL * LWL)

213
period
Transitional water wave
r€ b) Velocity of wave propagation d) frequency
[€
a)
b) Shallow water wave
c) lnstantaneous velocity
c) High water wave
d) Average velocity of wave
d) Deep water wave
 2aa PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARB"OR 249

3. 3.{O8 ProLlbm 3.{ I I Problem

3,1
The highest point of the wave is called. From the Sine wave curve shown, what do
you call the value of "L"? From the Sine wave curve shown, what do What zone is covered by the distance "y"?
you call the region y?
*a) wave crest L .T

b) wave kough
c) wave height lrval tl>I-125:
Li2<d
d) wave Iength I- :

a) Period of wave \\n t ln,tqlt tr1\til lbtililil

d-dcpt
''.:--,- b) Frequency of wave
h
-Y ,\ rdlt brttt)ul
3.{OS Problem c) Wave height a) Deep water
rs d) Wave length
b) Shallow zone

the lowest point of the wave. *c) Transition zone

a) Crest length region d) Shoaling zone ilt

Bs
a)
b)
wave crest
wave trough
3.{Og Problem !€ b) Trough length region

c) wave height From the Sine wave curve shown, what it

d)
Transition region
Period
3.{{it Problem
the value of h?
d) wave length
What zone is covered by the distance "2"?

s.t06 Problsm 3,112 Problem

d>Ltzst d<1"t25
The distance between the highest point a) Length of wave trough
From the wave behavior, indicate what
and the lowest point of the wave, b) Still water depth
zone is covered by the distance x. otltu lrtttrnr
!€ c) Amplitude
a) wave crest
d) Height of wave trough a) Deep water zone
b) wave kough os b) Shallow zone
*c/ wave height Transition zone
d) wave length d) Shoaling zone
d4/25

From the Sine wave curve shown, what do

you call the region x?

wQrc cresl
\till H.o The average height of the sea for all stages
The vertical distance of the wave crest and
a) Depp water zone
of the tide obtained from systematic
the wave trough, J observations of sea level at equal intervals
d=depth waie trough b) Shallow zone over a long period of time along a given
a) wave crest c) Transition zone coastline is called:
b) wave trough
!g
*ci wave height *a) Crest length region
d, Shoaling zone rc" a)
b)
Mean sea level
Mean low water
d) wave length b) Trough length region c) Mean lower low water
c) Transition region d) Mean ocean level
d) Period
ilri
 i

29C^ PORTS I\ND HARBC)R PORTS I\ND HAREiOR 291

The process of widening, enlarging, The flow of seawater in the The rise and fall of the water level due to
The regular periodic rise and fall of the
or deepening of channels in
cleaning, direction that accompanies a tidal variation change in the atmospheric pressure is
surface of the seas, observable along their
harbors, rivers and canals to maintain the of sea level and is thus periodic. approximately equal to:
shores is called:
idea depth of berthing areas due to fast
siltation rate is known as; us *a) 0.9 cm rise or fall of the water
a) Serche
level for 1 m bar fall or rise in
a) Wave
a) Disiltation
b)
c)
Storm surge
Tsunami atmospheric pressure
[9 b) Tide
b) Meandering
d) Tidal wave b) 0.30 cm rise or fall of the water c) Period ofwave
* c/ Dredging level for 1 m. bar lall or rise in d) Current

d) Excavation atmospheric pressure

c) 0.25 cm rise or fall of the water
level for 1 m. bar fall or rise in
atmospheric pressure
3.r#i Problem
The time of rotation of the earth with d) 0.6 cm rise or fall of the water level
respect to the moon and the planets, which for 1 m. bar fall or rise in The average height of all low waters at any
The periodic rise and fall of sea level in is approximately 24 hours and 50 minutes, place over a sufficiently extended period of
atmospheric pressure
response to the gravitational attraction of time is called:
the sun and moon as modified by the a) Highest astronomical tide
earth's rotation. b) Lowest astronomical tide a) Spring range
,* c) Astronomical tidal day b) Diurnal range
a) Rotational tide c) Extreme range
d) Ebb tidal day
b) Storm surge Wind generated waves but are created in
the deep ocean at some distance from the
rtr d, Mean low water
c) Gravitational tide
port site and the wind that created them
rs d) Astronomical tide
may be too distance to be felt in the port
and may have changed its direction by the 3.{2Er iProblem
The chart datum for harbor works time the waves reach the port.
is
generally the: a) Long waves The tidal current setting into the bays and
b). Wind waves estuaries along the coast is called:
A phenomenon involving abnormal a) Lowest observed water level
c) Sieching
oscillations of the water level with a period rs, b) Lowest astronomical tidg ss d, swell a) Ebb current
ol approximately a few minutes to a few c) Mean tidal-high water level b) Lunitidal cunent
tens of minutes. lt occurs when small
fluctuations of the water level are
d) Mean tidal-low water level @ c) Flood current

generated by micro scale variations of the 3.125 Pr6blem d) Slack water current

atmospheric pressure by an air front or a

Waves, which have a very long period,
low pressure in the outer sea and the
typically from 30 sec up to the tidal period
components of those oscillations whose
The rise of sea level due to the of 12 hr and 24 min. and are mostly found
period is the same as a natural period of
eflect between years 2000 and 2050 is in enclosed or semi.enclosed basins such
the harbor are amplified
. through
as bays or port basins. The return current toward the sea is called:
resonance. assumed to be about:
a) Ocean waves
*a) Seicie
B a) 0.25 m to 0.30 m rB
a) Ebb current
o) Seiciing b) Lunitidal current
b) Storm surge b) 0.12 m to 0.20 m
Flood current
c) Tsunami c) 0.06 m to 0.2 m c) Swell waves
Wind waves
c)
d) Slack water cunent
d) Astronomical tide d) 0.16 m to 0.25 m d)
 292 P()RTS AND HARBOR FonIs AND HARBoR 293
rt Characteristics of Shallow-
3! PtohIBm 3;rl
; Water Waves: d < Llz
The period during which the current is The maximum depression of the falling tide During Typhoon Ondoy, due to strong
negligible while it is changing directions is
called *_ . lt is the period during which
is called:
Shallow-water waves occurs in winds, it causes a wave length of a

water having a depth /ess than half of shallow-water wave of 80 m. long. lf the
the current is less than 1/10 of a knot or wave period (the time for two consecutive
less than 0.169 fps.
a) Trough the wave length. d < U2.
crests to pass a given point) is 7.2 sec.,
trf b) Low water determine the depth of water at that point
a) Turn of the current c) Neap assuming it to be uniform.
b) Spring water d) rbb
A. Wave longth of shallow-water
waves: Solution:
c) Diurnal time
tra- d) Slackwater ,- = [gr) t,n n l41l
(L
r=fo'lonnl'^ol
( L \2") /
8.{S4r,. :Pr,bblerir
r,,'
\2") )
e 81(7 2)', 2rd
B0 = r I trn r,l l
The straight.line stretch of open water
where: I 2n .l leo/
,3;,{31
available for wave growth without the L = wave length of shallow-water waves
n. n[?4) =0e8841
interruption of land is calledl 7 = period in seconds \80,
The average time interval, in solar hours
and minutes from a lunar transit to the next
d. water depth (assumed lo be uniform) W =2.57235
succeeding high water at a given place as
[A a) Fetch g = acceleration of gravrty (9.81 m/s2) 80

determined by an extended set of b) Wave length

d= 32.75 m. < lJ2
observations is called:
c) Neap
B. Ullave veloqity {celerity) of
d) Ebb shallow-water waves:
3.137 Problem
*a) High water lunitidal interval of
the place
v=f9Il,rnnl49) During the Typhoon Butchoy, the wave due
b)

c)
Upper meridian transit
Higher high water interval
\2n) t L l to the strong winds produced a wave
length at a point on the surface of the
d) Higher water slack where: water at a depth of 4 m. Determine the
The interval of time between successive V = wave velocity in m/s (velocrty of wave length for a period of 3.88 seconds
crests of the water waves passing a wave propagation)
for a shallow water wave.
stationary point of reference is called:
d = depth of water (m)
Solutian:
length
a) Amplitude
L = wave (m)
L=fdlt.nr,[?4]
The maximum height reached by each b) High-water lunitidal interval
g = acceleration of gravrty (9.81 m/s2)
\2n) \ l L
7 - period in seconds
rising tide is called: * c) Wave period
l.=rt'.qui'*t[ry)
a) Trough
d) Lunitidal period
1 zs rse )
b)
* c)
Ebb

Highwater
L = 23.50 tan h
l-,-l
By trial and error :
d) Crest L = 19.99 m. say 20 m.
 294 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARBOR 295

Characteristics of Deep Wavo.velocity for doep water

Water Waves: d 2 Ll2 waYes in terms of period "T"
The wave length of a shallow.water wave is $gc.:
Deep water waves break when the fonivard
80 m. long and its period of oscillation is Deep water waves are those
velocity of the crest particles exceeds the
7.2 seconds, lf it has a depth of water equal which occur in water having a depth
to 30 m, compute the velocity of the wave greater than one-half of the wave -t=-2nV velocity of propagation of the wave itself.
length, d > U2. s Determine the amplitude of the water
in mls.
V = 1.567 waves at this condition when the depth of
Solution: A. Y\lave length of ideep watel water is 64 m.
waves: r,i
where:
V = wave veloctty (m/s) Solution:
'=[*),,,n(?J / -)\ T. wave period in sec. d ^-
L=l9l l
-L =u.c
d , \2" )
{snarcw water wave)
f, L = 1.56 T2 64
=U.5
fl
where: -L
30< =40 L = wave length in meters
2 L= 128
T = wave period (time for wave to travel a
,, .
V=--#Enn 9.81(7.2\ 2n(30)
' '
distance L) Tropical typhoon Yolanda hits the country L=7H
2r B0
g = acceleration of gravity (9.81 m/sz) which causes a storm surge in Tacloban
128=7H
Gity. The wave period at a point having a
V =11.04m/ s
B. hlave velocity of deep wated depth of 36 m. in the ocean is 6.4 sec. H=18.29 (amplitude)
wavos in lerms of wave lengtf{ Compute the height of the wave if it has a
'"..L: . . :,,,,,:, steepness of 0.14.

Problsih, ,L=.-2nV2 Solution:

s Wave length of deep water waves:

The length of wave in a deep water wave is V = 1.2495 r[ , gr-

114,8 m. The water will reach a shallow where: 2n Tropical cyclone "lnting" wtll hit the
water depth when the waves start to break. g = acceleration of gravity (9.81 m/s2)
country with an estimated forecast velocity
Determine the depth of shallow water at L - 1.56 T2 of propagation of wave equal to 80 kph.
this condition. Determine the approximate length between
c. water wav6 L = 1.56(6.4)'?
crest of the wave in meters.
will occur when L = 63.90 m
Solution:
Solution:
L=7H d>:
I
lokl
2 V = 1.24eJ[
114.8 = 7H
shallow water urhere tho
63:90
H=16.4m is equal to 1.25 of 36 , =31.95 (deep-waterwave) v=!9
d = 1.25H 2 3.6

d = 1.25(16.4) ! = Steeoness
Y =22.22m1s

d. 20.5 m H=! L
22.22= 1.249J1
7
H = 63.90(0.14)
d=1.25H L.316.50 m.
where: H =8.95 m
H = height of wave (amplitude)
L = wave length in neters
d = depth of water
 296 P()RTS AND HARB()R PORTS AND HARB()R 297

3.{43. Problem 3.{45,, Plriblem v = 1.249 JL

Solufion:
L
d<-
The velocity of propagation of wave duiing ln the Pacific Ocean, near Surigao City, the v =1.249 J24N 2
the typhoon Ondoy is equal to 120 kph at a depth of water is 0,43 km,. What is the
certain point in the Pacific Ocean. approximate value of the wave speed of a V = 61.19 m/s 4 <Q
2
=10
Determine the approximate depth of the tsunami, which will cause a wave length
ocean at that particular point. V = 61.19(3.6) (
(between the crest of wave) equal to
[-: ILt^
o12
) ,rr l?4.l
Solution: 800 m? V = 220.3kph \rn )
n
\r)
v=
# =$33mis' Solution:
L=800m ,o=Y*'[ip)
V , 1.2a9 JL d=430m
r[ 3.1#7 Problem 20 = 1 .56 T'? (0.85013)
33.33 = 1.249 v = 1.24e J[ T = 3.88 sec,
L =712.11 nm
V = 1.249 1600 Tropical typhoon "Yolanda" hits the
country with an estimated wind speed of
o=! V = 35.32 n/s
140 kph. This causes a storm surge in
2
V = 35 32(3.6) Tacloban City with a period of 7,47 sec. in a
I1?.!1
,6 = .356, V =127.2kph point having a depth of 9 m. Compute the 3.i|49, Problem
height of the wave if it has a steepness of
d= 0.356km 0,14.Hint:L=1.55T2 During the typhoon Neneng, the length of
deep waler wave is 96 m. caused by strong
3.146 Solufion; winds near Batayan lsland. Compute the
3.144 Probtem L = 1.56 T'? velocity of wave in kph.
A tsunami also called seismic sea wave of
tidal wave is a catastrophic ocean wave, t = 1.56(7 .47)2 Solution;
The path of the typhoon ,'Dindo,, passes
usually caused by a submarine earthquake gl'
thru Batanes lsland at a certain localion
occurring less than 50 km beneath the sea L = 87.05 m , _ d 50
whose depth of water above the bottom of z1t
floor, with a magnitude greater than 6.5 on L 96
the sea equal to 150 m^ Determine the | .48
the Richter scale. Under water or coastal = 0.t4 L = 1.56 T2 2 z
approximate velocity of wave propagation L
landslides or volcanic eruptions also may
in kph. 96 = 1.56 T2
cause a tsunami. The term tidal wave is H = 87.05(0.14) d>f, {aeeowaterwave)
more frequently used for such a wave, bul T = 7.84 sec.
So/ufion;
it is a misnomer, for the wave has no H= 12.19 m.
o=! connection with the tides. lf the depth of t =4v
Z water al a certain point in the ocean is. s
1200 m, determine the velocity of the waye
tso=! propagation in kph. V=1.567
2
3.148 V = 1.56(7.84)
L=300
Solution:
V =1,249 Jl L During the Typhoon Katrina, the wave Y = 12.24m|s
d=- length which is caused by the strong winds
V = 1.249 J300 2 V =12.2413,6)
is equal to 20 m. long at a point where the
V = 21.63 m/s
1200 = :
I
depth ol water is 4 m. DeterminE the wave
period in sec. for a shallow water wave'
V = 44.06kph
V = 21.63(3.6) L

V = 77,88 kph L = 2400 m,

 29A PoRTS AND HARBoR PORTS AND HARBOR 299
3,1$o
, 2n$8.67\'? 3.t53 Problem Relation Between Max.
PAG.ASA'issued a warning on the western 32.2 Wave Height and
seaboard. The forecast predicts waves L = 671.67 ft.
The wave length of a deep water wave is nificant Wave Hei h
having a wave length of 2g0 m. at a point equal to 160 m. long. Compute the wave
I
velocity that causes this wave in kph.
near the Scarborough Shoal in the i,Uest d= - A hypothetical ,wave having a
Philippine Sea having a depth of 150 m. 2 wave height and period equal
Solution:
Determine the wave period that causes this . 671.67
0=--- .
respectively to average values of the
wave length. L 1.56 T2 wave height and period of the largest
2
160m=1.56T2 1/3 of all waves in the train as
Solution: d = 335.84 it. counted in the order of greater wave
T = 10.13 sec.
. 335.84 height is called Significant Wave
62! 0= _- V= 1.567 Height.
2 b
V = 1.56(10.13)
156r280=146 d = 55.97 fathoms V = 15.8 m/s Hrr, = 1.87 Ht
Note: V- 56.89 kph
, _Zfi,,, where:
s lfathom=6ft. Hnax IfldX. wave height
=
r[ H'. significant wave height
V = 1.2495
3:{54 Problem
V= 1.2495 rEO
V = 20.91 m/s The wind velocity of 4.2 m/s causes a deep
water wave formation in a period of 6.67
3,{55 Problem
2n
l; Tropical cyclone ,,lnting" hit the country sec. Compute the depth of waler,
Compute the maximum wave height if it
s with an estimated forecast of wave speed
V= 1.567 of 120 kph. The cyclone causes a storm has a significant wave height of 3.4 m.
SoftJfion;
surge with a frequency of 0.109 heltr. high.
20.91 = 1.56 T 1
Compute the length between the crest of Period =
T = 13.40 ser,. frequency Solution:
the deep water wave.
_1
t=_ Hr., = 1.87 Ht
Solution: f
. oT2 1
H.* = 1.87(3.4)
b-b/ = -
.2n I Hma = 6.36 m,
The velocity of propagation of a deep water f = 0.15 cycles/sec.
L = 1.56 T2
wave. caused by Typhoon ,,Senyang', is
equal to 40 mph at a certain point in ttre f = frequency f= Arithmetic Mean of All
L
ocean. Estimate the depth of still water
level at this point in fathoms.
_1
,= 015=f Wave Height and
i @eriod)
Significant Wryq Hgqght
Solution: L=28m.
-1
,= =9.17sec. H,
. 2nV2 OrOn
d= |2= +2',@ondition for deep -water wave) = 0.6 H'
g L = 1.56 T2
where:
d= 14m.
\/ _ 40(5290) L = 1.56(9.17)'z Hm = arithmetical mean value of all recorded
3600 wave herghts during a period of
V = 58.62 fps
| = 131.18 m. obseruation
Hs = significant wave height
 300 PORTS AND HARE}OR P()RTS I\ND HARB()F? 301

So/ufion;
3.{S8', Problern
L
d> Peepwaterlcvel)
What is the arithmetical mean value of all The wave length of a depth water wave The velocity ofwave propagation produces Z
recorded wave height during a period of
during the typhoon at the port of Cagayan a wave length of 300 m. and a wave height
observation if it has a significant wave de Oro is 310 m. The depth of still walei is of 25 m. lf the depth of still water in the
height of 4,24 m, located 0.90 m below the centerline of the t. rt llr
ocean is 80 m, determine the elevation of
rotation ol the wave. lf the steepness ofthe the wave crest above the still water level.
Solution: wave is 0.16, determine the vertical
Hm = 0.6 Hs
distance of the wave through from the Solulion;
botlom of the ocean if its depth of still
H, = 0.6(4.24) water is 40 m. above the bottom of the
ocean.
H^= 2.54 m. ia:=r::
',ilt)=tz 5
H=2.4m (amplitude)
Solution:
Sai nt-Venant and Flamant
l=tz,-
d= 46.2- 1.2-0.3
A water parlicle at the surface of '.ttD'
a deep-water wave oscillates about a
i,tt,l,ll
h
nH'coth 2nd d = 44.70 m.
=
point whose height above the still "4LL
-
h, L' 2d
water "ho" is given as: (nQS\') f2n(80))
h =l ' ' lcothl I
L= 2144.70)
-
,-, \ryr'tc|i:ilr
_
Dcplh walLl wr\,cs
( 4(300) , [ 300 ,
h" = 1.76 l= 89.44 m.
'.
l!12' Steepness = !
:,
u,: ,ll L Elev.of wave crest alnvethe stillwater
H
0.16 =310 Eiev.=80+ho2
+
H
Characteristics of Long
Il.f(l) s!kr rr\.\ H = 49.60 m
Elev. =80 +1.76+12.5 Waves: d < Ll25
v+0.90=
H
Elev. = 94.26 m. Waves with a relatively long wave
n- =i4I)*,r,'[4q) '2 length compared to the water deptLt
(41 ) \L ) d < 1/25 are called long waves.
49'60
v+0.90-
'2 it

Y = 23.90 m
3.t'59, ,Prubtefir A. Length of w-ave for long wavoa
where: h"40-23"90
ha =distance from the stilt water level The amplitude of a deep-water wave is L=TVgd
ta the
center of rotatian of waves h.16.10 m. 2.4 m. lf the depth ol water from the bottom
where:
H = height of wave or amplitude up to the crest of the wave is 46,2 m.,
L = wave length in nteters
d = depth of still water determine the hgrizontal distance between peiod in sec.
T = wave
L. wave length the crests of thd wave. Assume the center g. lll
acceleration of gravily (9 ru/:;")
a = distance from the still water depth to the of rotation of the wave is 0.3 m. above the
d. depth of water
crest of wave still water level.
 302 PORTS AND HARBC)R PORTS AND HARBOR 303
B. Wave velocity for a long wave

V = r/go wave generated in deep-water, when

Determine the velocily which causes a The wave length ol a long wave is equal to A
wave height of a long wave equal to 1g 120 m. Determine the wave velocity in kph reaching shoaling water changes not only
where: meters if it has a steepness of 1/9. which causes lhis wave length. its height but also jts length. The wave
V = wave velocity in m/s period however remains constant. For a
g = acceleration of gravity (9.81 n/sz) Solution: Solution: depth of 1.25 m, lhe shallow-water wave
length :s 20 m., determine the deep-water
!= 1 fo, lono*rn
d = depth of water For a long wave :

v=s; L25 wave length.

!=l
L9
d=1 Solution:
120 25 L.
-1 =tanh
2nd
L = 9(18)
Gompute the wave length caused by strong d=4.8m. Lo -LA
L-162m.
winds along the coast of Ormoc City for i V=.6 20
_ 2nfi.25\
wave period of 17.56 sec, if the depth of .L
d= tor long wave
=tanh
L20
water is 4 m. - v = &t4i)
162 )n
Solution: d= NE =648, V = 6.86 n/s -L = 0.37368

r =T16o V = 6.86(3.6)
V= 1ff L" ' 53.52 m.
l- - tz.s2.,6.g14) y =.,6rr1oae; Y = 24.70 kph
L=110m.
V = 7.97 m/s
d4 1
V.
= =003636 < =0.M (ok) 7.97(3.6) = 28.69 kph
, 110 -
This is a longwave. Relationship of Deep-
Water Wave Length and The shallow-water wave length is 24 m. and
the Shallow.Water Wave the deep-water wave length is 64.2 m

Determine the period (in seconds) to cause

Length (Applicable only for Determine lhe depth of the shallow water.
very small waves/ but valid for
a wave length of a long wave equal to Solufion;
The wave length of a long wave at a depth 125m.
any
of 4.8 m. is 122 m. Delermine the veloiity jL.=tanh. 2nd
of the wave propagation in kph. Solution: L.
A 2nd L" -LA
.
=i2p[
L= T\6d Lo -
LA
24 . 2nd
Solution:
d 4.8 u.2
-=tann- 24
L m l= $ ro, nro*rr* where:
2nd
Lo= deep-water wave length
tanh =0.37383
d
=0.03934 rL.g.g4
24
lotS
L = =5 m. (depth of water) Le = shallow-water wave length

=6
O
# d = depth of water
2rcd
-0.3g2g7
24
L= Tr,6[
v = Srt4r) d=1.5m.
V = 6.86 n/s 125=TJ981(5)
V = 6.86(3.6)
" 24.7 kph T .17.84sec.
 3()4 PORTS AND HARBOR
PoRTS AND HARBOR 305
of Fetch 3,168 probtsii
3.171'' Pr0blem 74:
The distance that a wind blows lf the velocity of the wind is 25 mph, find
across the water is calted Fetch. The size of waves resulting from the Give the different types of breaking waves.
the wind pressure in kpa if a consiant ,,c,, energy transfer is governed by the
is usually taken as 0.00256. following factors:
l. Spilling breaker
H=0.17WF ll. Plunging breaker
Solution: L Velocity of the wind lll. Heaving breaker
where:
P=cV2
ll. Fetch or distance over which the wind lV. Collapsing breaker
H = amplitude of wave in feet
blows V. Pitching breaker
p = 0.00256(25)' lll, Duration of time that the wind blows Vl. Surging breaker
V = wind velocity in mph lV. Frequency of wave action
F = length of fetch in miles
p = 1.6 psf a) l, ll, lll and lV only

1.6(9 B1) *a) l, ll, and lll only

b) ll, lV, V and Vl only
n= ' '/2r0lr * c)
' 2.2110091 '"'"t b) l, ll and IV only
l, tl, lV and Vt only
3.167 Probtem p = 0.0768 kPa c) ll, lll and lV only d) lll, V and Vl only

d) All of the above

Gompute the amplitude of the wave during Residual Water Level
typhoon wit a wind velocity of 50 knots, if
(Gravity Type)
the length of the fetch is 50b miles. 3.t6e Probtem
Solution: A hypothetical wave height of deep-water Waves continue to grow aftenthey reach a
3.{75 CE Board Nov.
Note:1 knot=1 nautical mites / hr, wave corrected for the effects of velocig equal to
of the wind speed but Determine the elevation of the residual
1 nautical niles = 60g0 ft. submarine topographic changes such as at a decreasing rate. Energy losses fiom water level (RWL) lor a gravity type if the
refraction and diffraction oi wave but friction, transfer of energy into cunents Iollowing data are as follows:
50(6080)
v= excluding wave shoaling and breaking to and the development of white caps m6ans Elev, of MLLltll = 0 m (datum)
5280
be expressed in the significant wave the wave will not grow until the wave speed Elev. of HWL = +1.26 ,n
V = 57,58 mph height. reaches the wind speed. Elev. ol LWL = - 0.23 m

H .0.17 JVF
a) Deep-water wave
a) 213 c) % Solution;
rq b) Equivalent deep-waler wave
rrE b/ 1/3 d) 3/,

H = 0.17 vE ss(5oo)
c) Highest wave
H= 28.84ft. d) Significant wave RWL
3
When waves enter a shallow water: I
3.{7o. Probtem lllt=rr srr

Wind P ure l. Wave speed decreases 0.2.1

ll. Wave length decreases

P=cV2 The maximum value of significant wave

lll, Wave speed increases
lV. Wave height increases H=1.26+0.23
height during a ce(ain period is known as:
where:
V. Wave length increases H = 1.49
Vl. Wave period does not change
p = wind pressure in psf ,* al Max.waveheight
c = constant p.00256) b) Highest wave height
u* a) l, ll, lV and Vl only | = | t,.ont=o.uo
y=0.50-0.23
V = velocity of wind in mph
c) Hrrro significant wave height b) lll, lV, V and Vl only
d) Hrn c) l, ll, and lV only Y=0.27m
d) ll, lll, and Vl only Elev. of RWL = + 0.27 m
 306 PORTS AND HARBOR
PORTS AND HARBOR 3U^7

Solution: Allowable h = 0.16 to 0.40 m

HWL=+l 2
Deterinine the elevation of the design low H "h+0.74
tide (DLT), which is the water level that 5
guarantees about 98% of tide, which is safe H ='1.30 +h
t,lyL= -0.3t) Rwt,
to the ships using the gravity type. 2

Elev, of HWL = +1.45

6nr H ;J (1.30+h)=h+0.74
m (Highestwatu tevel) MLLIv=0
Elev. of RWL = +0.25 m (Residuat water tevet) m 2.60+2h=3h+2.22
h " 0.38 m. balow ttLLW (ok less than 0.40 m)
Solution: I,W I-:

l.t5
H=1,26+0.23
4m
Seismic Forces Acting on
H=1.49m Marine Structures
?n=?(1.4e)=o.eem
,l Solution: 3 3'
y=0,99-0.23
i ln design of port and harbor facilities,
L5m Y = +0,76 m. @tevdionot RWL) seismic effects must be taken into
DLT=1
D consideration. lf A is equal to the dead
I .5m Rwt,
weight, B is equal to surcharge, and C is
MIIW 1.80
0.30 1t3(E) equal to design seismic coefficient, lind
H=1.45+h 0.30m
0_10 =l/l(1.8) the seismic force using seismic coefficient
method.
=n*o'u
LlvL= A.i0
According to the tide table (1991)of
| NA['lRlA, the port of Cebu has a frequertcy
*a)
D=3-0.30 ol tide below MLLW is 213 t[mes/year. The n+9 .r (i.r.1.
1.45 + h
=h+0.25
prds,nt data observed by the PPA reveals 2 )'
3 D=2.70n theloflowing results: A+B
Elev. of HWL = + 1.30 n
(High water level) b) d) (A+28)c
1.45+h=3h+0.75
Elev. of RWL = 0,74 m (Residual water tevel)
2 ).
2h=0] Determine the present elevation of tide
Residual Water Level below MLLW using a sheet pile type
h = 0.35 m. < 0.40 m. ok analysis.
Pile
Elev. of DLT = - 0.35 m. Solu#on; The magnitude of surcharge during
ea(hquake in designing port and harbor
facilities.
Determine the elevation of the residual a) Double the surcharge considered
water level (Rttll) Ior a sh'eet pile type if the without earthquake
From the figure shown, compute the following data are as follows; b) Times 3 of the
surcharge
distance from the top of the structure Elev. of ULL$I (datum)= 0.00 m considered without earthquake
o.71
(quay) to the residual water level (RWL} Elev. of HWL = + 1.26 m
Elev. of LWL =. 0.23 m 2t3H
* cl % of the surcharge considered
Use gravity type method. without earthquake
h d) 1/3 of the surcharge considorod
without earthquake
{f)esign kNtiLl()
 n

30a PoF?TS AND HARE}oR

F)ORTS AND HARBOR 309

r$;l8eii
Solufion; Angular Frequency of a
Surcharge = 2.50(3.5X1) Note: For checking of sliding of the structure,
the surcharge load is considered behind the
, Wave
Surcharge = 8.75 tf
The cross section of a quay is shown in the structure only.
figure, seismicrorce =
+ffi: [rr
- *P) = t17.5 kN
o=K{gd
Design seismic coeff. - 0.15(0.80)(1.20)
h where:
t=211) Design seismic coeff, .0,14 2;10 m

Rocks 8 75
{ Wr:I56 kN @= angular frequency
,.1r0 )
Seismic force = o.tq( +z.qt+
'iliiil,i,''n" " \ 2J
RwL'l K= wave number
.. 2tr
,,,,,
Seismic force
" 6.55tf / m 2.8i) nr
(=-
hf2:7ll L
KN
L= wave length in meters
.li
lgli, Froblcm d = depth of water
0.5
Surcharge
Seismicforce = O,. * Seismic
0.5 0..) The cross-section of the quay plays a very 2 ) coeff
1.50 important role from ea(hquake disaster in
Surcharge " 0
4ol
I-ocate the elevatioil o! resi.lual *ater levcl (RWl the port of Ormoc City.
Horizontal seismic coefficient 0.14 DL=156+179+89
3.Iffi '?riblem
=
Coeff. of friction at the base = 0.60 DL = 424 kN
Regional seismic coefficient = 0.15
Weight of rocks above the residual water
PAG-ASA issued a gale warning in the
Factor for sub soil condition = 0.80 Seismicforce = (424 + 0)(0.14)= 59.36kltl Eastern Seaboard of the country. PAG-ASA
Coefficient of importance = 1.20
level (RWL)= 156 kN
forecast estimates that the wave length will
Vlleight of rocks below the RWL = 179 kN
Unit weight of concrete = 2.45 tilm2 be 144 m, long. Determine the angular
Weight of the entire concrete structure gg kN
= frequency of the wave if the depth of the
Estimate the design seismic force. Surcharge = 87.5 kN l.t{*{,r- ?&lem water at that particular location is 19 m.
$olution: Compute the design seismic force for Design of pierc in an area of
checking of sliding of the structure as seismographic disturbance must be Solution:
1
RWL =:(Y) recommended by the Phil. ports Authority designed to resist seismic forces. ,rl =Krffi
J (PPA).
,|
Determine the seismic force in kN/m that
2tr
RWL =' (1.8)
= 0.60 Seismic force r ( p1* Surcharge Seismic
must be used in the design if it carries the (=
J
2 coeff. following loads: t
Dead load: Consider 1 meter length of quay Dead load =-424 kN/m
wt. of concrete = [+1o.soyz.+s1 San /rr3r = 87.5 kN
Live load = 188 kN/m x=4
144
Regional seismic coefficient r 0.14
+ s.50(0.3)(2.45)l 1 Factor for subsoil condition = 0.80 K = 0.04363 (wave number)
Wt. of concrete = 8.% tf Coefficient of importance = 1.20
r,r = x rffd
Wt. of rocks above RWL . 1.50(?.7)(3.2)(1)
2,70

I *,=, 56 kN Solufion;
Wt. of rocks above RWL = 15.55 tf rrr = 0.04363 v6.81(1r)
RWt. Seismic coefficienl = 0.14(0.8)(1 .2) = 0.13/4
Wt. of rocks betow RWL = 2.8(3.2N2)(1) 0.596
Seismic force. seismic coefficient(ot + 9) <o =

M. of rocks below RWL = 17.g2 tf l4lr-l7,hN

2.80 Seismic force = 0.1u4(424 + ry)
Total DL = 8.94 + 15.55 + 17.92
: KN
Total DL = 42.41 tf t Seismic force = 68.62 kN /m
 3ro PORTS AND HARBOR POFaTS AND HARBOR 311

Marine Structures Moori and Bollards

A dock which is similar to a wharf and Type of dolphins which are not designed
Bollard is the mooring fitting for
often referred to as such, is backup by for the impact of the ship, as they located
mooring ships during a storm installed
A term used to describe a marine structure at the outside or outside/inside of the
ground as it derives its name from the very in back of the face of the dock where they
for the mooring or tying up of vessels, for befth far from the water line and "bitt"
nature or supporting ground in the back of will not be hit. They are located about 45'
loading and unloading cargo or for is installed close fo the waterline of
embarking and disembarking passengers.
it. offthebowandstefh. . " the berth ta be used for mooring ships
-''i ''i)
a) Dock a) Bulkhead
,;' .j a) '
Beasttru dolPhins
'
in ordinary condition.
b) Pier [9
c) Wharl
b) Groin @' ry Moorlng dotPhins
B€ d/
c) Jetty
c) Fixed mooring berth ,..,]lr;r;r:]lli@Iif, t ,, ri,

M
Allaftheabove d) Breakwater
d) Bollards

A dock which is parallel to the

only,
shore,
which can be used for docking on one side
Mari;r.e structures for modring vessels
A marine structure consisting of dolphins
42" ffi
Fry?iKF"I
qri,p
Ilqr il.k-4 ,t'rl I

lor tying up the ship and a platform for

a) Bulkhead * c/ Wharf
rg= a, Dolphins supporting the cargo handling equipment. DOURI-Ii MOORING RIT"I SINGI-r: MOORINC BITT

b) Pier d) Jetty b) Groin

c) Jetty a) Breasting dolphins
d) Breakwater b) Mooring dolphins
#
,,.rtl!....,
-"%!i;r:i,I"
*c) Fixed mooring berth
trffi. r]!ffi;;1'
d) Bollards CILA:TS
A dock which projects into the water,
which may be used on docking for both CORNER MOORINC
POST
sides.

a) Bulkhead Type of dolphins which are designed to

rg- b/ Pier take the impact of the ship when docking
c) Wharf and to hold the ship against a broadside A breakwater is a structure constructed for
d) Breakwater wind. Therefore, they are provided with the purpose of forming an artificial harbor
fenders to absorbed the impact of the ship with a water area so protected from the

ffiffii[
and to protect the dolphin and the ship effect of sea waves as to provide safe
from damage. accommodations for shipping. When a
breakwater supports a roadway, this is
An arlificial basin for vessels when the *a/ Breasting dolphins called:
DOABLE RI'TT BOI,LARI)
basin is pumped out. b) Mooring dolphins
a) Quay
c) Fixed mooring berth
* a/ Drydock d) Bollards
b) Pier .:.. a::-a.
-':
-M':- -.
. -:' :::>

b)
c)
Wet dock
Quay
[g c) Mole
CI,EAT flP S)
d) Jetty "L5smm#,-.l
d) Jetty OPEN CHOCX
 312 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS,A,ND HARBOR 3r3

C)
m
Sloping Lobe:
3,2OO Protlem
(:ORNI|II MOORING At a small quay wall where the mooring A type of mooring bollard which is suitable
POS'f cl.ost/.D cil(x:K
ropes may not be pulled upward, then what for warping ships along berths a single
type of bollards are used? pillar type is used with lines lrom one ship
only. General mooring application where
rope angle is not steep. lt has a normal
M.-.-r::::'',::;'.' llollords
max. working capacity of 200 tons.
POWLR (\IPI'TAN
All general mooring apptications *a) Single and double pillar
including steep rope angles. Lines from
Iwo shrps may be attached b) Tee-head
without
i.. MOORING BOL1ARDS interference. c) Sloping lobe
d) None of the above

Ke el
A) Singte and Double piflar:
a) Single mooring bitt 3'2Ol ,,$.!oblem
b) Tee-head shape
c) Sloping lobe
A type of mooring bollard where all general
Generally when bollards are pulled upward lg d) Single pillar Upe mooring applications including steep rope
as shown, then what type of bollards are angles. Any one bollard should preferably
used? be allocated to lines from one ship only. lt
has a normal maximum working capacity
of 150 tons.
The mooring fitting for mooring ships
a) Single and double pillar
General mooring applications where during a storm installed at the outside or
rope angles ls nol sfeep. Single piltar type outside/inside of the berth far from the Dg' b) Tee-head
should be used with lines from one ship water line is called: c) Sloping lobe
only. Suitable for warping ships along d) None of the above
berths, etc. a) Bitt
lS b) Bollard
B) Tee-head: Keel c) Cleat
d) Closed chock &f,ot
A typi of mooring bollard where all general
a) Single mooring bitt mooring applications including steep rope
r€ b, Tee.head shape
angles and lines from two ships may be
aftached without interference. lt has a
c) Sloping lobe
The mooring fifting for mooring ships normal max. capacity of 200 tons.
d) Single piilar during a storm installed close to the water
All general mooing applintions line ol the berth. a) Single and double pillar
including steep rope angtes. Any one b) Tee-head
!€ Bitt
bollard should preferabty
line from one ship only.
be allocated to a)
b) Bollard
D€ c) Sloping lobe

c) Cleat
d) None of the above

d) Closed chock
 314 PORTS AND HARE}OR PORTS AND HARBOR 315

Marine Structures
!,2,1i Prirhlsm
A platform built parallel to the shore or
breakwater within the harbor to berth The physical conliguration of the seabed, A berth structure projecting out from the
The structure that protects the harbor from vessels is called: the measurements of deplhs of water in the shoreline.
stormy waves and permits calm in the ocean, etc. and also information derived
harbor is called: a) Dock from such measurement,
a) Groin c) Breakwater

rs b) Wharf [g d) Pier
b) Whart
ElfJ m
I)-6.5(tni ilAflAOR c) Quay
*a) Bathymetry
\.ntL@Miel bL,. ks
d) Jetty Shore b) Oceanography
c) Hydrology Problerii
d) Fathomology
A sheltered place where the ship may
a R L A K t|, A n: k w tL I I t I ilR,\ ? o I \- receive or discharge cargo. lt includes the
a) Dock * c/ Breakwater
A rubble mound and or a concrete harbor with its approach channels and
structure that protects the harbor alea anchorage places.
b) Wharf d) Jetty from wave action,
A vertical post to which the eye of a * a) Port c) Basin
mooring line can be attached.
b) Harbor d) Quay
Problem
* a) Bollard
A solid structure, which projects into the b) Dolphin
sea perpendicular to the shore to berth c) Gravity wall
vessels, is called: BRt:IXtal ERtfll H TLTRA\(DS
d) Tetrapods
A sheltered place where the ship may
col,el ttone
a) Groin * cl Breakwater receive or discharge cargo. lt includes the
b) Bulkhead d) Jetty harbor with its approach channels and
i anchorage places.

A shore protection structure usually built a) Groin c) Breakwater

a) perpendicular to the coastline to retard rg' o) Quay d) Jetty

Dock c) Breakwater A structure for retaining or to prevent ea(h
littoral transport of sedimentary matefials.
b) Wharf rs d/ Jetty or fill from sliding into water.

* a) Groin c) Breakwater
b) Bulkhead d) Jety
A platform or deck structure built below
A platform built in the harbor parallel to the the top deck level and supported on
shore and backed up by ground is called: bearing piles. The main function of tho
1Yrk.il sr:(1()N(tr
platform is to reduce the lateral eoll
i ilMxtikQttr
pressure over the upper portion of the
A berth structure which projects out into sheet wall.
8T I,XIil'AD S'I'K]mD BYllg RON the water from the shore, or a berth
a) Dock structure at some distance from the a) Sea wall
b) Wharf a) Breasting dolphin shoreline is called: b) Quay
!A c) Quay [S b) Bulkhead * c) Relievingptatlorm
d) Jetty c) Breakwater a) Groin c) Breakwater
d) Revetment
d) Berth structure b) Bulkhead rg 4 Jetty
 316 PORTS AND HARBOR
,PoRTS AND HARBOR 317
:3:t2O,:ri, Pnriblefi
A berth structure with no direcl connection 3.2?j2 Problem Wind Pressure and Wind
to the shore, at which the ships can berth. At the berths where the movement of the Forces Acting on Vessels
Berthing can take place on either one or largest ships to be accommodated takes For ships above 40,000 ton displacement, and Pier
both sides of lhe structure, place at the higher states of the tide, the yaw should not exceed:
the
underkell clearance may be achieved by
* a) Sea istand dredging a berth box in front of the beffi t.2i24 Ptobbn
c) Relieving platform slructure. lf the length of the largest ship
b) Breakwater that uses the berth is lg0 m., compute the When the type of dock and iG general
d) Revetment area of the berth box in sq.m. The
'beam
of t)..5 n
features have been determined, it will be
the ship is 32 m. wide. necessary to establish the lateral load for
which the pier is to be designed. Lateral
n Channels ' Solution: loads from the mooring lines pull the ship
L=1.2 1'r,ip W=1,5(B)
into or along the dock or hold it against the
a) 1,0 m force of the wind or current. The maximum
L=1.2(180) W=1.5(32)
rs b) wind force will be equal to the exposed
o.sm
For good manoeuvering control, the ship L=216 W=49 area of the broadside of the ship in a light
requires deeper water depth than the
Berth area = 216{48)
c) 0.8 m condition multiplied by the wind pressure
absolute minimum requiiement from d) 1.2n to which a shape factor of 1.3 has been
loading.of the ship, tidal variations, trim, Berth area = 10J68 m2 applied, which is a combined lactor taking
etc. lf the speed of the ship is 5 knots, into consideration the reduction due to
determine the required depth of the Note: The berth box should have a length
of height and the increase for suction on the
channel if the ship has a max. daft of 7.g m. 1.2 overall tength of the largeit ship leeward side of the ship. Compute the
,times .the
and a width of 1.5 times the beam of tie 3.223 Problem design wind pressure in Pa of the pier
Solution:
largest ship that will use the berth. .when. ships are berth on both sides of a
Desired ratio of channel depth to max. drafl
of From a certain point along the Sulu Sea, pier. Wind velocity is 78 mph.
the ship = '1.3
the elevation of the sea level having an
Depth of channel (for asped
atmospheric pressure of 14.8 mbars is Solution:
1.3 = of
58.5 m. lf the atmosphbric pressure is only
Draft of ship /ess lhan 6 knofs) Wind pressure:
6.6 mbars, what will be the elevation ol the
Depth = 1.3(7.8) = 10.14 m. For ships above 40,000 ton displacement, sea level at the same point? p = O.OOzSOVz
the surge should nol exceed:
p = 0.00256(78)2

Solution: p = 15.575 psf

For every 1 mbar increase in pressure, Design wind pressure = 15.575(1.3)

A ship. having a speed of g knots is floating sea levelwill decrease by 0.9 cm or 0.009 m.
on a channel depth of 15 m. lt is required t6 : Design wind pressure = 20.25 psf = 971.33
For every 1 mbar decrease in pressure,
determine the approximate draft of ihe ship Design wind pressure = 971.33(1 + 0.50)
m sea levelwill increase by 0.9 im or 0.a09 m.
under this speed. lm
Design wind pressure = 1457 Pa
So/utionr.
For a speed greater than 6 Elev. of sea ;"us1 = (14.8 - 6.6)(0.009) + 58.5
knots : Note: When shrps are befth on bolh srdes of
Depth ofchannel Elev. of sea level. 58.574 m the pier, the total wind force acting on the pier
1.5 =
as a resu/f of wind on the shrps, should be
Draft of ship r94 1.0 m c) 0.80 m increased by 50o/o to allow for wind against the
Daft = to n. b) 0.7 m d) 1.2m second shrp.
E=
 31A PoI?TS AND HAF?E!oR PORTS AND HARBOR 319

Solution: Bank clearance = 2 times the beam of

p.0.00256w the largest ship using the channel.
An ocean.going vessel, MV Sebastian, has p = 0.00256(75)z Manoeuvering lane = 2 times the beam
a displacement tonnage of. 46,00 long p 14.4 psf of the largest ship using the channal.
tons and a loaded draft ol 37.5 ft. and hai "
an exposed area of 30000 sq.ft. when the P = 14.4(1 .2) = 1 7.28 psf Channel with curves should have
ship is berthed on the on the pier, The Wind force which one ship exerts against the larger width of channel compared to a
Bank clearance = ranges from 1.0 to 2.0
vessel will dock without the aid of . 17.28(28000\
orer= ' ' =21gqltons times the beam of the /argesf shtp uslng
straight channel.
tugboats. lf the max. wind velocity is 70 ' 2200 the channel. Width of manoeuvering lane for a
mph in a direction normal to the pier, what curve channel should be increased to 4
Additional wind force of the second ship Recommended total channel bottom
is the total wind force (tons) which the times the beam of the largest ship in the
1 width for single lane channel should be
vessel exerts against the pier considering (219.93) = 109 96 tons curve channel.
= 3.6 to 6 times the beam of the design
a factor of 1.3 to allow lor suction on the 2
ship depending on the sea and wind Width of harbor entrance should be
leeward side of the ship, Total horizontal wind force on the pier
condition. equal to the length oi the design ship.
Hint: p = g.gg2ffiV (wind pressure rn psfl
'219.93+ 109.96 Max. cunent velocity through the
1ton :2200 lb. For oil and gas tankers, a minimum
V: velocity in mph = 330 tons bottom width channel should be 5 times harbor enhance should not exceed 1.5
the beam of the ship, mls or 3 knots.
Solution:
Velocity pressure:
p = 0.00256V2 Maximum Width of B) Two-Lane Channel tn Distance of Shi
p = 0,00256(70)2 Channels and
p. 12.54 psf O For ships in ballast = 3 to 5 times the
P= 12.54(1.3) = 16.31 psf ship's length
Total wind force which one shrp exerls agarnst A) Single Lane Channel @ For a loaded ship such as oil tanker
the pier in tons: = 7 to 8 times the ship's length
F=pA
llank
F = 16.31(30000)
F = 489300 lb. Min. Diameters of Turning
t=ffi =222.41tons
Area During Manoeuvering
on the Harbor Basin
Chmvl s'ituh

To avoid excessive interaction

O For ships without tugboat assistance
between two ships haveling past one
= 4 times the length of the ship
another, either in the same direction or in
the opposite direction in a two{ane @ For ships having tugboat assistance
The world's largest tanker from lreland has
channel, it is necessary to separate the = 2 times the length of the ship
a DltT of 326000 tons. lt has an exposed
area of 28000 ft2 when it is berthed on the
two manoeuvering lanes by a shiP @ With the use of main ProPeller and
Width of manoeuvering lane = ranges clearance lane.
pier. The max. wind velocity is 75 mph in a rudder and the bow thrusters = 1.5
from 1.6 to 2.A ilmes the beam width of
direction normal to the pier, lf a second The clearance lane = min. ol 30'n. ar times the length of the ship
largest ship using the channel
ship is berthed on the opposite side of the the beam of the largest shrp should be @ Ullhere the ship is turned by warping
pier, compute the total horizontal wind For large ship, an angle of yaw of 5" provided. around a dolphin or pier and
force on the pier considering a factor of 1.2 can add an extra width equivalent to half
Recommended total channel width usually with tugboat assistance
to allow for suction side on the leeward the beam to the manoeuvedng lane, due
will vary between 6.2 to 9 times the under calm conditions = 1.2 times
side of the ship. Hint: p = 0.00256V2 (wind to the effect of cross current and or length of the ship
beam of the ship
pressure in psf and V in mph) winds.
 320 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARBOR 321

Dredge Area Around 3"22l, 3.230 Problem

a Berth
1.. r\r1 t | 1 r\r1 \1 l.\rat
The width of a restricted channel should be A two-lane channel with two ships using The cargo ship is manoeuvering thru a
measured at the bottom of the dredge bed the channel moving in opposite directions one-lane channel. The beam of the ship is
with a manoeuvering lane depending on has beam width of smaller ship equal to 36 m. Considering the manoeuvering lane,
wind, current and the manoeuverability of 28 m. and a beam width of the largest ship the bank clearance on both sides and
ri; .
the ship wherein container ships, car of 36 m. To avoid excessive interaction allowance for yaw of the ship when the
carriers, passenger ships present between two ships traveling past one channel is exposed to crosscurrent and
considerable windage area and may another in opposite direction, it is wind, compute the minimum width of the
therefore require more channel width than necessary to separate the two single lane channel.
their beam would suggest, Ships displaced manoeuvering lanes by a ship clearance
Length of dredge area = 1.25 times length of
/argest shrp to use the berth, wik
from the channel centerline towards the lane. To minimize the suction and Solution:
banks of the channel will experience a repulsion lorces between the ships, a
fugboaf asslsfance
bank suction effect due to
the clearance lane not less than 30 m. or the ,
I ) rtl,
\ltttr\ 1t\, ) rt 1,1)tt

Length of dredge arca = 1,5 times the length asymmetrical flow of water around the ship beam of the largest ship should be
of largest shrp fo use the beth, without and this will cause a yawning movement. provided. Compute the minimum width of
tugboat assrslance To counter act this, an additional bank the two-lane channel considering a bank
Width of dredged tidal befih 1.25 times the "
clearance must beadded the to clearance lane on both sides assuming the
at
beam of the largest ship to use the befth manoeuvering lane on both sides. channel is not exposed to crosscurrent or
Determine the minimum width of the single winds. The width of the two-lane channel
lane channel if the beam of the largest ship should be measured at the bottom of the
is 24 m. wide. dredged bed and should be the sum of the
3.227 ,Frnblem lanes,

To avoid excessive interaction between

Solution: Solution;
two ships traveling past one another, either \ttir
( ltt)rt1t
in the same or in the opposite direction in a llnnk ,!t ,,
tl!..,, ,.ai lr.,ail, ..,.
two.lane channel, it is necessary to ltne
L
--.lj'nk
katrdilt:/ l,rr lltr
Bank clearance =B (beam ofthe largest ship)
separate the two manoeuvering lanes a
ship clearance lane. Illhat would be the
--- Bank clearance = 36 m.

B
distance of the clearance lane provided if
the beam of the smaller ship is 24 m. and
lt/anoeuvering lane= 1.6 B + =' Withallowance
for yaw ol the ship)
the beam ol the larger ship is 28 m.
6=:8 lr=36

B=24 m lt/anoeuvering lane = 1.6(36) + *2 = 75.60 m.

( httilk,l I ittth Min. width of channel - 36 + 36 + 75.60

Min. width of channel - 147.60 m.

I\4in, bank clearance . B. 36 m. (bean of
IVlin. manoeuvering lane = 1.68 largest ship)
Ittlanoeuvering lane is 1.6 times the beam of
b:24 B=28 Min. manoeuvering lane - 1.6(24) the largerst ship. 3.231 Problem
Min. manoeuvering lane = 38.40 m lVlanoeuvering lane = 1.6(36) = 57.60 m.
Ship clearance = 36 m.
(nof less than 30 m. A four-berth pier and slip is shown in the
Clunn?t $itrh Bankclearance=B=24m.
Solution: or bean of largest ship) figure. The length of largest ship is 180 m.
d = ship clearance beam of largest ship but Total width of channel = 24 + 38.40 + 24 Total width of two-lane channel and that of the smaller ship is 120 m. only.
not less than 30 m. = 36(2) + 57,60 + 36 Compute the minimum length of the pier.
Total width of channel = 86.40 m.
d=30 m >28 lJsed.30m. = 165.60 m.
 322 PoRTS AND HARBoR P()RTS AND H,AREIOR 323

s,ip
Determine the following: 8m

' ,:r r,.

O Total length, L ofthe pier
@ Total width, W of the pier Compute the approximate length of lhe
@ Width of slip, S anchor chain of a ship having a length of
c a
.1)
120 m.
1t
. .,!. .
..,i
i.i i t
{i Truilsit
Sfud
o I
:

!..1 L
g d\
a
: ()
tl li il
r.,]

".ii v l, lj
26m
Solutionr
liln
Solution: .l&i!r*i r:.. :
{'} Length of anchor chain = 1.5 length of ship
O Length L of the pier 3m
"e{d**
-
So/ufion:
r 01.87
Length of chain 1 .5(120) ' 18A m. bng
Clearance = 0. 1 0Lr (length of largest ship) -w
) b
Clearance = 0.10(180) = 18 m, Width of pier:

Total length ofpier= 180 1 120 + 18 + 25 + 25 W:87.87+8+8

W = 103.87 m.
Total length of pier. 368 m.

.3) Width of slip S

s
t_
S,28+30
Length and Width of Pier S=2122)+30=74m.
and sli
ll R l(ln R
{l:!r) {2lm)

The length of the cargo vessel afloat has a L=190+25+25 When more than one shiP is to be
length of 180 m. lt is required to determine accommodated along the berth, determine Breast mooring lines are used to reduce the
L= 230 m.
the dimensions of the two.berth pier the minimum clearance length between the sway and yaw motions and should be
adjacent ship if one ship has a length of perpendicular to the sh,p.
shown using the following data:
@ Widlh oi the pier "W" 180 m. and the other ship has a length of Spring mooring lines are used to reduce the
Width of apron on the sides for two-way
Area of transit shed: 200 m. surge motion of the ship along the berth
traffic:a=8m. l--i-2111.!1... ,
A = 8400(2) for2 berths (ship) front. They should be as Parallel as
Width of apron on the truck loading
A = 16800 m2
posslble to the berth front. The angle
area: e=12.8m. between the berth front and the shtpslde
Width of apron on the truck loading 128+y+26.230 should be equal lo or /ess than 10" .
area:c=26m. y = 191.20 Head and sfern lines = these can be used in
PIT:R

Beam (width) of ship: B addition to the spring and breasl ltnes to

=22m. A=by Solufion: reduce the shrp s motlon.
Area of transit shed = 8400 mz for one 16800 = b(191.20) Clearance = 0.1 0 of the longest length of ship
berth b - 87.87 m. Min. clearance = 0.10(200) . 20 m.
 324 P()RTS I\ND HARB()R PORTS AND HARBOR 325

Elements of Standard Ships 3.238 Froblem !.2*l Ploblcnt $r2rt5 ;P;s[!orr

ip Relation to its Depth of
The reduction of under keel clearance due The backward motion of a ship is called
Floatation The point at the front end of a ship is
to the suction effect induced by the higher called:
current velocity between the sea bottom
3.235 Problem and the ship.
1tn1!. tut\hil,

lrrlq. Millilt.
The maximum distance from the water * a/ Sguat c) Aft
level to the highest point of the ship at the
prevailing draft.
b) Trim d) Keel ';n,
Alt I oNa.d
ltt
(rtcroll ltn*Ih

*a) Air draft 3.239 Problem otttult l(ngth

b) Scantling draft
ul Designed draft
The difference between the aft and the
forward draft.
d) Ballast displacement
1t . t!,
.

5ii{1,1llt-19rfl o,,-r I ifl:]r:r rrl:r.l . r'rir.1i

a) Ahead
3.236 Problem ,\ t
b) Bow
a) Portside * c) Asfern
The draft for which the structural strength Itr b) Bow d) Aft
of the ship has been designed. c) Slern
d) Starboatd
a) Air draft
[] b) Scanttingdraft _ lr: ,

c) Designed draft l'l

*a) c) Stern
3,Ul Problem The right side of the ship when facing
lLr,r'ri..- ..,'',1f,iiillli,,,.,' b) Bow d) Astern
to
lowards the bow of the ship is called:
The distance from the stern the
ht'lt2-1ri|)
midships.
3;240 Problem
l:'! ,Dtu1: ,ilt*
The point at the backend of a ship is ,,"1

.@,
_l)-_,
,.237 Problem, called:
Bthl! ililhhi,
The draft for which the fundamental design - -'
,tlt t tt*drt
parameters of the ship are based.
o'oatt ieasth
lar t !1.
a) Air draft ' )tr
b) Scantling draft
e€ c) Designed draft :-il. . l,
d) Trim draft J
a) Portside
lll L

\r il tr.. 1...,, I
b) Aft
\1, ,|',,,i \l . ,. ,
a) Forward c) Astern
, ',t-
b) Bow ng d, Starboardside
f,.cl a) Trim *c) Stern c) Astern

b) Bow d) Astern [s d) Aft

 326 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HAF?BOR 327

Form s of Littoral Drift i,,:,Fidblgitii r:r,r:,Problom

3;f,{8 I,l
"3i25.2'r lPioblGilt,t.l 3.255
Move ment
The region of shallow-water zone where
The movement of littoral drift. Shallow-water zone are classified into the
3.2{5 problem following regions:
the sand movement differs for the times of
wave run up and down flow. During the
* a) Liftoraltransport time of wave run,up sand is Put in
A liftoral drift thatmoves by tumbling, b) l. Offshore zone
suspension by the agitation at the front of
sliding or bouncing along the surtace
ii
Foreshore ll. Surf zone
the sea floor through the direct action c) Offshore lll. Swash zone
a wave and transported by the running'up

waves and currents.

of d) ln-shore lV, On-shore zone
water.

a) Offshore zone
a) Offshore sediment *a) l, ll, and lll only b) Surfzone
b) 0n-shore sediment 3.1249 Froblem b) l, ll and lV only * c) Swashzone
vl
!s
Suspended sediment l, lll, and lV only d) On-shore zone
d/ Bed load sediment The movement of littoral drift parallel d) All of the above
to
shore.

a) 3.256 Problem
b)
Foreshore transpo(
3.253r Problom
3.246 Probtem Off-shore lransport Long shore sediment moves in either left
* c) Longshoretransport The region of shallow.water zone where or right along a coast, corresponding to
A littoral drift that d) high'densig suspension of sediment is the direction of incoming waves. The
is suspended in On-shore transport
formed by the setere agitation and action direction with the larger volume of
seawater by turbulence of breakers
and of a large-scale vortices that are generated movement during a year is called:
others and transported by currents.
by the breakers
$;25O Probleni * a) Predominantdirection
a) Offshore sediment
b) Long shore direction
b) On-shore sediment a) Offshore zone
c)
* c/ Suspendedsediment
The movement of littoral drift rs bJ Surtzone .
d)
Off shore direction
On shore direction
perpendicular to the shore.
d) Bed load sediment c) Swash zone
d) On-shore zone
a) Foreshore transport
b) 3.257 ',, Prrihlaitl
Off-shore transport
Lonq shore transport
g;edY,,: Peblelir ,3,251t r,ProHem The zone from low tide shoreline to the
rs d/ On-shore transport location of the upper limit of wave wash at
The regions of shallow-water zone wherein high tide is called:
Refers to the sedimentary material
moved which in order for sand to be moved by the C.ail Bu.knk,ft l:t'ft'shot"
in the liftoral zone under action of wave h'\!!!!:,_.__ . Ollihott

and current. *s&r :Prohtenr

action of fluid motion (oscillatory :r
movement) the current velocity of the fluid
must exceed a certain value. This condition htnlJi
a) Littoral transport A littoral drift that moves as a layer
of high. is generally called the threshold of
og' b/ Littoral drift densig flow near the bed surface. movement.
c) Long shore transport
d) On-shore transport
*a) Sheet flow *a) Offshorezone
b) 0n-shore sediment b) Surf zone
c) Suspended sediment c) Swash zone a) On shore c) Backshore
d) Bed load sediment d) 0n-shore zone b) lnshore [8 d Foresfiore
 32A PoRTS AND H,rrrison 329
PoRTS AND HARBOR

3.258 3.260 Problem o* and Dll'PlN(

a) Step type beach and bar tYPe D) HFIAVIN(;
beach
The zone from landward boundary of The area between the offshore and the low
foreshore to the coastline, where waves b) Step type beach and shallow tYPe
tide shoreline, where waves break and long t
will reach during stormy weath'er is called beach '',
shore bars or steps are formed is called:
c) Bar type beach and shallow tYPe
!!,|!ttt ll!tttr!!! |!!!!l!!1: .. !.\!t!.1.t:.. -!!l_t\l!!!t: beach ttia
d) Shallow type and trough tYPe
i
bLufl:r htt0\ beach
l*ttr

EI SWAYIN(;

.t\
it:
Motion of Ships Caused bY (
a) On shore Seawater Waves
a) On shore
rs.
b) lnshore
bJ
c)
lnshore l) St;R(;lN(;
Backshore
D€ c) Backshore
d) Foreshore
d) Foreshore A) ROI,I,ING
4, -r

3.259', Problenr When a model beach is constructed with -.L,i

natural sand in a wave channel exposed to
The area on the ocean side where waves waves over a long period of time, the I}) PITCHIN(;
do not break normally. tn many cases, the beach profile will approach an equilibrium
bottom slope is comparativety gentle is condition corresponding waves to thi
called: acting upon it. This equilibrium condition
of the beach is classified into two types.
- t .r^t nr, \tt,\'- t,q,,tt..a, til ttr. t!\lt.,t
- -t
3.2612 Problem
The movement in the horizontal plane of a

ship moving fonvard or backward at sea

under the impact of current, waves, and
Strp ttltt beodt wind gusts moving is called:
(tutrtutl lx,ut h)
C) YAWING
a) Pitch
0s b) Surge
a) 0n shore
c) Sway
b) Long shore
d) Yaw
*c/ Offshore
l,ore beucfi.

d) Fore shore
Tr.'oyrgh
_ ' ,

llor t.vpc btut.h

Islornt b?.u.h)
 330 PORTS.AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARBOR 331

&263 Principal Dimensions of B) Container ShiPs

The horizontal motion of the ship along its

Vessel
The movement in the horizontal plane of a
ship which tends to rotate the ship about longitudinal axis caused by seawater
its vertical axis due to impact of current, waves is known as:
waves and wind gusts is called:
a) Yawning ,* cl Surging
a) Pitch c) Sway
b) Pitching d) Heaving

b) Surge [9 d) Yaw
lr httt tLt ptt]ttntl itu kt r't
3t&8 !,1 tt,qt

OtLnrll ltirvlr
1..

The vertical motion of the ship up and

down caused by seawater waves is known
Dead Weight Full
as; Overall lVlolded
The movement in the vertical plane of a Tonnage Load
ship, which tends to move it up and down a) Yawning c) Surging (DWT)
Length Breadth
Draft
due to impact of current, waves, and wind
gusts 1s called;
b) Pitching Bls d) Heaving
lircc boaril
30000 tons 218 m 30.2 m 11.1m
Mold.d Depth 40000 tons 244 m 32.3 m 12.2m
tons 266 m 32.3 m 13.0 m
Iill
a) Pitch * cl Heave
l0!d draft
60000 tons 286 m 36.5 m 13.8 m
b) Surge d) Roll
Moldcd Brerdth
The motion of the ship, which tends to
rotate the ship about its longitudinal axis
due to seawaterwaves is known as:
A) Cargo ShiPs C) Passenger ShiPs
a) Yawning * cl Rolling
The movement in the vertical plane of a b) Pitching d) Heaving
ship, which tends to rotate the ship about
its transverse axis due to the impact of
current, waves and wind gusts, is calledl

'* al Pitch c) Heave

Ihe motion of the ship, which tends to
b) Surge d) Roll
rotate the ship about its traverse axis
caused by seawater waves is known as: Dead Weight Full
Overall lVolded
Load
a) Yawning c) Rolling
Tonnage
(DWT)
Length Breadth
Draft
!S b) Pitching d) Heaving 67m 10.9 m 3.9 m
1000 tons
2000 tons 83m 13.1 m 4.9 m
Gross Full
The motion, which cause the ship to rotate 5000 tons 109 m 16.8 m 6.5 m Overall Molded
Tonnage Load
about the vertical axis of the boat, which is 10000 tons 137 m 19.9 m 8.2 m Length Breadth
(GT) Draft
caused by seawater waves. 12000 tons 144 m 21.0 m 8.6 m
20000 tons 180 m 25.7 m Bm
The motion of the ship, which tends to 185 m 27.5 m 1.0 rn
30000 tons 1
207 m 28.4 n 8m
30000 tons
*al Yawning
move hsrizontally on its sides caused by
40000 tons 200 m 29.9 m 11.8 m
50000 tons 248m 323m Bm
seawatgr waves. 14.7 m
b) Pitching 90000 tons 249 m 38.1 m 8m
70000 tons 278m 35.2 m
c) Surging a) Yawning *c/ $waying
100000 tons 256 m 39.3 m 15.1 m
16.9 m
d) Heaving b) Pitching d) Heaving
150000 tons 286 m 44.3 m
 P()RTS AND.HARBOR 333
D) $mallCargo Ships
ship Between Dead Virtual of 3.27$,".:, l:Problom
Weight Tonnage (DWT),
h The virtual weight of the shtp is the A foreign passenger ship has a gross
.u Gross Tonnage (GT) and sum of the displacement tonnage of tonnage (GT) of 30000 tons. lt has a length
Displacement Tonnage the ship and the added weight. ol 207 m with a molded breadth of 25.7 m"
lf the lull draft is I m, determine the virtual
Added weight: weight of the ship.
, 0T, is displacetnenttormage,of shipo Use log (Dt1= g.g3'1 + 0.891 log (GT)
w,=f,o'?LW

Dead Weight
A) Cargo Ships Solufion;
Full
0verali Molded where: Displacement tonnage (DT):
Tonnage
(DWr) Length Breadth
Load r Less than 10000 DWT W, = added weight (tons) log (DT) = 0.031 + 0.891 log (GT)
Draft
500 tons log(DT):0.550 + 0.889 tog(DWT) D = draft of ship (m)
51 m 9.0 m 3.3 m log (DT) = 0.031 + 0.891 log (30000)
700 tons L = length of ship (ml
57m 9.5 m 3.4 m
o 10.000 DWT or more
'Wo urltt weight of seawater (1 ton/m3)
= DT = 10474 tons
Added weight:
log(DT)= 0.511 + O.gtl log(DWT)

B) Container Ships 1,272 Problem w =1D'LW

'40
log(DT) = 0.365 + 0.9s3 tog(DWT)
E) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels A cargo ship having a dead weight tonnage wr = I t8)'(207)(1)
4,,' "
(DWT) of 12000 tons has a daft of 8.6 m' lf
C) Ferries the length of the ship and is moldecl W, = 10405 tons
breadth ue 144 m. and 21 m. respectively,
tll'
c Long distance determine the virtual weight of the ship.
Virtual weight of the shiP = DT + E
log(DT) = 1.388 + 0.683 tog(GT) Use tog (DT)= 0.511 + 0,913 log (DWT) Virtual weight ol the ship = 10474 + 1 0405

o Shott to medium distance Solution: Vi(ual weight of the ship = 20879 tans

log(OT) = 0,506 + 0.904 log(GT) DWT = 12000 tons

Displacem ent tonnage : (DT )

log (DT)= 0.511 + 0.913109 (DWT)

D) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels Relation B€tween
Dead Weight log (DT) = 0.511 + 0 913 log (12000)
Tonnage
0verall Molded
Full log(DT) = 0.0657 * 0.909 tog(DWT) Weight Tonnage
Load DT = 1 71 91 tons
(DWT)
Length Breadth and the Gross fonnage
400 tons 75n
Draft E) Passenger Ships (Japanese) Virtual weight = Displacement tonnage plus
(GT) for the Different
13.6 m 1.1 m added weight (W,)
1 500 tons 97m 16.4 m
tog(DT)r 0.026 + 0.981 tog(GT)
4.7 m Added weight:
2500 tons 115 m 18.5 m
4000 tons n
5.5 m
F) Passenger Ships (Foreign)
Wu40
134 m 20.7 6.3 m =TD,LW
6000 tons 154 m 22.9 n 7.0 m log(DT)' 0.021 * 0.S91 log{GT} Cargo Slrrpsr GT = 0.514 DWT

Contarner Shrps;
10000 tons 182 m 25.9 m 7.4 m 1
\,VtA\= (8.6)'(144X1) GT = 0.880 DWT
G) Car Carriers +
log(DT)= 1.91s + 0.s88 tog(GT) W, = 8365 tons
Oil lanker: Gt = a.553 DWT

Virtual weight = 17191 + 8365 Rolbon/Roll-off Vessel; GI - 0.808 DWT

H) OilTankers
Virtual weight = 25556 tons
log(DT)= 0.332 + 0.956 tog(DlryT)
 334 PORTS AND HARBOR 335
PORTS AND HARB()R

&274 Water Planned water depth = standard water depth 3;278 lfov. 20'16
of berth for ship + design low tide
An oil tanker has a displacement tonnage Standard Basin Depth for Different
(DT) equal to 27800 tons. The tength of Types of Vessels: :
Planned water dePth -7 5 + (-0 35) A rectangular barge is 20 m long, 12 m
tie
oil tanker is 158 m. Determine the gross Planned water dePth = '7.85 m
wide and-8 m deep' lt enters the harbor of
tonnage (GT) capacity of the oil tanker.
Design LowTide
{BLT) =.0,1 m. ,
Cebu City having a design low tide
(DLT)

Use log (DT)= 0.332 + 0.956 tog (DWT)

Gonstructional allowance for no scour ln ls no scour protecting equal to 0.30 m. The harbor tacility is
-
GT = 0.553 DWT
protecting riprap is 0.5 m. , : Note: case there
riorap laver, the allowance for ertra dredging
protected by riprap to prevent scouring'
lf there is scour protecting riprap, there is tinoid o, considered, usuatly 0'5 m' is taken ihe weight of the barge when empty is
Solution: no construction allowance needed.
for this item. equal to- 1000 tons' Assuming sp'Sl' oI
seawater to be 1.03 and that the max' depth
log 1Ot; = 0.332 + 0.956 tog (DWT)
of water in the harbor is 6'4 m deeP,
log (27800) = 0.332 + 0.956 t0g (DWT) determine the maximum weight in tons that
the barge can carry safely based on-the
DWT = 20012.53 tons
3 ry:,,.1 prliibletli. soecificitions of the (PPA) Phil' Port
Gross tonnage (GT; = g.55, ,*t Authority regarding standard water depth'
GT = 0.553(20012.53) From the given data shown below, it
is
reouired to compute the design water
GI = 11067 tons dral Desigu (dead
depth for a ship having a 40,000 DWT
0.3 dcprh
0.5 rrr
weight ton). Solution;
Full load droP of the ship =' 11 m
Value of Full Loaded Draft g'3
Design Low Tide (DLT) = ' n't

Construction allowance for no scour

Fullloadeddraft=rffi*u gnmeters) protecting riPraP = 0.5 m
Y 1000
8 nl

where: Planned water depth is considered as Solulion: 5,1 6.4 nr

DW = dead weight tons lollows for a ship with a draft of 7.80 m.
nl
Assume that there is a scour protection
riprap layer.
Standard water depth 12m
of berth for the
shiP =.7,5 ,
Design low tide E .0.35 m
l^ :ltgl ship having a rorat weighr of Determine the design water depth. llm
BF = 1 2(6.1)(20)(1.03X1000)
50,000 DWT (dead weight tons) inciuding I 1.8 nt

its cargo floats on seawater having i mi

BF = 1507920 kg
specific aravity of1103. Oetermine the Solution: 0.3 m

value of the full loaded (max.) draft. W, BF

W = 1507.920 tons
Solution:
Design water dePth Max. weight it could carry = 1507 920 - 1000
- =-11-0.3- 05
Fuli toaded drafl =
,ffi u
*-11.8m
Max. weight it could carry = 507.920 tons

Fuil toaded draft =,m + s= 12.0T m

/.tSJ m
.5 m (dnr1])

0.35 nr (lorv tide)

336 PORTS I\ND HAREIOF? PORTS AND HARBOR 337
3.279 GE Bgard May'2O{$, Vol. displaced in seawater: Solution: When the cargo uesse/ ls a/ lhe fresh
May'20{6 W. V (sp.gr.) y,, water the total weight is only W2.

20000(1000) = Vr(1 03)(1000)

I{r=200I[0 kg
A ship having a displacement of 20000 Wz=200,000-ry
Vt = 19417.48 m3
metric tones enters a harbor of fresh water.
W2= 272368k9
The ship captain recorded a draft of 9.4 m.
while the ship was still in seawater (sp.gr. Vol. displaced in fresh water: B.F. = Wz= 272368
= 1,03). Obtain the draft in rneters of the 20000(1000) = Vz(1000) 1.5
272368 = d(8X 1 4X1 000)
ship in fresh water if the horizontal section
V: .20000 m3
of the ship below the water line is 3000 mr d = 2.43 m. (draft in fresh water)
in both instances. V:-Vr=h(A) water
20000 * 1941t .48 = h(3000)
@ Number of bars that il can carry:
h = 0.194 m
Solution: 8m (2)(8)(14X1000)= 200,000 + 14.79x

Draft in fresh water. 8.4 + 0.194

x. 1623 bars
Draft in fresh waler = 8.594 m.

w
3.280 eE llov. A container ship 122 m. long and 12 m.
water wide displaced 8500 cubic meters of fresh
A cargo vessel weighing 200,000 kg is 14 m water. lt is placed in a lock 137 m. long
8.4m
Iong, 8 meters wide and 4.5 meters deep. lt BF and 15 m. wide and then loaded with 3640
tons of steel.
will transport to Cebu 20 mm diameter by 6
BFt meters long reinforcing steel bars. (D Pieces ofbars:
.\ea ttaler (.\p. Sr. =, I .0-l)
x = no. of bars
O lf a draft (submerged depth of the
cargo vessel) is to be maintained at 3
meters, how many pieces of the bars *r= N.*t6)(7850)x
can it carry if density of sait u/ater
equal to 1026 kglm3 and steel weighs Wz. 14.79 xkg (wt. of steet bars)
7850 kg/m3. W1+ Wr= gP

@ Itlhat is the draft from the cargo 200,000 + 14.19x= 3(8)(14X1026)

vessel
ll..1m
d when one half of its cargo is unloaded x=9786 no.ofbars
in fresh water?.

RFt @ lf the draft of the cargo vessel in fresh ,/) Draft from the cargo vessel: @ Determine the draft of ship before the
water is equal to 2 m., determine the Total weight = Wt + Wz
steel is loaded.
number of bars that it can carry. @ Determine the draft of the ship after the
W= 200,000 + 14.79(9786) steel is loaded.
W= 200,000 + 144736 @ Determine the increase in depth of
water in the lock after the ship has
W = 344136 kg been loaded with steel.
334 PORTS AND HARBOR PORTS AND HARE}OR
339

Solu0bn;

A boat going from salt water (sp.gr. is 1.03)

A ship of 7064 sq.m. horizontal crosr.
sectional area at the water line has a drall to fresh mter (sp.gr' = 1) sinks 7.62 cm'
of 12.35 m in sea water when loaded to r and after burning 72,730 kg. of coal rises
up by {5.24 cm.
capacity. ln the fresh water at the entranca
of the Panama Canal, it is observed that
@ Find the original draft in salt unter.
the ship draws 12.6 m. Sp.gr. of sel
water = 1.03. @ Find the original draft in fresh water'
@ Find the original disllacement of ths
boat in sea water.
@ Determine the weight of the ship and
cargo in tonnes.
r:2 m Solution:
@ Determine the ships displacement ln r
' Weight of the ship and cargo in tonnes:
cu,m. lor fresh waler.
' @ Original draft in saft water.
V= vol. displaced in sea water ln figure A:
@ With an available water depth in thr
canal, what weight of cargo must bc v + 7064(12.6 - 12.35) = vol. displaced
ii.rs, lightered so that the ship can barely in fresh water
pass into the lbcks with 0,1 m
y + 1766' vot. displaced in iresh water
clearance below the keel?
W = B.F. = tb3OY rn sea water
RFt
Solution:
A Draft of ship before the sfee/ rs /oadedr W= B.F. = 1000 (V+ 1766)
BF1=W
122(121 il = 8500 1030v= 1000 (y+ 1766) Assume that the cross-sectional area of
V = 58,867 cu.m. the shrp is unifom = A
dt= 5,806 m.
t{= (58,867)(1000) BF1= Y1 Y;
BFr = tg9r,'l,tr,^,
@ Draft of ship afterthe steel is loaded: W= 58,867,000 kg.
BF - 1030 Ay
When the stee/ is loaded: W = 58,867 tonnes

dz=5806-#ffi (r) Shrps disptacement in cu.m. for fresh

ln figure B:

RF water:
dz= 8.292 m.
Sea vdls V= 58,867 cu.m. in seawater
y= 58,867 + 1766
@ /ncrease in the depth of water:
V= 60.633 cu.m. infreshwater BF2= W
122(12)y= [ rezlrsl- 122(12)lx
1464 = 591x
1000(1) [A [
+ 0.0762)] = W

@ Change of weight fron a height of 12'6 m' W= 1000 A (y + 0.0762) e

l'0.404x to 12.4 m.
x+y+5.806=8.292 ln figure C:
wt. of cargoto be lightered:
x+y=2.486
tY= 7064(0.2X1000)
Y=2.486-x
W= 1412.800 kg
0.404x= 2.486 - x
W = 1112.8 tonnes
1.404x= 2.486
x.1.77 m.
BF

Frush water
I
34e- PORTS AND HARBOR

W = 1030 Ay Solution:
1030 Ay = 1000 A f + 4.47621

1.03Y=Y+5.9762
0'03Y = 9 9762
y = 2.51

@ Original draft in fresh water. n

Draft=2.54+0.0762 0.3 m

Draft = 2,6162 m.
ia seq \|qter

@ ariginal displacement of the boat in sea

water.
ln O W= 10304(2.54)
W = 2616.24 O

Bft= 1tY -rrrrO 4.8

1000(1) [A 0- 0.0262)] = w -72,730

10004 (y- 0.0762)= W -72,730 CI
in the Panama Canal

ln @ 1000A (2.54 - 0.0762)

= 2616.24 -72730 1 marine ton = 2240 lb. = 9.988 kN

2463.84 = 2616.24 -
152.44 = 72730
7 27 30
vol, drsplaced rn seawater =10000(e.e88)
1 oasgr)

A= 477.23 m2 Vol. displaced in seawater = 9994.80 m3

ln@ W=2616.2(477.23)
W = 1,248,529k9
a.rr'=
W = 12,248 kN
Vol. displaced in Panama
Tffi
Vol. displaced in Panama Canal = 10181.45 m3

(10181 45 - 9994'80)
Difference in draft =
1800
A cruise liner having a constant cross-
sectional area of 1800 sq.m. crusied Difference in draft = 0.131 m

Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific 0cean taking

the Panama Canal route. The ship has a Draft in seawater = 4.8 - 0.131
displacement of 10000 tons and an
observed draft of 4.8 m. in the Gatun Lake Draft in seawater = 4.669 m

Lock of the canal. What should be the

specified depth in Philippine standards of a Specified depth in Phil. Standard
refuge harbor in the Pacific due to a strong
typhoon. Sp. gr. of the seawater is 1.02 and = 4.669 + 0.3

assume 1 marine ton = 2240 lb. The design = 4.959 m.

low tide is - 0.3 m.